UPD78F0058YGC8BT-A - RENESAS TECHNOLOGY

To our customers,

Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents

On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology

Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both

companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid

Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding.

Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com

April 1st, 2010

Renesas Electronics Corporation

Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com)

Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry.

Notice

1. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is

subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please

confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to

additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website.

2. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights

of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document.

No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights

of Renesas Electronics or others.

3. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.

4. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of

semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,

and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by

you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.

5. When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control

laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas

Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by

the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and

technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited

under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations.

6. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics

does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages

incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.

7. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: “Standard”, “High Quality”, and

“Specific”. The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product’s quality grade, as

indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular

application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as “Specific” without the prior

written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for

which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way

liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an

application categorized as “Specific” or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written

consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is “Standard” unless otherwise

expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc.

“Standard”: Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual

equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots.

“High Quality”: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anti-

crime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support.

“Specific”: Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or

systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare

intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life.

8. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,

especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation

characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or

damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.

9. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have

specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further,

Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to

guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a

Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire

control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because

the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system

manufactured by you.

10. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental

compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable

laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS

Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with

applicable laws and regulations.

11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas

Electronics.

12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this

document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.

(Note 1) “Renesas Electronics” as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-

owned subsidiaries.

(Note 2) “Renesas Electronics product(s)” means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics.

User’s Manual

Printed in Japan

Document No. U12013EJ3V2UD00 (3rd edition)

Date Published February 2003 N CP (K)

1997, 2003

PD780058, 780058Y Subseries

8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontrollers

PD780053

PD780053Y

PD780054

PD780054Y

PD780055

PD780055Y

PD780056

PD780056Y

PD780058

PD780058BY

PD780058B

PD78F0058Y

PD78F0058

PD780053Y(A)

PD780053(A)

PD780054Y(A)

PD780054(A)

PD780055Y(A)

PD780055(A)

PD780056Y(A)

PD780056(A)

PD780058BY(A)

PD780058B(A)

2User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

[MEMO]

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES

1 PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD FOR SEMICONDUCTORS

Note:

Strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide and

ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static electricity

as much as possible, and quickly dissipate it once, when it has occurred. Environmental control

must be adequate. When it is dry, humidifier should be used. It is recommended to avoid using

insulators that easily build static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and transported

in an anti-static container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement

tools including work bench and floor should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using

wrist strap. Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need

to be taken for PW boards with semiconductor devices on it.

2 HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS FOR CMOS

Note:

No connection for CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If no connection is provided

to the input pins, it is possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc., hence

causing malfunction. CMOS devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels

of CMOS devices must be fixed high or low by using a pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused

pin should be connected to VDD or GND with a resistor, if it is considered to have a possibility of

being an output pin. All handling related to the unused pins must be judged device by device and

related specifications governing the devices.

3 STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION OF MOS DEVICES

Note:

Power-on does not necessarily define initial status of MOS device. Production process of MOS

does not define the initial operation status of the device. Immediately after the power source is

turned ON, the devices with reset function have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on does

not guarantee out-pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. Device is not initialized until the

reset signal is received. Reset operation must be executed immediately after power-on for devices

having reset function.

FIP, EEPROM, and IEBus are trademarks of NEC Electronics Corporation.

Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and/or other countries.

PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

HP9000 Series 700 and HP-UX are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.

SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc.

SunOS is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

TRON stands for The Realtime Operating system Nucleus.

ITRON is an abbreviation of Industrial TRON.

4User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Purchase of NEC Electronics I2C components conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent Rights to use

these components in an I2C system, provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as

defined by Philips.

These commodities, technology or software, must be exported in accordance

with the export administration regulations of the exporting country.

Diversion contrary to the law of that country is prohibited.

The information in this document is current as of January, 2003. The information is subject to

change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data

sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC Electronics products. Not

all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales

representative for availability and additional information.

No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior

written consent of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may

appear in this document.

NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual

property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document

or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is

granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others.

Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative

purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these

circuits, software and information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full

responsibility of the customer. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by

customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information.

While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products,

customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To

minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC

Electronics products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as

redundancy, fire-containment and anti-failure features.

NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and

"Specific".

The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer-

designated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC

Electronics product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of

each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application.

"Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio

and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment

and industrial robots.

"Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster

systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed

for life support).

"Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life

support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc.

The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC

Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications

not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to

determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application.

(Note)

(1) "NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its

majority-owned subsidiaries.

(2) "NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics

(as defined above).

•

M8E 02. 11-1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Regional Information

• Device availability

• Ordering information

• Product release schedule

• Availability of related technical literature

• Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and

components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth)

• Network requirements

In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary

from country to country.

NEC Electronics America, Inc. (U.S.)

Santa Clara, California

Tel: 408-588-6000

800-366-9782

Fax: 408-588-6130

800-729-9288

NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.

Hong Kong

Tel: 2886-9318

Fax: 2886-9022/9044

NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.

Seoul Branch

Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-528-0303

Fax: 02-528-4411

NEC Electronics Shanghai, Ltd.

Shanghai, P.R. China

Tel: 021-6841-1138

Fax: 021-6841-1137

NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.

Taipei, Taiwan

Tel: 02-2719-2377

Fax: 02-2719-5951

NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.

Novena Square, Singapore

Tel: 6253-8311

Fax: 6250-3583

J02.11

NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH

Duesseldorf, Germany

Tel: 0211-65 03 01

Fax: 0211-65 03 327

• Sucursal en España

Madrid, Spain

Tel: 091-504 27 87

Fax: 091-504 28 60

Vélizy-Villacoublay, France

Tel: 01-30-67 58 00

Fax: 01-30-67 58 99

• Succursale Française

• Filiale Italiana

Milano, Italy

Tel: 02-66 75 41

Fax: 02-66 75 42 99

• Branch The Netherlands

Eindhoven, The Netherlands

Tel: 040-244 58 45

Fax: 040-244 45 80

• Tyskland Filial

Taeby, Sweden

Tel: 08-63 80 820

Fax: 08-63 80 388

• United Kingdom Branch

Milton Keynes, UK

Tel: 01908-691-133

Fax: 01908-670-290

Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC

Electronics product in your application, pIease contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to

obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors. They will verify:

6User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Major Revisions in This Edition (1/2)

Page Description

Throughout Deletion of following product

•

PD780058Y

Addition of following products

•

PD780058B, 780058BY, 780053(A), 780053Y(A), 780054(A), 780054Y(A), 780055(A),

780055Y(A), 780056(A), 780056Y(A), 780058B(A), 780058BY(A)

Deletion of following packages

• 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-3B9 type)

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-BE9 type)

Addition of following package

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type)

pp. 31, 32, 38, 39 1.1 Features, 1.7 Outline of Functions

• Change of operating voltage range of A/D and D/A converters of

PD780058 and 78F0058

• Change of supply voltage of

PD78F0058

p. 40 Addition of 1.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

pp. 41, 42, 48, 49 2.1 Features, 2.7 Outline of Functions

• Change of operating voltage range of A/D and D/A converters of

PD78F0058Y

• Change of supply voltage of

PD78F0058Y

p. 50 Addition of 2.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

p. 60 Change of processing when A/D converter is not used in 3.2.11 AVREF0

pp. 62, 63 Change of recommended connection of unused pins and connection of P60 to P63, AVREF1, and

VPP pins in Table 3-1 Pin I/O Circuit Types

p. 75 Change of processing when A/D converter is not used in 4.2.11 AVREF0

pp. 77, 78 Change of recommended connection of unused pins and connection of P60 to P63, AVREF1, and

VPP pins in Table 4-1 Pin I/O Circuit Types

p. 132 Modification of Note 2 in 6.2.8 Port 6

p. 149 Addition of note on feedback resistor to Figure 7-3 Processor Clock Control Register Format

p. 167 Addition of Table 8-5 INTP1/TI01 Pin Valid Edge and CR00 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

p. 168 Addition of Table 8-6 INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge and CR01 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

p. 177 Correction of note on valid edge of INTP0/TI00/P00 and INTP1/TI01/P01 pin in Figure 8-8

Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0

p. 185 Addition of Figure 8-17 Configuration of PPG Output

Addition of Figure 8-18 PPG Output Operation Timing

pp. 201 to 204 8.5 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Operating Cautions

Addition of description on TI01/P01/INTP1 to (5) Valid edge setting

Addition of (c) One-shot pulse output function to (6) Re-trigger of one-shot pulse

Addition of (8) Conflict operation

Addition of (9) Timer operation

Addition of (10) Capture operation

Addition of (11) Compare operation

Addition of (12) Edge detection

p. 235 Modification of note on changing count clock in Figure 10-2 Timer Clock Select Register 2

Format

p. 242 Modification of note on changing count clock in Figure 11-2 Timer Clock Select Register 2

Format

p. 252 Addition of note on rewriting TCL2 in Figure 13-2 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Major Revisions in This Edition (2/2)

Page Description

p. 263 Modification of Figure 14-5 A/D Converter Basic Operation

Addition of Table 14-2 A/D Conversion Sampling Time and A/D Converter Start Delay Time

pp. 267, 268 Addition of 14.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table

pp. 269, 270, 272, 273 14.6 A/D Converter Cautions

Change of description in (1) Power consumption in standby mode

Addition of (3) Conflict operations

Addition of (6) Input impedance of ANI0 to ANI7 pins

Addition of (10) Timing at which A/D conversion result is undefined

Addition of (11) Notes on board design

Addition of (12) AVREF0 pin

Addition of (13) Internal equivalent circuit of ANI0 to ANI7 pins and permissible signal

source impedance

p. 280 Addition of description of processing when D/A converter is not used in 15.5 D/A Converter

Cautions (3) AVREF1 pin

p. 379 Addition of 17.4.7 Restrictions in I2C bus mode 2

p. 468 Addition of 19.4.5 Restrictions in UART mode 2

p. 477 Addition of Caution when interrupt is acknowledged to Figure 21-2 Interrupt Request Flag

p. 483 Addition of description on TI01/P01/INTP1 pin to Figure 21-5 Format of External Interrupt

Mode Register 0

p. 525 Addition of Caution to 25.1 ROM Correction Function

p. 535 Modification of Table 26-1 Differences Between

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y and Mask ROM

Versions

pp. 538 to 549 Total revision of description on flash memory programming as 26.3 Flash Memory

Characteristics

pp. 567 to 596 Addition of CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

pp. 597 to 626 Addition of CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

pp. 627 to 657 Addition of CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD

= 2.2 V))

pp. 658, 659 Addition of CHAPTER 31 CHARACTERISTICS CURVES (REFERENCE VALUES)

pp. 660, 661 Addition of CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS

pp. 662 to 665 Addition of CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

pp. 666, 667 Correction of APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES BETWEEN

PD78054, 78058F, AND 780058

SUBSERIES

pp. 668 to 684 Total revision of APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

Transfer of description of embedded software to APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

The mark shows major revised points.

8User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

PREFACE

Readers This manual has been prepared for user engineers who wish to understand the

functions of the

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries and design and develop its

application systems and programs.

This manual is intended for the products in the following subseries.

•

PD780058 Subseries

PD780053, 780054, 780055, 780056, 780058, 780058B, 78F0058, 780053(A),

780054(A), 780055(A), 780056(A), 780058B(A)

•

PD780058Y Subseries

PD780053Y, 780054Y, 780055Y, 780056Y, 780058BY, 78F0058Y, 780053Y(A),

780054Y(A), 780055Y(A), 780056Y(A), 780058BY(A)

These products are collectively referred to as the “

PD780058, 780058Y Subseries”

in this manual.

Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions described

in the organization below.

Organization The

PD780058, 780058Y Subseries manual is separated into two parts: this

manual and the instruction edition (common to the 78K/0 Series).

PD780058, 780058Y 78K/0 Series

Subseries User’s Manual

User’s Manual Instructions

(This manual)

Pin functions CPU functions

Internal block functions Instruction set

Interrupts Explanation of each instruction

Other on-chip peripheral functions

Electrical specifications

9User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

How to Read This Manual It is assumed that readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical

engineering, logic circuits, and microcontrollers.

When using this manual as the manual for the

PD780053(A), 780054(A),

780055(A), 780056(A), 780058B(A), 780053Y(A), 780054Y(A), 780055Y(A),

780056Y(A), and 780058BY(A),

→The only difference between these products and the

PD780053, 780054,

780055, 780056, 780058B, 780053Y, 780054Y, 780055Y, 780056Y, and

780058BY is the quality grade (see 1.9 Differences Between Standard

Model and (A) Model, and 2.9 Differences Between Standard Model and

(A) Model). The correspondence between the standard model and (A) model

is as follows in CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS to CHAPTER 27 INSTRUC-

TION SET OUTLINE.

PD780053 →

PD780053(A)

PD780053Y →

PD780053Y(A)

PD780054 →

PD780054(A)

PD780054Y →

PD780054Y(A)

PD780055 →

PD780055(A)

PD780055Y →

PD780055Y(A)

PD780056 →

PD780056(A)

PD780056Y →

PD780056Y(A)

PD780058B →

PD780058B(A)

PD780058BY →

PD780058BY(A)

To gain a general understanding the functions:

→Read this manual in the order of the contents.

To know the

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries instruction functions in detail:

→ Refer to the 78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual (U12326E)

How to interpret the register format:

→

For a bit number enclosed in angle brackets (<>), the bit name is defined as

a reserved word in the RA78K

0, and defined in the header file named sfrbit.h

in the CC78K0.

To learn the function of a register whose register name is known:

→ Refer to APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX.

To see application examples of each function of the

PD780058, 780058Y

Subseries:

→Refer to 78K/0 Series Basics (III) Application Note (U10182E) separately

available.

To understand the electrical specifications of the

PD780058, 780058Y Subseries:

→See CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VER-

SION), CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY

VERSION), CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY

VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V)).

Caution Examples in this manual employ the “standard” quality grade for

general electronics. When using examples in this manual for the

“special” quality grade, review the quality grade of each part and/or

circuit actually used.

10 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Chapter Organization: This manual divides the descriptions for the

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries into

different chapters as shown below. Read only the chapters related to the device being used.

Chapter

PD780058

PD780058Y

Subseries Subseries

CHAPTER 1 Outline (

PD780058 Subseries) √—

CHAPTER 2 Outline (

PD780058Y Subseries) —√

CHAPTER 3 Pin Functions (

PD780058 Subseries) √—

CHAPTER 4 Pin Functions (

PD780058Y Subseries) —√

CHAPTER 5 CPU Architecture √√

CHAPTER 6 Port Functions √√

CHAPTER 7 Clock Generator √√

CHAPTER 8 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter √√

CHAPTER 9 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter √√

CHAPTER 10 Watch Timer √√

CHAPTER 11 Watchdog Timer √√

CHAPTER 12 Clock Output Controller √√

CHAPTER 13 Buzzer Output Controller √√

CHAPTER 14 A/D Converter √√

CHAPTER 15 D/A Converter √√

CHAPTER 16 Serial Interface Channel 0 (

PD780058 Subseries) √—

CHAPTER 17 Serial Interface Channel 0 (

PD780058Y Subseries) —√

CHAPTER 18 Serial Interface Channel 1 √√

CHAPTER 19 Serial Interface Channel 2 √√

CHAPTER 20 Real-Time Output Port √√

CHAPTER 21 Interrupt and Test Functions √√

CHAPTER 22 External Device Expansion Function √√

CHAPTER 23 Standby Function √√

CHAPTER 24 Reset Function √√

CHAPTER 25 ROM Correction √√

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058,

PD78F0058Y √√

CHAPTER 27 Outline of Instruction Set √√

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION) √√

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION) √√

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V)) √√

CHAPTER 31 CHARACTERISTICS CURVES (REFERENCE VALUES) √√

CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS √√

CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS √√

11User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Differences Between

PD780058 and

PD780058Y Subseries:

The

PD780058 and

PD780058Y Subseries differ in the following functions of

serial interface channel 0.

Modes of serial interface channel 0

PD780058

PD780058Y

Subseries Subseries

3-wire serial I/O mode √√

2-wire serial I/O mode √√

SBI (serial bus interface) mode √—

I2C (inter IC) bus mode — √

√: Supported

—: Not supported

Legend Data significance: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right

Active low representations: ××× (overscore over pin or signal name)

Note: Footnote for item marked with Note in the text.

Caution: Information requiring particular attention

Remark: Supplementary information

Numeral representations: Binary ... ×××× or ××××B

Decimal ... ××××

Hexadecimal ... ××××H

Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary

versions. However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.

Documents Related to Devices

Document Name Document No.

PD780058, 780058Y Subseries User's Manual This manual

78K/0 Series Instruction User's Manual U12326E

78K/0 Series Basics (III) Application Note U10182E

Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the

latest version of each document for designing.

12 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Documents Related to Software Development Tools (User’s Manuals)

Document Name Document No.

RA78K0 Assember Package Operation U14445E

Language U14446E

Structure Assembly Language U11789E

CC78K0 C Compiler Operation U14297E

Language U14298E

SM78K Series System Simulator Ver. 2.30 or Later Operation (WindowsTM Based) U15373E

External Part User Open Interface Specification U15802E

ID78K Series Integrated Debugger Ver. 2.30 or Later Operation (Windows Based) U15185E

RX78K0 Real-Time OS Fundamentals U11537E

Installation U11536E

Project Manager Ver. 3.12 or Later (Windows Based) U14610E

Documents Related to Hardware Development Tools (User’s Manuals)

Document Name Document No.

IE-78K0-NS In-Circuit Emulator U13731E

IE-78K0-NS-A In-Circuit Emulator U14889E

IE-780308-NS-EM1 Emulation Board U13304E

IE-78001-R-A In-Circuit Emulator U14142E

IE-780308-R-EM Emulation Board U11362E

Documents Related to Flash Memory Writing

Document Name Document No.

PG-FP3 Flash Memory Programmer User’s Manual U13502E

PG-FP4 Flash Memory Programmer User’s Manual U15260E

Other Related Documents

Document Name Document No.

SEMICONDUCTOR SELECTION GUIDE - Products and Packages - X13769X

Semiconductor Device Mounting Technology Manual C10535E

Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices C11531E

NEC Semiconductor Device Reliability/Quality Control System C10983E

Guide to Prevent Damage for Semiconductor Devices by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) C11892E

Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the

latest version of each document for designing.

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES) ......................................................................... 31

1.1 Features ................................................................................................................................31

1.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 32

1.3 Ordering Information .......................................................................................................... 32

1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View) ............................................................................................. 33

1.5 78K/0 Series Lineup ............................................................................................................ 35

1.6 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 37

1.7 Outline of Function ............................................................................................................. 38

1.8 Mask Options ....................................................................................................................... 40

1.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model .................................................... 40

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES) ....................................................................... 41

2.1 Features ................................................................................................................................41

2.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 42

2.3 Ordering Information .......................................................................................................... 42

2.4 Pin Configuration (Top View) ............................................................................................. 43

2.5 78K/0 Series Lineup ............................................................................................................ 45

2.6 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 47

2.7 Outline of Functions ........................................................................................................... 48

2.8 Mask Options ....................................................................................................................... 50

2.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model .................................................... 50

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES) ............................................................. 51

3.1 Pin Function List ................................................................................................................. 51

3.2 Description of Pin Functions ............................................................................................ 55

3.2.1 P00 to P05, P07 (Port 0) ........................................................................................................ 55

3.2.2 P10 to P17 (Port 1) ................................................................................................................. 55

3.2.3 P20 to P27 (Port 2) ................................................................................................................. 56

3.2.4 P30 to P37 (Port 3) ................................................................................................................. 57

3.2.5 P40 to P47 (Port 4) ................................................................................................................. 57

3.2.6 P50 to P57 (Port 5) ................................................................................................................. 58

3.2.7 P60 to P67 (Port 6) ................................................................................................................. 58

3.2.8 P70 to P72 (Port 7) ................................................................................................................. 59

3.2.9 P120 to P127 (Port 12) ........................................................................................................... 59

3.2.10 P130 and P131 (Port 13) ........................................................................................................ 60

3.2.11 AVREF0 ...................................................................................................................................... 60

3.2.12 AVREF1 ...................................................................................................................................... 60

3.2.13 AVSS ......................................................................................................................................... 60

3.2.14 RESET ..................................................................................................................................... 60

3.2.15 X1 and X2................................................................................................................................60

3.2.16 XT1 and XT2 ........................................................................................................................... 60

3.2.17 VDD0, VDD1 ................................................................................................................................60

3.2.18 VSS0, VSS1 ................................................................................................................................. 61

3.2.19 VPP (Flash memory version only) ........................................................................................... 61

3.2.20 IC (Mask ROM version only) .................................................................................................. 61

3.3 I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins....................................... 62

14 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES) .......................................................... 66

4.1 Pin Function List ................................................................................................................. 66

4.2 Description of Pin Functions ............................................................................................ 70

4.2.1 P00 to P05, P07 (Port 0) ........................................................................................................ 70

4.2.2 P10 to P17 (Port 1) ................................................................................................................. 71

4.2.3 P20 to P27 (Port 2) ................................................................................................................. 71

4.2.4 P30 to P37 (Port 3) ................................................................................................................. 72

4.2.5 P40 to P47 (Port 4) ................................................................................................................. 73

4.2.6 P50 to P57 (Port 5) ................................................................................................................. 73

4.2.7 P60 to P67 (Port 6) ................................................................................................................. 73

4.2.8 P70 to P72 (Port 7) ................................................................................................................. 74

4.2.9 P120 to P127 (Port 12) ........................................................................................................... 74

4.2.10 P130 and P131 (Port 13) ....................................................................................................... 75

4.2.11 AVREF0 ...................................................................................................................................... 75

4.2.12 AVREF1 ...................................................................................................................................... 75

4.2.13 AVSS ......................................................................................................................................... 75

4.2.14 RESET ..................................................................................................................................... 75

4.2.15 X1 and X2................................................................................................................................75

4.2.16 XT1 and XT2 ........................................................................................................................... 75

4.2.17 VDD0, VDD1 ................................................................................................................................75

4.2.18 VSS0, VSS1 ................................................................................................................................. 76

4.2.19 VPP (Flash memory version only) ........................................................................................... 76

4.2.20 IC (Mask ROM version only) .................................................................................................. 76

4.3 I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins....................................... 77

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE ................................................................................................. 81

5.1 Memory Spaces ................................................................................................................... 81

5.1.1 Internal program memory space.............................................................................................. 87

5.1.2 Internal data memory space .................................................................................................... 89

5.1.3 Special Function Register (SFR) area .................................................................................... 89

5.1.4 External memory space ........................................................................................................... 89

5.1.5 Data memory addressing ......................................................................................................... 89

5.2 Processor Registers ........................................................................................................... 96

5.2.1 Control registers ....................................................................................................................... 96

5.2.2 General registers ...................................................................................................................... 99

5.2.3 Special-Function Registers (SFRs) ......................................................................................... 100

5.3 Instruction Address Addressing ....................................................................................... 104

5.3.1 Relative addressing .................................................................................................................. 104

5.3.2 Immediate addressing .............................................................................................................. 105

5.3.3 Table indirect addressing ......................................................................................................... 106

5.3.4 Register addressing ................................................................................................................. 107

5.4 Operand Address Addressing ........................................................................................... 108

5.4.1 Implied addressing ................................................................................................................... 108

5.4.2 Register addressing ................................................................................................................. 109

5.4.3 Direct addressing ..................................................................................................................... 110

5.4.4 Short direct addressing ............................................................................................................ 111

5.4.5 Special-Function Register (SFR) addressing.......................................................................... 113

5.4.6 Register indirect addressing .................................................................................................... 114

5.4.7 Based addressing ..................................................................................................................... 115

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.8 Based indexed addressing ....................................................................................................... 116

5.4.9 Stack addressing ...................................................................................................................... 116

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS ...................................................................................................... 117

6.1 Port Functions ..................................................................................................................... 117

6.2 Port Configuration .............................................................................................................. 122

6.2.1 Port 0 ....................................................................................................................................... 122

6.2.2 Port 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 124

6.2.3 Port 2 (

PD780058 Subseries) .............................................................................................. 125

6.2.4 Port 2 (

PD780058Y Subseries) ............................................................................................ 127

6.2.5 Port 3 ....................................................................................................................................... 129

6.2.6 Port 4 ....................................................................................................................................... 130

6.2.7 Port 5 ....................................................................................................................................... 131

6.2.8 Port 6 ....................................................................................................................................... 132

6.2.9 Port 7 ....................................................................................................................................... 134

6.2.10 Port 12 ..................................................................................................................................... 136

6.2.11 Port 13 ..................................................................................................................................... 137

6.3 Port Function Control Registers ....................................................................................... 138

6.4 Port Operations ................................................................................................................... 144

6.4.1 Writing to I/O port ..................................................................................................................... 144

6.4.2 Reading from I/O port .............................................................................................................. 144

6.4.3 Operations on I/O port ............................................................................................................. 144

6.5 Selection of Mask Option ................................................................................................... 145

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR .................................................................................................. 146

7.1 Clock Generator Functions................................................................................................ 146

7.2 Clock Generator Configuration ......................................................................................... 146

7.3 Clock Generator Control Registers .................................................................................. 148

7.4 System Clock Oscillator..................................................................................................... 152

7.4.1 Main system clock oscillator .................................................................................................... 152

7.4.2 Subsystem clock oscillator ....................................................................................................... 153

7.4.3 Example of resonator with bad connection ............................................................................. 154

7.4.4 Divider ....................................................................................................................................... 155

7.4.5 When not using subsystem clock ............................................................................................ 155

7.5 Clock Generator Operations .............................................................................................. 156

7.5.1 Main system clock operations .................................................................................................. 157

7.5.2 Subsystem clock operations .................................................................................................... 158

7.6 Changing System Clock and CPU Clock Settings ......................................................... 159

7.6.1 Time required for switchover between system clock and CPU clock ..................................... 159

7.6.2 System clock and CPU clock switching procedure ................................................................. 161

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER ............................................................................... 162

8.1 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Functions ............................................................................. 162

8.2 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration ...................................................................... 164

8.3 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Control Registers ............................................................... 169

8.4 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Operations ........................................................................... 179

8.4.1 Interval timer operations .......................................................................................................... 179

8.4.2 PWM output operations............................................................................................................ 181

8.4.3 PPG output operations ............................................................................................................. 184

8.4.4 Pulse width measurement operations ..................................................................................... 186

16 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.4.5 External event counter operation............................................................................................. 193

8.4.6 Square-wave output operation ................................................................................................. 195

8.4.7 One-shot pulse output operation ............................................................................................. 197

8.5 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Operating Cautions ............................................................ 201

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER ................................................................................. 205

9.1 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Functions ............................................................................... 205

9.1.1 8-bit timer/event counter mode ................................................................................................ 205

9.1.2 16-bit timer/event counter mode .............................................................................................. 208

9.2 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration ........................................................................ 210

9.3 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Control Registers.................................................................. 214

9.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2 ........................................................ 219

9.4.1 8-bit timer/event counter mode ................................................................................................ 219

9.4.2 16-bit timer/event counter mode .............................................................................................. 225

9.5 Cautions on 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2 ........................................................... 230

CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER ............................................................................................................ 232

10.1 Watch Timer Functions ..................................................................................................... 232

10.2 Watch Timer Configuration .............................................................................................. 233

10.3 Watch Timer Control Registers........................................................................................ 233

10.4 Watch Timer Operations ................................................................................................... 237

10.4.1 Watch timer operation ............................................................................................................ 237

10.4.2 Interval timer operation .......................................................................................................... 237

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER ................................................................................................... 238

11.1 Watchdog Timer Functions .............................................................................................. 238

11.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration ........................................................................................ 240

11.3 Watchdog Timer Control Registers ................................................................................. 241

11.4 Watchdog Timer Operations ............................................................................................ 244

11.4.1 Watchdog timer operation ...................................................................................................... 244

11.4.2 Interval timer operation .......................................................................................................... 245

CHAPTER 12 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER ............................................................................. 246

12.1 Clock Output Controller Functions ................................................................................ 246

12.2 Clock Output Controller Configuration .......................................................................... 247

12.3 Clock Output Function Control Registers ..................................................................... 247

CHAPTER 13 BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER ........................................................................... 250

13.1 Buzzer Output Controller Functions .............................................................................. 250

13.2 Buzzer Output Controller Configuration........................................................................ 250

13.3 Buzzer Output Function Control Registers ................................................................... 251

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER ...................................................................................................... 254

14.1 A/D Converter Functions ................................................................................................. 254

14.2 A/D Converter Configuration ........................................................................................... 254

14.3 A/D Converter Control Registers .................................................................................... 258

14.4 A/D Converter Operations ................................................................................................ 262

14.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter ......................................................................................... 262

14.4.2 Input voltage and conversion results ..................................................................................... 264

14.4.3 A/D converter operating mode ............................................................................................... 265

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

14.5 How to Read the A/D Converter Characteristics Table ................................................ 267

14.6 A/D Converter Cautions ................................................................................................... 269

CHAPTER 15 D/A CONVERTER ...................................................................................................... 275

15.1 D/A Converter Functions ................................................................................................. 275

15.2 D/A Converter Configuration ........................................................................................... 276

15.3 D/A Converter Control Registers .................................................................................... 278

15.4 D/A Converter Operations ................................................................................................ 279

15.5 D/A Converter Cautions ................................................................................................... 280

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES) .............................. 281

16.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 0 ........................................................................ 282

16.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0 ................................................................. 284

16.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 0 ........................................................... 288

16.4 Operations of Serial Interface Channel 0 ...................................................................... 295

16.4.1 Operation stop mode.............................................................................................................. 295

16.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation ........................................................................................... 296

16.4.3 SBI mode operation ............................................................................................................... 301

16.4.4 2-wire serial I/O mode operation ........................................................................................... 327

16.4.5 SCK0/P27 pin output manipulation ....................................................................................... 332

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES) ........................... 333

17.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 0 ........................................................................ 334

17.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0 ................................................................. 336

17.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 0 ........................................................... 340

17.4 Operations of Serial Interface Channel 0 ...................................................................... 347

17.4.1 Operation stop mode.............................................................................................................. 347

17.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation ........................................................................................... 348

17.4.3 2-wire serial I/O mode operation ........................................................................................... 352

17.4.4 I2C bus mode operation ......................................................................................................... 357

17.4.5 Cautions on use of I2C bus mode ......................................................................................... 374

17.4.6 Restrictions in I2C bus mode 1 .............................................................................................. 377

17.4.7 Restrictions in I2C bus mode 2 .............................................................................................. 379

17.4.8 SCK0/SCL/P27 pin output manipulation ............................................................................... 380

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1 ........................................................................... 382

18.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 1 ........................................................................ 382

18.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 1 ................................................................. 383

18.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 1 ........................................................... 386

18.4 Operations of Serial Interface Channel 1 ...................................................................... 394

18.4.1 Operation stop mode.............................................................................................................. 394

18.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation ........................................................................................... 395

18.4.3 3-wire serial I/O mode operation with automatic transmit/receive function ......................... 398

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2 ........................................................................... 427

19.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 2 ........................................................................ 427

19.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 2 ................................................................. 428

19.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 2 ........................................................... 432

19.4 Operation of Serial Interface Channel 2 ........................................................................ 442

19.4.1 Operation stop mode.............................................................................................................. 442

18 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode (with time-division transfer function) ............ 444

19.4.3 3-wire serial I/O mode ............................................................................................................ 458

19.4.4 Restrictions in UART mode 1 ................................................................................................ 465

19.4.5 Restrictions in UART mode 2 ................................................................................................ 468

CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT ..................................................................................... 469

20.1 Real-Time Output Port Functions ................................................................................... 469

20.2 Real-Time Output Port Configuration ............................................................................ 470

20.3 Real-Time Output Port Control Registers...................................................................... 472

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 474

21.1 Interrupt Function Types .................................................................................................. 474

21.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration ............................................................................. 475

21.3 Interrupt Function Control Registers ............................................................................. 479

21.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations ....................................................................................... 488

21.4.1 Non-maskable interrupt request acknowledgment operation ............................................... 488

21.4.2 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgment operation ....................................................... 491

21.4.3 Software interrupt request acknowledgment operation ........................................................ 494

21.4.4 Multiple interrupt servicing ..................................................................................................... 494

21.4.5 Interrupt request pending ....................................................................................................... 497

21.5 Test Function ..................................................................................................................... 498

21.5.1 Registers controlling test function ......................................................................................... 498

21.5.2 Test input signal acknowledgment operation ........................................................................ 500

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION....................................................... 501

22.1 External Device Expansion Function ............................................................................. 501

22.2 External Device Expansion Function Control Register ............................................... 505

22.3 External Device Expansion Function Timing ................................................................ 507

22.4 Example of Connection with Memory ............................................................................ 512

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION .............................................................................................. 513

23.1 Standby Function and Configuration ............................................................................. 513

23.1.1 Standby function ..................................................................................................................... 513

23.1.2 Standby function control register ........................................................................................... 514

23.2 Standby Function Operations ......................................................................................... 515

23.2.1 HALT mode ............................................................................................................................. 515

23.2.2 STOP mode ............................................................................................................................ 518

CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION .................................................................................................... 521

24.1 Reset Function .................................................................................................................. 521

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION ................................................................................................. 525

25.1 ROM Correction Function ................................................................................................ 525

25.2 ROM Correction Configuration ....................................................................................... 525

25.3 ROM Correction Control Registers ................................................................................. 527

25.4 ROM Correction Application............................................................................................ 528

25.5 ROM Correction Usage Example .................................................................................... 531

25.6 Program Execution Flow .................................................................................................. 532

25.7 ROM Correction Cautions ................................................................................................ 534

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y ............................................................................................ 535

26.1 Internal memory Size Switching Register ..................................................................... 536

26.2 Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register ....................................................... 537

26.3 Flash Memory Characteristics ........................................................................................ 538

26.3.1 Programming environment ..................................................................................................... 538

26.3.2 Communication mode ............................................................................................................ 539

26.3.3 On-board pin processing........................................................................................................ 543

26.3.4 Connection of adapter for flash writing ................................................................................. 546

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW ............................................................................... 552

27.1 Conventions Used in Operation List .............................................................................. 553

27.1.1 Operand identifiers and description methods ....................................................................... 553

27.1.2 Description of operation column ............................................................................................ 554

27.1.3 Description of flag operation column ..................................................................................... 554

27.2 Operation List .................................................................................................................... 555

27.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type ........................................................................ 563

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION) .................................... 567

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION) ........................... 597

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.5 V)) .... 627

CHAPTER 31 CHARACTERISTICS CURVES (REFERENCE VALUES) .................................... 658

CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS ............................................................................................. 660

CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS ..................................................... 662

APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES BETWEEN

PD78054, 78058F, AND 780058 SUBSERIES ......... 666

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS ........................................................................................... 668

B.1 Software Package ............................................................................................................. 670

B.2 Language Processing Software ...................................................................................... 670

B.3 Control Software ............................................................................................................... 671

B.4 Flash Memory Writing Tools ............................................................................................ 671

B.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware) ........................................................................................... 672

B.5.1 When using in-circuit emulator IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A.................................................. 672

B.5.2 When using in-circuit emulator IE-78001-R-A ....................................................................... 673

B.6 Debugging Tools (Software) ............................................................................................ 674

B.7 Embedded Software ......................................................................................................... 675

B.8 System-Upgrade Method from Former In-Circuit Emulator for 78K/0 Series

to IE-78001-R-A ................................................................................................................. 676

B.9 Drawing and Footprint for Conversion Socket (EV-9200GC-80) ................................ 677

B.10 Drawing of Conversion Adapter (TGK-080SDW, TGC-080SBP) .................................. 679

B.11 Cautions on Designing Target System .......................................................................... 681

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX ..................................................................................................... 685

C.1 Register Index (Register Name) ....................................................................................... 685

C.2 Register Index (Symbol) .................................................................................................... 688

APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY ................................................................................................. 691

20 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3-1 Pin I/O Circuit List .................................................................................................................................... 64

4-1 Pin I/O Circuit List .................................................................................................................................... 79

5-1 Memory Map (

PD780053, 780053(A), 780053Y, 780053Y(A)) ........................................................... 81

5-2 Memory Map (

PD780054, 780054(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A)) ........................................................... 82

5-3 Memory Map (

PD780055, 780055(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A)) ........................................................... 83

5-4 Memory Map (

PD780056, 780056(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A)) ........................................................... 84

5-5 Memory Map (

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A)) ................................... 85

5-6 Memory Map (

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y) ................................................................................................ 86

5-7 Data Memory Addressing (

PD780053, 780053(A), 780053Y, 780053Y(A)) ....................................... 90

5-8 Data Memory Addressing (

PD780054, 780054(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A)) ....................................... 91

5-9 Data Memory Addressing (

PD780055, 780055(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A)) ....................................... 92

5-10 Data Memory Addressing (

PD780056, 780056(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A)) ....................................... 93

5-11 Data Memory Addressing (

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A)) ............... 94

5-12 Data Memory Addressing (

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y) ........................................................................... 95

5-13 Program Counter Format ......................................................................................................................... 96

5-14 Program Status Word Format .................................................................................................................. 96

5-15 Stack Pointer Format ............................................................................................................................... 98

5-16 Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory ........................................................................................................ 98

5-17 Data to Be Reset from Stack Memory .................................................................................................... 98

5-18 General-purpose Register Configuration ................................................................................................ 99

6-1 Port Types ............................................................................................................................................... 117

6-2 Block Diagram of P00 and P07 ............................................................................................................. 123

6-3 Block Diagram of P01 to P05 ................................................................................................................ 123

6-4 Block Diagram of P10 to P17 ................................................................................................................ 124

6-5 Block Diagram of P20, P21, and P23 to P26 ....................................................................................... 125

6-6 Block Diagram of P22 and P27 ............................................................................................................. 126

6-7 Block Diagram of P20, P21, and P23 to P26 ....................................................................................... 127

6-8 Block Diagram of P22 and P27 ............................................................................................................. 128

6-9 Block Diagram of P30 to P37 ................................................................................................................ 129

6-10 Block Diagram of P40 to P47 ................................................................................................................ 130

6-11 Block Diagram of Falling Edge Detector ............................................................................................... 130

6-12 Block Diagram of P50 to P57 ................................................................................................................ 131

6-13 Block Diagram of P60 to P63 ................................................................................................................ 133

6-14 Block Diagram of P64 to P67 ................................................................................................................ 133

6-15 Block Diagram of P70 ............................................................................................................................ 134

6-16 Block Diagram of P71 and P72 ............................................................................................................. 135

6-17 Block Diagram of P120 to P127 ............................................................................................................ 136

6-18 Block Diagram of P130 and P131 ......................................................................................................... 137

6-19 Port Mode Register Format ................................................................................................................... 140

6-20 Format of Pull-up Resistor Option Register.......................................................................................... 141

6-21 Format of Memory Expansion Mode Register ...................................................................................... 142

LIST OF FIGURES (1/8)

Figure No. Title Page

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6-22 Format of Key Return Mode Register ................................................................................................... 143

7-1 Clock Generator Block Diagram ............................................................................................................ 147

7-2 Subsystem Clock Feedback Resistor ................................................................................................... 148

7-3 Format of Processor Clock Control Register ........................................................................................ 149

7-4 Format of Oscillation Mode Selection Register .................................................................................... 151

7-5 Main System Clock Waveform due to Writing to OSMS ...................................................................... 151

7-6 External Circuit of Main System Clock Oscillator ................................................................................. 152

7-7 External Circuit of Subsystem Clock Oscillator .................................................................................... 153

7-8 Examples of Resonator with Bad Connection ...................................................................................... 154

7-9 Main System Clock Stop Function ........................................................................................................ 157

7-10 Switching Between System Clock and CPU Clock .............................................................................. 161

8-1 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter ...................................................................................... 165

8-2 Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Output Controller ........................................................ 166

8-3 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 0 .............................................................................................. 170

8-4 Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register .................................................................................... 172

8-5 Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 0 .................................................................................. 173

8-6 Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register .................................................................................. 175

8-7 Format of Port Mode Register 3 ............................................................................................................ 176

8-8 Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0 ...................................................................................... 177

8-9 Format of Sampling Clock Select Register ........................................................................................... 178

8-10 Control Register Settings for Interval Timer Operation ........................................................................ 179

8-11 Interval Timer Configuration Diagram ................................................................................................... 180

8-12 Interval Timer Operation Timings .......................................................................................................... 180

8-13 Control Register Settings for PWM Output Operation ......................................................................... 182

8-14 Example of D/A Converter Configuration with PWM Output ............................................................... 183

8-15 TV Tuner Application Circuit Example ................................................................................................... 183

8-16 Control Register Settings for PPG Output Operation ........................................................................... 184

8-17 Configuration of PPG Output................................................................................................................. 185

8-18 PPG Output Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 185

8-19 Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter

and One Capture Register .................................................................................................................... 186

8-20 Configuration Diagram for Pulse Width Measurement by Free-Running Counter .............................. 187

8-21 Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Free-Running Counter

and One Capture Register (with Both Edges Specified) ..................................................................... 187

8-22 Control Register Settings for Two Pulse Width Measurements with Free-Running Counter .............. 188

8-23 Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter

(with Both Edges Specified) .................................................................................................................. 189

8-24 Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter

and Two Capture Registers ................................................................................................................... 190

8-25 Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Free-Running Counter

and Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified) ................................................................... 191

8-26 Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement by Means of Restart .................................. 192

LIST OF FIGURES (2/8)

Figure No. Title Page

22 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8-27 Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Means of Restart

(with Rising Edge Specified) ................................................................................................................. 192

8-28 Control Register Settings in External Event Counter Mode ................................................................ 193

8-29 External Event Counter Configuration Diagram ................................................................................... 194

8-30 External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified) ............................................ 194

8-31 Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode .................................................................... 195

8-32 Square-Wave Output Operation Timing ................................................................................................ 196

8-33 Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Using Software Trigger.................. 197

8-34 One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Timing Using Software Trigger ..................................................... 198

8-35 Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Using External Trigger .................. 199

8-36 One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Timing Using External Trigger (with Rising Edge Specified) ...... 200

8-37 16-Bit Timer Register Start Timing ........................................................................................................ 201

8-38 Timing After Change of Compare Register During Timer Count Operation ....................................... 201

8-39 Capture Register Data Retention Timing .............................................................................................. 202

8-40 Operation Timing of OVF0 Flag ............................................................................................................ 203

9-1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter ........................................................................................ 211

9-2 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Output Controller 1 ....................................................... 212

9-3 Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Output Controller 2 ....................................................... 212

9-4 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 1 .............................................................................................. 215

9-5 Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 1 ................................................................................... 216

9-6 Format of 8-Bit Timer Output Control Register..................................................................................... 217

9-7 Format of Port Mode Register 3 ............................................................................................................ 218

9-8 Interval Timer Operation Timing ............................................................................................................ 219

9-9 External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified) ............................................ 222

9-10 Square-Wave Output Operation Timing ................................................................................................ 224

9-11 Interval Timer Operation Timing ............................................................................................................ 225

9-12 External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified) ............................................ 227

9-13 Square-Wave Output Operation Timing ................................................................................................ 229

9-14 Start Timing of 8-Bit Timer Registers 1 and 2 ...................................................................................... 230

9-15 External Event Counter Operation Timing ............................................................................................ 230

9-16 Timing After Compare Register Change During Timer Count Operation ............................................ 231

10-1 Watch Timer Block Diagram .................................................................................................................. 234

10-2 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 2 .............................................................................................. 235

10-3 Format of Watch Timer Mode Control Register .................................................................................... 236

11-1 Watchdog Timer Block Diagram ............................................................................................................ 240

11-2 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 2 .............................................................................................. 242

11-3 Format of Watchdog Timer Mode Register ........................................................................................... 243

12-1 Remote Controlled Output Application Example .................................................................................. 246

12-2 Clock Output Controller Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 247

12-3 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 0 .............................................................................................. 248

LIST OF FIGURES (3/8)

Figure No. Title Page

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

12-4 Format of Port Mode Register 3 ............................................................................................................ 249

13-1 Buzzer Output Controller Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 250

13-2 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 2 .............................................................................................. 252

13-3 Format of Port Mode Register 3 ............................................................................................................ 253

14-1 A/D Converter Block Diagram ............................................................................................................... 255

14-2 Format of A/D Converter Mode Register .............................................................................................. 259

14-3 Format of A/D Converter Input Select Register .................................................................................... 260

14-4 Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 1 ...................................................................................... 261

14-5 A/D Converter Basic Operation ............................................................................................................. 263

14-6 Relationship Between Analog Input Voltage and A/D Conversion Result ........................................... 264

14-7 A/D Conversion by Hardware Start ....................................................................................................... 265

14-8 A/D Conversion by Software Start ........................................................................................................ 266

14-9 Overall Error ........................................................................................................................................... 267

14-10 Quantization Error .................................................................................................................................. 267

14-11 Example of Method of Reducing Current Consumption in Standby Mode ......................................... 269

14-12 Analog Input Pin Handling ..................................................................................................................... 270

14-13 A/D Conversion End Interrupt Request Generation Timing ................................................................. 271

14-14 Timing of Reading Conversion Result (When Conversion Result is Undefined) ................................ 272

14-15 Timing of Reading Conversion Result (When Conversion Result is Normal) ..................................... 272

14-16 Example of Connecting Capacitor to AVREF0 Pin .................................................................................. 273

14-17 Internal Equivalent Circuit of Pins ANI0 to ANI7 .................................................................................. 274

14-18 Example of Connection If Signal Source Impedance Is High .............................................................. 274

15-1 D/A Converter Block Diagram ............................................................................................................... 276

15-2 Format of D/A Converter Mode Register .............................................................................................. 278

15-3 Use Example of Buffer Amplifier ........................................................................................................... 280

16-1 Serial Bus Interface (SBI) System Configuration Example .................................................................. 283

16-2 Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 0 ....................................................................................... 285

16-3 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 3 .............................................................................................. 289

16-4 Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 0 ....................................................................................... 290

16-5 Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register .................................................................................. 292

16-6 Format of Interrupt Timing Specification Register ................................................................................ 294

16-7 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing .............................................................................................................. 299

16-8 RELT and CMDT Operations ................................................................................................................. 299

16-9 Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order ................................................................................................. 300

16-10 Example of Serial Bus Configuration with SBI ..................................................................................... 301

16-11 SBI Transfer Timing ................................................................................................................................ 303

16-12 Bus Release Signal ............................................................................................................................... 304

16-13 Command Signal.................................................................................................................................... 304

16-14 Addresses............................................................................................................................................... 305

16-15 Slave Selection by Address ................................................................................................................... 305

LIST OF FIGURES (4/8)

Figure No. Title Page

24 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16-16 Commands ............................................................................................................................................. 306

16-17 Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 306

16-18 Acknowledge Signal ............................................................................................................................... 307

16-19 BUSY and READY Signals .................................................................................................................... 308

16-20 RELT, CMDT, RELD, and CMDD Operations (Master) ......................................................................... 313

16-21 RELD and CMDD Operations (Slave) ................................................................................................... 313

16-22 ACKT Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 314

16-23 ACKE Operations ................................................................................................................................... 315

16-24 ACKD Operations ................................................................................................................................... 316

16-25 BSYE Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 316

16-26 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 319

16-27 Address Transmission from Master Device to Slave Device (WUP = 1) ............................................. 321

16-28 Command Transmission from Master Device to Slave Device ............................................................ 322

16-29 Data Transmission from Master Device to Slave Device ..................................................................... 323

16-30 Data Transmission from Slave Device to Master Device ..................................................................... 324

16-31 Serial Bus Configuration Example Using 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode ...................................................... 327

16-32 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing .............................................................................................................. 330

16-33 RELT and CMDT Operations ................................................................................................................. 331

16-34 SCK0/P27 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................................. 332

17-1 Serial Bus Configuration Example Using I2C Bus ................................................................................ 335

17-2 Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 0 ....................................................................................... 337

17-3 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 3 .............................................................................................. 341

17-4 Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 0 ....................................................................................... 342

17-5 Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register .................................................................................. 343

17-6 Format of Interrupt Timing Specification Register ................................................................................ 345

17-7 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing .............................................................................................................. 350

17-8 RELT and CMDT Operations ................................................................................................................. 350

17-9 Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order ................................................................................................. 351

17-10 Serial Bus Configuration Example Using 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode ...................................................... 352

17-11 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing .............................................................................................................. 355

17-12 RELT and CMDT Operations ................................................................................................................. 356

17-13 Example of Serial Bus Configuration Using I2C Bus ......................................................................... 357

17-14 I2C Bus Serial Data Transfer Timing................................................................................................... 358

17-15 Start Condition .................................................................................................................................... 359

17-16 Address ............................................................................................................................................... 359

17-17 Transfer Direction Specification .......................................................................................................... 359

17-18 Acknowledge Signal ............................................................................................................................ 360

17-19 Stop Condition..................................................................................................................................... 360

17-20 Wait Signal .......................................................................................................................................... 361

17-21 Pin Configuration ................................................................................................................................ 366

17-22 Data Transmission from Master to Slave (Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) ............ 368

17-23 Data Transmission from Slave to Master (Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) ............ 371

17-24 Start Condition Output ........................................................................................................................ 374

LIST OF FIGURES (5/8)

Figure No. Title Page

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17-25 Slave Wait Release (Transmission) .................................................................................................... 375

17-26 Slave Wait Release (Reception) ......................................................................................................... 376

17-27 SCK0/SCL/P27 Pin Configuration ...................................................................................................... 380

17-28 SCK0/SCL/P27 Pin Configuration ...................................................................................................... 380

17-29 Logic Circuit of SCL Signal ................................................................................................................ 381

18-1 Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 1 ....................................................................................... 384

18-2 Format of Timer Clock Select Register 3 .............................................................................................. 387

18-3 Format of Serial Operation Mode Register 1 ....................................................................................... 388

18-4 Format of Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Control Register ............................................................ 389

18-5 Format of Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Specification Register ...................................... 390

18-6 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing .............................................................................................................. 396

18-7 Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order ................................................................................................. 397

18-8 Basic Transmission/Reception Mode Operation Timing ....................................................................... 406

18-9 Basic Transmission/Reception Mode Flowchart ................................................................................... 407

18-10 Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission/Reception

(in Basic Transmit/Receive Mode) ......................................................................................................... 408

18-11 Basic Transmission Mode Operation Timing......................................................................................... 410

18-12 Basic Transmission Mode Flowchart ..................................................................................................... 411

18-13 Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission (in Basic Transmit Mode) ............................. 412

18-14 Repeat Transmission Mode Operation Timing ...................................................................................... 414

18-15 Repeat Transmission Mode Flowchart .................................................................................................. 415

18-16 Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission (in Repeat Transmit Mode)........................... 416

18-17 Automatic Transmission/Reception Suspension and Restart .............................................................. 418

18-18 System Configuration When Busy Control Option Is Used.................................................................. 419

18-19 Operation Timing When Busy Control Option Is Used (When BUSY0 = 0) ........................................ 420

18-20 Busy Signal and Wait Release (When BUSY0 = 0) ............................................................................. 421

18-21 Operation Timing When Busy & Strobe Control Options Are Used (When BUSY0 = 0).................... 422

18-22 Operation Timing of Bit Shift Detection Function by Busy Signal (When BUSY0 = 1) ...................... 423

18-23 Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Time ................................................................................... 424

18-24 Operation Timing with Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Function Performed Using

Internal Clock ......................................................................................................................................... 425

19-1 Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 2 ....................................................................................... 429

19-2 Baud Rate Generator Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 430

19-3 Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 2 ....................................................................................... 432

19-4 Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Mode Register .................................................................... 433

19-5 Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Status Register ................................................................... 436

19-6 Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register................................................................................ 437

19-7 Format of Serial Interface Pin Select Register ..................................................................................... 441

19-8 Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmit/Receive Data ....................................................... 452

19-9 Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Completion Interrupt Request Generation Timing....... 454

19-10 Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Completion Interrupt Request Generation Timing ........... 455

19-11 Receive Error Timing ............................................................................................................................. 456

LIST OF FIGURES (6/8)

Figure No. Title Page

26 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19-12 Status of Receive Buffer Register (RXB) and Generation of Interrupt Request (INTSR)

When Reception Is Stopped.................................................................................................................. 457

19-13 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing .............................................................................................................. 463

19-14 Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order ................................................................................................. 464

19-15 Reception Completion Interrupt Request Generation Timing (When ISRM = 1) ................................ 465

19-16 Receive Buffer Register Read Disable Period ...................................................................................... 466

19-17 P23 Output Selector .............................................................................................................................. 468

20-1 Real-Time Output Port Block Diagram.................................................................................................. 470

20-2 Real-Time Output Buffer Register Configuration.................................................................................. 471

20-3 Format of Port Mode Register 12.......................................................................................................... 472

20-4 Format of Real-Time Output Port Mode Register ................................................................................ 472

20-5 Format of Real-Time Output Port Control Register .............................................................................. 473

21-1 Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function ............................................................................................. 477

21-2 Format of Interrupt Request Flag Register ........................................................................................... 480

21-3 Interrupt Mask Flag Register Format .................................................................................................... 481

21-4 Format of Priority Specification Flag Register ...................................................................................... 482

21-5 Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0 ...................................................................................... 483

21-6 Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 1 ...................................................................................... 484

21-7 Format of Sampling Clock Select Register ........................................................................................... 485

21-8 Noise Eliminator I/O Timing (During Rising Edge Detection) .............................................................. 486

21-9 Format of Program Status Word ........................................................................................................... 487

21-10 Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Occurrence and Acknowledgment Flowchart ................................ 489

21-11 Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing ................................................................. 489

21-12 Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Operation ............................................................ 490

21-13 Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Processing Algorithm .................................................................. 492

21-14 Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Minimum Time) .............................................................. 493

21-15 Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Maximum Time) ............................................................. 493

21-16 Multiple Interrupt Servicing Example .................................................................................................... 495

21-17 Interrupt Request Pending Timing......................................................................................................... 497

21-18 Basic Configuration of Test Function .................................................................................................... 498

21-19 Format of Interrupt Request Flag Register 1L...................................................................................... 499

21-20 Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Register 1L .......................................................................................... 499

21-21 Format of Key Return Mode Register ................................................................................................... 500

22-1 Memory Map When Using External Device Expansion Function ........................................................ 502

22-2 Format of Memory Expansion Mode Register ...................................................................................... 505

22-3 Format of Internal Memory Size Switching Register............................................................................ 506

22-4 Instruction Fetch from External Memory............................................................................................... 508

22-5 External Memory Read Timing .............................................................................................................. 509

22-6 External Memory Write Timing .............................................................................................................. 510

22-7 External Memory Read Modify Write Timing ........................................................................................ 511

22-8 Example of Connection Between

PD780054 and Memory................................................................ 512

LIST OF FIGURES (7/8)

Figure No. Title Page

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

23-1 Format of Oscillation Stabilizat Time Selection Register ..................................................................... 514

23-2 HALT Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation........................................................................ 516

23-3 HALT Mode Release by RESET Input .................................................................................................. 517

23-4 STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation ....................................................................... 519

23-5 STOP Mode Release by RESET Input ................................................................................................. 520

24-1 Reset Function Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 521

24-2 Reset Timing by RESET Input .............................................................................................................. 522

24-3 Reset Timing due to Watchdog Timer Overflow ................................................................................... 522

24-4 Reset Timing by RESET Input in STOP Mode ..................................................................................... 522

25-1 ROM Correction Block Diagram ............................................................................................................ 525

25-2 Format of Correction Address Registers 0 and 1 ................................................................................. 526

25-3 Format of Correction Control Register .................................................................................................. 527

25-4 Example of Storing to EEPROM (When One Place Is Corrected) ...................................................... 528

25-5 Initialization Routine............................................................................................................................... 529

25-6 ROM Correction Operation .................................................................................................................... 530

25-7 ROM Correction Usage Example .......................................................................................................... 531

25-8 Program Transition Diagram (When One Place Is Corrected) ............................................................. 532

25-9 Program Transition Diagram (When Two Places Are Corrected) ......................................................... 533

26-1 Format of Memory Size Switching Register ......................................................................................... 536

26-2 Format of Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register .............................................................. 537

23-3 Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory ............................................................................. 538

26-4 Communication Mode Selection Format ............................................................................................... 539

26-5 Example of Connection with Dedicated Flash Programmer ................................................................ 540

26-6 VPP Pin Connection Example ................................................................................................................ 543

26-7 Signal Conflict (Input Pin of Serial Interface) ....................................................................................... 544

26-8 Abnormal Operation of Other Device .................................................................................................... 544

26-9 Signal Conflict (RESET Pin) .................................................................................................................. 545

26-10 Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (SIO ch-0) .............................. 546

26-11 Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (SIO ch-1) .............................. 547

26-12 Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (SIO ch-2) .............................. 548

26-13 Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in UART Mode (UART ch-0)............................................. 549

26-14 Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in UART Mode (UART ch-1)............................................. 550

26-15 Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in Pseudo 3-Wire Mode.................................................... 551

B-1 Configuration of Development Tools ..................................................................................................... 669

B-2 EV-9200GC-80 Drawing (For Reference Only)..................................................................................... 677

B-3 EV-9200GC-80 Footprint (For Reference Only) ................................................................................... 678

B-4 TGK-080SDW Drawing (For Reference Only) (Unit: mm) .................................................................... 679

B-5 TGC-080SBP Drawing (For Reference Only) (Unit: mm) ................................................................... 680

B-6 Distance Between In-Circuit Emulator and Conversion Socket (80GC) .............................................. 681

B-7 Connection Condition of Target System (NP-80GC-TQ) ...................................................................... 682

B-8 Distance Between In-Circuit Emulator and Conversion Socket (80GK) .............................................. 683

B-9 Connection Condition of Target System (NP-80GK) ............................................................................ 684

LIST OF FIGURES (8/8)

Figure No. Title Page

28 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

1-1 Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions .................................................................................................... 40

1-2 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model ............................................................................ 40

2-1 Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions .................................................................................................... 50

2-2 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model ............................................................................ 50

3-1 Pin I/O Circuit Types ................................................................................................................................62

4-1 Pin I/O Circuit Types ................................................................................................................................77

5-1 Vector ........................................................................................................................................................ 88

5-2 Special-Function Register List .............................................................................................................. 101

6-1 Port Functions (

PD780058 Subseries) ............................................................................................... 118

6-2 Port Functions (

PD780058Y Subseries) ............................................................................................. 120

6-3 Port Configuration .................................................................................................................................. 122

6-4 Pull-up Resistor of Port 6 ...................................................................................................................... 132

6-5 Port Mode Register and Output Latch Settings When Using Alternate Functions ............................. 139

6-6 Comparison Between Mask ROM Version and Flash Memory Version .............................................. 145

7-1 Clock Generator Configuration .............................................................................................................. 146

7-2 Relationship Between CPU Clock and Minimum Instruction Execution Time ..................................... 150

7-3 Maximum Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover ........................................................................... 160

8-1 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Interval Times ........................................................................................... 162

8-2 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Square-Wave Output Ranges.................................................................. 163

8-3 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration ............................................................................................ 164

8-4 INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge and CR00 Capture Trigger Valid Edge ..................................................... 167

8-5 INTP1/TI01 Pin Valid Edge and CR00 Capture Trigger Valid Edge ..................................................... 167

8-6 INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge and CR01 Capture Trigger Valid Edge ..................................................... 168

8-7 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Interval Times ........................................................................................... 181

8-8 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Square-Wave Output Ranges.................................................................. 196

9-1 Interval Times of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2 ......................................................................... 206

9-2 Square-Wave Output Ranges of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2 ................................................ 207

9-3 Interval Times When 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2 Are Used as

16-Bit Timer/Event Counter ................................................................................................................... 208

9-4 Square-Wave Output Ranges When 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2

Are Used as 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter ............................................................................................. 209

9-5 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration .............................................................................................. 210

9-6 Interval Time of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 1 ....................................................................................... 220

9-7 Interval Time of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 2 ....................................................................................... 221

9-8 Square-Wave Output Ranges of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2 ................................................ 223

LIST OF TABLES (1/3)

Table No. Title Page

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

9-9 Interval Times When 2-Channel 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters (TM1 and TM2)

Are Used as 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter ............................................................................................. 226

9-10 Square-Wave Output Ranges When 2-Channel 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters (TM1 and TM2)

Are Used as 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter ............................................................................................. 228

10-1 Interval Timer Interval Time ................................................................................................................... 232

10-2 Watch Timer Configuration .................................................................................................................... 233

10-3 Interval Timer Interval Time ................................................................................................................... 237

11-1 Watchdog Timer Program Loop Detection Times ................................................................................. 238

11-2 Interval Times ......................................................................................................................................... 239

11-3 Watchdog Timer Configuration .............................................................................................................. 240

11-4 Watchdog Timer Program Loop Detection Time................................................................................... 244

11-5 Interval Timer Interval Time ................................................................................................................... 245

12-1 Clock Output Controller Configuration .................................................................................................. 247

13-1 Buzzer Output Controller Configuration ................................................................................................ 250

14-1 A/D Converter Configuration ................................................................................................................. 254

14-2 A/D Converter Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Start Delay Time ................................................ 263

14-3 Resistances and Capacitances of Equivalent Circuit (Reference Values) .......................................... 274

15-1 D/A Converter Configuration ................................................................................................................. 276

16-1 Differences Between Channels 0, 1, and 2 .......................................................................................... 281

16-2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0 ......................................................................................... 284

16-3 Various Signals in SBI Mode ................................................................................................................. 317

17-1 Differences Between Channels 0, 1, and 2 .......................................................................................... 333

17-2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0 ......................................................................................... 336

17-3 Interrupt Request Signal Generation of Serial Interface Channel 0 .................................................... 339

17-4 Signals in I2C Bus Mode ..................................................................................................................... 365

18-1 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 1 ......................................................................................... 383

18-2 Interval Timing According to CPU Processing (When Internal Clock Is Operating) ........................... 425

18-3 Interval Time According to CPU Processing (with External Clock) ..................................................... 426

19-1 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 2 ......................................................................................... 428

19-2 Operating Mode Settings of Serial Interface Channel 2 ...................................................................... 434

19-3 Relationship Between Main System Clock and Baud Rate ................................................................. 439

19-4 Relationship Between ASCK Pin Input Frequency and Baud Rate (When BRGC Is Set to 00H) ..... 440

19-5 Relationship Between Main System Clock and Baud Rate ................................................................. 449

19-6 Relationship Between ASCK Pin Input Frequency and Baud Rate (When BRGC Is Set to 00H) ..... 450

LIST OF TABLES (2/3)

Table No. Title Page

30 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19-7 Receive Error Causes ............................................................................................................................ 456

20-1 Real-Time Output Port Configuration .................................................................................................... 470

20-2 Operation in Real-Time Output Buffer Register Manipulation ............................................................. 471

20-3 Real-Time Output Port Operating Mode and Output Trigger ............................................................... 473

21-1 Interrupt Source List .............................................................................................................................. 475

21-2 Various Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources ............................................................... 479

21-3 Times from Maskable Interrupt Request Generation to Interrupt Servicing ....................................... 491

21-4 Interrupt Request Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing During Interrupt Servicing ...................... 494

21-5 Test Input Sources ................................................................................................................................. 498

21-6 Flags Corresponding to Test Input Signals ........................................................................................... 498

22-1 Pin Functions in External Memory Expansion Mode ........................................................................... 501

22-2 State of Port 4 to 6 Pins in External Memory Expansion Mode .......................................................... 501

22-3 Values After Internal Memory Size Switching Register Is Reset......................................................... 506

23-1 HALT Mode Operating Status................................................................................................................ 515

23-2 Operation After HALT Mode Release .................................................................................................... 517

23-3 STOP Mode Operating Status ............................................................................................................... 518

23-4 Operation After STOP Mode Release ................................................................................................... 520

24-1 Hardware Status After Reset................................................................................................................. 523

25-1 ROM Correction Configuration .............................................................................................................. 525

26-1 Differences Between

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y and Mask ROM Versions .......................................... 535

26-2 Internal Memory Size Switching Register Setting Values .................................................................... 536

26-3 Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register Setting Values ....................................................... 537

26-4 Communication Mode List ..................................................................................................................... 539

26-5 Pin Connection List ................................................................................................................................ 542

27-1 Operand Identifiers and Description Methods ...................................................................................... 553

33-1 Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions ....................................................................................... 662

A-1 Major Differences Between

PD78054, 78058F, and 780058 Subseries ........................................... 666

B-1 System-Upgrade Method from Former In-Circuit Emulator for 78K/0 Series to IE-78001-R-A ......... 676

LIST OF TABLES (3/3)

Table No. Title Page

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

1.1 Features

On-chip high-capacity ROM and RAM

Item Program Memory Data Memory

Mask ROM Flash Internal High- Internal Buffer Internal

Part Number Memory Speed RAM RAM Expansion RAM

PD780053, 780053(A) 24 KB — 1,024 bytes 32 bytes None

PD780054, 780054(A) 32 KB —

PD780055, 780055(A) 40 KB —

PD780056, 780056(A) 48 KB —

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A) 60 KB — 1,024 bytes

PD78F0058 — 60 KBNote 1 1,024 bytesNote 2

Notes 1. The flash memory capacity can be changed by means of the internal memory size switching register

(IMS).

2. The capacity of the internal high-speed RAM can be changed by means of the internal expansion RAM

size switching register (IXS).

External memory expansion space: 64 KB

Minimum instruction execution time changeable from high-speed (0.4

s: Main system clock 5.0 MHz operation)

to ultra-low speed (122

s: Subsystem clock 32.768 kHz operation)

Instruction set suited to system control

• Bit manipulation possible in all address spaces

• Multiple and divide instructions

I/O ports: 68 (N-ch open-drain: 4)

8-bit resolution A/D converter: 8 channels (VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 VNote)

8-bit resolution D/A converter: 2 channels (VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 VNote)

Serial interface: 3 channels

• 3-wire serial I/O/SBI/2-wire serial I/O mode: 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O mode (on-chip automatic transmit/receive function): 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O/UART mode (on-chip time-division transfer function): 1 channel

Timer: 5 channels

• 16-bit timer/event counter: 1 channel

• 8-bit timer/event counter: 2 channels

• Watch timer: 1 channel

• Watchdog timer: 1 channel

Note The operating voltage range of the A/D and D/A converters of the

PD780058 is VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V.

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Vectored interrupt sources: 21

Test inputs: 2

Two types of on-chip clock oscillators (main system clock and subsystem clock)

Supply voltage: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V (mask ROM version)

VDD = 2.7Note to 5.5 V (

PD78F0058)

Note VDD = 2.2 V can also be supplied to the

PD78F0058. For details, contact an NEC Electronics sales

representative.

1.2 Applications

Car audio systems, cellular phones, pagers, printers, AV equipment, cameras, PPCs, vending machines, car

electrical components, etc.

1.3 Ordering Information

Part Number Package Internal ROM

PD780053GC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780053GK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780054GC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780054GK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780055GC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780055GK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780056GC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780056GK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780058GC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780058GK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780058BGC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780058BGK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780053GC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780054GC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780055GC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780056GC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780058BGC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD78F0058GC-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Flash memory

PD78F0058GK-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Flash memory

Remark ××× indicates ROM code suffix.

For details of the quality grades and their applications, see Quality Grades on NEC Electronics Semiconductor

Devices (Document No.: C11531E).

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View)

• 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780053GC-×××-8BT, 780054GC-×××-8BT, 780055GC-×××-8BT,

PD780056GC-×××-8BT, 780058GC-×××-8BT, 780058BGC-×××-8BT,

PD780053GC(A)-×××-8BT, 780054GC(A)-×××-8BT, 780055GC(A)-×××-8BT,

PD780056GC(A)-×××-8BT, 780058BGC(A)-×××-8BT, 78F0058GC-8BT

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12)

PD780053GK-×××-9EU, 780054GK-×××-9EU, 780055GK-×××-9EU,

PD780056GK-×××-9EU, 780058GK-×××-9EU, 780058BGK-×××-9EU, 78F0058GK-9EU

Cautions 1. Be sure to connect the IC (Internally Connected) pin to VSS0 or VSS1 directly in the normal

operating mode.

2. Connect the AVSS pin to VSS0.

Remarks 1. The pin connection in parentheses is intended for the

PD78F0058.

2. When the

PD780053, 780054, 780055, 780056, 780058, or 780058B is used in application

fields that require reduction of the noise generated from inside the microcontroller, the

implementation of noise reduction measures, such as supplying to VDD0 and VDD1 individually

and connecting VSS0 and VSS1 to different ground lines, is recommended.

P15/ANI5

P16/ANI6

P17/ANI7

P130/ANO0

P131/ANO1

REF1

P70/SI2/RxD0

P71/SO2/TxD0

P72/SCK2/ASCK

P20/SI1

P21/SO1

P22/SCK1

P23/STB/TxD1

P24/BUSY/RxD1

P25/SI0/SB0

P26/SO0/SB1

P27/SCK0

P40/AD0

P41/AD1

RESET

P127/RTP7

P126/RTP6

P125/RTP5

P124/RTP4

P123/RTP3

P122/RTP2

P121/RTP1

P120/RTP0

P37

P36/BUZ

P35/PCL

P34/TI2

P33/TI1

P32/TO2

P31/TO1

P30/TO0

P67/ASTB

P66/WAIT

P65/WR

P14/ANI4

P13/ANI3

P12/ANI2

P11/ANI1

P10/ANI0

REF0

DD0

XT1/P07

XT2

IC (V

)

DD1

P05/INTP5

P04/INTP4

P03/INTP3

P02/INTP2

P01/INTP1/TI01

P00/INTP0/TI00

P42/AD2

P43/AD3

P44/AD4

P45/AD5

P46/AD6

P47/AD7

P50/A8

P51/A9

P52/A10

P53/A11

P54/A12

P55/A13

SS1

P56/A14

P57/A15

P60

P61

P62

P63

P64/RD

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

SS0

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

A8 to A15: Address bus PCL: Programmable clock

AD0 to AD7: Address/data bus RD: Read strobe

ANI0 to ANI7: Analog input RESET: Reset

ANO0, ANO1: Analog output RTP0 to RTP7: Real-time output port

ASCK: Asynchronous serial clock RxD0, RxD1: Receive data

ASTB: Address strobe SB0, SB1: Serial bus

AVREF0, AVREF1: Analog reference voltage SCK0 to SCK2: Serial clock

AVSS: Analog ground SI0 to SI2: Serial input

BUSY: Busy SO0 to SO2: Serial output

BUZ: Buzzer clock STB: Strobe

IC: Internally connected TI00, TI01: Timer input

INTP0 to INTP6: Interrupt from peripherals TI1, TI2: Timer input

P00 to P05, P07: Port 0 TO0 to TO2: Timer output

P10 to P17: Port 1 TxD0, TxD1: Transmit data

P20 to P27: Port 2 VDD0, VDD1: Power supply

P30 to P37: Port 3 VPP: Programming power supply

P40 to P47: Port 4 VSS0, VSS1: Ground

P50 to P57: Port 5 WAIT: Wait

P60 to P67: Port 6 WR: Write strobe

P70 to P72: Port 7 X1, X2: Crystal (main system clock)

P120 to P127: Port 12 XT1, XT2: Crystal (subsystem clock)

P130, P131: Port 13

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

1.5 78K/0 Series Lineup

78K/0 Series product lineup is illustrated below. Part numbers in the boxes indicate subseries names.

Remark VFD (Vacuum Fluorescent Display) is referred to as FIPTM (Fluorescent Indicator Panel) in some

documents, but the functions of the two are the same.

PD78083

PD78018F PD78018FY

PD78014H EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78018F

Basic subseries for control

On-chip UART, capable of operating at low voltage (1.8 V)

42/44-pin

64-pin

52-pin 52-pin version of the PD780024A

PD780024AS

52-pin 52-pin version of the PD780034A

PD780034AS

PD78054 with IEBus

controller

PD78054 with enhanced serial I/O

PD78078Y with enhanced serial I/O and limited functions

PD78054 with timer and enhanced external interface

64-pin

80-pin

80-pin EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78054

PD78018F with UART and D/A converter, and enhanced I/O

PD780034A

PD780988

PD780034AY

64-pin

PD780024A with expanded RAM

PD780024A with enhanced A/D converter

On-chip inverter control circuit and UART. EMI-noise reduced.

PD78064

PD78064B

PD780308

100-pin

100-pin PD780308Y

PD78064Y

80-pin

78K/0

Series

LCD drive

PD78064 with enhanced SIO, and expanded ROM and RAM

EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78064

Basic subseries for driving LCDs, on-chip UART

Bus interface supported

µµ

PD78018F with enhanced serial I/O

80-pin

100-pin

Products in mass production Products under development

Y subseries products are compatible with I2C bus.

ROMless version of the PD78078

100-pin

100-pin EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78078

Inverter control

PD780208100-pin

VFD drive

PD78044F with enhanced I/O and VFD C/D. Display output total: 53

PD78098B

100-pin

PD780024A PD780024AY

µµ

80-pin

80-pin PD780852

PD780828B

For automobile meter driver. On-chip CAN controller

100-pin PD780958

For industrial meter control

On-chip automobile meter controller/driver

Meter control

80-pin On-chip IEBus controller

80-pin

On-chip controller compliant with J1850 (Class 2)

PD780833Y

PD780948 On-chip CAN controller

64-pin PD780078 PD780078Y

µµ

PD780034A with timer and enhanced serial I/O

PD78054 PD78054Y

PD78058F PD78058FY

PD780058 PD780058Y

µµ

PD78070A PD78070AY

PD78078 PD78078Y

PD780018AY

Control

PD78075B

PD780065

PD78044H

PD780232

80-pin

80-pin For panel control. On-chip VFD C/D. Display output total: 53

PD78044F with N-ch open-drain I/O. Display output total: 34

PD78044F

80-pin Basic subseries for driving VFD. Display output total: 34

120-pin

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 40 pins max.

PD780318

PD780328

120-pin

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 32 pins max.

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 24 pins max.

PD780338

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 40 pins max.

On-chip CAN controller

Specialized for CAN controller function

80-pin

PD780703Y

PD780702Y

64-pin PD780816

PD780344 with enhanced A/D converter

100-pin

PD780344 PD780344Y

PD780354 PD780354Y

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

The following lists the main functional differences between subseries products.

• Non-Y subseries

Function ROM Timer 8-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit Serial Interface I/O

External

Subseries Name 8-Bit 16-Bit Watch WDT A/D A/D D/A

Expansion

Control PD78075B

32 K to 40 K

4 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 8 ch –2 ch 3 ch (UART: 1 ch) 88 1.8 V

PD78078

48 K to 60 K

PD78070A –61 2.7 V

PD780058

24 K to 60 K

2 ch

3 ch (time-division UART: 1 ch)

68 1.8 V

PD78058F

48 K to 60 K

3 ch (UART: 1 ch) 69 2.7 V

PD78054

16 K to 60 K

2.0 V

PD780065

40 K to 48 K

–4 ch (UART: 1 ch) 60 2.7 V

PD780078

48 K to 60 K

2 ch –8 ch 3 ch (UART: 2 ch) 52 1.8 V

PD780034A

8 K to 32 K

1 ch 3 ch (UART: 1 ch) 51

PD780024A

8 ch –

PD780034AS

–4 ch 39 –

PD780024AS

4 ch –

PD78014H 8 ch 2 ch 53

PD78018F

8 K to 60 K

PD78083

8 K to 16 K

–– 1 ch (UART: 1 ch) 33 –

Inverter PD780988

16 K to 60 K

3 ch Note –1 ch –8 ch –3 ch (UART: 2 ch) 47 4.0 V

control

VFD PD780208

32 K to 60 K

2 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 8 ch ––2 ch 74 2.7 V –

drive PD780232

16 K to 24 K

3 ch –– 4 ch 40 4.5 V

PD78044H

32 K to 48 K

2 ch 1 ch 1 ch 8 ch 1 ch 68 2.7 V

PD78044F

16 K to 40 K

2 ch

LCD PD780354

24 K to 32 K

4 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch –8 ch –3 ch (UART: 1 ch) 66 1.8 V –

drive PD780344 8 ch –

PD780338

48 K to 60 K

3 ch 2 ch –10 ch 1 ch 2 ch (UART: 1 ch) 54

PD780328 62

PD780318 70

PD780308

48 K to 60 K

2 ch 1 ch 8 ch ––

3 ch (time-division UART: 1 ch)

57 2.0 V

PD78064B 32 K 2 ch (UART: 1 ch)

PD78064

16 K to 32 K

Bus PD780948 60 K 2 ch 2 ch 1 ch 1 ch 8 ch ––3 ch (UART: 1 ch) 79 4.0 V

interface

PD78098B

40 K to 60 K

1 ch 2 ch 69 2.7 V –

supported

PD780816

32 K to 60 K

2 ch 12 ch –2 ch (UART: 1 ch) 46 4.0 V

Meter PD780958

48 K to 60 K

4 ch 2 ch –1 ch –––2 ch (UART: 1 ch) 69 2.2 V –

control

Dash- PD780852

32 K to 40 K

3 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 5 ch ––3 ch (UART: 1 ch) 56 4.0 V –

board

control

PD780828B

32 K to 60 K

Note 16-bit timer: 2 channels

10-bit timer: 1 channel

VDD

MIN.

Value

Capacity

(Bytes)

√

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

1.6 Block Diagram

Remarks 1. The internal ROM and RAM capacities depend on the product.

2. The pin connection in parentheses is intended for the

PD78F0058.

16-bit timer/

event counter

8-bit timer/

event counter 1

Watchdog timer

Watch timer

Serial interface 0

Serial interface 1

A/D converter

D/A converter

8-bit timer/

event counter 2

Interrupt control

Buzzer output

Clock output control VDD0, VSS0, IC

(VPP)

78K/0

CPU core

ROM

(flash

memory)

RAM

Port 0

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Port 5

Port 6

Port 7

Port 12

Port 13

Real-time output port

External access

System control

P00

P01 to P05

P07

P10 to P17

P20 to P27

P30 to P37

P40 to P47

P50 to P57

P60 to P67

P70 to P72

P120 to P127

P130, P131

RTP0/P120 to

RTP7/P127

AD0/P40 to

AD7/P47

A8/P50 to

A15/P57

RD/P64

WR/P65

WAIT/P66

ASTB/P67

RESET

XT1/P07

XT2

TO0/P30

TI00/P00

TI01/P01

TO1/P31

TI1/P33

TO2/P32

TI2/P34

SI0/SB0/P25

SO0/SB1/P26

SCK0/P27

SI1/P20

SO1/P21

SCK1/P22

STB/TxD1/P23

BUSY/RxD1/P24

SI2/RxD0/P70

SO2/TxD0/P71

SCK2/ASCK/P72

AVSS

AVREF0

ANI0/P10 to

ANI7/P17

ANO0/P130,

ANO1/P131

AVSS

AVREF1

INTP0/P00 to

INTP5/P05

BUZ/P36

PCL/P35 VDD1 VSS1

BUSY/RxD1/P24

STB/TxD1/P23

Serial interface 2

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

1.7 Outline of Function

ROM Mask ROM

Flash memory

24 KB 32 KB 40 KB 48 KB 60 KB

60 KB

Note 1

High-speed RAM 1,024 bytes

Buffer RAM 32 bytes

Expansion RAM None

1,024 bytes

Note 2

Memory space 64 KB

General-purpose registers 8 bits × 8 × 4 banks

Minimum instruction execution time Function to vary minimum instruction execution time incorporated

With main system clock selected 0.4

s/0.8

s/1.6

s/3.2

s/6.4

s/12.8

s (@ 5.0 MHz operation)

With subsystem clock selected 122

s (@ 32.768 kHz operation)

Instruction set • 16-bit operation

• Multiply/divide (8 bits × 8 bits, 16 bits ÷ 8 bits)

• Bit manipulation (set, reset, test, and boolean operation)

• BCD adjust, etc.

I/O ports Total: 68

• CMOS input: 2

• CMOS I/O: 62

• N-ch open-drain I/O: 4

A/D converter 8-bit resolution × 8 channels

Operating voltage range VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

D/A converter 8-bit resolution × 2 channels

Operating voltage range VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

Serial interface • 3-wire serial I/O/SBI/2-wire serial I/O mode selection possible: 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O mode (on-chip max. 32 bytes auto-transmit/receive function): 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O/UART mode (on-chip time-division transfer function) selectable:

1 channel

Timer • 16-bit timer/event counter: 1 channel

• 8-bit timer/event counter: 2 channels

• Watch timer: 1 channel

• Watchdog timer: 1 channel

Timer outputs 3: (14-bit PWM output enable: 1)

Clock output 19.5 kHz, 39.1 kHz, 78.1 kHz, 156 kHz, 313 kHz, 625 kHz, 1.25 MHz,

2.5 MHz, 5.0 MHz (main system clock: @ 5.0 MHz operation)

32.768 kHz (subsystem clock: @ 32.768 kHz operation)

Buzzer output 1.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 4.9 kHz, 9.8 kHz (main system clock: @ 5.0 MHz operation)

Notes 1. The capacity of the flash memory can be changed by using the internal memory switching register

(IMS).

2. The capacity of the internal expansion RAM can be changed by using the internal expansion RAM

size switching register (IXS).

Item

Part Number

Internal

memory

PD780053,

PD780054,

PD780055,

PD780056,

PD780058B,

PD780058

PD78F0058

780053(A) 780054(A) 780055(A) 780056(A) 780058B(A)

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Maskable Internal: 13, External: 6

Non-maskable Internal: 1

Software 1

Test input Internal: 1, External: 1

Supply voltage VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

VDD = 2.7

Note

to 5.5 V

Operating ambient temperature TA = –40 to +85°C

Package • 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12)

Note VDD = 2.2 V can also be supplied. For details, contact an NEC Electronics sales representative.

The timers are outlined below.

Item

Part Number

PD780053,

PD780054,

PD780055,

PD780056,

PD780058B,

PD780058

PD78F0058

780053(A) 780054(A) 780055(A) 780056(A) 780058B(A)

Vectored

interrupt

sources

Operating Interval timer 2 channelsNote 3 2 channels 1 channelNote 1 1 channelNote 2

Mode External event counter √√——

Function Timer output √√——

PWM output √———

Pulse width measurement √———

Square-wave output √√——

One-shot pulse output √———

Interrupt request √√√√

Test input —— √—

Notes 1. The watch timer can perform both watch timer and interval timer functions at the same time.

2. The watchdog timer can perform either the watchdog timer function or the interval timer function.

3. When capture/compare registers 00 and 01 (CR00 and CR01) are specified as compare registers.

16-Bit Timer/ 8-Bit Timer/Event Watch Timer Watchdog Timer

Event Counter Counters 1 and 2

CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

1.8 Mask Options

The mask ROM versions (

PD780053, 780053(A), 780054, 780054(A), 780055, 780055(A), 780056, 780056(A),

780058, 780058B, 780058B(A)) provide pull-up resistor mask options which allow users to specify whether to connect

a pull-up resistor to a specific port pin when the user places an order for the device production. Using this mask option

when pull-up resistors are required reduces the number of components to add to the device, resulting in board space

saving.

The mask options provided in the

PD780058 Subseries are shown in Table 1-1.

Table 1-1. Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions

Pin Names Mask Options

P60 to P63 Pull-up resistor connection can be specified in 1-bit units.

1.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

The (A) models of the

PD780058 Subseries (

PD780053(A), 780054(A), 780055(A), 780056(A), and 780058B(A))

have improved reliability by increasing the check items from the standard model (

PD780053, 780054, 780055,

780056, and 780058B). The functions and electrical characteristics of the (A) model are the same as those of the

standard model.

Table 1-2. Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

Product Name Standard Model (A) Model

Item

Quality grade Standard Special

(for general-purpose electronic systems) (for high-reliability electronic systems)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

2.1 Features

On-chip high-capacity ROM and RAM

Item Program Memory Data Memory

Mask ROM Flash Internal High- Internal Buffer Internal

Part Number Memory Speed RAM RAM Expansion RAM

PD780053Y, 780053Y(A) 24 KB — 1,024 bytes 32 bytes None

PD780054Y, 780054Y(A) 32 KB —

PD780055Y, 780055Y(A) 40 KB —

PD780056Y, 780056Y(A) 48 KB —

PD780058BY, 780058BY(A) 60 KB — 1,024 bytes

PD78F0058Y — 60 KBNote 1 1,024 bytesNote 2

Notes 1. The capacity of flash memory can be changed by means of the internal memory size switching register

(IMS).

2. The capacity of internal high-speed RAM can be changed by means of the internal expansion RAM

size switching register (IXS).

External memory expansion space: 64 KB

Minimum instruction execution time changeable from high-speed (0.4

s: Main system clock 5.0 MHz operation)

to ultra-low speed (122

s: Subsystem clock 32.768 kHz operation)

Instruction set suited to system control

• Bit manipulation possible in all address spaces

• Multiple and divide instructions

I/O ports: 68 (N-ch open-drain: 4)

8-bit resolution A/D converter: 8 channels (VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

8-bit resolution D/A converter: 2 channels (VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

Serial interface: 3 channels

• 3-wire serial I/O/2-wire serial I/O/I2C bus mode: 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O mode (on-chip automatic transmit/receive function): 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O/UART mode (on-chip time-division transfer function): 1 channel

Timer: 5 channels

• 16-bit timer/event counter: 1 channel

• 8-bit timer/event counter: 2 channels

• Watch timer: 1 channel

• Watchdog timer: 1 channel

Vectored interrupt sources: 21

Test inputs: 2

Two types of on-chip clock oscillators (main system clock and subsystem clock)

Supply voltage: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V (mask ROM version)

VDD = 2.7Note to 5.5 V (

PD78F0058Y)

Note VDD = 2.2 V can also be supplied to the

PD78F0058Y. For details, contact an NEC Electronics sales

representative.

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

2.2 Applications

Car audio systems, cellular phones, pagers, printers, AV equipment, cameras, PPCs, vending machines, car

electrical components, etc.

2.3 Ordering Information

Part Number Package Internal ROM

PD780053YGC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780053YGK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780054YGC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780054YGK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780055YGC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780055YGK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780056YGC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780056YGK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780058BYGC-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Mask ROM

PD780058BYGK-×××-9EU 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Mask ROM

PD780053YGC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780054YGC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780055YGC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780056YGC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD780058BYGC(A)-×××-8BT 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Special

PD78F0058YGC-8BT Note 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14) Flash-memory

PD78F0058YGK-9EU Note 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12) Flash-memory

Remark ××× indicates ROM code suffix.

For details of the quality grades and their applications, see Quality Grades on NEC Electronics Semiconductor

Devices (Document No.: C11531E).

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

2.4 Pin Configuration (Top View)

• 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780053YGC-×××-8BT, 780054YGC-×××-8BT, 780055YGC-×××-8BT,

PD780056YGC-×××-8BT, 780058BYGC-×××-8BT, 780053YGC(A)-×××-8BT,

PD780054YGC(A)-×××-8BT, 780055YGC(A)-×××-8BT, 780056YGC(A)-×××-8BT,

PD780058BYGC(A)-×××-8BT, 78F0058YGC-8BT

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (fine pitch) (12 × 12)

PD780053YGK-×××-9EU, 780054YGK-×××-9EU, 780055YGK-×××-9EU,

PD780056YGK-×××-9EU, 780058BYGK-×××-9EU, 78F0058YGK-9EU

Cautions 1. Be sure to connect the IC (Internally Connected) pin to VSS0 directly in the normal

operating mode.

2. Connect the AVSS pin to VSS0.

Remarks 1. The pin connection in parentheses is intended for the

PD78F0058Y.

2. When the

PD780053Y, 780054Y, 780055Y, 780056Y, or 780058BY is used in application

fields that require reduction of the noise generated from inside the microcontroller, the

implementation of noise reduction measures, such as supplying to VDD0 and VDD1 individually

and connecting VSS0 and VSS1 to different ground lines, is recommended.

P15/ANI5

P16/ANI6

P17/ANI7

P130/ANO0

P131/ANO1

REF1

P70/SI2/RxD0

P71/SO2/TxD0

P72/SCK2/ASCK

P20/SI1

P21/SO1

P22/SCK1

P23/STB/TxD1

P24/BUSY/RxD1

P25/SI0/SB0/SDA0

P26/SO0/SB1/SDA1

P27/SCK0/SCL

P40/AD0

P41/AD1

RESET

P127/RTP7

P126/RTP6

P125/RTP5

P124/RTP4

P123/RTP3

P122/RTP2

P121/RTP1

P120/RTP0

P37

P36/BUZ

P35/PCL

P34/TI2

P33/TI1

P32/TO2

P31/TO1

P30/TO0

P67/ASTB

P66/WAIT

P65/WR

P14/ANI4

P13/ANI3

P12/ANI2

P11/ANI1

P10/ANI0

REF0

DD0

XT1/P07

XT2

IC (V

)

DD1

P05/INTP5

P04/INTP4

P03/INTP3

P02/INTP2

P01/INTP1/TI01

P00/INTP0/TI00

P42/AD2

P43/AD3

P44/AD4

P45/AD5

P46/AD6

P47/AD7

P50/A8

P51/A9

P52/A10

P53/A11

P54/A12

P55/A13

SS1

P56/A14

P57/A15

P60

P61

P62

P63

P64/RD

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

SS0

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

A8 to A15: Address bus RD: Read strobe

AD0 to AD7: Address/data bus RESET: Reset

ANI0 to ANI7: Analog input RTP0 to RTP7: Real-time output port

ANO0, ANO1: Analog output RxD0, RxD1: Receive data

ASCK: Asynchronous serial clock SB0, SB1: Serial bus

ASTB: Address strobe SCK0 to SCK2: Serial clock

AVREF0, AVREF1: Analog reference voltage SCL: Serial clock

AVSS: Analog ground SDA0, SDA1: Serial data

BUSY: Busy SI0 to SI2: Serial input

BUZ: Buzzer clock SO0 to SO2: Serial output

IC: Internally connected STB: Strobe

INTP0 to INTP6: Interrupt from peripherals TI00, TI01: Timer input

P00 to P05, P07: Port 0 TI1, TI2: Timer input

P10 to P17: Port 1 TO0 to TO2: Timer output

P20 to P27: Port 2 TxD0, TxD1: Transmit data

P30 to P37: Port 3 VDD0, VDD1: Power supply

P40 to P47: Port 4 VPP: Programming power supply

P50 to P57: Port 5 VSS0, VSS1: Ground

P60 to P67: Port 6 WAIT: Wait

P70 to P72: Port 7 WR: Write strobe

P120 to P127: Port 12 X1, X2: Crystal (main system clock)

P130, P131: Port 13 XT1, XT2: Crystal (subsystem clock)

PCL: Programmable clock

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

2.5 78K/0 Series Lineup

78K/0 Series product lineup is illustrated below. Part numbers in the boxes indicate subseries names.

Remark VFD (Vacuum Fluorescent Display) is referred to as FIP (Fluorescent Indicator Panel) in some

documents, but the functions of the two are the same.

PD78083

PD78018F PD78018FY

PD78014H EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78018F

Basic subseries for control

On-chip UART, capable of operating at low voltage (1.8 V)

42/44-pin

64-pin

52-pin 52-pin version of the PD780024A

PD780024AS

52-pin 52-pin version of the PD780034A

PD780034AS

PD78054 with IEBus controller

PD78054 with enhanced serial I/O

PD78078Y with enhanced serial I/O and limited functions

PD78054 with timer and enhanced external interface

64-pin

80-pin

80-pin EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78054

PD78018F with UART and D/A converter, and enhanced I/O

PD780034A

PD780988

PD780034AY

64-pin

PD780024A with expanded RAM

PD780024A with enhanced A/D converter

On-chip inverter control circuit and UART. EMI-noise reduced.

PD78064

PD78064B

PD780308

100-pin

100-pin PD780308Y

PD78064Y

80-pin

78K/0

Series

LCD drive

PD78064 with enhanced SIO, and expanded ROM and RAM

EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78064

Basic subseries for driving LCDs, on-chip UART

Bus interface supported

µµ

PD78018F with enhanced serial I/O

80-pin

100-pin

Products in mass production Products under development

Y subseries products are compatible with I

C bus.

ROMless version of the PD78078

100-pin

100-pin EMI-noise reduced version of the PD78078

Inverter control

PD780208100-pin

VFD drive

PD78044F with enhanced I/O and VFD C/D. Display output total: 53

PD78098B

100-pin

PD780024A PD780024AY

µµ

80-pin

80-pin PD780852

PD780828B

For automobile meter driver. On-chip CAN controller

100-pin PD780958

For industrial meter control

On-chip automobile meter controller/driver

Meter control

80-pin On-chip IEBus controller

80-pin

On-chip controller compliant with J1850 (Class 2)

PD780833Y

PD780948 On-chip CAN controller

64-pin PD780078 PD780078Y

µµ

PD780034A with timer and enhanced serial I/O

PD78054 PD78054Y

PD78058F PD78058FY

PD780058 PD780058Y

µµ

PD78070A PD78070AY

PD78078 PD78078Y

PD780018AY

Control

PD78075B

PD780065

PD78044H

PD780232

80-pin

80-pin For panel control. On-chip VFD C/D. Display output total: 53

PD78044F with N-ch open-drain I/O. Display output total: 34

PD78044F

80-pin Basic subseries for driving VFD. Display output total: 34

120-pin

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 40 pins max.

PD780318

PD780328

120-pin

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 32 pins max.

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 24 pins max.

PD780338

PD780308 with enhanced display function and timer. Segment signal output: 40 pins max.

On-chip CAN controller

Specialized for CAN controller function

80-pin

PD780703Y

PD780702Y

64-pin PD780816

PD780344 with enhanced A/D converter

100-pin

PD780344 PD780344Y

PD780354 PD780354Y

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Major functional differences among the Y subseries are shown below.

• Y subseries

Function Timer 8-Bit 10-Bit 8-Bit Serial Interface I/O

External

Subseries Name 8-Bit 16-Bit Watch WDT A/D A/D D/A

Expansion

Control

PD78078Y

48 K to 60 K

4 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 8 ch –2 ch

3 ch (UART: 1 ch, I2C: 1 ch)

88 1.8 V √

PD78070AY

–61 2.7 V

PD780018AY 48 K to 60 K

–3 ch (I2C: 1 ch) 88

PD780058Y

24 K to 60 K

2 ch 2 ch

3 ch (time-division UART: 1 ch, I

C: 1 ch

)

68 1.8 V

PD78058FY

48 K to 60 K

3 ch (UART: 1 ch, I2C: 1 ch)

69 2.7 V

PD78054Y

16 K to 60 K

2.0 V

PD780078Y

48 K to 60 K

2 ch –8 ch –

4 ch (UART: 2 ch, I2C: 1 ch)

52 1.8 V

PD780034AY 8 K to 32 K

1 ch

3 ch (UART: 1 ch, I2C: 1 ch)

PD780024AY

8 ch –

PD78018FY

8 K to 60 K

2 ch (I2C: 1 ch) 53

LCD

PD780354Y

24 K to 32 K

4 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch –8 ch –4 ch (UART: 1 ch, 66 1.8 V –

drive

PD780344Y

8 ch –I2C: 1 ch)

PD780308Y

48 K to 60 K

2 ch

3 ch (time-division UART: 1 ch, I

C: 1 ch)

57 2.0 V

PD78064Y

16 K to 32 K

2 ch (UART: 1 ch, I2C: 1 ch)

Bus

PD780701Y

60 K 3 ch 2 ch 1 ch 1 ch 16 ch ––

4 ch (UART: 1 ch, I2C: 1 ch)

67 3.5 V –

interface

PD780703Y

supported

PD780833Y

65 4.5 V

Remark Functions other than the serial interface are common to both the Y and non-Y subseries.

VDD

MIN.

Value

ROM

Capacity

(Bytes)

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

2.6 Block Diagram

Remarks 1. The internal ROM and RAM capacities depend on the product.

2. The pin connection in parentheses is intended for the

PD78F0058Y.

16-bit timer/

event counter

8-bit timer/

event counter 1

Watchdog timer

Watch timer

Serial interface 0

Serial interface 1

A/D converter

D/A converter

8-bit timer/

event counter 2

Interrupt control

Buzzer output

Clock output control VDD0, VSS0, IC

(VPP)

78K/0

CPU core

ROM

(flash

memory)

RAM

Port 0

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Port 4

Port 5

Port 6

Port 7

Port 12

Port 13

Real-time output port

External access

System control

P00

P01 to P05

P07

P10 to P17

P20 to P27

P30 to P37

P40 to P47

P50 to P57

P60 to P67

P70 to P72

P120 to P127

P130, P131

RTP0/P120 to

RTP7/P127

AD0/P40 to

AD7/P47

A8/P50 to

A15/P57

RD/P64

WR/P65

WAIT/P66

ASTB/P67

RESET

XT1/P07

XT2

TO0/P30

TI00/P00

TI01/P01

TO1/P31

TI1/P33

TO2/P32

TI2/P34

SI0/SB0/P25

SO0/SB1/P26

SCK0/P27

SI1/P20

SO1/P21

SCK1/P22

STB/TxD1/P23

BUSY/RxD1/P24

SI2/RxD0/P70

SO2/TxD0/P71

SCK2/ASCK/P72

AVSS

AVREF0

ANI0/P10 to

ANI7/P17

ANO0/P130,

ANO1/P131

AVSS

AVREF1

INTP0/P00 to

INTP5/P05

BUZ/P36

PCL/P35 VDD1 VSS1

BUSY/RxD1/P24

STB/TxD1/P23

Serial interface 2

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

2.7 Outline of Functions

ROM Mask ROM

Flash memory

24 KB 32 KB 40 KB 48 KB 60 KB 60 KBNote 1

High-speed RAM 1,024 bytes

Buffer RAM 32 bytes

Expansion RAM None 1,024 bytes

1,024 bytes

Note 2

Memory space 64 KB

General-purpose registers 8 bits × 8 × 4 banks

Minimum instruction execution time Function to vary minimum instruction execution time incorporated

With main system clock selected 0.4

s/0.8

s/1.6

s/3.2

s/6.4

s/12.8

s (@ 5.0 MHz operation)

With subsystem clock selected 122

s (@ 32.768 kHz operation)

Instruction set • 16-bit operation

• Multiply/divide (8 bits × 8 bits, 16 bits ÷ 8 bits)

• Bit manipulation (set, reset, test, and boolean operation)

• BCD adjust, etc.

I/O ports Total: 68

• CMOS input: 2

• CMOS I/O: 62

• N-ch open-drain I/O: 4

A/D converter 8-bit resolution × 8 channels

Operating voltage range VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

D/A converter 8-bit resolution × 2 channels

Operating voltage range VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

Serial interface • 3-wire serial I/O/SBI/2-wire serial I/O mode selection possible: 1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O mode (on-chip max. 32 bytes auto-transmit/receive function):

1 channel

• 3-wire serial I/O/UART mode (on-chip time-division transfer function) selectable:

1 channel

Timer • 16-bit timer/event counter: 1 channel

• 8-bit timer/event counter: 2 channels

• Watch timer: 1 channel

• Watchdog timer: 1 channel

Timer outputs 3: (14-bit PWM output enable: 1)

Clock output 19.5 kHz, 39.1 kHz, 78.1 kHz, 156 kHz, 313 kHz, 625 kHz, 1.25 MHz,

2.5 MHz, 5.0 MHz (main system clock: @ 5.0 MHz operation)

32.768 kHz (subsystem clock: @ 32.768 kHz operation)

Buzzer output 1.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 4.9 kHz, 9.8 kHz (main system clock: @ 5.0 MHz operation)

Notes 1. The capacity of the flash memory can be changed by using the internal memory switching register

(IMS).

2. The capacity of the internal expansion RAM can be changed by using the internal expansion RAM

size switching register (IXS).

Item

Part Number

Internal

memory

PD780053Y,

PD780054Y,

PD780055Y,

PD780056Y,

PD780058BY

PD78F0058Y

780053Y(A) 780054Y(A) 780055Y(A) 780056Y(A) 780058BY(A)

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Maskable Internal: 13, External: 6

Non-maskable Internal: 1

Software 1

Test input Internal: 1, External: 1

Supply voltage VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V VDD = 2.7Note

to 5.5 V

Operating ambient temperature TA = –40 to +85°C

Package • 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (Fine pitch) (12 × 12)

Note VDD = 2.2 V can also be supplied. For details, contact an NEC Electronics sales representative.

The timers are outlined below.

Item

Part Number

PD780053Y,

PD780054Y,

PD780055Y,

PD780056Y,

PD780058BY

PD78F0058Y

780053Y(A) 780054Y(A) 780055Y(A) 780056Y(A) 780058BY(A)

Vectored

interrupt

sources

Operating Interval timer 2 channelsNote 3 2 channels 1 channelNote 1 1 channelNote 2

Mode External event counter √√——

Function Timer output √√——

PWM output √———

Pulse width measurement √———

Square-wave output √√——

One-shot pulse output √———

Interrupt request √√√√

Test input —— √—

Notes 1. The watch timer can perform both watch timer and interval timer functions at the same time.

2. The watchdog timer can perform either the watchdog timer function or the interval timer function.

3. When capture/compare registers 00 and 01 (CR00 and CR01) are specified as compare registers.

16-Bit Timer/ 8-Bit Timer/Event Watch Timer Watchdog Timer

Event Counter Counters 1 and 2

CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

2.8 Mask Options

The mask ROM versions (

PD780053Y, 780053Y(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A), 780056Y,

780056Y(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A)) provide pull-up resistor mask options which allow users to specify whether

to connect a pull-up resistor to a specific port pin when the user places an order for the device production. Using

this mask option when pull-up resistors are required reduces the number of components to add to the device, resulting

in board space saving.

The mask options provided in the

PD780058Y Subseries are shown in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1. Mask Options of Mask ROM Versions

Pin Names Mask Options

P60 to P63 Pull-up resistor connection can be specified in 1-bit units.

2.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

The (A) models of the

PD780058Y Subseries (

PD780053Y(A), 780054Y(A), 780055Y(A), 780056Y(A), and

780058BY(A)) have improved reliability by increasing the check items from the standard model (

PD780053Y,

780054Y, 780055Y, 780056Y, and 780058BY). The functions and electrical characteristics of the (A) model are the

same as those of the standard model.

Table 2-2. Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

Product Name Standard Model (A) Model

Item

Quality grade Standard Special

(for general-purpose electronic systems) (for high-reliability electronic systems)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

P00 Input Port 0 Input only Input INTP0/TI00

P01 Input INTP1/TI01

P02 INTP2

P03 INTP3

P04 INTP4

P05 INTP5

P07Note 1 Input Input only Input XT1

P10 to P17 I/O Port 1 Input ANI0 to ANI7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.Note 2

P20 Input SI1

P21 SO1

P22 SCK1

P23 STB/TxD1

P24 BUSY/RxD1

P25 SI0/SB0

P26 SO0/SB1

P27 SCK0

P30 Input TO0

P31 TO1

P32 TO2

P33 TI1

P34 TI2

P35 PCL

P36 BUZ

P37 —

Notes 1. When the P07/XT1 pin is used as an input port, set bit 6 (FRC) of the processor clock control register

(PCC) to 1 (do not use the feedback resistor incorporated in the subsystem clock oscillator).

2. When pins P10/ANI0 to P17/ANI7 are used as an analog input of the A/D converter, set port 1 to the

input mode. In this case, any connected on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

I/O Port 2

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

3.1 Pin Function List

(1) Port pins (1/2)

I/O 7-bit I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit

units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip

pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

I/O Port 3

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-it units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Port pins (2/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

P40 to P47 I/O Port 4 Input AD0 to AD7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 8-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

The test input flag (KRIF) is set to 1 by falling edge detection.

P50 to P57 I/O Port 5 Input A8 to A15

8-bit I/O port

LEDs can be driven directly.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

P60 Input —

P61

P62

P63

P64 RD

P65 WR

P66 WAIT

P67 ASTB

P70 Input SI2/RxD0

P71 SO2/TxD0

P72 SCK2/ASCK

P120 to P127

I/O Port 12 Input RTP0 to RTP7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

P130 to P131

I/O Port 13 Input

ANO0 to ANO1

2-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

I/O Port 7

3-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

If used as an input port, an on-chip

pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

I/O Port 6 N-ch open-drain I/O port

8-bit I/O port On-chip pull-up resistors can be

Input/output can be specified in specified by mask option.

1-bit units. (Mask ROM version only).

LEDs can be driven directly.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Non-port pins (1/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

INTP0 Input Input P00/TI00

INTP1 P01/TI01

INTP2 P02

INTP3 P03

INTP4 P04

INTP5 P05

SI0 Input Serial interface serial data input Input P25/SB0

SI1 P20

SI2 P70/RxD

SO0 Output Serial interface serial data output Input P26/SB1

SO1 P21

SO2 P71/TxD

SB0 P25/SI0

SB1 P26/SO0

SCK0 Serial interface serial clock input/output Input P27

SCK1 P22

SCK2 P72/ASCK

STB Output Serial interface automatic transmit/receive strobe output Input P23/TxD1

BUSY Input Serial interface automatic transmit/receive busy input Input P24/RxD1

RxD0 Input Asynchronous serial interface serial data input Input P70/SI2

RxD1 P24/BUSY

TxD0 Output Asynchronous serial interface serial data output Input P71/SO2

TxD1 P23/STB

ASCK Input Asynchronous serial interface serial clock input Input P72/SCK2

TI00 Input External count clock input to 16-bit timer (TM0) Input P00/INTP0

TI01 Capture trigger signal input to capture register (CR00) P01/INTP1

TI1 External count clock input to 8-bit timer (TM1) P33

TI2 External count clock input to 8-bit timer (TM2) P34

TO0 Output 16-bit timer (TM0) output (also used for 14-bit PWM output) Input P30

TO1 P31

TO2 P32

PCL Output Clock output (for main system clock and subsystem clock trimming) Input P35

BUZ Output Buzzer output Input P36

RTP0 to RTP7

Output Real-time output port outputting data in synchronization with trigger Input P120 to P127

8-bit timer (TM1) output

8-bit timer (TM2) output

Serial interface serial data input/output Input

External interrupt request inputs with specifiable valid edges (rising

edge, falling edge, both rising and falling edges).

I/O

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Non-port pins (2/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

AD0 to AD7 I/O Lower address/data bus when expanding memory externally Input P40 to P47

A8 to A15 Output Higher address bus when expanding memory externally Input P50 to P57

RD Output Strobe signal output for read operation from external memory Input P64

WR Strobe signal output for write operation to external memory P65

WAIT Input Wait insertion when accessing external memory Input P66

ASTB Output Strobe output externally latching address information output to ports 4 Input P67

and 5 to access external memory

ANI0 to ANI7

Input A/D converter analog input Input P10 to P17

ANO0, ANO1

Output D/A converter analog output Input P130, P131

AVREF0 Input A/D converter reference voltage input (also functions as analog power — —

supply)

AVREF1 Input D/A converter reference voltage input — —

AVSS — A/D converter, D/A converter ground potential. Use the same potential — —

as VSS0.

RESET Input System reset input — —

X1 Input Crystal connection for main system clock oscillation — —

X2 — ——

XT1 Input Crystal connection for subsystem clock oscillation Input P07

XT2 — ——

VDD0 — Positive power supply for ports — —

VSS0 — Ground potential for ports — —

VDD1 — Positive power supply (except ports and analog block) — —

VSS1 — Ground potential (except ports and analog block) — —

VPP — High-voltage application for program write/verify. — —

IC — Internally connected. Connect directly to VSS0. ——

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3.2 Description of Pin Functions

3.2.1 P00 to P05, P07 (Port 0)

P00 to P05 and P07 function as a 7-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as an external

interrupt request input, an external count clock input to the timer, a capture trigger signal input, and crystal connection

for subsystem oscillation.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P00 and P07 function as input-only port pins and P01 to P05 function as I/O port pins.

P01 to P05 can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 0 (PM0). When they

are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected to them using pull-up resistor option

(2) Control mode

In this mode, P00 to P05 and P07 function as an external interrupt request input, an external count clock input

to the timer, and crystal connection for subsystem clock oscillation.

(a) INTP0 to INTP5

INTP0 to INTP5 are external interrupt request input pins for which valid edges can be specified (rising

edge, falling edge, and both rising and falling edges). INTP0 or INTP1 become 16-bit timer/event counter

capture trigger signal input pins with a valid edge input.

(b) TI00

This is a pin for inputting the external count clock to the 16-bit timer/event counter.

This is a pin for inputting the capture trigger signal to the capture register (CR00) of the 16-bit timer/event

counter.

(d) XT1

This is a crystal connection pin for subsystem clock oscillation.

3.2.2 P10 to P17 (Port 1)

P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as an A/D converter

analog inputs.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port.

They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 1 (PM1). When they are used

as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected to them using pull-up resistor option register L

(PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P10 to P17 function as A/D converter analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7). On-chip pull-up resistors are

automatically disabled when these pins are specified as analog inputs.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3.2.3 P20 to P27 (Port 2)

P20 to P27 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as data input/output

to/from the serial interface, clock input/output, automatic transmit/receive busy input, and strobe output.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P20 to P27 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P20 to P27 function as serial interface data input/output, clock input/output, automatic transmit/receive busy

input, and strobe output.

(a) SI0, SI1, SO0, SO1

These are serial data I/O pins of the serial interface.

(b) SCK0, SCK1

These are serial clock I/O pins of the serial interface.

These are NEC Electronics standard serial bus interface I/O pins.

(d) BUSY

This is an automatic transmit/receive busy input pin of the serial interface.

(e) STB

This is an automatic transmit/receive strobe output pin of the serial interface.

(f) RxD1, TxD1

These are serial interface serial data I/O pins of the asynchronous serial interface.

Caution When P20 to P27 are used as serial interface pins, the I/O and output latches must be

set according to the function the user requires. For the setting, see Figure 16-4 Format

of Serial Operation Mode Register 0, Figure 18-3 Format of Serial Operation Mode

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3.2.4 P30 to P37 (Port 3)

P30 to P37 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as timer input/output,

clock output and buzzer output.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P30 to P37 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as an input or output in 1-bit units using port

mode register 3 (PM3). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to then using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P30 to P37 function as timer input/output, clock output, and buzzer output.

(a) TI1 and TI2

These are pins for inputting the external count clock to the 8-bit timer/event counter.

(b) TO0 to TO2

These are timer output pins.

This is a clock output pin.

(d) BUZ

This is a buzzer output pin.

3.2.5 P40 to P47 (Port 4)

P40 to P47 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as an address/data

bus.

The test input flag (KRIF) can be set to 1 by detecting a falling edge.

The following operating modes can be specified in 8-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P40 to P47 using function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified for as input or output in 8-bit units using

the internal memory expansion mode register (MM). When they are used as an input port pins, on-chip pull-

up resistors can be connected to them using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P40 to P47 function as the lower address/data bus pins (AD0 to AD7) in external memory expansion mode.

When these pins are used as an address/data bus, on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3.2.6 P50 to P57 (Port 5)

P50 to P57 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as an address bus.

P50 to P57 can drive LEDs directly.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P50 to P57 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P50 to P57 function as the higher address bus pins (A8 to A15) in external memory expansion mode. When

these pins are used as an address bus, on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

3.2.7 P60 to P67 (Port 6)

P60 to P67 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they are also used for control in external

memory expansion mode. P60 to P63 can drive LEDs directly.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P60 to P67 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

P60 to P63 are N-ch open-drain outputs. In mask ROM products, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to these pins using a mask option.

When P64 to P67 are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected using pull-up resistor

option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P60 to P67 function as control signal output pins (RD, WR, WAIT, ASTB) in external memory expansion mode.

When pins are used as control signal outputs, on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

Caution When an external wait is not used in external memory expansion mode, P66 can be used as

an I/O port pins.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3.2.8 P70 to P72 (Port 7)

P70 to P72 function as a 3-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as serial interface data

I/O and clock I/O.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P70 to P72 function as a 3-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input port or output in 1-bit units using port

mode register 7 (PM7). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to them using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P70 to P72 function as serial interface data I/O and clock I/O.

(a) SI2, SO2

These are serial data I/O pins of the serial interface.

(b) SCK2

This is a serial clock I/O pin of the serial interface.

These are serial data I/O pins of the asynchronous serial interface.

(d) ASCK

This is a serial clock I/O pin of the asynchronous serial interface.

Caution When P70 to P72 are used as serial interface pins, the I/O and output latches must be set

according to the function the user requires.

For the setting, see the operation mode setting list in Table 19-2 Serial Interface Channel

3.2.9 P120 to P127 (Port 12)

P120 to P127 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as a real-time output

port.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P120 to P127 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port

mode register 12 (PM12). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to them using pull-up resistor option register H (PUOH).

(2) Control mode

P120 to P127 function as a real-time output port (RTP0 to RTP7) that outputs data in synchronization with

a trigger.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3.2.10 P130 and P131 (Port 13)

P130 and P131 function as a 2-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as D/A converter

analog output.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P130 and P131 function as a 2-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port

mode register 13 (PM13). When they are used as an input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to them using pull-up resistor option register H (PUOH).

(2) Control mode

P130 and P131 function as D/A converter analog outputs (ANO0 and ANO1).

Caution When only one of the D/A converter channels is used with AVREF1 < VDD0, the other pins that

are not used as analog outputs must be set as follows:

• Set the PM13x bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 1 (input mode) and connect the pin

to VSS0.

• Clear the PM13x bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 0 (output mode) and the output latch

to 0, and output a low level from the pin.

3.2.11 AVREF0

This is the A/D converter reference voltage input pin. This pin also serves as an analog power supply pin. Supply

power to this pin when the A/D converter is used.

When the A/D converter is not used, use the same voltage that of the VDD0 or VSS0 pin.

3.2.12 AVREF1

This is the D/A converter reference voltage input pin.

When the D/A converter is not used, use the same voltage that of the VDD0 pin.

3.2.13 AVSS

This is the ground voltage pin of A/D converter and D/A converter. Always use the same voltage as that of the

VSS0 pin even when the A/D converter or D/A converter is not used.

3.2.14 RESET

This is the low-level active system reset input pin.

3.2.15 X1 and X2

These are crystal resonator connection pins for main system clock oscillation. For external clock supply, input

a signal to X1 and its inverted signal to X2.

3.2.16 XT1 and XT2

These are crystal resonator connection pins for subsystem clock oscillation.

For external clock supply, input a signal to XT1 and its inverted signal to XT2.

3.2.17 VDD0, VDD1

VDD0 is the positive power supply pin for ports.

VDD1 is the positive power supply pin for blocks other than port and analog blocks.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SS0

As short as possible

3.2.18 VSS0, VSS1

VSS0 is the ground potential pin for ports.

VSS1 is the ground potential pin for blocks other than port and analog blocks.

3.2.19 VPP (Flash memory version only)

This is the high-voltage application pin for flash memory programming mode setting and program write/verify.

Connect this pin in either of the following ways.

•Connect independently to a 10 kΩ pull-down resistor.

•By using a jumper on the board, connect directly to the dedicated flash programmer in the programming mode

or to VSS0 in the normal operation mode.

3.2.20 IC (Mask ROM version only)

The IC (Internally Connected) pin is provided to set the test mode to check the

PD780058 Subseries at delivery.

Connect it directly to VSS0 with the shortest possible wire in the normal operating mode.

When a voltage difference is produced between the IC pin and VSS0 pin because the wiring between those two

pins is too long or an external noise is input to the IC pin, the user’s program may not run normally.

Connect the IC pin to VSS0 directly.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3.3 I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

Table 3-1 shows the pin I/O circuit types and the recommended connection of unused pins.

Refer to Figure 3-1 for the configuration of the I/O circuit of each type.

Table 3-1. Pin I/O Circuit Types (1/2)

Pin Name I/O Circuit Type I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

P00/INTP0/TI00 2 Input Connect to VSS0.

P01/INTP1/TI01 8-C I/O Input: Independently connect to VSS0 via a resistor.

P02/INTP2 Output: Leave open.

P03/INTP3

P04/INTP4

P05/INTP5

P07/XT1 16 Input Connect to VDD0.

P10/ANI0 to P17/ANI7 11-D I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 or VSS0 via a resistor.

P20/SI1 8-C Output: Leave open.

P21/SO1 5-H

P22/SCK1 8-C

P23/STB/TxD1 5-H

P24/BUSY/RxD1 8-C

P25/SI0/SB0 10-B

P26/SO0/SB1

P27/SCK0

P30/TO0 5-H

P31/TO1

P32/TO2

P33/TI1 8-C

P34/TI2

P35/PCL 5-H

P36/BUZ

P37

P40/AD0 to P47/AD7 5-N I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 via a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

P50/A8 to P57/A15 5-H I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 or VSS0 via a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 3-1. Pin I/O Circuit Types (2/2)

Pin Name I/O Circuit Type I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

P60 to P63 (mask ROM version) 13-J I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 via a resistor.

P60 to P63 (flash memory version) 13-K Output: Set 0 to the port and leave open at low level output.

P64/RD 5-H I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 or VSS0 via a resistor.

P65/WR Output: Leave open.

P66/WAIT

P67/ASTB

P70/SI2/RxD0 8-C

P71/SO2/TxD0 5-H

P72/SCK2/ASCK 8-C

P120/RTP0 to P127/RTP7 5-H

P130/ANO0, P131/ANO1 12-C I/O Input: Independently connect to VSS0 via a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

RESET 2 Input —

XT2 16 —Leave open.

AVREF0 —Connect to VDD0 or VSS0.

AVREF1 Connect to VDD0.

AVSS Connect to VSS0.

IC (mask ROM version) Connect directly to VSS0.

VPP (flash memory version) Independently connect via a 10 kΩ pull-down resistor, or

connect to VSS0 or VSS1 directly.

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Input

enable

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Type 2

Type 5-H

Schmitt-triggered input with

hysteresis characteristics

Type 5-N Type 11-D

Type 10-B

Type 8-C

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Open drain

Output disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

P-ch

Comparator

N-ch

Input

enable

REF

(threshold voltage)

–

SS0

Figure 3-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Type 12-C

Type 13-J

Type 13-K

Output disable

VDD0

N-ch

IN/OUT

Medium breakdown

input buffer

Data

P-ch

XT2XT1

Feedback

cut-off

P-ch

Type 16

Output disable

VDD0

N-ch

Mask

option

IN/OUT

Medium breakdown

input buffer

Data

P-ch

Pull-up

enable

VDD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

VDD0

P-ch

N-ch

Input

enable P-ch

N-ch

Analog output

voltage

VSS0

Figure 3-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (2/2)

66 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

P00 Input Port 0 Input only Input INTP0/TI00

P01 INTP1/TI01

P02 INTP2

P03 INTP3

P04 INTP4

P05 INTP5

P07Note 1 Input Input only Input XT1

P10 to P17 I/O Port 1 Input ANI0 to ANI7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting softwareNote 2.

P20 SI1

P21 SO1

P22 SCK1

P23 STB/TxD1

P24 BUSY/RxD1

P25 SI0/SB0/SDA0

P26 SO0/SB1/SDA1

P27 SCK0/SCL

P30 Input TO0

P31 TO1

P32 TO2

P33 TI1

P34 TI2

P35 PCL

P36 BUZ

P37 —

Notes 1. When the P07/XT1 pin is used as an input port, set bit 6 (FRC) of the processor clock control register

(PCC) to 1 (do not use the feedback resistor incorporated in the subsystem clock oscillator).

2. When pins P10/ANI0 to P17/ANI7 are used as an analog input of the A/D converter, set port 1 to the

input mode. In this case, any connected on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

I/O Port 3

8-bit I/O port

Input/output mode can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

4.1 Pin Function List

(1) Port pins (1/2)

I/O 7-bit I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit Input

units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip

pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

I/O Port 2 Input

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Port pins (2/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

P40 to P47 I/O Port 4 Input AD0 to AD7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 8-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

The test input flag (KRIF) is set to 1 by falling edge detection.

P50 to P57 I/O Port 5 Input A8 to A15

8-bit I/O port

LEDs can be driven directly.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

P60 —

P61

P62

P63

P64 RD

P65 WR

P66 WAIT

P67 ASTB

P70 SI2/RxD0

P71 SO2/TxD0

P72 SCK2/ASCK

P120 to P127

I/O Port 12 Input RTP0 to RTP7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

P130 to P131

I/O Port 13 Input ANO0 to ANO1

2-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

I/O Port 6 N-ch open-drain I/O port Input

8-bit I/O port On-chip pull-up resistors can be

Input/output can be specified in specified by mask option.

1-bit units. (Mask ROM version only).

LEDs can be driven directly.

I/O Port 7 Input

3-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

If used as an input port, an on-chip

pull-up resistor can be connected by

setting software.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Non-port pins (1/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

INTP0 Input Input P00/TI00

INTP1 P01/TI01

INTP2 P02

INTP3 P03

INTP4 P04

INTP5 P05

SI0 Input Serial interface serial data input Input P25/SB0/SDA0

SI1 P20

SI2 P70/RxD

SO0 Output Serial interface serial data output Input P26/SB1/SDA1

SO1 P21

SO2 P71/TxD

SB0 Serial interface serial data input/output Input P25/SI0/SDA0

SB1 P26/SO0/SDA1

SDA0 P25/SI0/SB0

SDA1 P26/SO0/SB1

SCK0 Serial interface serial clock input/output Input P27/SCL

SCK1 P22

SCK2 P72/ASCK

SCL P27/SCK0

STB Output Serial interface automatic transmit/receive strobe output Input P23/TxD1

BUSY Input Serial interface automatic transmit/receive busy input Input P24/RxD1

RxD0 Input Asynchronous serial interface serial data input Input P70/SI2

RxD1 P24/BUSY

TxD Output Asynchronous serial interface serial data output Input P71/SO2

TxD1 P23/STB

ASCK Input Asynchronous serial interface serial clock input Input P72/SCK2

TI00 External count clock input to 16-bit timer (TM0) P00/INTP0

TI01 Capture trigger signal input to capture register (CR00) P01/INTP1

TI1 External count clock input to 8-bit timer (TM1) P33

TI2 External count clock input to 8-bit timer (TM2) P34

TO0 Output 16-bit timer (TM0) output (also used for 14-bit PWM output) Input P30

TO1 P31

TO2 P32

PCL Output Clock output (for main system clock and subsystem clock trimming) Input P35

BUZ Output Buzzer output Input P36

RTP0 to RTP7

Output Real-time output port outputting data in synchronization with trigger Input P120 to P127

Input Input

8-bit timer (TM1) output

8-bit timer (TM2) output

External interrupt request inputs with specifiable valid edges (rising

edge, falling edge, both rising and falling edges).

I/O

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Non-port pins (2/2)

Pin Name I/O Function After Reset

Alternate Function

AD0 to AD7 I/O Lower address/data bus when expanding memory externally Input P40 to P47

A8 to A15 Output Higher address bus when expanding memory externally Input P50 to P57

RD Output Strobe signal output for read operation from external memory Input P64

WR Strobe signal output for write operation to external memory P65

WAIT Input Wait insertion when accessing external memory Input P66

ASTB Output Strobe output externally latching address information output to ports 4 Input P67

and 5 to access external memory

ANI0 to ANI7

Input A/D converter analog input Input P10 to P17

ANO0, ANO1

Output D/A converter analog output Input P130, P131

AVREF0 Input

A/D converter reference voltage input (also functions as analog power supply)

——

AVREF1 Input D/A converter reference voltage input — —

AVSS — A/D converter, D/A converter ground potential. Use the same potential — —

as VSS0.

RESET Input System reset input — —

X1 Input Crystal connection for main system clock oscillation — —

X2 — ——

XT1 Input Crystal connection for subsystem clock oscillation Input P07

XT2 — ——

VDD0 — Positive power supply for ports — —

VSS0 — Ground potential for ports — —

VDD1 — Positive power supply (except ports and analog block) — —

VSS1 — Ground potential (except ports and analog block) — —

VPP — High-voltage application for program write/verify. — —

VSS — Ground potential — —

IC — Internally connected. Connect directly to VSS0. ——

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.2 Description of Pin Functions

4.2.1 P00 to P05, P07 (Port 0)

P00 to P05 and P07 function as a 7-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they function as an external

interrupt request input, an external count clock input to the timer, a capture trigger signal input, and crystal connection

for subsystem oscillation.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P00 and P07 function as input-only port pins and P01 to P05 function as I/O port pins.

P01 to P05 can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 0 (PM0). When they

are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected to them using pull-up resistor option

(2) Control mode

In this mode, P00 to P05 and P07 function as an external interrupt request input, an external count clock input

to the timer, and crystal connection for subsystem clock oscillation.

(a) INTP0 to INTP5

INTP0 to INTP5 are external interrupt request input pins for which valid edges can be specified (rising

edge, falling edge, and both rising and falling edges). INTP0 and INTP1 become a 16-bit timer/event

counter capture trigger signal input pins with a valid edge input.

(b) TI00

This is a pin for inputting the external count clock to the 16-bit timer/event counter.

This is a pin for inputting the capture trigger signal to the capture register (CR00) of the 16-bit timer/event

counter.

(d) XT1

This is a crystal connection pin for subsystem clock oscillation.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.2.2 P10 to P17 (Port 1)

P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as an A/D converter

analog inputs.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port.

They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 1 (PM1). When they are used

as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected to them using pull-up resistor option register L

(PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P10 to P17 function as A/D converter analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7). On-chip pull-up resistors are

automatically disabled when these pins are specified as analog inputs.

4.2.3 P20 to P27 (Port 2)

P20 to P27 an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as data input/output to/from the

serial interface, clock input/output, automatic transmit/receive busy input, and strobe output.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P20 to P27 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P20 to P27 function as serial interface data input/output, clock input/output, automatic transmit/receive busy

input, and strobe output.

(a) SI0, SI1, SO0, SO1, SB0, SB1, SDA0, SDA1

These are serial data I/O pins of the serial interface.

(b) SCK0, SCK1, SCL

These are serial clock I/O pins of the serial interface.

This is an automatic transmit/receive busy input pin of the serial interface.

(d) STB

This is an automatic transmit/receive strobe output pin of the serial interface.

(e) RxD1, TxD1

These are serial interface serial data I/O pins of the asynchronous serial interface.

Caution When P20 to P27 are used as a serial interface pins, the I/O and output latches must

be set according to the function the user requires. For the setting, see Figure 17-4

Format of Serial Operation Mode Register 0, Figure 18-3 Format of Serial Operation

Mode Register 1, and Table 19-2 Serial Interface Channel 2 Operating Mode Settings.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.2.4 P30 to P37 (Port 3)

P30 to P37 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as timer input/output,

clock output, and buzzer output.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P30 to P37 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as an input or output using in 1-bit units port

mode register 3 (PM3). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to them using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P30 to P37 function as timer input/output, clock output, and buzzer output.

(a) TI1 and TI2

These are pins for inputting the external count clock to the 8-bit timer/event counter.

(b) TO0 to TO2

These are timer output pins.

This is a clock output pin.

(d) BUZ

This is a buzzer output pin.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.2.5 P40 to P47 (Port 4)

P40 to P47 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as an address/data

bus.

The test input flag (KRIF) can be set to 1 by detecting a falling edge.

The following operating modes can be specified in 8-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P40 to P47 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 8-bit units using the internal

memory expansion mode register (MM). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can

be connected to them using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P40 to P47 function as the lower address/data bus pins (AD0 to AD7) in external memory expansion mode.

When these pins are used as an address/data bus, on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

4.2.6 P50 to P57 (Port 5)

P50 to P57 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as an address bus.

P50 to P57 can drive LEDs directly.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P50 to P57 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P50 to P57 function as the higher address bus pins (A8 to A15) in external memory expansion mode. When

these pins are used as an address bus, on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

4.2.7 P60 to P67 (Port 6)

P60 to P67 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they are also used for control in external

memory expansion mode. P60 to P63 can drive LEDs directly.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P60 to P67 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port mode

P60 to P63 are N-ch open-drain outputs. In mask ROM products, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to these pins using a mask option.

When P64 to P67 are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected using pull-up resistor

option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P60 to P67 functions as control signal output pins (RD, WR, WAIT, ASTB) in external memory expansion mode.

When pins are used as control signal outputs, the on-chip pull-up resistors are automatically disabled.

Caution When an external wait is not used in external memory expansion mode, P66 can be used as

an I/O port pin.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.2.8 P70 to P72 (Port 7)

P70 to P72 function as a 3-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as serial interface data

I/O and clock I/O.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P70 to P72 function as a 3-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input port or output in 1-bit units using port

mode register 7 (PM7). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to them using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

(2) Control mode

P70 to P72 function as serial interface data I/O and clock I/O.

(a) SI2, SO2

These are serial data I/O pins of the serial interface.

(b) SCK2

This is a serial clock I/O pin of the serial interface.

These are serial interface serial data I/O pins of the asynchronous serial interface.

(d) ASCK

This is a serial clock I/O pin of the asynchronous serial interface.

Caution When P70 to P72 are used as serial interface pins, the I/O and output latches must be set

according to the function the user requires.

For the setting, see to the operation mode setting list in Table 19-2 Serial Interface Channel

4.2.9 P120 to P127 (Port 12)

P120 to P127 function as an 8-bit I/O port. Besides serving as an I/O port pins, they also function as a real-time

output port.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P120 to P127 function as an 8-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output port in 1-bit units using

port mode register 12 (PM12). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be

connected to them using pull-up resistor option register H (PUOH).

(2) Control mode

P120 to P127 function as a real-time output port (RTP0 to RTP7) that outputs data in synchronization with

a trigger.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.2.10 P130 and P131 (Port 13)

P130 and P131 function as a 2-bit I/O port. Besides serving as I/O port pins, they also function as D/A converter

analog output.

The following operating modes can be specified in 1-bit units.

(1) Port mode

P130 and P131 function as a 2-bit I/O port. They can be specified as input or output in 1-bit units using port

mode register 13 (PM13). When they are used as input port pins, on-chip pull-up resistors can be connected

to them using pull-up resistor option register H (PUOH).

(2) Control mode

P130 and P131 function as D/A converter analog outputs (ANO0 and ANO1).

Caution When only one of the D/A converter channels is used with AVREF1 < VDD0, the other pins that

are not used as analog outputs must be set as follows:

• Set the PM13x bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 1 (input mode) and connect the pin

to VSS0.

• Clear the PM13x bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 0 (output mode) and the output latch

to 0, and output a low level from the pin.

4.2.11 AVREF0

This is the A/D converter reference voltage input pin. This pin also serves as an analog power supply pin. Supply

power to this pin when the A/D converter is used.

When the A/D converter is not used, use the same voltage that of the VDD0 or VSS0 pin.

4.2.12 AVREF1

This is the D/A converter reference voltage input pin.

When the D/A converter is not used, use the same voltage that of the VDD0 pin.

4.2.13 AVSS

This is the ground voltage pin of A/D converter and D/A converter. Always use the same voltage as that of the

VSS0 pin even when the A/D converter or D/A converter is not used.

4.2.14 RESET

This is the low-level active system reset input pin.

4.2.15 X1 and X2

These are crystal resonator connection pins for main system clock oscillation. For external clock supply, input

a signal to X1 and its inverted signal to X2.

4.2.16 XT1 and XT2

These are crystal resonator connection pins for subsystem clock oscillation.

For external clock supply, input a signal to XT1 and its inverted signal to XT2.

4.2.17 VDD0, VDD1

VDD0 is the positive power supply pin for ports.

VDD1 is the positive power supply pin for blocks other than port and analog blocks.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.2.18 VSS0, VSS1

VSS0 is the ground potential pin for ports.

VSS1 is the ground potential pin for blocks other than port and analog blocks.

4.2.19 VPP (Flash memory version only)

This is the high-voltage apply pin for flash memory programming mode setting and program write/verify.

Connect this pin in either of the following ways.

• Connect independently to a 10 kΩ pull-down resistor.

• By using a jumper on the board, connect directly to the dedicated flash programmer in the programming mode

or to VSS0 in the normal operation mode.

4.2.20 IC (Mask ROM version only)

The IC (Internally Connected) pin is provided to set the test mode to check the

PD780058Y Subseries at delivery.

Connect it directly to VSS0 with the shortest possible wire in the normal operating mode.

When a voltage difference is produced between the IC pin and VSS0 pin because the wiring between those two

pins is too long or an external noise is input to the IC pin, the user’s program may not run normally.

Connect the IC pin to VSS0 directly.

VSS0 IC

As short as possible

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

4.3 I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

Table 4-1 shows the pin I/O circuit types and the recommended connection of unused pins.

Refer to Figure 4-1 for the configuration of the I/O circuit of each type.

Table 4-1. Pin I/O Circuit Types (1/2)

Pin Name I/O Circuit Type I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

P00/INTP0/TI00 2 Input Connect to VSS0.

P01/INTP1/TI01 8-C I/O Input: Independently connect to VSS0 via a resistor.

P02/INTP2 Output: Leave open.

P03/INTP3

P04/INTP4

P05/INTP5

P07/XT1 16 Input Connect to VDD0

P10/ANI0 to P17/ANI7 11-D I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 or VSS0 via a resistor.

P20/SI1 8-C Output: Leave open.

P21/SO1 5-H

P22/SCK1 8-C

P23/STB/TxD1 5-H

P24/BUSY/RxD1 8-C

P25/SI0/SB0/SDA0 10-B

P26/SO0/SB1/SDA1

P27/SCK0/SCL

P30/TO0 5-H

P31/TO1

P32/TO2

P33/TI1 8-C

P34/TI2

P35/PCL 5-H

P36/BUZ

P37

P40/AD0 to P47/AD7 5-N I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 via a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

P50/A8 to P57/A15 5-H I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 or VSS0 via a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 4-1. Pin I/O Circuit Types (2/2)

Pin Name I/O Circuit Type I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins

P60 to P63 (mask ROM version) 13-J I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 via a resistor.

Output: Set 0 to the port and leave open at low level output.

P60 to P63 (flash memory version) 13-K I/O Input: Independently connect to VDD0 or VSS0 via a resistor.

P64/RD 5-H Output: Leave open.

P65/WR

P66/WAIT

P67/ASTB

P70/SI2/RxD0 8-C

P71/SO2/TxD0 5-H

P72/SCK2/ASCK 8-C

P120/RTP0 to P127/RTP7 5-H

P130/ANO0, P131/ANO1 12-C I/O Input: Independently connect to VSS0 via a resistor.

Output: Leave open.

RESET 2 Input —

XT2 16 — Leave open.

AVREF0 — Connect to VDD0 or VSS0.

AVREF1 Connect to VDD0.

AVSS Connect to VSS0.

IC (mask ROM version) Connect directly to VSS0.

VPP (flash memory version) Independently connect 10 kΩ pull-down resistor, or connect

to VSS0 or VSS1 directly.

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 4-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (1/2)

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Input

enable

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Type 2

Type 5-H

Schmitt-triggered input with

hysteresis characteristics

Type 5-N Type 11-D

Type 10-B

Type 8-C

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Open drain

Output disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

Pull-up

enable

DD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

DD0

P-ch

N-ch

P-ch

Comparator

N-ch

Input

enable

REF

(threshold voltage)

–

SS0

CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 4-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (2/2)

Type 12-C

Type 13-J

Type 13-K

Output disable

VDD0

N-ch

IN/OUT

Medium breakdown

input buffer

Data

P-ch

XT2XT1

Feedback

cut-off

P-ch

Type 16

Output disable

VDD0

N-ch

Mask

option

IN/OUT

Medium breakdown

input buffer

Data

P-ch

Pull-up

enable

VDD0

P-ch

IN/OUT

Output

disable

Data

VDD0

P-ch

N-ch

Input

enable P-ch

N-ch

Analog output

voltage

VSS0

81User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

5.1 Memory Spaces

Figures 5-1 to 5-6 show the memory maps.

Figure 5-1. Memory Map (

PD780053, 780053(A), 780053Y, 780053Y(A))

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

24,576 × 8 bits

5FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External memory

39,552 × 8 bits

Unusable

Program

memory

space

6000H

5FFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-2. Memory Map (

PD780054, 780054(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A))

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

32,768 × 8 bits

7FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External Memory

31,360 × 8 bits

Unusable

Program

memory

space

8000H

7FFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-3. Memory Map (

PD780055, 780055(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A))

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

40,960 × 8 bits

9FFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External memory

23,168 × 8 bits

Unusable

Program

memory

space

A000H

9FFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-4. Memory Map (

PD780056, 780056(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A))

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

49,152 × 8 bits

BFFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External memory

14,976 × 8 bits

Unusable

Program

memory

space

C000H

BFFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-5. Memory Map (

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A))

Note When the internal ROM size is 60 KB, the area F000H to F3FFH cannot be used. F000H to F3FFH

can be used as external memory by setting the internal ROM size to 56 KB or less using the internal

memory size switching register (IMS).

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

61,440 × 8 bits

EFFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

Unusable

Note

Unusable

Program

memory

space

F000H

EFFFH

F800H

F7FFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Internal

expansion RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

F400H

F3FFH

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-6. Memory Map (

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y)

Note When the flash memory size is 60 KB, the area F000H to F3FFH cannot be used. F000H to F3FFH

can be used as external memory by setting the flash memory size to 56 KB or less using the internal

memory size switching register (IMS).

0000H

Data memory

space

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Flash memory

61,440 × 8 bits

EFFFH

1000H

0FFFH

0800H

07FFH

0080H

007FH

0040H

003FH

0000H

CALLF entry area

CALLT table area

Vector table area

Program area

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

Unusable

Program

memory

space

F000H

EFFFH

F800H

F7FFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Internal

expansion RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

F400H

F3FFH

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

Unusable

Note

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.1.1 Internal program memory space

The

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries have various sizes of internal ROM or flash memory as shown below.

The internal program memory space

stores programs and table data. Normally, they are addressed with a program

counter (PC).

Part Number

Internal ROM

Type Capacity

PD780053, 780053(A), 780053Y, 780053Y(A) Mask ROM 24,576 × 8 bits

PD780054, 780054(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A) 32,768 × 8 bits

PD780055, 780055(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A) 40,960 × 8 bits

PD780056, 780056(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A) 49,152 × 8 bits

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A) 61,440 × 8 bits

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y Flash memory 61,440 × 8 bits

The internal program memory is divided into the following three areas.

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Vector table area

The 64-byte area 0000H to 003FH is reserved as a vector table area. The program start addresses for branch

upon RESET input interrupt request or generation are stored in the vector table area. Of the 16-bit address,

the lower 8 bits are stored at even addresses and the higher 8 bits are stored at odd addresses.

Table 5-1. Vector Table

Vector Table Address Interrupt Source

0000H RESET input

0004H INTWDT

0006H INTP0

0008H INTP1

000AH INTP2

000CH INTP3

000EH INTP4

0010H INTP5

0014H INTCSI0

0016H INTCSI1

0018H INTSER

001AH INTSR/INTCSI2

001CH INTST

001EH INTTM3

0020H INTTM00

0022H INTTM01

0024H INTTM1

0026H INTTM2

0028H INTAD

003EH BRK

(2) CALLT instruction table area

The 64-byte area 0040H to 007FH can store the subroutine entry address of a 1-byte call instruction (CALLT).

(3) CALLF instruction entry area

The area 0800H to 0FFFH can perform a direct subroutine call with a 2-byte call instruction (CALLF).

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.1.2 Internal data memory space

The

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries incorporate the following RAMs.

(1) Internal high-speed RAM

High-speed memory of the following configuration is incorporated:

1,024 × 8 bits (FB00H to FEFFH)

In this area, four banks of general-purpose registers, each bank consisting of eight 8-bit registers, are allocated

to the 32-byte area FEE0H to FEFFH.

The internal high-speed RAM can also be used as a stack memory area.

(2) Internal buffer RAM

Buffer RAM is allocated to the 32-byte area from FAC0H to FADFH. The internal buffer RAM is used to store

transmit/receive data of serial interface channel 1 (in 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive

function). If the 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function is not used, the internal buffer

RAM can also be used as normal RAM.

(3) Internal expansion RAM (

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A), 78F0058, 78F0058Y

only)

Internal expansion RAM is allocated to the 1,024-byte area from F400H to F7FFH.

5.1.3 Special Function Register (SFR) area

On-chip peripheral hardware special-function registers (SFRs) are allocated to the area FF00H to FFFFH. (See

Table 5-2 Special-Function Register List in 5.2.3 Special Function Registers (SFRs)).

Caution Do not access addresses where SFRs are not assigned.

5.1.4 External memory space

The external memory space is accessible by setting the internal memory expansion mode register (MM). External

memory space can store program, table data, etc. and allocate peripheral devices.

5.1.5 Data memory addressing

The method to specify the address of the instruction to be executed next, or the address of a register or memory

to be manipulated when an instruction is executed is called addressing.

The address of the instruction to be executed next is addressed by the program counter PC (for details, see 5.3

Instruction Address Addressing).

To address the memory that is manipulated when an instruction is executed, the

PD780058, 780058Y Subseries

is provided with many addressing modes with a high operability. Especially at addresses corresponding to data

memory area, particular addressing modes can be used in accordance with the functions of the special function

registers (SFRs) and general-purpose registers. This area is between FB00H and FFFFH. The data memory space

is the entire 64 KB space (0000H to FFFFH). Figures 5-7 to 5-12 show the data memory addressing modes. For

details of each addressing, see 5.4 Operand Address Addressing.

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-7. Data Memory Addressing (

PD780053, 780053(A), 780053Y, 780053Y(A))

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

24,576 × 8 bits

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External memory

39,552 × 8 bits

Unusable

6000H

5FFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-8. Data Memory Addressing (

PD780054, 780054(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A))

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

32,768 × 8 bits

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External memory

31,360 × 8 bits

Unusable

8000H

7FFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-9. Data Memory Addressing (

PD780055, 780055(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A))

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

40,960 × 8 bits

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External memory

23,168 × 8 bits

Unusable

A000H

9FFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-10. Data Memory Addressing (

PD780056, 780056(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A))

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

49,152 × 8 bits

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

External memory

14,976 × 8 bits

Unusable

C000H

BFFFH

FA80H

FA7FH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits SFR addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-11. Data Memory Addressing (

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A))

Note When the internal ROM size is 60 KB, the area F000H to F3FFH cannot be used. F000H to F3FFH

can be used as external memory by setting the internal ROM size to 56 KB or less using the internal

memory size switching register (IMS).

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 × 8 bits

Internal ROM

61,440 × 8 bits

Internal buffer RAM

32 × 8 bits

Unusable

F000H

EFFFH

F800H

F7FFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

F400H

F3FFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 × 8 bits

Internal expansion RAM

1,024 × 8 bits

SFR addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

UnusableNote

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 5-12. Data Memory Addressing (

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y)

Note When the flash memory size is 60 KB, the area F000H to F3FFH cannot be used. F000H to F3FFH

can be used as external memory by setting the flash memory size to 56 KB or less using the internal

memory size switching register (IMS).

0000H

General-purpose registers

32 ×8 bits

Flash memory

61,440 ×8 bits

Internal buffer RAM

32 ×8 bits

Unusable

F000H

EFFFH

F800H

F7FFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FEE0H

FEDFH

FF00H

FEFFH

FFFFH

Internal high-speed RAM

1,024 ×8 bits

Unusable

FB00H

FAFFH

F400H

F3FFH

FF20H

FF1FH

FE20H

FE1FH

Special function

registers (SFRs)

256 ×8 bits

Internal expansion RAM

1,024 ×8 bits

SFR addressing

Short direct

addressing

Direct addressing

addressing

Based addressing

Based indexed

addressing

Unusable

Note

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.2 Processor Registers

The

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries incorporate the following processor registers.

5.2.1 Control registers

The control registers control the program sequence, statuses and stack memory. The control registers consist

of a program counter (PC), a program status word (PSW) and a stack pointer (SP).

(1) Program counter (PC)

The program counter is a 16-bit register which holds the address information of the next program to be

executed.

In normal operation, the PC is automatically incremented according to the number of bytes of the instruction

to be fetched. When a branch instruction is executed, immediate data and register contents are set.

RESET input sets the reset vector table values at addresses 0000H and 0001H to the program counter.

Figure 5-13. Program Counter Format

(2) Program status word (PSW)

The program status word is an 8-bit register consisting of various flags to be set/reset by instruction execution.

Program status word contents are automatically stacked upon interrupt request generation or PUSH PSW

instruction execution and are automatically reset upon execution of the RETB, RETI, and POP PSW

instructions.

RESET input sets the PSW to 02H.

Figure 5-14. Program Status Word Format

15 0

PC15 PC14 PC13 PC12 PC11 PC10 PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0PC

IEPSW Z RBS1 AC RBS0 0 ISP CY

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(a) Interrupt enable flag (IE)

This flag controls the interrupt request acknowledgment operations of the CPU.

When IE = 0, all interrupt requests except the non-maskable interrupt are disabled (DI status).

When IE = 1, interrupts are enabled (EI status). At this time, acknowledgment of interrupts is controlled

with an inservice priority flag (ISP), an interrupt mask flag for various interrupt sources, and a priority

specification flag.

The interrupt enable flag is reset to 0 when the DI instruction is executed or when an interrupt request

is acknowledged, and set to 1 when the EI instruction is executed.

(b) Zero flag (Z)

When the operation result is zero, this flag is set to 1. It is reset to 0 in all other cases.

These are 2-bit flags to select one of the four register banks.

The 2-bit information which indicates the register bank selected by SEL RBn instruction execution is stored

in these flags.

(d) Auxiliary carry flag (AC)

If the operation result has a carry from bit 3 or a borrow at bit 3, this flag is set to 1. It is reset to 0 in

all other cases.

(e) In-service priority flag (ISP)

This flag manages the priority of acknowledgeable maskable vectored interrupts. When ISP = 0, the

vectored interrupt whose priority is specified by the priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, and

PR1L) (see 21.3 (3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L)) to be low is

disabled. Whether the interrupt is actually acknowledged is controlled by the status of the interrupt enable

flag (IE).

(f) Carry flag (CY)

This flag stores overflow and underflow upon add/subtract instruction execution. It stores the shift-out

value upon rotate instruction execution and functions as a bit accumulator during bit manipulation

instruction execution.

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Stack pointer (SP)

This is a 16-bit register to hold the start address of the memory stack area. Only the internal high-speed RAM

area (FB00H to FEFFH) can be set as the stack area.

Figure 5-15. Stack Pointer Format

The SP is decremented ahead of write (save) to the stack memory and is incremented after read (reset) from

the stack memory.

Each stack operation saves/resets data as shown in Figures 5-16 and 5-17.

Caution Because RESET input makes SP contents indeterminate, be sure to initialize the SP before

instruction execution.

Figure 5-16. Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory

Figure 5-17. Data to Be Reset from Stack Memory

15 0

SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0SP

Interrupt and

BRK instruction

PSW

PC15 to PC8

PC7 to PC0

SP SP _ 2

SP _ 2

CALL, CALLF, and

CALLT instruction

PUSH rp instruction

SP _ 1

SP SP _ 2

SP _ 2

SP _ 1

PC7 to PC0

SP _ 3

SP _ 2

SP _ 1

SP SP _ 3

RETI and RETB

instruction

PSW

PC15 to PC8

PC7 to PC0

SP SP + 2

RET instructionPOP rp instruction

SP + 1

PC7 to PC0

SP SP + 2

SP + 1

SP + 2

SP + 1

SP SP + 3

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.2.2 General registers

General-purpose registers are mapped at particular addresses (FEE0H to FEFFH) of the data memory. They

consist of 4 banks, each bank containing eight 8-bit registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, and H).

Each register can be used as an 8-bit register and two 8-bit registers can be used in pairs as a 16-bit register (AX,

BC, DE, and HL).

They can be described in terms of function names (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL) and absolute names

(R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3).

of the 4-register bank configuration, an efficient program can be created by switching between a register for normal

processing and a register for interrupt requests for each bank.

Figure 5-18. General-Purpose Register Configuration

(a) Absolute name

(b) Function name

BANK0

BANK1

BANK2

BANK3

FEFFH

FEF8H

FEE0H

RP3

RP2

RP1

RP0

15 0 7 0

16-bit processing 8-bit processing

FEE0H

FEE8H

BANK0

BANK1

BANK2

BANK3

FEFFH

FEF8H

FEE0H

15 0 7 0

16-bit processing 8-bit processing

FEF0H

FEE8H

100

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.2.3 Special-Function Registers (SFRs)

Unlike a general-purpose register, each special-function register has a special function.

These registers are allocated in the FF00H to FFFFH area.

Special-function registers can be manipulated like general-purpose registers, with operation, transfer and bit

manipulation instructions. The manipulatable bit units, 1, 8, and 16, depend on the special-function register type.

Each manipulation bit unit can be specified as follows.

• 1-bit manipulation

Describe the symbol reserved by assembler for the 1-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr.bit).

This manipulation can also be specified using an address.

• 8-bit manipulation

Describe the symbol reserved by assembler for the 8-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr).

This manipulation can also be specified using an address.

• 16-bit manipulation

Describe the symbol reserved by assembler for the 16-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfrp).

When addressing an address, describe an even address.

Table 5-2 gives a list of special-function registers. The meanings of items in the table are as follows.

• Symbol

Symbol indicating the addresses of the special function register. These symbols are reserved words in the

RA78K0 and defined by header file sfrbit.h in the CC78K0, and can be used as the operands of instructions

when the RA78K0, ID78K0, ID78K0-NS, and SM78K0 are used.

• R/W

Indicates whether the corresponding special-function register can be read or written.

R/W: Read/write enabled

R: Read only

W: Write only

• Manipulatable bit units

√ indicates the bit units (1, 8, or 16 bits) in which the register can be manipulated. — indicates that the register

cannot be manipulated in the indicated bit units.

• After reset

Indicates each register status upon RESET input.

101

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Address Special-Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W After Reset

FF00H Port 0 P0 R/W √√ — 00H

FF01H Port 1 P1 √√ —

FF02H Port 2 P2 √√ —

FF03H Port 3 P3 √√ —

FF04H Port 4 P4 √√ — Undefined

FF05H Port 5 P5 √√ —

FF06H Port 6 P6 √√ —

FF07H Port 7 P7 √√ — 00H

FF0CH Port 12 P12 √√ —

FF0DH Port 13 P13 √√ —

FF10H Capture/compare register 00 CR00 — — √Undefined

FF11H

FF12H Capture/compare register 01 CR01 — — √

FF13H

FF14H 16-bit timer register TM0 R — — √0000H

FF15H

FF16H Compare register 10 CR10 R/W — √— Undefined

FF17H Compare register 20 CR20 — √—

FF18H 8-bit timer register 1 TMS TM1 R — √√00H

FF19H 8-bit timer register 2 TM2 — √

FF1AH Serial I/O shift register 0 SIO0 R/W — √— Undefined

FF1BH Serial I/O shift register 1 SIO1 — √—

FF1FH A/D conversion result register ADCR R — √—

FF20H Port mode register 0 PM0 R/W √√ — FFH

FF21H Port mode register 1 PM1 √√ —

FF22H Port mode register 2 PM2 √√ —

FF23H Port mode register 3 PM3 √√ —

FF25H Port mode register 5 PM5 √√ —

FF26H Port mode register 6 PM6 √√ —

FF27H Port mode register 7 PM7 √√ —

FF2CH Port mode register 12 PM12 √√ —

FF2DH Port mode register 13 PM13 √√ —

FF30H Real-time output buffer register L RTBL — √— 00H

FF31H Real-time output buffer register H RTBH — √—

FF34H Real-time output port mode register RTPM √√ —

FF36H Real-time output port control register RTPC √√ —

Table 5-2. Special-Function Register List (1/3)

Manipulatable Bit Unit

8 Bits

1 Bit 16 Bits

102

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Address Special-Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W After Reset

FF38H Correction address register 0Note CORAD0 R/W — — √0000H

FF39H

FF3AH Correction address register 1Note CORAD1 — — √

FF3BH

FF40H Timer clock select register 0 TCL0 √√ — 00H

FF41H Timer clock select register 1 TCL1 — √—

FF42H Timer clock select register 2 TCL2 — √—

FF43H Timer clock select register 3 TCL3 — √— 88H

FF47H Sampling clock select register SCS — √— 00H

FF48H 16-bit timer mode control register TMC0 √√ —

FF49H 8-bit timer mode control register 1 TMC1 √√ —

FF4AH Watch timer mode control register TMC2 √√ —

FF4CH Capture/compare control register 0 CRC0 √√ — 04H

FF4EH 16-bit timer output control register TOC0 √√ — 00H

FF4FH 8-bit timer output control register TOC1 √√ —

FF60H Serial operating mode register 0 CSIM0 √√ —

FF61H Serial bus interface control register SBIC √√ —

FF62H Slave address register SVA — √— Undefined

FF63H Interrupt timing specify register SINT √√ — 00H

FF68H Serial operating mode register 1 CSIM1 √√ —

FF69H

Automatic data transmit/receive control register

ADTC √√ —

FF6AH

Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer

ADTP — √—

FF6BH

Automatic data transmit/receive interval specify register

ADTI √√ —

FF70H

Asynchronous serial interface mode register

ASIM √√ —

FF71H

Asynchronous serial interface status register

ASIS R √√ —

FF72H Serial operating mode register 2 CSIM2 RW √√ —

FF73H Baud rate generator control register BRGC — √—

FF74H Transmit shift register TXS SIO2 W — √— FFH

Receive buffer register RXB R

FF75H Serial interface pin select register SIPS R/W √√ — 00H

FF80H A/D converter mode register ADM √√ — 01H

FF84H A/D converter input select register ADIS — √— 00H

FF8AH Correction control registerNote CORCN √√ —

FF90H D/A conversion value setting register 0 DACS0 — √—

FF91H D/A conversion value setting register 1 DACS1 — √—

FF98H D/A converter mode register DAM √√ —

Table 5-2. Special-Function Register List (2/3)

Manipulatable Bit Unit

8 Bits

1 Bit 16 Bits

Note This register is provided only in the

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A),

78F0058, and 78F0058Y.

103

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

IF0 √ 00H

Address Special-Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W After Reset

FFD0H to External access areaNote 1 R/W √√ — Undefined

FFDFH

FFE0H Interrupt request flag register 0L √√

FFE1H Interrupt request flag register 0H √√

FFE2H Interrupt request flag register 1L IF1L √√ —

FFE4H Interrupt mask flag register 0L √√

FFE5H Interrupt mask flag register 0H √√

FFE6H Interrupt mask flag register 1L MK1L √√ —

FFE8H Priority order specification flag register 0L √√

FFE9H Priority order specification flag register 0H √√

FFEAH Priority order specification flag register 1L PR1L √√ —

FFECH External interrupt mode register 0 INTM0 — √—

FFEDH External interrupt mode register 1 INTM1 — √—

FFF0H Internal memory size switching register IMS — √—Note 2

FFF2H Oscillation mode select register OSMS W — √—

FFF3H Pull-up resistor option register H PUOH R/W √√ —

FFF4H Internal expansion RAM size IXS W — √— 0AH

switching registerNote 3

FFF6H Key return mode register KRM √√ — 02H

FFF7H Pull-up resistor option register L PUOL √√ — 00H

FFF8H Memory expansion mode register MM √√ — 10H

FFF9H Watchdog timer mode register WDTM √√ — 00H

FFFAH

Oscillation stabilization time select register

OSTS — √—

FFFBH Processor clock control register PCC √√ —

IF0L

IF0H

MK0L

MK0H

PR0L

PR0H

Table 5-2. Special-Function Register List (3/3)

Manipulatable Bit Unit

8 Bits

1 Bit 16 Bits

MK0 √FFH

PR0 √

00H

R/W

04H

Notes 1. The external access area cannot be accessed using SFR addressing. Access the area using direct

addressing.

2. The value after reset depends on the product.

PD780053, 780053(A), 780053Y, 780053Y(A): C6H

PD780054, 780054(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A): C8H

PD780055, 780055(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A): CAH

PD780056, 780056(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A): CCH

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A): CFH

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y: CFH

3. This register is provided only in the

PD780058, 780058B, 780058B(A), 780058BY, 780058BY(A),

78F0058, and 78F0058Y.

104

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.3 Instruction Address Addressing

The instruction address is determined by the program counter (PC) contents. The contents of the PC are normally

incremented (+1 for each byte) automatically according to the number of bytes of an instruction to be fetched each

time another instruction is executed. When a branch instruction is executed, the branch destination information is

set to the PC and branched by the following addressing. (For details of instructions, refer to 78K/0 Instructions User’s

Manual (U12326E).

5.3.1 Relative addressing

[Function]

The value obtained by adding 8-bit immediate data (displacement value: jdisp8) of an instruction code to the

start address of the following instruction is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched. The

displacement value is treated as signed two’s complement data (–128 to +127) and bit 7 becomes a sign bit.

In the relative addressing modes, execution branches in a relative range of –128 to +127 from the first address

of the next instruction.

This function is carried out when the BR $addr16 instruction or a conditional branch instruction is executed.

[Illustration]

15 0

876

15 0

jdisp8

When S = 0, all bits of α are 0.

When S = 1, all bits of α are 1.

PC indicates the start address

of the instruction

after the BR instruction.

...

105

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.3.2 Immediate addressing

[Function]

Immediate data in the instruction word is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched.

This function is carried out when the CALL !addr16 or BR !addr16 or CALLF !addr11 instruction is executed.

The CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions can branch in the entire memory space. The CALLF !addr11

instruction branches to an area of addresses 0800H to 0FFFH.

[Illustration]

In the case of CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions

In the case of CALLF !addr11 instruction

15 0

CALL or BR

Low Addr.

High Addr.

15 0

10 to 8

11 10

00001

643

CALLF

7 to 0

106

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.3.3 Table indirect addressing

[Function]

The table contents (branch destination address) of the particular location to be addressed by bits 1 to 5 of the

immediate data of an operation code are transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched.

Before the CALLT [addr5] instruction is executed, table indirect addressing is performed. This instruction

references an address stored in the memory table at addresses 40H to 7FH, and can branch in the entire memory

space.

[Illustration]

15 1

15 0

Low Addr.

High Addr.

Memory (table)

Effective address + 1

Effective address 01

00000000

65 0

111

765 10

ta4 to 0

Operation code

107

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.3.4 Register addressing

[Function]

The register pair (AX) contents to be specified by an instruction word are transferred to the program counter (PC)

and branched.

This function is carried out when the BR AX instruction is executed.

[Illustration]

15 0

108

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4 Operand Address Addressing

The following methods are available to specify the register and memory (addressing) which undergo manipulation

during instruction execution.

5.4.1 Implied addressing

[Function]

The register which functions as an accumulator (A and AX) in the general-purpose register area is automatically

(illicitly) addressed.

In the

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries instruction words, the following instructions employ implied addressing.

Instruction Register to Be Specified by Implied Addressing

MULU Register A for multiplicand and AX register for product storage

DIVUW Register AX for dividend and quotient storage

ADJBA/ADJBS Register A for storage of numeric values which become decimal correction targets

ROR4/ROL4 Register A for storage of digit data which undergoes digit rotation

[Operand format]

Because implied addressing can be automatically employed with an instruction, no particular operand format is

necessary.

[Description example]

In the case of MULU X

With an 8-bit × 8-bit multiply instruction, the product of register A and register X is stored in AX. In this example,

the A and AX registers are specified by implied addressing.

109

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.2 Register addressing

[Function]

This addressing accesses a general-purpose register as an operand. The general-purpose register accessed

is specified by the register bank select flags (RBS0 and RBS1) and register specification code (Rn or RPn) in

an instruction code.

8-bit register is specified, one of the eight registers is specified by 3 bits in the operation code.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

r X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H

rp AX, BC, DE, HL

‘r’ and ‘rp’ can be described with function names (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL) as well as absolute

names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3).

[Description example]

MOV A, C; when selecting C register as r

Operation code 01100010

INCW DE; when selecting DE register pair as rp

Operation code 10000100

110

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.3 Direct addressing

[Function]

This addressing directly addresses the memory indicated by the immediate data in an instruction word.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

addr16 Label or 16-bit immediate data

[Description example]

MOV A, !0FE00H; when setting !addr16 to FE00H

Operation code 10001110 OP code

00000000 00H

11111110 FEH

[Illustration]

Memory

Opcode

addr16 (lower)

addr16 (higher)

111

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.4 Short direct addressing

[Function]

The memory to be manipulated in the fixed space is directly addressed with 8-bit data in an instruction word.

The fixed space to which this address is applied is a 256-byte space of addresses FE20H to FF1FH. An internal

RAM and special-function registers (SFRs) are mapped at FE20H to FEFFH and FF00H to FF1FH, respectively.

The SFR area (FF00H to FF1FH) to which short direct addressing is applied is a part of the entire SFR area.

Ports frequently accessed by the program, and the compare registers and capture registers of timer/event

counters are mapped to this area. These SFRs can be manipulated with a short byte length and few clocks.

When 8-bit immediate data is at 20H to FFH, bit 8 of an effective address is set to 0. When it is at 00H to 1FH,

bit 8 is set to 1. See [Illustration] on next page.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

saddr Label or immediate data of FE20H to FF1FH

saddrp Label or immediate data of FE20H to FF1FH (even address only)

112

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

[Description example]

MOV 0FE30H, #50H; when setting saddr to FE30H and immediate data to 50H

Operation code 00010001 OP code

00110000 30H (saddr-offset)

01010000 50H (immediate data)

[Illustration]

When 8-bit immediate data is 20H to FFH, α = 0

When 8-bit immediate data is 00H to 1FH, α = 1

15 0

Short direct memory

Effective Address 1111111

Opcode

saddr-offset

113

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.5 Special-Function Register (SFR) addressing

[Function]

The memory-mapped special-function registers (SFRs) are addressed with 8-bit immediate data in an instruction

word.

This addressing is applied to the 240-byte spaces FF00H to FFCFH and FFE0H to FFFFH. However, the SFRs

mapped at FF00H to FF1FH can be accessed with short direct addressing.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

sfr Special-function register name

sfrp 16-bit manipulatable special-function register name (even address only)

[Description example]

MOV PM0, A; when selecting PM0 (FF20H) as sfr

Operation code 11110110 OP code

00100000 20H (sfr-offset)

[Illustration]

15 0

SFR

Effective address 1111111

Opcode

sfr-offset

114

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.6 Register indirect addressing

[Function]

This addressing addresses the memory with the contents of a register pair specified as an operand. The register

pair to be accessed is specified by the register bank select flags (RBS0 and RBS1) and register pair specification

code in an instruction code. This addressing can be carried out for all the memory spaces.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

—[DE], [HL]

[Description example]

MOV A, [DE]; when selecting [DE] as register pair

Operation code 10000101

[Illustration]

15 08

7 0

Memory

Contents of addressed

memory are transferred.

Memory address specified

by register pair DE

115

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.7 Based addressing

[Function]

This addressing addresses the memory by adding 8-bit immediate data to the contents of the HL register pair

which is used as a base register and by using the result of the addition. The HL register pair to be accessed

is in the register bank specified by the register bank select flags (RBS0 and RBS1). The addition is performed

by expanding the offset data as a positive number to 16 bits. A carry from the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing

can be carried out for all the memory spaces.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

—[HL + byte]

[Description example]

MOV A, [HL + 10H]; when setting byte to 10H

Operation code 10101110

00010000

116

CHAPTER 5 CPU ARCHITECTURE

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

5.4.8 Based indexed addressing

[Function]

This addressing addresses the memory by adding the contents of the HL register, which is used as a base register,

to the contents of the B or C register specified in the instruction word, and by using the result of the addition.

The HL, B, and C registers to be accessed are registers in the register bank specified by the register bank select

flags (RBS0 and RBS1). The addition is performed by extending the contents of the B or C register to 16 bits

as a positive number. A carry from the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing can be carried out for all the memory

spaces.

[Operand format]

Identifier Description

—[HL + B], [HL + C]

[Description example]

In the case of MOV A, [HL + B]

Operation code 10101011

5.4.9 Stack addressing

[Function]

The stack area is indirectly addressed with the stack pointer (SP) contents.

This addressing method is automatically employed when the PUSH, POP, subroutine call and return instructions

are executed or the register is saved/reset upon generation of an interrupt request.

Stack addressing can be used to address the internal high-speed RAM area only.

[Description example]

In the case of PUSH DE

Operation code 10110101

117

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

6.1 Port Functions

The

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries incorporate two input ports and sixty-six I/O ports. Figure 6-1 shows

the port types. Every port can be manipulated in 1-bit and 8-bit units and can carry out considerably varied control

operations. Besides port functions, the ports can also serve as on-chip hardware I/O pins.

Figure 6-1. Port Types











Port 0

P00

P07











Port 1

P10

P17











Port 2

P20

P27











Port 3

P30

P37





































Port 13







Port 7

Port 12

Port 6

Port 5

P50

P57

P60

P67

P70

P72

P120

P127

P130

P131

P05











Port 4

P40

P47

118

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Pin Name Function Alternate Function

P00 Port 0 Input only INTP0/TI00

P01 7-bit I/O port INTP1/TI01

P02 INTP2

P03 INTP3

P04 INTP4

P05 INTP5

P07 Input only XT1

P10 to P17 Port 1 ANI0 to ANI7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

P20 SI1

P21 SO1

P22 SCK1

P23 STB/TxD1

P24 BUSY/RxD1

P25 SI0/SB0

P26 SO0/SB1

P27 SCK0

P30 TO0

P31 TO1

P32 TO2

P33 TI1

P34 TI2

P35 PCL

P36 BUZ

P37 —

P40 to P47 Port 4 AD0 to AD7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified i 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

The test input flag (KRIF) is set to 1 by falling edge detection.

P50 to P57 Port 5 A8 to A15

8-bit I/O port

LED can be driven directly.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

Table 6-1. Port Functions (

PD780058 Subseries) (1/2)

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be connected by setting

software.

Port 2

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

Port 3

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

119

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 6-1. Port Functions (

PD780058 Subseries) (2/2)

Pin Name Function Alternate Function

P60 —

P61

P62

P63

P64 RD

P65 WR

P66 WAIT

P67 ASTB

P70 SI2/RxD0

P71 SO2/TxD0

P72 SCK2/ASCK

P120 to P127 Port 12 RTP0 to RTP7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

P130 and P131

Port 13 ANO0, ANO1

2-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

Port 7

3-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

N-ch open-drain I/O port

On-chip pull-up resistors can be specified

by mask option. (Mask ROM version only).

LEDs can be driven directly.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be connected by setting

software.

Port 6

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

120

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 6-2. Port Functions (

PD780058Y Subseries) (1/2)

Pin Name Function Alternate Function

P00 Input only INTP0/TI00

P01 INTP1/TI01

P02 INTP2

P03 INTP3

P04 INTP4

P05 INTP5

P07 Input only XT1

P10 to P17 Port 1 ANI0 to ANI7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

P20 SI1

P21 SO1

P22 SCK1

P23 STB/TxD1

P24 BUSY/RxD1

P25 SI0/SB0/SDA0

P26 SO0/SB1/SDA1

P27 SCK0/SCL

P30 TO0

P31 TO1

P32 TO2

P33 TI1

P34 TI2

P35 PCL

P36 BUZ

P37 —

P40 to P47 Port 4 AD0 to AD7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 8-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

The test input flag (KRIF) is set to 1 by falling edge detection.

P50 to P57 Port 5 A8 to A15

8-bit I/O port

LEDs can be driven directly.

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

Port 0

7-bit I/O port Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be connected by setting

software.

Port 2

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

Port 3

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

121

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 6-2. Port Functions (

PD780058Y Subseries) (2/2)

Pin Name Function Alternate Function

P60 —

P61

P62

P63

P64 RD

P65 WR

P66 WAIT

P67 ASTB

P70 SI2/RxD0

P71 SO2/TxD0

P72 SCK2/ASCK

P120 to P127 Port 12 RTP0 to RTP7

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

P130 and P131

Port 13 ANO0, ANO1

2-bit I/O port

Input/output mode can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

N-ch open-drain I/O port

On-chip pull-up resistors can be specified

by mask option. (Mask ROM version only).

LEDs can be driven directly.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be connected by setting

software.

Port 6

8-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

Port 7

3-bit I/O port

Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.

If used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected by setting software.

122

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2 Port Configuration

A port consists of the following hardware.

Table 6-3. Port Configuration

Item Configuration

Control register Port mode register (PMm: m = 0 to 3, 5 to 10, 12, 13)

Pull-up resistor option register (PUOH, PUOL)

Memory expansion mode register (MM)Note

Key return mode register (KRM)

Port Total: 68 (Input: 2, I/O: 66)

Pull-up resistor • Mask ROM version

Total: 66 (software specifiable: 62, mask option: 4)

• Flash memory version

Total: 62

Note MM specifies the input/output mode of port 4.

6.2.1 Port 0

Port 0 is a 7-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P01 to P05 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 0 (PM0). Pins P00 and P07 are input-only ports. When pins P01 to P05 are used as input

ports, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected to them in 6-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Alternate functions include external interrupt request input, external count clock input to the timer and crystal

connection for subsystem clock oscillation.

RESET input sets port 0 to input mode.

Figures 6-2 and 6-3 show block diagrams of port 0.

Caution Because port 0 also serves as external interrupt request input, when the port function output

mode is specified and the output level is changed, the interrupt request flag is set. Thus, when

the output mode is used, set the interrupt mask flag to 1.

123

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 6-2. Block Diagram of P00 and P07

RD: Port 0 read signal

Figure 6-3. Block Diagram of P01 to P05

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 0 read signal

WR: Port 0 write signal

P00/INTP0/TI00,

P07/XT1

Internal bus

P-ch

WRPM

WRPORT

WRPUO

VDD0

P01/INTP1/TI01,

P02/INTP2

P05/INTP5

Selector

PUO0

Output latch

(P01 to P05)

PM01 to PM05

Internal bus

124

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.2 Port 1

Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 1 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units using port

mode register 1 (PM1). When pins P10 to P17 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be connected

to them in 8-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Alternate functions include A/D converter analog input.

RESET input sets port 1 to input mode.

Figure 6-4 shows a block diagram of port 1.

Caution A pull-up resistor cannot be used for pins used as A/D converter analog inputs.

Figure 6-4. Block Diagram of P10 to P17

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 1 read signal

WR: Port 1 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

P10/ANI0

P17/ANI7

Selector

PUO1

Output latch

(P10 to P17)

PM10 to PM17

Internal bus

125

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.3 Port 2 (

PD780058 Subseries)

Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P20 to P27 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 2 (PM2). When pins P20 to P27 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can

be connected to them in 8-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Alternate functions include serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, automatic transmit/receive busy input, and strobe

output.

RESET input sets port 2 to input mode.

Figures 6-5 and 6-6 show a block diagram of port 2.

Cautions 1. When used as serial interface pins, set input/output and the output latch according to the

function. For the setting method, see Figure 16-4 Format of Serial Operating Mode Register

0, Figure 18-3 Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 1, and Table 19-2 Serial Interface

Channel 2 Operating Mode Settings.

2. When reading the pin state in SBI mode, set the PM2n bit of PM2 to 1 (n = 5, 6) (See the

description of (10) Judging busy state of slave in section 16.4.3 SBI mode operation).

Figure 6-5. Block Diagram of P20, P21, and P23 to P26

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 2 read signal

WR: Port 2 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO2

Output latch

(P20, P21, P23 to P26)

PM20, PM21

PM23 to PM26

Internal bus

Alternate function

P20/SI1,

P21/SO1,

P23/STB/TxD1,

P24/BUSY/RxD1,

P25/SI0/SB0,

P26/SO0/SB1

126

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 6-6. Block Diagram of P22 and P27

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 2 read signal

WR: Port 2 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO2

Output latch

(P22, P27)

PM22, PM27

Internal bus

Alternate function

P22/SCK1,

P27/SCK0

127

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.4 Port 2 (

PD780058Y Subseries)

Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P20 to P27 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 2 (PM2). When pins P20 to P27 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can

be connected to them in 8-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Alternate functions include serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, automatic transmit/receive busy input, and strobe

output.

RESET input sets port 2 to input mode.

Figures 6-7 and 6-8 show a block diagram of port 2.

Caution When used as serial interface pins, set input/output and the output latch according to the

function. For the setting method, see Figure 17-4 Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 0,

Figure 18-3 Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 1, and Table 19-2 Serial Interface Channel

2 Operating Mode Settings.

Figure 6-7. Block Diagram of P20, P21, and P23 to P26

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 2 read signal

WR: Port 2 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO2

Output latch

(P20, P21, P23 to P26)

PM20, PM21

PM23 to PM26

Internal bus

Alternate function

P20/SI1,

P21/SO1,

P23/STB/TxD1,

P24/BUSY/RxD1,

P25/SI0/SB0/SDA0,

P26/SO0/SB1/SDA1

128

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 6-8. Block Diagram of P22 and P27

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 2 read signal

WR: Port 2 write signal

P-ch

WRPM

WRPORT

WRPUO

VDD0

Selector

PUO2

Output latch

(P22 and P27)

PM22, PM27

Internal bus

Alternate function

P22/SCK1,

P27/SCK0/SCL

129

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.5 Port 3

Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P30 to P37 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 3 (PM3). When pins P30 to P37 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can

be connected to them in 8-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Alternate functions include timer I/O, clock output and buzzer output.

RESET input sets port 3 to input mode.

Figure 6-9 shows a block diagram of port 3.

Figure 6-9. Block Diagram of P30 to P37

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 3 read signal

WR: Port 3 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO3

Output latch

(P30 to P37)

PM30 to PM37

Internal bus

Alternate function

P30/TO0

P32/TO2,

P33/TI1,

P34/TI2,

P35/PCL,

P36/BUZ,

P37

130

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.6 Port 4

Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P40 to P47 can be set to input or output mode in 8-bit units

using the memory expansion mode register (MM). When pins P40 to P47 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-

up resistor can be connected to them in 8-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

The test input flag (KRIF) can be set to 1 by detecting a falling edge.

Alternate functions include an address/data bus function in external memory expansion mode.

RESET input sets port 4 to input mode.

Figures 6-10 and 6-11 show a block diagram of port 4 and of the falling edge detector, respectively.

Figure 6-10. Block Diagram of P40 to P47

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

MM: Memory expansion mode register

RD: Port 4 read signal

WR: Port 4 write signal

Figure 6-11. Block Diagram of Falling Edge Detector

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO4

Output latch

(P40 to P47)

Internal bus

P40/AD0

P47/AD7

P40

P41

P42

P43

P44

P45

P46

P47

Falling edge detector

KRMK

KRIF set signal

Standby release

signal

131

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.7 Port 5

Port 5 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P50 to P57 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units

using the port mode register 5 (PM5). When pins P50 to P57 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor

can be connected to them in 8-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Port 5 can drive LEDs directly.

Alternate functions include an address bus function in external memory expansion mode.

RESET input sets port 5 to input mode.

Figure 6-12 shows a block diagram of port 5.

Figure 6-12. Block Diagram of P50 to P57

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 5 read signal

WR: Port 5 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO5

Output latch

(P50 to P57)

PM50 to PM57

Internal bus

P50/A8

P57/A15

132

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.8 Port 6

Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P60 to P67 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 6 (PM6).

This port has functions related to pull-up resistors as shown below. These functions differ depending on whether

the higher 4 bits or lower 4 bits of a port are used, and whether the mask ROM model or flash memory model is used.

Table 6-4. Pull-up Resistor of Port 6

Higher 4 Bits (P64 to P67 Pins) Lower 4 Bits (P60 to P63 Pins)

Mask ROM On-chip pull-up resistor can be connected in 4-bit Pull-up resistor can be connected in 1-bit

version units by PUO6 units by mask option

Flash memory version Pull-up resistor is not connected

PUO6: Bit 6 of pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL)

Pins P60 to P63 can drive LEDs directly.

Alternate functions include a control signal output function in external memory expansion mode.

RESET input sets port 6 to input mode.

Figures 6-13 and 6-14 show block diagrams of port 6.

Cautions 1. When an external wait is not used in external memory expansion mode, P66 can be used as

an I/O port.

2. The value of the low-level input leakage current flowing to the P60 to P63 pins differ

depending on the following conditions:

[Mask ROM version]

• When pull-up resistor is connected: Always –3

A (MAX.)

• When pull-up resistor is not connected

· For duration of 1.5 clocks (no wait)Note when instruction such as MOV instruction to

read port 6 (P6) and port mode register 6 (PM6) is executed: –200

A (MAX.)

· Other than above: –3

A (MAX.)

[Flash memory version]

• For duration of 1.5 clocks (no wait)Note when instruction such as MOV instruction to read

port 6 (P6) and port mode register 6 (PM6) is executed: –200

A (MAX.)

• Other than above: –3

A (MAX.)

Note At this time, on-chip pull-up resistors are enabled.

133

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 6-13. Block Diagram of P60 to P63

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 6 read signal

WR: Port 6 write signal

Figure 6-14. Block Diagram of P64 to P67

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 6 read signal

WR: Port 6 write signal

PORT

DD0

Selector

Output latch

(P60 to P63)

PM60 to PM63

Internal bus

P60 to P63

Mask option resistor

Mask ROM versions

only. Flash memory

versions have no

pull-up resistors.

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO6

Output latch

(P64 to P67)

PM64 to PM67

Internal bus

P64/RD,

P65/WR,

P66/WAIT,

P67/ASTB

134

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.9 Port 7

This is a 3-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P70 to P72 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units using

port mode register 7 (PM7). When pins P70 to P72 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor can be

connected in 3-bit units using pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Alternate functions include serial interface channel 2 data I/O and clock I/O.

RESET input sets port 7 to input mode.

Figures 6-15 and 6-16 show a block diagram of port 7.

Caution When used as serial interface pins, set input/output and the output latch according to the

function. For the setting method, see Table 19-2 Serial Interface Channel 2 Operating Mode

Setting.

Figure 6-15. Block Diagram of P70

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 7 read signal

WR: Port 7 write signal

P-ch

WRPM

WRPORT

WRPUO

VDD0

Selector

PUO7

Output latch

(P70)

PM70

Internal bus

P70/SI2/RxD0

135

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 6-16. Block Diagram of P71 and P72

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 7 read signal

WR: Port 7 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO7

Output latch

(P71 and P72)

PM71, PM72

Internal bus

Alternate function

P71/SO2/TxD0,

P72/SCK2/ASCK

136

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.10 Port 12

This is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P120 to P127 can be set to input or output mode in 1-bit units

using port mode register 12 (PM12). When pins P120 to P127 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up resistor

can be connected in 8-bit units using pull-up resistor option register H (PUOH).

These pins have an alternate function, serving as real-time outputs.

RESET input sets port 12 to input mode.

Figure 6-17 shows a block diagram of port 12.

Figure 6-17. Block Diagram of P120 to P127

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 12 read signal

WR: Port 12 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO12

Output latch

(P120 to P127)

PM120 to PM127

Internal bus

P120/RTP0

P127/RTP7

137

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.2.11 Port 13

This is a 2-bit I/O port with an output latch. Pins P130 and P131 can be set to input mode/output mode in 1-bit

units using port mode register 13 (PM13). When pins P130 and P131 are used as an input port, an on-chip pull-up

resistor can be connected in 2-bits using pull-up resistor option register H (PUOH).

These pins have an alternate function, serving as D/A converter analog outputs.

RESET input sets port 13 to input mode.

Figure 6-18 shows a block diagram of port 13.

Caution When only one of the D/A converter channels is used with AVREF1 < VDD0, the other pins that

are not used as analog outputs must be set as follows:

• Set the PM13 bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 1 (input mode) and connect the pin

to VSS0.

• Clear the PM13x bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 0 (output mode) and the output latch

to 0, and output a low level from the pin.

Figure 6-18. Block Diagram of P130 and P131

PUO: Pull-up resistor option register

PM: Port mode register

RD: Port 13 read signal

WR: Port 13 write signal

P-ch

PORT

PUO

DD0

Selector

PUO13

Output latch

(P130 and P131)

PM130, PM131

Internal bus

P130/ANO0,

P131/ANO1

138

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.3 Port Function Control Registers

The following four types of registers control the ports.

•Port mode registers (PM0 to PM3, PM5 to PM7, PM12, PM13)

•Pull-up resistor option registers (PUOH, PUOL)

•Memory expansion mode register (MM)

•Key return mode register (KRM)

(1) Port mode registers (PM0 to PM3, PM5 to PM7, PM12, PM13)

These registers are used to set port input/output in 1-bit units.

PM0 to PM3, PM5 to PM7, PM12, and PM13 are independently set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation

instruction

RESET input sets these registers to FFH.

When port pins are used as the alternate-function pins, set the port mode register and output latch according

to Table 6-5.

Cautions 1. Pins P00 and P07 are input-only pins.

2. As port 0 has an alternate function as external interrupt request input, when the port

function output mode is specified and the output level is changed, the interrupt request

flag is set. When the output mode is used, therefore, the interrupt mask flag should be

set to 1 beforehand.

3. The memory expansion mode register (MM) specifies the input/output mode of pins P40

to P47.

139

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 6-5. Port Mode Register and Output Latch Settings When Using Alternate Functions

P00 INTP0 Input 1 (fixed) None

TI00 Input 1 (fixed) None

P01 INTP1 Input 1 ×

TI01 Input 1 ×

P02 to P05 INTP2 to INTP5 Input 1 ×

P07Note 1 XT1 Input 1 (fixed) None

P10 to P17Note 1 ANI0 to ANI7 Input 1 ×

P30 to P32 TO0 to TO2 Output 0 0

P33, P34 TI1, TI2 Input 1 ×

P35 PCL Output 0 0

P36 BUZ Output 0 0

P40 to P47 AD0 to AD7 I/O ×Note 2

P50 to P57 A8 to A15 Output ×Note 2

P64 RD Output ×Note 2

P65 WR Output ×Note 2

P66 WAIT Input ×Note 2

P67 ASTB Output ×Note 2

P120 to P127 RTP0 to RTP7 Output 0 Desired value

P130, P131Note 1 ANO0, ANO1 Output 1 ×

Alternate Function

Name

P××PM××

I/O

Pin Name

Notes 1. If these ports are read out when these pins are used in the alternate-function mode, undefined values

are read.

2. When the P40 to P47 pins, P50 to P57 pins, and P64 to P67 pins are used for alternate functions,

set the function by the memory extension mode register (MM).

Cautions 1. When not using an external wait in the external memory extension mode, the P66 pin can be

used as an I/O port.

2. When port 2 and port 7 are used for the serial interface, input/output and the output latch

must be set according to the function. For the setting methods, see Figure 16-4 Format

of Serial Operation Mode Register 0, Figure 17-4 Format of Serial Operation Mode

Interface Channel 2 Operating Mode Settings.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

140

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 6-19. Port Mode Register Format

PM0

PM1

PM2

1 1 PM03 PM02 PM01 1

76543210Symbol

PM3

PM5

FF20H

FF21H

FF22H

FF23H

FF25H

FFH

R/W

Address

After

reset R/W

PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10

PM27 PM26 PM25 PM24 PM23 PM22 PM21 PM20

PM37 PM36 PM35 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30

PM57 PM56 PM55 PM54 PM53 PM52 PM51 PM50

PM6

PM7

FF26H

FF27H

FFH

R/W

PM67 PM66 PM65 PM64 PM63 PM62 PM61 PM60

1 1 1 1 1 PM72 PM71 PM70

PM05 PM04

PM12

PM13

PMmn Pmn pin I/O mode selection

(m = 0 to 3, 5 to 7, 12, 13 : n = 0 to 7)

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

FF2CH

FF2DH

FFH

R/W

PM122 PM121 PM120

111111

PM131 PM130

PM125 PM124 PM123PM127 PM126

141

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Pull-up resistor option registers (PUOH, PUOL)

These registers are used to set whether to use an on-chip pull-up resistor at each port or not. A pull-up resistor

is internally used at bits set to the input mode in a port where on-chip pull-up resistor use has been specified

with PUOH, PUOL. No on-chip pull-up resistors can be used for bits set to the output mode or bits used as

an analog input pin, irrespective of the PUOH or PUOL setting.

PUOH and PUOL are set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears these registers to 00H.

Cautions 1. Pins P00 and P07 do not incorporate a pull-up resistor.

2. When ports 1, 4, 5, and pins P64 to P67 are used as alternate-function pins, an on-chip

pull-up resistor cannot be used even if the PUOm bit of PUOH, PUOL (m = 1, 4 to 6) is

set to 1.

3. Pins P60 to P63 can be connected to pull-up resistors by a mask option only for mask

ROM versions.

Figure 6-20. Format of Pull-up Resistor Option Register

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 to 3, 6, and 7 of PUOH to 0.

PUO7 PUO6 PUO5 PUO4 PUO2 PUO1 PUO0PUOL

PUOm Pm internal pull-up resistor selection

(m = 0 to 7, 12, 13)

Internal pull-up resistor not used

Internal pull-up resistor used

FFF7H 00H R/W

<7> <6> <5> <4>

PUO3

<3> <2> <0>

<1>

PUO13 PUO12 0

00PUOH FFF3H 00H R/W

7 6 <5> <4>Symbol Address

After

reset R/W

76 3 2 0

142

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Memory expansion mode register (MM)

This register is used to set the input/output mode of port 4.

MM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets MM to 10H.

Figure 6-21. Format of Memory Expansion Mode Register

Note The full address mode allows external expansion for all areas of the 64 KB address space, except the

internal ROM, RAM, SFR, and use-prohibited areas.

Remarks 1. Pins P60 to P63 enter the port mode in both the single-chip and memory expansion mode.

2. Besides setting port 4 input/output mode, MM also sets the wait count and external expansion

area.

0 0 PW1 0MM FFF8H 10H R/W

76 543 2Symbol Address

After

reset R/W

PW0 MM2 MM1 MM0

MM2 MM1 MM0

000

001

011

100

101

111

Other than above Setting prohibited

Single-chip/memory

expansion mode

selection

Single-chip mode

256-byte

mode

4 KB

mode

16 KB

mode

Full

Note

address

mode

Memory

expansion

mode

AD0 to AD7

Input

Out-

put

Port

mode

P40 to P47

P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67 pin state

PW1 PW0

Wait control

No wait

Wait (one wait state inserted)

Setting prohibited

Wait control by external wait pin

P56, P57 P64 to P67

Port mode

A14, A15

A12, A13

P64 = RD

P65 = WR

P66 = WAIT

P67 = ASTB

P50 to P53 P54, P55

A8 to A11

143

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Key return mode register (KRM)

This register sets enabling/disabling of standby function release by a key return signal (falling edge detection

of port 4).

KRM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets KRM to 02H.

Figure 6-22. Format of Key Return Mode Register

Caution When falling edge detection of port 4 is used, KRIF should be cleared to 0 (it is not cleared

to 0 automatically).

KRIF Key return signal detection flag

Not detected

Detected (falling edge detection of port 4)

000 0KRM FFF6H

76 543 2Symbol <1>

0 KRMK KRIF

<0>

KRMK Standby mode control by key return signal

Standby mode release enabled

Standby mode release disabled

Address

After

reset R/W

02H R/W

144

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.4 Port Operations

Port operations differ depending on whether the input or output mode is set, as shown below.

6.4.1 Writing to I/O port

(1) Output mode

A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, and the output latch contents are output from

the pin.

Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.

(2) Input mode

A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status

does not change.

Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.

Caution In the case of a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction, although a single bit is manipulated,

the port is accessed as an 8-bit unit. Therefore, on a port with a mixture of input and output

pins, the output latch contents for pins specified as input are undefined, even for bits other

than the manipulated bit.

6.4.2 Reading from I/O port

(1) Output mode

The output latch contents are read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change.

(2) Input mode

The pin status is read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change.

6.4.3 Operations on I/O port

(1) Output mode

An operation is performed on the output latch contents, and the result is written to the output latch. The output

latch contents are output from the pins.

Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.

(2) Input mode

The output latch contents are undefined, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does not change.

Caution In the case of a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction, although a single bit is manipulated,

the port is accessed as an 8-bit unit. Therefore, on a port with a mixture of input and output

pins, the output latch contents for pins specified as input are undefined, even for bits other

than the manipulated bit.

145

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

6.5 Selection of Mask Option

The following mask option is provided in mask ROM versions. The flash memory versions have no mask options.

Table 6-6. Comparison Between Mask ROM Version and Flash Memory Version

Pin Name Mask ROM Version Flash Memory Version

Mask option for pins P60 to P63 On-chip pull-up resistors can be selected in 1-bit units. No on-chip pull-up resistor

146 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

7.1 Clock Generator Functions

The clock generator generates the clock to be supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware. The following two

types of system clock oscillators are available.

(1) Main system clock oscillator

This circuit oscillates at frequencies of 1 to 5.0 MHz. Oscillation can be stopped by executing the STOP

instruction or setting the processor clock control register (PCC).

(2) Subsystem clock oscillator

The circuit oscillates at a frequency of 32.768 kHz. Oscillation cannot be stopped. If the subsystem clock

oscillator is not used, not using the internal feedback resistor can be set by the processor clock control register

(PCC). This enables a decrease in the power consumption in STOP mode.

7.2 Clock Generator Configuration

The clock generator consists of the following hardware.

Table 7-1. Clock Generator Configuration

Item Configuration

Control registers Processor clock control register (PCC)

Oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

Oscillator Main system clock oscillator

Subsystem clock oscillator

147

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 7-1. Clock Generator Block Diagram

Subsystem

clock

oscillator

Main

system

clock

oscillator

XT2

XT1/P07

FRC

STOP

MCC FRC CLS CSS

PCC2 PCC1

Internal bus

Standby

controller

To INTP0

sampling clock

Prescaler

Clock to

peripheral

hardware

Prescaler

Oscillation mode

select register

Watch timer,

clock output

function

CPU clock

CPU

)

Wait

controller

Scaler

Selector

MCS

Processor clock control register

PCC0

Selector

1/2

148

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.3 Clock Generator Control Registers

The clock generator is controlled by the following two registers.

• Processor clock control register (PCC)

• Oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

(1) Processor clock control register (PCC)

PCC sets the CPU clock selection, division ratio, main system clock oscillator operation/stop and whether to

use the subsystem clock oscillator internal feedback resistorNote.

PCC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets PCC to 04H.

Note The feedback resistor is necessary for adjusting the bias point of an oscillated waveform to the middle

level of the supply voltage. Only when the subsystem clock is not used, the current consumption in

the STOP mode can be further reduced by setting bit 6 (FRC) of PCC to 1.

Figure 7-2. Subsystem Clock Feedback Resistor

FRC

P-ch

Feedback resistor

XT1 XT2

149

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 7-3. Format of Processor Clock Control Register

Notes 1. Bit 5 is a read-only bit.

2. This bit can be set to 1 only when the subsystem clock is not used.

3. When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock, MCC should be used to stop the main

system clock oscillation. A STOP instruction should not be used.

Caution Be sure to clear bit 3 to 0.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

4. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

MCC FRC CLS CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0PCC

CLS

Main system clock

Subsystem clock

FFFBH 04H R/W

Note 1

<7> <6> <5> <4>Symbol Address

After

reset R/W

32 0

CSS

PCC2 CPU cIock selection (f

CPU

)

PCC1 PCC0

CPU clock status

Setting prohibitedOther than above

FRC

Internal feedback resistor used

Internal feedback resistor not used

Note 2

Subsystem clock feedback resistor selection

MCC

Oscillation possible

Oscillation stopped

Main system clock oscillation control

Note 3

R/W

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

150

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

The fastest instruction of the

PD780058, 780058Y Subseries is executed in 2 CPU clocks. Therefore, the

relationship between the CPU clock (fCPU) and minimum instruction execution time is as shown in Table 7-

Table 7-2. Relationship Between CPU Clock and Minimum Instruction Execution Time

CPU Clock (fCPU) Minimum Instruction

Execution Time: 2/fCPU

fX0.4

fX/2 0.8

fX/221.6

fX/233.2

fX/246.4

fX/2512.8

fXT/2 122

fX = 5.0 MHz, fXT = 32.768 kHz

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

151

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Cautions 1. Writing to OSMS should be performed only immediately after reset signal release and before

peripheral hardware operation starts. As shown in Figure 7-5 below, writing data (including

the same data as previously) to OSMS causes a main system clock cycle delay of up to 2/

fX during the write operation. Therefore, if this register is written during the operation, in

peripheral hardware which operates on the main system clock, a temporary error occurs in

the count clock cycle of timer, etc. In addition, because the oscillation mode is changed by

this register, the clock for peripheral hardware as well as that for the CPU is switched.

Figure 7-5. Main System Clock Waveform due to Writing to OSMS

2. When writing 1 to MCS, VDD must be 2.7 V or higher before the write operation.

Remark fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

(2) Oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

This register specifies whether the clock output from the main system clock oscillator without passing through

the divider is used as the main system clock, or the clock output via the divider is used as the main system

clock.

OSMS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears OSMS to 00H.

Figure 7-4. Format of Oscillation Mode Selection Register

Write to OSMS

(MCS 0)

Max. 2/f

Operating at f

= f

/2 (MCS = 0) Operating at f

= f

/2 (MCS = 0)

MCS Main system clock divider control

Divider used

Divider not used

000 0OSMS FFF2H

76 543 2Symbol 1

0 MCS

Address

After

reset R/W

00H W

152

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.4 System Clock Oscillator

7.4.1 Main system clock oscillator

The main system clock oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator or a ceramic resonator (standard: 5.0 MHz)

connected to the X1 and X2 pins.

External clocks can be input to the main system clock oscillator. In this case, input a clock signal to the X1 pin

and the inverse signal to the X2 pin.

Figure 7-6 shows an external circuit of the main system clock oscillator.

Figure 7-6. External Circuit of Main System Clock Oscillator

(a) Crystal and ceramic oscillation (b) External clock

Cautions 1. Do not execute the STOP instruction or set MCC (bit 7 of the processor clock control register

(PCC)) to 1 if an external clock is used. Otherwise, the operation of the main system clock

will be stopped and the X2 pin will be pulled up to VDD1.

2. When using a main system clock oscillator and a subsystem clock oscillator, carry out wiring

in the broken line area in Figures 7-6 and 7-7 to prevent any effects from wiring capacities.

• Minimize the wiring length.

• Do not allow wiring to intersect with other signal conductors. Do not allow wiring to come

near changing high current.

• Set the potential of the grounding position of the oscillator capacitor to that of VSS1. Do

not ground to any ground pattern where high current is present.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

Crystal

ceramic resonator

External

clock

VSS1

153

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.4.2 Subsystem clock oscillator

The subsystem clock oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator (standard: 32.768 kHz) connected to the XT1

and XT2 pins.

External clocks can be input to the main system clock oscillator. In this case, input a clock signal to the XT1 pin

and an antiphase clock signal to the XT2 pin.

Figure 7-7 shows an external circuit of the subsystem clock oscillator.

Figure 7-7. External Circuit of Subsystem Clock Oscillator

(a) Crystal oscillation (b) External clock

Caution When using a main system clock oscillator and a subsystem clock oscillator, carry out wiring

in the broken line area in Figures 7-6 and 7-7 to prevent any effects from wiring capacities.

• Minimize the wiring length.

• Do not allow wiring to intersect with other signal conductors. Do not allow wiring to come near

changing high current.

• Set the potential of the grounding position of the oscillator capacitor to that of VSS1. Do not

ground to any ground pattern where high current is present.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

Take special note of the fact that the subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude

circuit for reducing current consumption.

External

Clock

XT2

XT1

PD74HCU04

XT2

XT1

32.768

kHz

SS1

154

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.4.3 Example of resonator with bad connection

Figure 7-8 shows examples of resonators with bad connections.

Figure 7-8. Examples of Resonator with Bad Connection (1/2)

(a) Too long wiring (b) Crossed signal lines

High

Current

ICX2

VSS1

Pnm

High Current

SS1

X1 IC

VSS1

PORTn

(n = 0 to 7, 12, 13)

VSS1

of oscillator (potential at points A, B,

and C fluctuates)

Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert

resistors in series on the XT2 side.

155

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 7-8. Examples of Resonator with Bad Connection (2/2)

(e) Signals are fetched

ICX1X2

VSS1

Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert

resistors in series on the XT2 side.

Caution If XT2 and XT1 are wired in parallel, the cross-talk noise of X1 may increase with XT2, resulting

in malfunction. To prevent this, it is recommended to wire XT2 and X1 so that they are not in

parallel, and to connect the IC pin between XT2 and X1 directly to VSS1.

7.4.4 Divider

The divider divides the main system clock oscillator output (fXX) and generates various clocks.

7.4.5 When not using subsystem clock

If it is not necessary to use the subsystem clock for low power consumption operations and clock operations,

connect the XT1 and XT2 pins as follows.

XT1: Connect to VDD0

XT2: Leave open

In this state, however, some current may leak via the internal feedback resistor of the subsystem clock oscillator

when the main system clock stops. To suppress the leakage current, disconnect the above internal feedback resistor

by setting bit 6 (FRC) of the processor clock control register (PCC) to 1. In this case also, connect the XT1 and XT2

pins as described above.

156

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.5 Clock Generator Operations

The clock generator generates the following clocks and controls the CPU operating mode including the standby

mode.

•Main system clock fXX

•Subsystem clock fXT

•CPU clock fCPU

•Clock to peripheral hardware

The following clock generator functions and operations are determined by the processor clock control register

(PCC) and the oscillation mode selection register (OSMS).

(a) Upon generation of the RESET signal, the lowest speed mode of the main system clock (12.8

s when operated

at 5.0 MHz) is selected (PCC = 04H, OSMS = 00H). Main system clock oscillation stops while a low level

is applied to the RESET pin.

(b) With the main system clock selected, one of the six types of minimum instruction execution times (0.4

s, 0.8

s, 1.6

s, 3.2

s, 6.4

s, 12.8

s @ 5.0 MHz) can be selected by setting the PCC and OSMS registers.

system where the subsystem clock is not used, the current consumption in the STOP mode can be further

reduced by specifying with not to use the feedback resistor using bit 6 (FRC) of the PCC register.

(d) The PCC register can be used to select the subsystem clock and to operate the system on a low current

consumption (122

s when operated at 32.768 kHz).

(e) With the subsystem clock selected, main system clock oscillation can be stopped by the PCC register. The

HALT mode can be used, but not the STOP mode. (Subsystem clock oscillation cannot be stopped.)

(f) The main system clock is divided and supplied to the peripheral hardware. The subsystem clock is supplied

to the 16-bit timer/event counter, watch timer, and clock output functions only. Thus, the 16-bit timer/event

counter (when selecting watch timer output as the count clock when operating on the subsystem clock), the

watch function, and the clock output function can also be continued in the standby state. However, since all

other peripheral hardware operate on the main system clock, the peripheral hardware also stops if the main

system clock is stopped (except external input clock operation).

157

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.5.1 Main system clock operations

When operating on the main system clock (with bit 5 (CLS) of the processor clock control register (PCC) cleared

to 0), the following operations are carried out by PCC settings.

(a) Because the operation guaranteed instruction execution speed depends on the power supply voltage, the

minimum instruction execution time can be changed by bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) of the PCC register.

(b) If bit 7 (MCC) of the PCC register is set to 1 when operating on the main system clock, the main system clock

oscillation does not stop. When bit 4 (CSS) of PCC is set to 1 and the operation is subsequently switched

to the subsystem clock (CLS = 1), the main system clock oscillation stops (see Figure 7-9).

Figure 7-9. Main System Clock Stop Function (1/2)

(a) Operation when MCC is set after setting CSS in case of main system clock operation

(b) Operation when MCC is set in case of main system clock operation

MCC

CSS

CLS

Main system clock oscillation

Subsystem clock oscillation

CPU clock

MCC

CSS

CLS

Main system clock oscillation

Subsystem clock oscillation

CPU clock

Oscillation does not stop.

158

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 7-9. Main System Clock Stop Function (2/2)

7.5.2 Subsystem clock operations

When operating on the subsystem clock (with bit 5 (CLS) of the processor clock control register (PCC) set to 1),

the following operations are carried out.

(a) The minimum instruction execution time remains constant (122

s when operating at 32.768 kHz) irrespective

of bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) of the PCC register.

(b) The watchdog timer stops counting.

Caution Do not execute the STOP instruction while the subsystem clock is in operation.

MCC

CSS

CLS

Main system clock oscillation

Subsystem clock oscillation

CPU clock

159

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.6 Changing System Clock and CPU Clock Settings

7.6.1 Time required for switchover between system clock and CPU clock

The system clock and CPU clock can be switched over by bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) and bit 4 (CSS) of the

processor clock control register (PCC).

The actual switchover operation is not performed directly after writing to the PCC; operation continues on the pre-

switchover clock for several instructions (see Table 7-3).

Determination as to whether the system is operating on the main system clock or the subsystem clock is performed

using bit 5 (CLS) of the PCC register.

160

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 7-3. Maximum Time Required for CPU Clock Switchover

××

000

1100

100 0

1000

CSS

00 0

0×

PCC0

PCC1

PCC2

1×

PCC0

CSS PCC2 PCC1

011

××

18 instructions

2 instructions

4 instructions 4 instructions

16 instructions

2 instructions

8 instructions

4 instructions 4 instructions

2 instructions

16 instructions 16 instructions 16 instructions

8 instructions 8 instructions

2 instructions

/2f

instruction

(77 instructions)

/4f

instruction

(39 instructions)

/8f

instruction

(20 instructions)

/32f

instruction

(5 instructions)

/16f

instruction

(10 instructions)

/4f

instruction

(39 instructions)

/8f

instruction

(20 instructions)

/32f

instruction

(5 instructions)

/16f

instruction

(10 instructions)

/64f

instruction

(3 instructions)

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

Set Values After Switchover

Set Values Before

Switchover

CSS CSS CSS CSS CSS

1 instruction 1 instruction

1 instruction

CSS

1 instruction

Remarks 1. One instruction is executed in the minimum instruction execution time with the pre-switchover CPU clock.

2. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode selection register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with f

= 5.0 MHz or f

= 32.768 kHz.

Caution Selection of the CPU clock cycle division ratio (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the main system clock to the subsystem

clock (changing CSS from 0 to 1) should not be performed simultaneously. Simultaneous setting is possible, however, for

selection of the CPU clock cycle division ratio (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the subsystem clock to the main system

clock (changing CSS from 1 to 0).

PCC0

PCC1

PCC2

PCC1

PCC2 PCC0

PCC1

PCC2 PCC0

PCC1

PCC2 PCC0

PCC1

PCC2 PCC0

PCC1

PCC2 PCC0

161

CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

7.6.2 System clock and CPU clock switching procedure

This section describes the procedure for switching between the system clock and the CPU clock.

Figure 7-10. Switching Between System Clock and CPU Clock

(1) The CPU is reset by setting the RESET signal to low level after power-on. After that, when reset is released

by setting the RESET signal to high level, the main system clock starts oscillation. At this time, the oscillation

stabilization time (217/fX) is secured automatically.

After that, the CPU starts executing the instruction at the minimum speed of the main system clock (12.8

s when

operated at 5.0 MHz).

(2) After the lapse of a sufficient time for the VDD voltage to increase to enable operation at maximum speeds,

the processor clock control register (PCC) and oscillation mode selection register (OSMS) are rewritten and

the maximum-speed operation is carried out.

(3) Upon detection of a decrease of the VDD voltage due to an interrupt request signal, the main system clock

is switched to the subsystem clock (which must be in an oscillation stable state).

(4) Upon detection of VDD voltage reset due to an interrupt request signal, bit 7 (MCC) of PCC is cleared to 0 and

oscillation of the main system clock is started. After the lapse of time required for stabilization of oscillation,

the PCC and OSMS registers are rewritten and the maximum-speed operation is resumed.

Caution When the main system clock is stopped and the device is operating on the subsystem clock, wait

until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching back

to the main system clock.

VDD

RESET

Interrupt

request

signal

System clock

CPU clock

Wait (26.2 ms: 5.0 MHz)

Internal reset operation

Minimum

speed

operation

Maximum speed

operation

Subsystem clock

operation

fXX fXX fXT fXX

High-speed

operation

162 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

8.1 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Functions

The 16-bit timer/event counter (TM0) has the following functions.

• Interval timer

• PWM output

• Pulse width measurement

• External event counter

• Square-wave output

• One-shot pulse output

PWM output and pulse width measurement can be used at the same time.

(1) Interval timer

TM0 generates interrupt requests at the preset time interval.

Table 8-1. 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Interval Times

Minimum Interval Time Maximum Interval Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × TI00 input cycle 216 × TI00 input cycle TI00 input edge cycle

—2 × 1/fX—2

16 × 1/fX— 1/fX

(400 ns) (13.1 ms) (200 ns)

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX1/fX2 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (200 ns) (400 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

2 × watch timer output cycle 216 × watch timer output cycle Watch timer output edge cycle

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

(2) PWM output

TM0 can generate 14-bit resolution PWM output.

(3) Pulse width measurement

TM0 can measure the pulse width of an externally input signal.

(4) External event counter

TM0 can measure the number of pulses of an externally input signal.

163

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(5) Square-wave output

TM0 can output a square wave with any selected frequency.

Table 8-2. 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Square-Wave Output Ranges

Minimum Pulse Time Maximum Pulse Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × TI00 input cycle 216 × TI00 input cycle TI00 input edge cycle

—2 × 1/fX—2

16 × 1/fX— 1/fX

(400 ns) (13.1 ms) (200 ns)

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX1/fX2 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (200 ns) (400 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

2 × watch timer output cycle 216 × watch timer output cycle Watch timer output edge cycle

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

(6) One-shot pulse output

TM0 is able to output a one-shot pulse with any output pulse width.

164

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.2 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration

The 16-bit timer/event counter consists of the following hardware.

Table 8-3. 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration

Item Configuration

Timer register 16 bits × 1 (TM0)

Timer outputs 1 (TO0)

Control registers Timer clock select register 0 (TCL0)

16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

16-bit timer output control register (TOC0)

Port mode register 3 (PM3)

External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0)

Sampling clock select register (SCS)Note

Note See Figure 21-1 Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function.

165

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-1. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter

Notes 1. Edge detector

2. The configuration of the 16-bit timer/event counter output controller is shown in Figure 8-2.

TCL06 TCL05 TCL04

Timer clock

select register 0

Internal bus

Capture/compare

control register 0

CRC02 CRC01 CRC00

Selector

TI01/

P01/INTP1

INTTM3

Selector

16-bit capture/compare

control register (CR01)

Internal Bus

16-bit capture/compare

control register (CR00)

Clear

Match

Clear circuit

TMC03 TMC02 TMC01 OVF0 OSPT OSPETOC04 LVS0 LVR0 TOC01 TOE0

16-bit timer mode

control register 16-bit timer output

control register

PWM pulse

output

controller

16-bit timer/event

counter output

controller

Note 2

TMC01 to TMC03

INTP0

INTTM01

TO0/P30

INTP1

INTTM00

Match

TMC01 to TMC03

16-bit timer register (TM0)

TI00/P00/

INTP0

Note 1

CRC02

166

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-2. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Output Controller

Remark The circuitry enclosed by the broken line is the output controller.

PWM pulse

output controller

Edge

detector

TI00/P00/

INTP0

OSPT

16-bit timer output

control register

OSPE TOC04 LVS0 LVR0 TOC01 TOE0

Selector

INV

Level

inversion

CRC02

INTTM01

CRC00

INTTM00

One-shot pulse

output controller

ES11 ES10

External interrupt

mode register 0

16-bit timer mode

control register

TMC03 TMC02 TMC01

P30 output

latch PM30

Port mode

TO0/P30

Internal bus

167

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Capture/compare register 00 (CR00)

CR00 is a 16-bit register which has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether

it is used as a capture register or as a compare register is set by bit 0 (CRC00) of capture/compare control

(a) When CR00 is used as a compare register

The value set in CR00 is constantly compared with the 16-bit timer register (TM0) count value, and an

interrupt request (INTTM00) is generated if they match. It can also be used as the register that holds

the interval time when TM0 is set to interval timer operation, and as the register that sets the pulse width

when TM0 is set to PWM output operation.

(b) When CR00 is used as a capture register

It is possible to select the valid edge of the INTP0/TI00 pin or the INTP1/TI01 pin as the capture trigger.

The INTP0/TI00 or INTP1/TI01 valid edge is set by external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0).

If CR00 is specified as a capture register and the capture trigger is specified to be the valid edge of the

INTP0/TI00 pin, the situation is as shown in Table 8-4. On the other hand, when the capture trigger is

specified to be the valid edge of the INTP1/TI01 pin, the situation is as shown in Table 8-5.

Table 8-4. INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge and CR00 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

ES11 ES10 INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge CR00 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

0 0 Falling edge Rising edge

0 1 Rising edge Falling edge

1 0 Setting prohibited

1 1 Both rising and falling edges No capture operation

Table 8-5. INTP1/TI01 Pin Valid Edge and CR00 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

ES21 ES20 INTP1/TI01 Pin Valid Edge CR00 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

0 0 Falling edge Falling edge

0 1 Rising edge Rising edge

1 0 Setting prohibited

1 1 Both rising and falling edges Both rising and falling edges

CR00 is set with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input makes CR00 undefined.

Cautions 1. Set the data of PWM (14 bits) to the higher 14 bits of CR00. At this time, clear the lower

2 bits to 00.

2. Set CR00 to a value other than 0000H in the clear & start mode entered on a match between

TM0 and CR00. However, in the free-running mode and in the clear mode using the valid

edge of TI00, if CR00 is set to 0000H, an interrupt request (INTTM00) is generated

following overflow (FFFFH).

3. If the new value of CR00 is less than the value of the 16-bit timer register (TM0), TM0

continues counting, overflows, and then starts counting again from 0. If the new value

of CR00 is less than the old value, the timer must be restarted after changing the value

of CR00.

168

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Capture/compare register 01 (CR01)

CR01 is a 16-bit register which has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether

it is used as a capture register or a compare register is set by bit 2 (CRC02) of capture/compare control register

(a) When CR01 is used as a compare register

The value set in CR01 is constantly compared with the 16-bit timer register (TM0) count value, and an

interrupt request (INTTM01) is generated if they match.

(b) When CR01 is used as a capture register

It is possible to select the valid edge of the INTP0/TI00 pin as the capture trigger. The INTP0/TI00 valid

edge is set by external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0).

Table 8-6. INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge and CR01 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

ES11 ES10 INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge CR01 Capture Trigger Valid Edge

0 0 Falling edge Falling edge

0 1 Rising edge Rising edge

1 0 Setting prohibited

1 1 Both rising and falling edges Both rising and falling edges

CR01 is set with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input makes CR01 undefined.

Caution Set CR01 to a value other than 0000H in the clear & start mode entered on a match between

TM0 and CR00. However, in the free-running mode and in the clear mode using the valid edge

of TI00, if CR01 is set to 0000H, an interrupt request (INTTM01) is generated following

overflow (FFFFH).

(3) 16-bit timer register (TM0)

TM0 is a 16-bit register which counts the count pulses.

TM0 is read with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction. When TM0 is read, the capture/compare register

(CR01) should first be set as a capture register.

RESET input clears TM0 to 0000H.

Caution As reading of the value of TM0 is performed via CR01, the previously set value of CR01 is

lost.

169

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.3 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Control Registers

The following seven registers are used to control the 16-bit timer/event counter.

•Timer clock select register 0 (TCL0)

•16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

•Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

•16-bit timer output control register (TOC0)

•Port mode register 3 (PM3)

•External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0)

•Sampling clock select register (SCS)

(1) Timer clock select register 0 (TCL0)

This register is used to set the count clock of the 16-bit timer register.

TCL0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TCL0 to 00H.

Remark TCL0 has the function of setting the PCL output clock in addition to that of setting the count clock

of the 16-bit timer register.

170

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-3. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 0

Cautions 1. The TI00/INTP0 pin valid edge is set by external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0), and

the sampling clock frequency is selected by the sampling clock selection register (SCS).

2. When enabling PCL output, set TCL00 to TCL03, then set CLOE to 1 with a 1-bit memory

manipulation instruction.

3. To read the count value when TI00 has been specified as the TM0 count clock, the value

should be read from TM0, not from 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01).

4. When rewriting TCL0 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand.

CLOE TCL06 TCL05 TCL04 TCL03 TCL02 TCL01 TCL00

<7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Symbol

TCL0

TCL03 TCL02 TCL01 TCL00

0000f

(32.768 kHz)

0101f

(5.0 MHz) f

/2 (2.5 MHz)

0110f

/2 f

(2.5 MHz) f

(1.25 MHz)

0111f

(1.25 MHz) f

(625 kHz)

1000f

(625 kHz) f

(313 kHz)

1001f

(313 kHz) f

(156 kHz)

1010f

(156 kHz) f

(78.1 kHz)

1011f

(78.1 kHz) f

(39.1 kHz)

1100f

(39.1 kHz) f

(19.5 kHz)

MCS = 1

PCL output clock selection

MCS = 0

FF40H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

Other than above Setting prohibited

TCL06 TCL05 TCL04

0 0 0 TI00 (valid edge specifiable)

0012f

Setting prohibited f

(5.0 MHz)

010f

(5.0 MHz) f

/2 (2.5 MHz)

011f

/2 f

/2 (2.5 MHz) f

(1.25 MHz)

100f

(1.25 MHz) f

(625 kHz)

1 1 1 Watch timer output (INTTM 3)

MCS = 1

16-bit timer register count clock selection

MCS = 0

Other than above Setting prohibited

CLOE

1 Output enabled

PCL output control

0 Output disabled

171

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

4. TI00: 16-bit timer/event counter input pin

5. TM0: 16-bit timer register

6. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

7. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz or fXT = 32.768 kHz.

(2) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

This register sets the 16-bit timer operating mode, the 16-bit timer register clear mode and output timing, and

detects an overflow.

TMC0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TMC0 to 00H.

Caution The 16-bit timer register starts operation at the moment TMC01 to TMC03 are set to values

other than 0, 0, 0 (operation stop mode). Set TMC01 to TMC03 to 0, 0, 0 to stop the operation.

172

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-4. Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register

Cautions 1. Switch the clear mode and the TO0 output timing after stopping the timer operation

(by clearing TMC01 to TMC03 to 0, 0, 0).

2. Set the valid edge of the TI00/INTP0 pin using external interrupt mode register 0

(INTM0) and select the sampling clock frequency using the sampling clock select

3. When using the PWM mode, set the PWM mode and then set data to CR00.

4. If clear & start mode entered on a match between TM0 and CR00 is selected, when the

set value of CR00 is FFFFH and the TM0 value changes from FFFFH to 0000H, the OVF0

flag is set to 1.

Remark TO0: 16-bit timer/event counter output pin

TI00: 16-bit timer/event counter input pin

TM0: 16-bit timer register

CR00: Compare register 00

CR01: Compare register 01

0000

TMC03 TMC02 TMC01

OVF0

7654321<0>Symbol

TMC0 FF48H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

OVF0 16-bit timer register overflow detection

0 Overflow not detected

1 Overflow detected

TMC03 TMC02 TMC01

Operating mode or

clear mode selection

TO0 output timing selection Interrupt request generation

000

Operation stopped

(TM0 cleared to 0)

No change Not generated

001

PWM mode

(free running)

PWM pulse output

010

011

100

101

110

111

Free-running mode Match between TM0 and

CR00 or match between

TM0 and CR01

Match between TM0 and

CR00, match between

TM0 and CR01 or TI00

valid edge

Match between TM0 and

CR00 or match between

TM0 and CR01

Match between TM0 and

CR00, match between

TM0 and CR01 or TI00

valid edge

Match between TM0 and

CR00 or match between

TM0 and CR01

Match between TM0 and

CR00, match between

TM0 and CR01 or TI00

valid edge

Clear & start on TI00

valid edge

Clear & start on match

between TM0 and CR00

Generated on match

between TM0 and CR00,

and match between TM0

and CR01

173

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

This register controls the operation of capture/compare registers 00 and 01 (CR00 and CR01).

CRC0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets CRC0 to 04H.

Figure 8-5. Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 0

Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before setting CRC0.

2. When clear & start mode entered on a match between TM0 and CR00 is selected by

the 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0), CR00 should not be specified as a

capture register.

0000

0 CRC02 CRC01 CRC00

76543210Symbol

CRC0 FF4CH 04H R/W

Address After reset R/W

CRC00

CR00 operating mode selection

Operates as compare register

Operates as capture register

CRC01

CR00 capture trigger selection

Captures on valid edge of TI01

Captures on reverse phase of valid edge of TI00

CRC02

CR01 operating mode selection

Operates as compare register

Operates as capture register

174

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) 16-bit timer output control register (TOC0)

This register controls the operation of the 16-bit timer/event counter output controller. It sets R-S type flip-

flop (LV0) setting/resetting, the active level in PWM mode, inversion enabling/disabling in modes other than

PWM mode, 16-bit timer/event counter timer output enabling/disabling, one-shot pulse output operation

enabling/disabling, and the output trigger for a one-shot pulse by software.

TOC0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TOC0 to 00H.

175

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-6. Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register

Cautions 1. Timer operation must be stopped before setting TOC0 (except OSPT).

2. If LVS0 and LVR0 are read after data is set, they will be 0.

3. OSPT is cleared automatically after data setting, and will therefore be 0 if read.

4. OSPT can be set only when OSPE = 1.

0 OSPT OSPE TOC04

LVS0 LVR0 TOC01 TOE0

7 <6> <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>Symbol

TOC0 FF4EH 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

TOE0

16-bit timer/event counter output control

Output disabled (port mode)

Output enabled

TOC01

In PWM mode In other modes

Active level selection Timer output F/F control

by match of CR00 and

TM0

Active high

Active low

Inversion operation disabled

Inversion operation enabled

LVS0 LVR0 16-bit timer/event counter timer

output F/F status setting

No change

Timer output F/F reset to 0

Timer output F/F set to 1

Setting prohibited

TOC04

Timer output F/F control by match of CR01 and TM0

Inversion operation disabled

Inversion operation enabled

OSPE

One-shot pulse output control

Continuous pulse output

One-shot pulse output

OSPT

Control of one-shot pulse output trigger by software

One-shot pulse trigger not used

One-shot pulse trigger used

176

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(5) Port mode register 3 (PM3)

This register sets port 3 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P30/TO0 pin for timer output, set PM30 and the output latch of P30 to 0.

PM3 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets PM3 to FFH.

Figure 8-7. Format of Port Mode Register 3

PM37 PM36 PM35 PM34 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30

76543210Symbol

PM3 FF23H FFH R/W

Address After reset R/W

PM3n

P3n pin input/output mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

177

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(6) External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0)

This register is used to set the valid edges of INTP0 to INTP2, TI00, and TI01.

INTM0 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears INTM0 to 00H.

Figure 8-8. Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0

Caution When using the INTP0/TI00/P00 and INTP1/TI01/P01 pins as timer input pins (TI00 and TI01),

stop the operation of 16-bit timer 0 by clearing bits 1 to 3 (TMC01 to TMC03) of the 16-bit timer

mode control register (TMC0) to 0, 0, 0, before setting the valid edge of TI00 and TI01. When

using the INTP0/TI00/P00 and INTP1/TI01/P01 pins as external interrupt input pins (INTP0 and

INTP1), the valid edge of INTP0 and INTP1 may be set while 16-bit timer 0 is operating.

ES31 ES30 ES21 ES20 ES11 ES10 0 0

76543210Symbol

INTM0 FFECH 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

ES11

INTP0/TI00 valid edge selection

ES10

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES21

INTP1/TI01 valid edge selection

ES20

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES31

INTP2 valid edge selection

ES30

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

178

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(7) Sampling clock select registers (SCS)

This register sets the clock used as the clock for sampling the valid edges input to INTP0. When remote

controlled reception is carried out using INTP0, digital noise is eliminated by the sampling clock.

SCS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SCS to 00H.

Figure 8-9. Format of Sampling Clock Select Register

Caution fXX/2N is the clock supplied to the CPU, and fXX/25, fXX/26, and fXX/27 are clocks supplied to

peripheral hardware. The fXX/2N clock is stopped in HALT mode.

Remarks 1. N: Value set to bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) of the processor clock control register (PCC)

(N = 0 to 4)

2. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

3. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

4. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

5. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

0 0 0 0 0 0 SCS1 SCS0

76543210Symbol

SCS FF47H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

SCS1 SCS0

INTP0 sampling clock selection

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

(39.1 kHz)f

(19.5 kHz)

(156.3 kHz)f

(78.1 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)f

(39.1 kHz)

179

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.4 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Operations

8.4.1 Interval timer operations

Setting the 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0) and capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0) as shown

in Figure 8-10 allows operation as an interval timer. Interrupt requests are generated repeatedly using the count value

set to 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00) beforehand as the interval.

When the count value of the 16-bit timer register (TM0) matches the value set to CR00, counting continues with

the TM0 value cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM00) is generated.

The count clock of the 16-bit timer/event counter can be selected using bits 4 to 6 (TCL04 to TCL06) of timer clock

select register 0 (TCL0).

For the operation when the value of the compare register is changed during the timer/counter operation, see 8.6

(3) Operation after compare register change during timer count operation.

Figure 8-10. Control Register Settings for Interval Timer Operation

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the interval timer. See

the description of the respective control registers for details.

0000110/10

TMC03 TMC02 TMC01 OVF0

TMC0

Clear & start on match TM0 and CR00

0 0 0 0 0 0/1 0/1 0

CRC02 CRC01 CRC00

CRC0

CR00 is set as compare register

180

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-11. Interval Timer Configuration Diagram

Figure 8-12. Interval Timer Operation Timings

Remark Interval time = (N + 1) × t : N = 0001H to FFFFH.

16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00)

16-bit timer register (TM0)

Selector

fXX/22

fXX/2

fXX

2fXX

INTTM3

TI00/P00/INTP0

OVF0

Clear circuit

INTTM00

Count clock

TM0 count value

CR00

INTTM00

TO0

Interval time Interval time Interval time

0000 0001 N 0000 0001 N 0000 0001 N

Count start Clear Clear

NN NN

Interrupt request acknowledge Interrupt request acknowledge

181

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 8-7. 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Interval Times

Minimum Interval Time Maximum Interval Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0002 × TI00 input cycle 216 × TI00 input cycle TI00 input edge cycle

0 0 1 Setting 2 × 1/fXSetting 216 × 1/fXSetting 1/fX

prohibited (400 ns) prohibited (13.1 ms) prohibited (200 ns)

0102 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX1/fX2 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (200 ns) (400 ns)

0112

2 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

1002

3 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

1112 × watch timer output cycle 216 × watch timer output cycle Watch timer output edge cycle

Other than above Setting prohibited

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. TCL04 to TCL06: Bits 4 to 6 of timer clock select register (TCL0)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

8.4.2 PWM output operations

Setting the 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0), capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0), and the 16-bit

timer output control register (TOC0) as shown in Figure 8-13 allows operation as PWM output. Pulses with the duty

rate determined by the value set to 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00) beforehand are output from the TO0/

P30 pin.

Set the active level width of the PWM pulse to the higher 14 bits of CR00. Select the active level using bit 1 (TOC01)

of the 16-bit timer output control register (TOC0).

This PWM pulse has a 14-bit resolution. The pulse can be converted to an analog voltage by integrating it with

an external low-pass filter (LPF). The PWM pulse is formed by a combination of the basic cycle determined by 28/

Φ and the sub-cycle determined by 214/Φ so that the time constant of the external LPF can be shortened. The count

clock Φ can be selected using bits 4 to 6 (TCL04 to TCL06) of timer clock select register 0 (TCL0).

PWM output enable/disable can be selected using bit 0 (TOE0) of TOC0.

Cautions 1. PWM operation mode should be selected before setting CR00.

2. Be sure to clear bits 0 and 1 of CR00 to 0.

3. Do not select PWM operation mode for external clock input from the TI00/P00/INTP0 pin.

TCL06 TCL05 TCL04

182

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-13. Control Register Settings for PWM Output Operation

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with PWM output.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

×: don’t care

TMC0 01000000

OVF0

TMC01TMC02TMC03

PWM mode

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CRC0 00/10/100000

CR00 is set as compare register

TOE0TOC01LVR0LVS0TOC04OSPEOSPT

TOC0 10/1×××××0

TO0 output enabled

Specifies active level

183

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

By integrating 14-bit resolution PWM pulses with an external low-pass filter, they can be converted to an analog

voltage and used for electronic tuning and D/A converter applications, etc.

The analog output voltage (VAN) used for D/A conversion with the configuration shown in Figure 8-14 is as follows.

VAN = VREF ×

216

VREF: External switching circuit reference voltage

Figure 8-14. Example of D/A Converter Configuration with PWM Output

Capture/compare register 00 (CR00) value

Figure 8-15 shows an example in which PWM output is converted to an analog voltage and used in a voltage

synthesizer type TV tuner.

Figure 8-15. TV Tuner Application Circuit Example

Switching circuit

TO0/P30

PWM

signal

VREF

Low-pass filter Analog output (VAN)

PD780058, 780058Y

TO0/P30

SS0

8.2 k

Ω

8.2 k

Ω

100 pF

22 k

Ω

+110 V

2SC

2352

47 k

Ω

47 k

Ω

47 k

Ω

0.22 F

Electronic

tuner

GND

PC574J

SS0

184

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.4.3 PPG output operations

Setting the 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0) and capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0) as shown

in Figure 8-16 allows operation as PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator) output.

In the PPG output operation, square waves are output from the TO0/P30 pin with the pulse width and the cycle

that correspond to the count values set beforehand to 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01) and 16-bit capture/

compare register 00 (CR00), respectively.

Figure 8-16. Control Register Settings for PPG Output Operation

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark × : don’t care

Cautions 1. CR00 and CR01 should be set to values in the following range:

0000H ≤ CR01 < CR00n ≤ FFFFH

2. The cycle of the pulse generated through PPG output (CR00 setting value + 1) has a duty of

(CR01 setting value + 1)/(CR00 setting value + 1).

TMC0 00110000

OVF0

TMC01TMC02TMC03

Clear & start on match of TM0 and CR00

CRC0 0×000000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as compare register

CR01 is set as compare register

TOC0 110/10/11000

TOE0

TOC01LVR0LVS0

Inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR00

TOC04OSPEOSPT

TO0 output enabled

Specified TO0 output F/F initial value

Inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR01

One-shot pulse output disabled

185

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-17. Configuration of PPG Output

Figure 8-18. PPG Output Operation Timing

16-bit timer capture/compare

16-bit timer counter 0

(TM0)

Clear

circuit

Noise

eliminator

fXX

fXX/2

fXX/22

TI00/P00/INTP0

16-bit timer capture/compare

TO0/P30

Selector

Output controller

INTTM3

2fXX

0000H 0000H

0001H

M – 1

Count clock

TM0 count value

TO0

Pulse width: (M + 1) × t

1 cycle: (N + 1) × t

CR00 capture value

CR01 capture value M

N – 1

ClearCount start

Remark 0000H < M < N ≤ FFFFH

186

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.4.4 Pulse width measurement operations

It is possible to measure the pulse width of the signals input to the TI00/P00 pin and TI01/P01 pin using the

16-bit timer register (TM0).

There are two measurement methods: measuring with TM0 used in free-running mode, and measuring by restarting

the timer in synchronization with the edge of the signal input to the TI00/P00 pin.

(1) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and one capture register

When the 16-bit timer register (TM0) is operated in free-running mode (see register settings in Figure 8-17),

and the edge specified by external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0) is input to the TI00/P00 pin, the value

of TM0 is taken into 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01) and an external interrupt request signal (INTP0)

is set.

Any of three edge specifications can be selected—rising, falling, or both edges—by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and

ES11) of INTM0.

For valid edge detection, sampling is performed at the interval selected by the sampling clock select register

(SCS), and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level is detected twice, thus eliminating noise

with a short pulse width.

Figure 8-19. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with

Free-Running Counter and One Capture Register

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measure-

ment. See the description of the respective control registers for details.

CRC0 00/1100000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as compare register

CR01 is set as capture register

TMC0 00/1100000

OVF0TMC01TMC02TMC03

Free-running mode

187

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-20. Configuration Diagram for Pulse Width Measurement by Free-Running Counter

Figure 8-21. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Free-Running Counter

and One Capture Register (with Both Edges Specified)

Selector

INTTM3

16-bit timer register (TM0)

16-bit capture/compare

OVF0

INTP0

Internal bus

TI00/P00/INTP00

Count clock

TM0 count value

TI00 pin input

CR01 captured value

INTP0

OVF0

0000 0001 D0 D1 FFFF 0000 D2 D3

D0 D1 D2 D3

(D1 – D0) × t (10000H – D1 + D2) × t (D3 – D2) × t

188

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Measurement of two pulse widths with free-running counter

When the 16-bit timer register (TM0) is operated in free-running mode (see register settings in Figure 8-20),

it is possible to simultaneously measure the pulse widths of the two signals input to the TI00/P00 pin and the

TI01/P01 pin.

When the edge specified by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and ES11) of external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0) is

input to the TI00/P00 pin, the value of TM0 is taken into 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01) and an

external interrupt request signal (INTP0) is set.

Also, when the edge specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES20 and ES21) of INTM0 is input to the TI01/P01 pin, the

value of TM0 is taken into 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00) and an external interrupt request signal

(INTP1) is set.

Any of three edge specifications can be selected—rising, falling, or both edges—as the valid edges for the

TI00/P00 pin and the TI01/P01 pin by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and ES11) and bits 4 and 5 (ES20 and ES21) of

INTM0, respectively.

For TI00/P00 pin valid edge detection, sampling is performed at the interval selected by the sampling clock

select register (SCS), and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level is detected twice, thus

eliminating noise with a short pulse width.

Figure 8-22. Control Register Settings for Two Pulse Width Measurements with Free-Running Counter

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

CRC0 10100000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as capture register

Captured in CR00 on valid edge of TI01/P01 Pin

CR01 is set as capture register

TMC0 00/1100000

OVF0TMC01TMC02TMC03

Free-running mode

189

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-23. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with

Free-Running Counter (with Both Edges Specified)

Count clock

TM0 count value

TI00 pin input

CR01 captured value

INTP0

TI01 pin input

CR00 captured value

INTP1

OVF0

(D1 – D0) × t (10000H – D1 + D2) × t

(10000H – D1 + (D2 + 1)) × t

(D3 – D2) × t

0000 0001 D0 D1 0000 D3D2FFFF

D0 D1 D3D2

190

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and two capture registers

When the 16-bit timer register (TM0) is operated in free-running mode (see register settings in Figure 8-22),

it is possible to measure the pulse width of the signal input to the TI00/P00 pin.

When the edge specified by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and ES11) of external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0) is

input to the TI00/P00 pin, the value of TM0 is taken into 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01) and an

external interrupt request signal (INTP0) is set.

Also, on the reverse input edge to that of the capture operation into CR01, the value of TM0 is taken into 16-

bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00).

Either of two edge specifications can be selected—rising or falling—as the valid edges for the TI00/P00 pin

by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and ES11) of INTM0.

For TI00/P00 pin valid edge detection, sampling is performed at the interval selected by the sampling clock

select register (SCS), and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level is detected twice, thus

eliminating noise with a short pulse width.

Caution If the valid edge of TI00/P00 is specified to be both the rising and falling edges, capture/

compare register 00 (CR00) cannot perform the capture operation.

Figure 8-24. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with

Free-Running Counter and Two Capture Registers

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

TMC0 00/1100000

OVF0TMC01TMC02TMC03

Free-running mode

CRC0 11100000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as capture register

Captured in CR00 on reverse

edge of valid edge of TI00/P00 Pin

CR01 is set as capture register

191

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-25. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Free-Running

Counter and Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified)

Count clock

TM0 count value

TI00 pin input

CR01 captured value

CR00 captured value

INTP0

OVF0

(D1 – D0) × t (10000H – D1 + D2) × t (D3 – D2) × t

D1 D3

D0 D2

D3D20000FFFFD1D00000 0001

192

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Pulse width measurement by means of restart

When input of a valid edge to the TI00/P00 pin is detected, the count value of the 16-bit timer register (TM0)

is taken into 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01), and then the pulse width of the signal input to the

TI00/P00 pin is measured by clearing TM0 and restarting the count (see register settings in Figure 8-24).

The edge specification can be selected from two types, rising and falling edges by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and

ES11) of external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0).

In a valid edge detection, sampling is performed on the cycle selected by the sampling clock select register

(SCS), and a capture operation is only performed when a valid level is detected twice, thus eliminating noise

with a short pulse width.

Caution If the valid edge of TI00/P00 is specified to be both the rising and falling edges, 16-bit capture/

compare register 00 (CR00) cannot perform the capture operation.

Figure 8-26. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement by Means of Restart

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

Figure 8-27. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by

Means of Restart (with Rising Edge Specified)

TMC0 00/1010000

OVF0

TMC01TMC02TMC03

Clear & start on valid edge of TI00/P00 pin

CRC0 11100000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as capture register

Captured in CR00 on reverse

edge to valid edge of TI00/P00 Pin

CR01 is set as capture register

Count clock

TM0 count value

TI00 pin input

CR01 captured value

CR00 captured value

INTP0

0000 0001 D0 0000 0001 D1 00010000D2

D0 D2

D1 × t

D2 × t

193

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.4.5 External event counter operation

The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses to be input to the TI00/P00 pin with the

16-bit timer register (TM0).

TM0 is incremented each time the valid edge specified by external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0) is input.

When the TM0 counted value matches the 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00) value, TM0 is cleared to

0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM00) is generated.

Set CR00 to a value other than 0000H (1-pulse count operation cannot be performed).

The rising edge, falling edge or both edges can be selected using bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and ES11) of INTM0.

Because operations are carried out only after the valid edge is detected twice by sampling at the interval selected

by the sampling clock select register (SCS), noise with short pulse widths can be eliminated.

Figure 8-28. Control Register Settings in External Event Counter Mode

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the external event

counter. See the description of the respective control registers for details.

CRC0 00/10/100000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as compare register

TMC0 00/1110000

OVF0TMC01TMC02TMC03

Clear & start on match of TM0 and CR00

194

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-29. External Event Counter Configuration Diagram

Figure 8-30. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified)

Caution When reading the external event counter count value, TM0 should be read.

16-bit capture/compare

Clear INTTM00

INTP0

16-bit timer register (TM0)

16-bit capture/compare

Internal bus

TI00 valid edge OVF0

TI00 pin input

TM0 count value

CR00

INTTM00

0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 N – 1 N 0000 0001 0002 0003

195

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.4.6 Square-wave output operation

The 16-bit timer/event counter outputs a square wave with any selected frequency at intervals specified by the

count value set in advance to 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00).

The TO0/P30 pin output status is reversed at intervals of the count value preset to CR00 by setting bit 0 (TOE0)

and bit 1 (TOC01) of the 16-bit timer output control register (TOC0) to 1. This enables a square wave with any selected

frequency to be output.

Figure 8-31. Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with square-wave output.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

TMC0 00/1110000

OVF0TMC01TMC02TMC03

Clear & start on match of TM0 and CR00

CRC0 00/10/100000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as compare register

TOC0 110/10/10000

TOE0TOC01LVR0OSPT OSPE TOC04 LVS0

TO0 output enabled

Inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR00

Specified TO0 output F/F initial value

No inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR01

One-shot pulse output disabled

196

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-32. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing

Table 8-8. 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Square-Wave Output Ranges

Minimum Pulse Time Maximum Pulse Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × TI00 input cycle 216 × TI00 input cycle TI00 input edge cycle

—2 × 1/fX—216 × 1/fX—1/fX

(400 ns) (13.1 ms) (200 ns)

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX1/fX2 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (200 ns) (400 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

2 × watch timer output cycle 216 × watch timer output cycle Watch timer output edge cycle

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

Count clock

TM0 count value

CR00

INTTM0

TO0 pin output

0000 0001 0002 N – 1 N 0000 0001 0002 N – 1 N 0000

197

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.4.7 One-shot pulse output operation

The 16-bit timer/event counter can be started in synchronization with a software trigger or external trigger (TI00/

P00 pin input) and output a one-shot pulse that ends on overflow of TM0.

(1) One-shot pulse output using software trigger

If the 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0), capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0), and the 16-bit

timer output control register (TOC0) are set as shown in Figure 8-31, and bit 6 (OSPT) of TOC0 is set to 1

by software, a one-shot pulse is output from the TO0/P30 pin.

By setting OSPT to 1, the 16-bit timer/event counter is cleared and started, and output is activated by the count

value (N) set beforehand to 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01). Thereafter, output is inactivatedNote

by the count value (M) set beforehand in 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00).

TM0 continues to operate after a one-shot pulse is output. To stop TM0, TMC0 must be set to 00H.

Note The case where N < M is described here. When N > M, the output becomes active with the CR00

Cautions 1. When a one-shot pulse is output by a software trigger, fix the TI00/P00 pin to either the

high or low level.

2. When outputting a one-shot pulse, do not set OSPT to 1. To output a one-shot pulse

again, wait until the current one-shot pulse output is completed.

Figure 8-33. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Using Software Trigger

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with one-shot pulse output.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

Caution Do not clear CR00 and CR01 to 0000H.

CRC0 00/1000000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as compare register

CR01 is set as compare register

TOC0 110/10/11100

TOE0TOC01LVR0OSPT OSPE TOC04 LVS0

TO0 output enabled

Inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR00

Specified TO0 output F/F initial value

Inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR01

One-shot pulse output mode

Set 1 in case of output

TMC0 00100000

OVF0TMC01TMC02TMC03

Free-running mode

198

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-34. One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Timing Using Software Trigger

Caution The 16-bit timer register starts operation at the moment TMC01 to TMC03 are set to values

other than 0, 0, 0 (operation stop mode).

Remark N < M

Count clock

TM0 count value

CR01 set value

CR00 set value

INTTM01

OSPT

INTTM00

TO0 pin output

0000 0001 N N + 1

0000

N – 1 N M – 1 M M + 1 0000

Set 0CH to TMC0

(TM0 count start)

One-shot pulse

199

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) One-shot pulse output using external trigger

If the 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0), capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0), and the 16-bit

timer output control register (TOC0) are set as shown in Figure 8-33, a one-shot pulse is output from the TO0/

P30 pin with a TI00/P00 valid edge as an external trigger.

Any of three edge specifications can be selected—rising, falling, or both edges—as the valid edges for the

TI00/P00 pin by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and ES11) of external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0).

When a valid edge is input to the TI00/P00 pin, the 16-bit timer/event counter is cleared and started, and output

is activated by the count values (N) set beforehand in 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01). Thereafter,

output is inactivatedNote by the count value (M) set beforehand in 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00).

Note The case where N < M is described here. When N > M, the output becomes active with the CR00

Caution When outputting one-shot pulses, the external trigger is ignored if generated again.

Figure 8-35. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Using External Trigger

(a) 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)

(b) Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0)

Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with one-shot pulse output.

See the description of the respective control registers for details.

Caution Do not clear CR00 and CR01 to 0000H.

CRC0 00/1000000

CRC00CRC01CRC02

CR00 is set as compare register

CR01 is set as compare register

TMC0 00010000

OVF0TMC01TMC02TMC03

Clear & start on valid edge of TI00/P00 pin

TOC0 110/10/11100

TOE0TOC01LVR0LVS0OSPT OSPE TOC04

TO0 output enabled

Inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR00

Specified TO0 output F/F initial value

Inversion of output on match of TM0 and CR01

One-shot pulse output mode

200

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 8-36. One-Shot Pulse Output Operation Timing Using

External Trigger (with Rising Edge Specified)

Caution The 16-bit timer register starts operation at the moment TMC01 to TMC03 are set to values

other than 0, 0, 0 (operation stop mode).

Remark N < M

Count clock

TM0 count value

CR01 set value

CR00 set value

INTTM01

TI00 pin input

INTTM00

TO0 pin output

0000 0001 0000 N N + 1 N + 2 M – 2M – 1 M M + 1 M + 2 M + 3

Set 08H to TMC0

(TM0 count start)

201

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

8.5 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Operating Cautions

(1) Timer start errors

An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start.

This is because the 16-bit timer register (TM0) is started asynchronously to the count pulse.

Figure 8-37. 16-Bit Timer Register Start Timing

(2) 16-bit compare register setting (when in the clear & start mode entered on a match between TM0 and

CR00)

Set 16-bit capture/compare register 00 (CR00) to the a value other than 0000H.

Thus, when using the 16-bit capture/compare register as event counter, one-pulse count operation cannot

be carried out.

(3) Operation after compare register change during timer count operation

If the value after the 16-bit capture/compare register (CR00) is changed is smaller than that of the 16-bit timer

CR00 change (M) is smaller than that before change (N), it is necessary to reset and restart the timer after

changing CR00.

Figure 8-38. Timing After Change of Compare Register During Timer Count Operation

Remark N > X > M

Timer start

Count pulse

TM0 count value 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H

Count pulse

CR00

TM0 count value X – 1 X FFFFH 0000H 0001H 0002H

202

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Capture register data retention timing

If the valid edge of the TI00/P00 pin is input during 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01) read, CR01

holds the data without carrying out a capture operation. However, the interrupt request signal (PIF0) is set

upon detection of the valid edge.

Figure 8-39. Capture Register Data Retention Timing

(5) Valid edge setting

When using the TI00/P00/INTP0 and TI01/P01/INTP1 pins as timer input pins (TI00 and TI01), stop the

operation of 16-bit timer 0 by clearing bits 1 to 3 (TMC01 to TMC03) of the 16-bit timer mode control register

(TMC0) to 0, 0, 0, before setting the valid edge of TI00 and TI01. The valid edge is set by bits 2 and 3 (ES10

and ES11) of external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0). When using the TI00/P00/INTP0 and TI01/P01/

INTP1 pins as external interrupt input pins (INTP0 and INTP1), the valid edge of INTP0 and INTP1 may be

set while 16-bit timer 0 is operating.

(6) Re-trigger of one-shot pulse

(a) One-shot pulse output using software

When outputting a one-shot pulse, do not set OSPT to 1. To output a one-shot pulse again, wait until

the current one-shot pulse output is completed.

(b) One-shot pulse output using external trigger

When outputting one-shot pulses, the external trigger is ignored if generated again.

When using the software trigger for one-shot pulse output, fix the level of the TI00/P00/INTP0 and TI01/

P01/INTP1 pins to either the high or low level. Otherwise, the external trigger will remain valid even when

the software trigger is used, and the timer will be cleared and started when the level of the TI00/P00/INTP0

or TI01/P01/INTP1 pin changes. In consequence, the pulse will be output unexpectedly.

Count pulse

TM0 count value

Edge input

PIF0

Capture read signal

CR01 captured value

Capture operation

ignored

X N + 1

N N + 1 N + 2 M M + 1 M + 2

203

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(7) Operation of OVF0 flag

(a) OVF0 flag setting

OFV0 flag is set to 1 in the following case.

When one of clear & start mode on match between TM0 and CR00, clear & start mode on TI00 valid edge,

or free-running mode is selected.

↓

CR00 is set to FFFFH.

↓

TM0 is counted up from FFFFH to 0000H.

Figure 8-40. Operation Timing of OVF0 Flag

Count pulse

CR00

TM0

OVF0

INTTM00

FFFFH

FFFEH FFFFH 0000H 0001H

(b) Clear OVF0 flag

Even if the OVF0 flag is cleared before the next count clock is counted (before TM0 becomes 0001H)

after TM0 has overflowed, the OVF0 flag is set again and the clear becomes invalid.

(8) Conflict operation

(a) If the read period and capture trigger input conflict

If the read period and inputting a capture trigger conflict while 16-bit capture/compare registers 00 and

01 (CR00 and CR01) are used as capture registers, the registers do not perform a capture operation but

hold data. However, the interrupt request flag (PIF0) is set when the valid edge is detected.

(b) If the match timing of the write period and TM0 conflict

When 16-bit capture/compare registers 00 and 01 (CR00, CR01) are used as capture registers, because

match detection cannot be performed correctly if the match timing of the write period and 16-bit timer

204

CHAPTER 8 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(9) Timer operation

(a) CR01 capture

Even if 16-bit timer register 0 (TM0) is read, a capture to 16-bit capture/compare register 01 (CR01) is

not performed.

(b) Acknowledgement of TI00 and TI01 pins

When the timer is stopped, input signals to the TI00 and TI01 pins are not acknowledged, regardless of

the CPU operation.

(10) Capture operation

(a) If the valid edge of TI00 is specified for the count clock

When the valid edge of TI00 is specified for the count clock, the capture register with TI00 specified as

a trigger will not operate correctly.

(b) If both rising and falling edges are selected as the valid edge of TI00.

When both the rising and falling edges are selected as the valid edge of TI00, CR00 cannot perform a

capture operation with TI00 specified as the capture trigger.

For an accurate capture operation, a pulse longer than twice the width of the count clock selected by the

sampling clock select register (SCS) is necessary.

(11) Compare operation

(a) When rewriting CR00 and CR01 during timer operation

When rewriting 16-bit timer capture/compare registers 00 and 01 (CR00, CR01), if the value is close to

or larger than the timer value, the match interrupt request generation or clear operation may not be

performed correctly.

(b) When CR00 and CR01 are set to compare mode

When CR00 and CR01 are set to compare mode, they do not perform a capture operation even if a capture

trigger is input.

(12) Edge detection

(a) When the TI00 or TI01 pin is high level immediately after a system reset

When the TI00 or TI01 pin is high level immediately after a system reset, if the valid edge of the TI00 or

TI01 pin is specified as the rising edge or both rising and falling edges, and the operation of 16-bit timer/

counter 0 (TM0) is then enabled, the rising edge will be detected immediately. Care is therefore needed

when the TI00 or TI01 pin is pulled up. However, when operation is enabled after being stopped, the rising

or falling edge is not detected.

205User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

9.1 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Functions

For the 8-bit timer/event counter, two modes are available. One is a mode for the two 8-bit timer/event counter

channels to be used separately (the 8-bit timer/event counter mode) and the other is a mode for the 8-bit timer/event

counter to be used as 16-bit timer/event counter (the 16-bit timer/event counter mode).

9.1.1 8-bit timer/event counter mode

The 8-bit timer/event counters 1 and 2 (TM1 and TM2) have the following functions.

• Interval timer

• External event counter

• Square-wave output

206

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) 8-bit interval timer

Interrupt requests are generated at the preset time intervals.

Table 9-1. Interval Times of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2

Minimum Interval Time Maximum Interval Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (102.4

s) (204.8

s) (400 ns) (800 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (204.8

s) (409.6

s) (800 ns) (1.6

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (409.6

s) (819.2

s) (1.6

s) (3.2

24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (819.2

s) (1.64 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (1.64 ms) (3.28 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (3.28 ms) (6.55 ms) (12.8

s) (25.6

27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (6.55 ms) (13.1 ms) (25.6

s) (51.2

28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (51.2

s) (102.4

29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (102.4

s) (204.8

211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (409.6

s) (819.2

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

207

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) External event counter

The number of pulses of an externally input signal can be measured.

(3) Square-wave output

A square wave with any selected frequency can be output.

Table 9-2. Square-Wave Output Ranges of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2

Minimum Pulse Time Maximum Pulse Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (102.4

s) (204.8

s) (400 ns) (800 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (204.8

s) (409.6

s) (800 ns) (1.6

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (409.6

s) (819.2

s) (1.6

s) (3.2

24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (819.2

s) (1.64 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (1.64 ms) (3.28 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (3.28 ms) (6.55 ms) (12.8

s) (25.6

27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (6.55 ms) (13.1 ms) (25.6

s) (51.2

28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (51.2

s) (102.4

29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (102.4

s) (204.8

211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (409.6

s) (819.2

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

208

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

9.1.2 16-bit timer/event counter mode

(1) 16-bit interval timer

Interrupt requests can be generated at the preset time intervals.

Table 9-3. Interval Times When 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2

Are Used as 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter

Minimum Interval Time Maximum Interval Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (1.6

s) (3.2

24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (209.7 ms) (419.4 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (419.4 ms) (838.9 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (838.9 ms) (1.7 s) (12.8

s) (25.6

27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (1.7 s) (3.4 s) (25.6

s) (51.2

28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (3.4 s) (6.7 s) (51.2

s) (102.4

29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX226 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (6.7 s) (13.4 s) (102.4

s) (204.8

211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX227 × 1/fX228 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (26.8 s) (53.7 s) (409.6

s) (819.2

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

209

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) External event counter

The number of pulses of an externally input signal can be measured.

(3) Square-wave output

A square wave with any selected frequency can be output.

Table 9-4. Square-Wave Output Ranges When 8-Bit Timer/Event

Counters 1 and 2 Are Used as 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter

Minimum Pulse Time Maximum Pulse Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (1.6

s) (3.2

24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (209.7 ms) (419.4 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (419.4 ms) (838.9 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (838.9 ms) (1.7 s) (12.8

s) (25.6

27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (1.7 s) (3.4 s) (25.6

s) (51.2

28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (3.4 s) (6.7 s) (51.2

s) (102.4

29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX226 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (6.7 s) (13.4 s) (102.4

s) (204.8

211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX227 × 1/fX228 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (26.8 s) (53.7 s) (409.6

s) (819.2

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

210

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

9.2 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration

The 8-bit timer/event counter consists of the following hardware.

Table 9-5. 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Configuration

Item Configuration

Timer register 8 bits × 2 (TM1, TM2)

Timer outputs 2 (TO1, TO2)

Control registers Timer clock select register 1 (TCL1)

8-bit timer mode control register 1 (TMC1)

8-bit timer output control register (TOC1)

Port mode register 3 (PM3)Note

Note See Figure 6-9 Block Diagram of P30 to P37.

211

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 9-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter

Note See Figures 9-2 and 9-3 for details of 8-bit timer/event counter output controllers 1 and 2, respectively.

8-bit compare

Match

8-bit timer

Selector

Clear

Selector

/2 to f

TI1/P33

/2 to f

TI2/P34

TCL

Timer clock

select register 1

8-bit timer mode

control register

TMC12 TCE2 TCE1

Internal bus

LVS2 LVR2 TOC

15 TOE2 LVS1 LVR1 TOC

11 TOE1

8-bit timer

8-bit timer/

event counter

output controller

8-bit timer output

control register

8-bit timer/event

counter output

controller 2

Clear

Match

8-bit compare

Selector

Note

INTTM1

TO2/P32

INTTM2

TO1/P31

Selector

Internal bus

212

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 9-2. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Output Controller 1

Note Bit 1 of port mode register 3 (PM3)

Remark The section in the broken lines is the output controller.

Figure 9-3. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Output Controller 2

Note Bit 2 of port mode register 3 (PM3)

Remarks 1. The section in the broken lines is the output controller.

2. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

LVR1

LVS1

TOC11

INTTM1

INV

P31

Output latch

TOE1

PM31

Note

TO1/P31

Level F/F

(LV1)

LVR2

LVS2

TOC15

INTTM2

INV

Level F/F

(LV2) fSCK

P32

Output latch

PM32Note

TOE2

TO2/P32

213

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Compare registers 10, 20 (CR10, CR20)

CR10 and CR20 are 8-bit registers used to compare the value set to CR10 to the 8-bit timer register 1 (TM1)

count value, and the value set to CR20 to the 8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) count value, and, if they match,

generate an interrupt request (INTTM1 and INTTM2, respectively).

CR10 and CR20 are set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. They cannot be set with a 16-bit

memory manipulation instruction. When the compare register is used as 8-bit timer/event counter, between

values 00H and FFH can be set. When the compare register is used as 16-bit timer/event counter, between

values 0000H and FFFFH can be set.

RESET input makes CR10 and CR20 undefined.

Cautions 1. Before changing the set value of 8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and CR20) while

the 16-bit timer/counter is being used, stop the operation of each of the 8-bit timer/event

counters.

2. When the new values of CR10 and CR20 are less than the count values of the 8-bit timer

registers (TM1 and TM2), TM1 and TM2 continue counting, overflow, and start counting

again from 0. If the new values of CR10 and CR20 are less than the old values, therefore,

it is necessary to restart the timers after changing the values of CR10 and CR20.

(2) 8-bit timer registers 1, 2 (TM1, TM2)

TM1 and TM2 are 8-bit registers used to count count pulses.

When TM1 and TM2 are used in the 8-bit timer × 2-channel mode, they are read with an 8-bit memory

manipulation instruction. When TM1 and TM2 are used as 16-bit timer × 1-channel mode, 16-bit timer register

(TMS) is read with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TM1 and TM2 to 00H.

214

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

9.3 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter Control Registers

The following four registers are used to control the 8-bit timer/event counter.

•Timer clock select register 1 (TCL1)

•8-bit timer mode control register 1 (TMC1)

•8-bit timer output control register (TOC1)

•Port mode register 3 (PM3)

(1) Timer clock select register 1 (TCL1)

This register sets the count clock of 8-bit timer registers 1 and 2.

TCL1 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TCL1 to 00H.

215

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 9-4. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 1

Caution When rewriting TCL1 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. TI1: 8-bit timer register 1 input pin

4. TI2: 8-bit timer register 2 input pin

5. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

6. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

TCL17 TCL16 TCL15 TCL14 TCL13 TCL12 TCL11 TCL10

76543210Symbol

TCL1 FF41H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

TCL13 TCL12 TCL11 TCL10

0 0 0 0 TI1 falling edge

0 0 0 1 TI1 rising edge

0110

0111

/2 f

(2.5 MHz) f

(1.25 MHz)

1000

(1.25 MHz) f

(625 kHz)

1001

(625 kHz) f

(313 kHz)

1010

(313 kHz) f

(156 kHz)

1011

(156 kHz) f

(78.1 kHz)

1100

(78.1 kHz) f

(39.1 kHz)

1101

(39.1 kHz) f

(19.5 kHz)

1110

(19.5 kHz) f

(9.8 kHz)

1111

(9.8 kHz) f

(4.9 kHz)

MCS = 1

8-bit timer register 1 count clock selection

MCS = 0

Other than above Setting prohibited

(2.4 kHz) f

(1.2 kHz)

TCL17 TCL16 TCL15 TCL14

0 0 0 0 TI2 falling edge

0 0 0 1 TI2 rising edge

0110

0111

/2 f

(2.5 MHz) f

(1.25 MHz)

1000

(1.25 MHz) f

(625 kHz)

1001

(625 kHz) f

(313 kHz)

1010

(313 kHz) f

(156 kHz)

1011

(156 kHz) f

(78.1 kHz)

1100

(78.1 kHz) f

(39.1 kHz)

1101

(39.1 kHz) f

(19.5 kHz)

1110

(19.5 kHz) f

(9.8 kHz)

1111

(9.8 kHz) f

(4.9 kHz)

MCS = 1

8-bit timer register 2 count clock selection

MCS = 0

Other than above Setting prohibited

(2.4 kHz) f

(1.2 kHz)

216

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) 8-bit timer mode control register (TMC1)

This register enables/stops operation of 8-bit timer registers 1 and 2 and sets the operating mode of 8-bit timer

registers 1 and 2.

TMC1 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TMC1 to 00H.

Figure 9-5. Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 1

Cautions 1. Switch the operating mode after stopping timer operation.

2. When used as a 16-bit timer register (TMS), TCE1 should be used for operation enable/

stop.

<0><1>234567Symbol

TCE1

FF49H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

TCE2TMC1200000

TMC1

TCE1

8-bit timer register 1 operation control

Operation stopped (TM1 is cleared to 0)

Operation enabled

TCE2

8-bit timer register 2 operation control

Operation stopped (TM2 is cleared to 0)

Operation enabled

TMC12

Operating mode selection

8-bit timer register × 2-channel mode (TM1, TM2)

16-bit timer register × 1-channel mode (TMS)

217

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) 8-bit timer output control register (TOC1)

This register controls operation of 8-bit timer/event counter output controllers 1 and 2.

It sets/resets the R-S flip-flops (LV1 and LV2) and enables/disables inversion and 8-bit timer output of 8-bit

timer registers 1 and 2.

TOC1 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TOC1 to 00H.

Figure 9-6. Format of 8-Bit Timer Output Control Register

Cautions 1. Be sure to set TOC1 after stopping timer operation.

2. After data setting, 0 is read from LVS1, LVS2, LVR1, and LVR2 when they are read.

<0>1<2><3><4>5<6><7>Symbol

TOE1TOC11LVR1LVS1TOE2TOC15LVR2LVS2TOC1 FF4FH 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

TOE1

8-bit timer/event counter 1 outptut control

Output disabled (port mode)

Output enabled

TOC11

8-bit timer/event counter 1 timer output F/F control

0 Inverted operation disabled

1 Inverted operation enabled

LVS1 LVR1

8-bit timer/event counter 1 timer output F/F status set

0 0 Unchanged

0 1 Timer output F/F is reset to 0

1 0 Timer output F/F is set to 1

1 1 Setting prohibited

TOE2

8-bit timer/event counter 2 output control

0 Output disabled (port mode)

1 Output enabled

TOC15

8-bit timer/event counter 2 timer output F/F control

0 Inverted operation disabled

1 Inverted operation enabled

LVS2 LVR2

8-bit timer/event counter 2 timer output F/F status set

0 0 Unchanged

0 1 Timer output F/F is reset to 0

1 0 Timer output F/F is set to 1

1 1 Setting prohibited

218

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Port mode register 3 (PM3)

This register sets port 3 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P31/TO1 and P32/TO2 pins for timer output, set PM31, PM32, and the output latches of P31

and P32 to 0.

PM3 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets PM3 to FFH.

Figure 9-7. Format of Port Mode Register 3

01234567Symbol

PM30

FF23H FFH R/W

Address After reset R/W

PM31PM32PM33PM34PM35PM36PM37

PM3

PM3n

P3n pin input/output mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

219

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

9.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2

9.4.1 8-bit timer/event counter mode

(1) Interval timer operations

8-bit timer/event counters 1 and 2 operate as interval timers that generate interrupt requests repeatedly at

intervals of the count value preset to 8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and CR20).

When the count values of 8-bit timer registers 1 and 2 (TM1 and TM2) match the values set to CR10 and CR20,

counting continues with the TM1 and TM2 values cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signals (INTTM1 and

INTTM2) are generated.

The count clock of TM1 can be selected using bits 0 to 3 (TCL10 to TCL13) of timer clock select register 1

(TCL1). The count clock of TM2 can be selected using bits 4 to 7 (TCL14 to TCL17) of timer clock select register

1 (TCL1).

For the operation when the value of the compare register is changed during a timer count operation, see 9.5

(3) Operation after compare register change during timer count operation.

Figure 9-8. Interval Timer Operation Timing

Remark Interval time = (N + 1) × t : N = 00H to FFH

Count clock

TM1 count value

INTTM1

CR10

TO1

Interval time Interval time Interval time

Interrupt request acknowledge Interrupt request acknowledge

NNNN

Count start Clear Clear

00 01 N 00 01 N 00 01 N

220

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 9-6. Interval Time of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 1

TCL13 TCL12 TCL11 TCL10 Minimum Interval Time Maximum Interval Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0000TI1 input cycle 28 × TI1 input cycle TI1 input edge cycle

0001TI1 input cycle 28 × TI1 input cycle TI1 input edge cycle

01102 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (102.4

s) (204.8

s) (400 ns) (800 ns)

01112

2 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (204.8

s) (409.6

s) (800 ns) (1.6

10002

3 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (409.6

s) (819.2

s) (1.6

s) (3.2

10012

4 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (819.2

s) (1.64 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

10102

5 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (1.64 ms) (3.28 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

10112

6 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (3.28 ms) (6.55 ms) (12.8

s) (25.6

11002

7 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (6.55 ms) (13.1 ms) (25.6

s) (51.2

11012

8 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (51.2

s) (102.4

11102

9 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (102.4

s) (204.8

11112

11 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (409.6

s) (819.2

Other than above Setting prohibited

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. TCL10 to TCL13: Bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 1 (TCL1)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

221

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 9-7. Interval Time of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 2

TCL17 TCL16 TCL15 TCL14 Minimum Interval Time Maximum Interval Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0000TI2 input cycle 28 × TI2 input cycle TI2 input edge cycle

0001TI2 input cycle 28 × TI2 input cycle TI2 input edge cycle

01102 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (102.4

s) (204.8

s) (400 ns) (800 ns)

01112

2 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (204.8

s) (409.6

s) (800 ns) (1.6

10002

3 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (409.6

s) (819.2

s) (1.6

s) (3.2

10012

4 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (819.2

s) (1.64 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

10102

5 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (1.64 ms) (3.28 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

10112

6 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (3.28 ms) (6.55 ms) (12.8

s) (25.6

11002

7 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (6.55 ms) (13.1 ms) (25.6

s) (51.2

11012

8 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (51.2

s) (102.4

11102

9 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (102.4

s) (204.8

11112

11 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (409.6

s) (819.2

Other than above Setting prohibited

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. TCL14 to TCL17: Bits 4 to 7 of timer clock select register 1 (TCL1)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

222

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) External event counter operation

The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses to be input to the TI1/P33 and TI2/

P34 pins using 8-bit timer registers 1 and 2 (TM1 and TM2).

TM1 and TM2 are incremented each time the valid edge specified by the timer clock select register (TCL1)

is input. Either the rising or falling edge can be selected.

When the TM1 and TM2 counted values match the values of 8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and

CR20), TM1 and TM2 are cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signals (INTTM1 and INTTM2) are generated.

Figure 9-9. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified)

Remark N = 00H to FFH

TI1 pin input

TM1 count value

INTTM1

CR10

00 01 02 03 04 05 N – 1 N 00 01 02 03

223

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Square-wave output operation

8-bit timer/event counters 1 and 2 output a square wave with any selected frequency at intervals specified

by the value set in advance to 8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and CR20).

The TO1/P31 or TO2/P32 pin output status is reversed at intervals of the count value preset to CR10 or CR20

by setting bit 0 (TOE1) or bit 4 (TOE2) of the 8-bit timer output control register (TOC1) to 1. This enables

a square wave with any selected frequency to be output.

Table 9-8. Square-Wave Output Ranges of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2

Minimum Pulse Time Maximum Pulse Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (102.4

s) (204.8

s) (400 ns) (800 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (204.8

s) (409.6

s) (800 ns) (1.6

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (409.6

s) (819.2

s) (1.6

s) (3.2

24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (819.2

s) (1.64 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX213 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (1.64 ms) (3.28 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX214 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (3.28 ms) (6.55 ms) (12.8

s) (25.6

27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX215 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (6.55 ms) (13.1 ms) (25.6

s) (51.2

28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX216 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (13.1 ms) (26.2 ms) (51.2

s) (102.4

29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (102.4

s) (204.8

211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (409.6

s) (819.2

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

224

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 9-10. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing

Note The initial value of the TO1 output can be set by bits 2 and 3 (LVS1 and LVR1) of the 8-bit timer output

control register (TOC1).

Count clock

TM1 count value 01 0200 N – 1 N 00 01 02 N – 1 N 00

Count start

CR10 N N

TO1

Note

225

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

9.4.2 16-bit timer/event counter mode

When bit 2 (TMC12) of the 8-bit timer mode control register (TMC1) is set to 1, the 16-bit timer/event counter mode

is set.

In this mode, the count clock is selected by using bits 0 to 3 (TCL10 to TCL13) of the timer clock select register

(TCL1), and the overflow signal of 8-bit timer/event counter 1 (TM1) is used as the count clock for 8-bit timer/event

counter 2 (TM2).

The counting operation is enabled or disabled in this mode by using bit 0 (TCE1) of TMC1.

(1) Operation as interval timer

The 16-bit timer/event counter operates as an interval timer that repeatedly generates an interrupt request

at intervals of the count values set in advance to the 2 channels of the 8-bit compare registers (CR10 and

CR20). When setting a count value, assign the value of the higher 8 bits to CR20 and the value of the lower

8 bits to CR10. For the count values that can be set (interval time), see Table 9-9.

When the value of 8-bit timer register 1 (TM1) matches the value of CR10 and the value of 8-bit timer register

2 (TM1) matches the value of CR20, the values of TM1 and TM2 are cleared to 0, and at the same time, an

interrupt request signal (INTTM2) is generated. For the operation timing of the interval timer, see Figure 9-

11.

Select the count clock by using bits 0 to 3 (TCL10 to TCL13) of timer clock select register 1 (TCL1). The overflow

signal of TM1 is used as the count clock for TM2.

Figure 9-11. Interval Timer Operation Timing

Remark Interval time = (N + 1) × t : N = 0000H to FFFFH

Caution Even if the 16-bit timer/event counter mode is used, when the TM1 count value matches the

CR10 value, an interrupt request (INTTM1) is generated and the F/F of 8-bit timer/event

counter output controller 1 is inverted. Thus, when using the 8-bit timer/event counter as

a 16-bit interval timer, set the INTTM1 mask flag TMMK1 to 1 to disable INTTM1 acknowledgment.

When reading the 16-bit timer register (TMS) count value, use a 16-bit memory manipulation

instruction.

Count clock

TMS (TM1, TM2) count value

CR10, CR20

INTTM2

TO2

Interval time Interval time Interval time

Interrupt request acknowledge Interrupt request acknowledge

NN NN

Count start Clear Clear

0000 0001 N 0000 0001 N 0000 0001 N

226

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 9-9. Interval Times When 2-Channel 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters (TM1 and TM2)

Are Used as 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter

TCL13 TCL12 TCL11 TCL10 Minimum Interval Time Maximum Interval Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0000TI1 input cycle 28 × TI1 input cycle TI1 input edge cycle

0001TI1 input cycle 28 × TI1 input cycle TI1 input edge cycle

01102 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

01112

2 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

10002

3 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (1.6

s) (3.2

10012

4 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (209.7 ms) (419.4 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

10102

5 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (419.4 ms) (838.9 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

10112

6 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (838.9 ms) (1.7 s) (12.8

s) (25.6

11002

7 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (1.7 s) (3.4 s) (25.6

s) (51.2

11012

8 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (3.4 s) (6.7 s) (51.2

s) (102.4

11102

9 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX226 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (6.7 s) (13.4 s) (102.4

s) (204.8

11112

11 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX227 × 1/fX228 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (26.8 s) (53.7 s) (409.6

s) (819.2

Other than above Setting prohibited

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. TCL10 to TCL13: Bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 1 (TCL1)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

227

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) External event counter operations

The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses to be input to the TI1/P33 pin using

2-channel 8-bit timer registers 1 and 2 (TM1 and TM2).

TM1 is incremented each time the valid edge specified by timer clock select register 1 (TCL1) is input. When

TM1 overflows as a result, TM2 is incremented with the overflow signal used as its count clock. Either the

rising or falling edge can be selected.

When the TM1 and TM2 counted values match the values of 8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and

CR20), TM1 and TM2 are cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM2) is generated.

Figure 9-12. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified)

Caution Even if the 16-bit timer/event counter mode is used, when the TM1 count value matches the

CR10 value, an interrupt request (INTTM1) is generated and the F/F of 8-bit timer/event

counter output controller 1 is inverted. Thus, when using the 8-bit timer/event counter as

a 16-bit interval timer, set the INTTM1 mask flag TMMK1 to 1 to disable INTTM1 acknowledgment.

When reading the 16-bit timer register (TMS) count value, use a 16-bit memory manipulation

instruction.

TI1 pin input

TM1, TM2 count value

CR10, CR20

INTTM2

0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 N – 1 N 0000 0001 0002 0003

228

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Square-wave output operation

8-bit timer/event counters 1 and 2 output a square wave with any selected frequency at intervals specified

by the value set in advance to 8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and CR20). To set a count value,

set the value of the higher 8 bits to CR20, and the value of the lower 8 bits to CR10.

The TO2/P32 pin output status is reversed at intervals of the count value preset to CR10 and CR20 by setting

bit 4 (TOE2) of the 8-bit timer output control register (TOC1) to 1. This enables a square wave with any selected

frequency to be output.

Table 9-10. Square-Wave Output Ranges When 2-Channel 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters

(TM1 and TM2) Are Used as 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter

Minimum Pulse Time Maximum Pulse Time Resolution

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX217 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX2 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX

(400 ns) (800 ns) (26.2 ms) (52.4 ms) (400 ns) (800 ns)

22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX218 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX22 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX

(800 ns) (1.6

s) (52.4 ms) (104.9 ms) (800 ns) (1.6

23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX219 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX23 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX

(1.6

s) (3.2

s) (104.9 ms) (209.7 ms) (1.6

s) (3.2

24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX220 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX24 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX

(3.2

s) (6.4

s) (209.7 ms) (419.4 ms) (3.2

s) (6.4

25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX221 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX25 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX

(6.4

s) (12.8

s) (419.4 ms) (838.9 ms) (6.4

s) (12.8

26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX222 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX26 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX

(12.8

s) (25.6

s) (838.9 ms) (1.7 s) (12.8

s) (25.6

27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX223 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX27 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX

(25.6

s) (51.2

s) (1.7 s) (3.4 s) (25.6

s) (51.2

28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX224 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX28 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX

(51.2

s) (102.4

s) (3.4 s) (6.7 s) (51.2

s) (102.4

29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX225 × 1/fX226 × 1/fX29 × 1/fX210 × 1/fX

(102.4

s) (204.8

s) (6.7 s) (13.4 s) (102.4

s) (204.8

211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX227 × 1/fX228 × 1/fX211 × 1/fX212 × 1/fX

(409.6

s) (819.2

s) (26.8 s) (53.7 s) (409.6

s) (819.2

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

3. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

229

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 9-13. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing

Count

clock

TM1

01H

N + 1

FFH FFH00H 00H

02H MM – 1 00H01H00H

00H FFH N00H 01H01H 00HN

TM2

CR10

CR20

TO2 Interval time

Count start Level inversion counter clear

230

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

9.5 Cautions on 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 1 and 2

(1) Timer start errors

An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start.

This is because 8-bit timer registers 1 and 2 (TM1 and TM2) are started asynchronously to the count pulse.

Figure 9-14. Start Timing of 8-Bit Timer Registers 1 and 2

(2) 8-bit compare register 10 and 20 setting

8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and CR20) can be set to 00H.

Thus, when these 8-bit compare registers are used as event counters, a one-pulse count operation can be

carried out.

When the 8-bit compare register is used as 16-bit timer/event counter, write data to CR10 and CR20 after

setting bit 0 (TCE1) of the 8-bit timer mode control register (TMC1) and stopping timer operation.

Figure 9-15. External Event Counter Operation Timing

Count pulse

TM1, TM2 count value 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H

Timer start

TI1, TI2, input

CR10, CR20

TM1, TM2 count value

TO1, TO2

Interrupt request flag

00H

00H 00H 00H 00H

231

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Operation after compare register change during timer count operation

If the values after 8-bit compare registers 10 and 20 (CR10 and CR20) are changed are smaller than those

of the 8-bit timer registers (TM1 and TM2), TM1 and TM2 continue counting, overflow and then restart counting

from 0. Thus, if the value after CR10 and CR20 change (M) is smaller than value before the change (N), it

is necessary to restart the timer after changing CR10 and CR20.

Figure 9-16. Timing After Compare Register Change During Timer Count Operation

Remark N > X > M

Count pulse

CR10, CR20

TM1, TM2 count value X – 1 X FFH 00H 01H 02H

232 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER

10.1 Watch Timer Functions

The watch timer has the following functions.

• Watch timer

• Interval timer

The watch timer and the interval timer can be used simultaneously.

(1) Watch timer

When the 32.768 kHz subsystem clock is used, a flag (WTIF) is set at 0.5-second or 0.25-second intervals.

When the 4.19 MHz (standard: 4.194304 MHz) main system clock is used, a flag (WTIF) is set at 0.5-second

or 0.25-second intervals.

Caution 0.5-second intervals cannot be generated with the 5.0 MHz main system clock. Switch to

the 32.768 kHz subsystem clock to generate 0.5-second intervals.

Remark fXX: Watch timer clock frequency (fX/27 or fXT)

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

(2) Interval timer

Interrupt requests (INTTM3) are generated at the preset time interval.

Table 10-1. Interval Timer Interval Time

Interval Time When Operated at When Operated at When Operated at

fXX = 5.0 MHz fXX = 4.19 MHz fXT = 32.768 kHz

24 × 1/fW410

s 488

25 × 1/fW819

s 977

26 × 1/fW1.64 ms 1.95 ms 1.95 ms

27 × 1/fW3.28 ms 3.91 ms 3.91 ms

28 × 1/fW6.55 ms 7.81 ms 7.81 ms

29 × 1/fW13.1 ms 15.6 ms 15.6 ms

Remark fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

fW: Watch timer clock frequency (fXX/27 or fXT)

233

CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

10.2 Watch Timer Configuration

The watch timer consists of the following hardware.

Table 10-2. Watch Timer Configuration

Item Configuration

Counter 5 bits × 1

Control registers Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

Watch timer mode control register (TMC2)

10.3 Watch Timer Control Registers

The following two registers are used to control the watch timer.

• Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

• Watch timer mode control register (TMC2)

(1) Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2) (see Figure 10-2.)

This register sets the watch timer count clock.

TCL2 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TCL2 to 00H.

Remark Besides setting the watch timer count clock, TCL2 sets the watchdog timer count clock and buzzer

output frequency.

234

CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 10-1. Watch Timer Block Diagram

TMC21

Prescaler

Selector

INTWT

5-bit counter

INTTM3

To 16-bit timer/

event counter

Watch timer mode

control register

TMC26 TMC25 TMC24 TMC23 TMC22 TMC21 TMC20

Internal bus

TCL24

Timer clock

select register 2

Clear

Selector

235

CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 10-2. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 2

Caution When changing the count clock, be sure to stop operation of the watch timer before

rewriting TCL2 (stopping operation is not necessary when rewriting the same data).

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

4. ×: don’t care

5. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

6. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz or fXT = 32.768 kHz.

TCL27

TCL26

TCL25 TCL24

3210

FF42H

Address

TCL2

Symbol

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20

00H

After

reset

R/W

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20

(625 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

(2.4 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

(4.9 kHz)

(1.2 kHz)

Watchdog timer count clock selection (see CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER)

TCL24

(32.768 kHz)

(39.1 kHz) f

(19.5 kHz)

Watch timer count clock selection

TCL27 TCL26 TCL25

Buzzer output disabled

Setting prohibited

(9.8 kHz)

(4.9 kHz)

(2.4 kHz)

(4.9 kHz)

(2.4 kHz)

(1.2 kHz)

Buzzer output frequency selection (see CHAPTER 13 BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER)

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

236

CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Watch timer mode control register (TMC2)

This register sets the watch timer operating mode, watch flag set time and prescaler interval time and enables/

disables prescaler and 5-bit counter operations.

TMC2 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TMC2 to 00H.

Figure 10-3. Format of Watch Timer Mode Control Register

Caution When the watch timer is used, the prescaler should not be cleared frequently.

Remarks 1. fW: Watch timer clock frequency (fXX/27 or fXT)

2. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

3. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

4. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

TMC26

TMC25 TMC24

TMC23

3210

FF4AH

Address

TMC2

Symbol

TMC22 TMC21 TMC20

00H

After

reset

R/W

TMC23

= 5.0 MHz operation

(0.4 sec)

(0.2 sec)

Watch flag set time selection

Other than above

TMC26 TMC25 TMC24

= 5.0 MHz operation

(410 s)

(819 s)

(1.64 ms)

(3.28 ms)

(6.55 ms)

(13.1 ms)

Setting prohibited

= 4.19 MHz operation

(488 s)

(977 s)

(1.95 ms)

(3.91 ms)

(7.81 ms)

(15.6 ms)

= 32.768 kHz operation

(488 s)

(977 s)

(1.95 ms)

(3.91 ms)

(7.81 ms)

(15.6 ms)

Prescaler interval time selection

= 4.19 MHz operation

(0.5 sec)

(0.25 sec)

= 32.768 kHz operation

(0.5 sec)

(0.25 sec)

TMC22

5-bit counter operation control

Clear after operation stop

Operation enable

TMC21

Prescaler operation control

Clear after operation stop

Operation enable

TMC20

Watch operating mode selection

Normal operating mode (flag set at f

)

Fast feed operating mode (flag set at f

)

237

CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

10.4 Watch Timer Operations

10.4.1 Watch timer operation

When the 32.768 kHz subsystem clock or 4.19 MHz main system clock is used, the timer operates as a watch

timer with a 0.5-second or 0.25-second interval.

The watch timer sets the test input flag (WTIF) to 1 at a constant time interval. When WTMK = 0, the standby

state (STOP mode/HALT mode) can be cleared by setting WTIF to 1.

When bit 2 (TMC22) of the watch timer mode control register (TMC2) is cleared to 0, the 5-bit counter is cleared

and the count operation stops.

For simultaneous operation of the interval timer, zero-second start can be achieved by clearing TMC22 to 0

(maximum error: 26.2 ms when operated at fXX = 5.0 MHz).

10.4.2 Interval timer operation

The watch timer operates as interval timer which generates interrupt requests repeatedly at an interval of the preset

count value.

The interval time can be selected using bits 4 to 6 (TMC24 to TMC26) of the watch timer mode control register

(TMC2).

Table 10-3. Interval Timer Interval Time

TMC26 TMC25 TMC24 Interval Time When Operated at When Operated at When Operated at

fXX = 5.0 MHz fXX = 4.19 MHz fXT = 32.768 kHz

0002

4 × 1/fW410

s 488

0012

5 × 1/fW819

s 977

0102

6 × 1/fW1.64 ms 1.95 ms 1.95 ms

0112

7 × 1/fW3.28 ms 3.91 ms 3.91 ms

1002

8 × 1/fW6.55 ms 7.81 ms 7.81 ms

1012

9 × 1/fW13.1 ms 15.6 ms 15.6 ms

Other than above Setting prohibited

Remark fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

fW: Watch timer clock frequency (fXX/27 or fXT)

TMC24 to TMC26: Bits 4 to 6 of watch timer mode control register (TMC2)

238 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

11.1 Watchdog Timer Functions

The watchdog timer has the following functions.

• Watchdog timer

• Interval timer

Caution Select the watchdog timer mode or the interval timer mode using the watchdog timer mode

(1) Watchdog timer mode

An inadvertent program loop is detected. Upon detection of the program loop, a non-maskable interrupt

request or RESET can be generated.

Table 11-1. Watchdog Timer Program Loop Detection Times

Runaway Detection Time MCS = 1 MCS = 0

211 × 1/fXX 211 × 1/fX (410

s) 212 × 1/fX (819

212 × 1/fXX 212 × 1/fX (819

s) 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms)

213 × 1/fXX 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms) 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms)

214 × 1/fXX 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms) 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms)

215 × 1/fXX 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms) 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms)

216 × 1/fXX 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms) 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms)

217 × 1/fXX 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms) 218 × 1/fX (52.4 ms)

219 × 1/fXX 219 × 1/fX (104.9 ms) 220 × 1/fX (209.7 ms)

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

239

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Interval timer mode

Interrupt requests are generated at the preset time intervals.

Table 11-2. Interval Times

Interval Time MCS = 1 MCS = 0

211 × 1/fXX 211 × 1/fX (410

s) 212 × 1/fX (819

212 × 1/fXX 212 × 1/fX (819

s) 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms)

213 × 1/fXX 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms) 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms)

214 × 1/fXX 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms) 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms)

215 × 1/fXX 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms) 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms)

216 × 1/fXX 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms) 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms)

217 × 1/fXX 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms) 218 × 1/fX (52.4 ms)

219 × 1/fXX 219 × 1/fX (104.9 ms) 220 × 1/fX (209.7 ms)

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

240

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

11.2 Watchdog Timer Configuration

The watchdog timer consists of the following hardware.

Table 11-3. Watchdog Timer Configuration

Item Configuration

Control registers Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)

Figure 11-1. Watchdog Timer Block Diagram

Prescaler

fXX

24fXX

25fXX

26fXX

27fXX

28fXX

Selector

Watchdog timer mode register

Internal bus

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20

fXX/23

fXX

211

Timer clock select register 2

WDTM4 WDTM3

8-bit counter

TMMK4

RUN

TMIF4

INTWDT

Maskable

interrupt

request

INTWDT

Non-maskable

interrupt

request

RESET

Controller

RUN

241

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

11.3 Watchdog Timer Control Registers

The following two registers are used to control the watchdog timer.

•Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

•Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)

(1) Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

This register sets the watchdog timer count clock.

TCL2 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TCL2 to 00H.

Remark Besides setting the watchdog timer count clock, TCL2 sets the watch timer count clock and buzzer

output frequency.

242

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 11-2. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 2

Caution Changing the count clock (rewriting TCL20 to TCL22) after watchdog timer operation has

started is prohibited.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

4. ×: don’t care

5. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

6. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz or fXT = 32.768 kHz.

TCL27

TCL26

TCL25 TCL24

3210

FF42H

Address

TCL2

Symbol

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20

00H

After

reset

R/W

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20

fXX /23

fXX /24

fXX /25

fXX /26

fXX /27

fXX /28

fXX /29

fXX /211

MCS = 1

fX/23

fX/24

fX/25

fX/26

fX/27

fX/28

fX/29

fX/211

MCS = 0

fX/24

fX/25

fX/26

fX/27

fX/28

fX/29

fX/210

fX/212

Watchdog timer count clock selection

TCL24

fXX /27

fXT (32.768 kHz)

MCS = 1

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

MCS = 0

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

Watch timer count clock selection (see CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER)

TCL27 TCL26 TCL25

Buzzer output disable

fXX /29

fXX /210

fXX /211

Setting prohibited

MCS = 1

fX/29 (9.8 kHz)

fX/210 (4.9 kHz)

fX/211 (2.4 kHz)

MCS = 0

fX/210 (4.9 kHz)

fX/211 (2.4 kHz)

fX/212 (1.2 kHz)

Buzzer output frequency selection (see CHAPTER 13 BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER)

(625 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

(2.4 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

(4.9 kHz)

(1.2 kHz)

243

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM)

This register sets the watchdog timer operating mode and enables/disables counting.

WDTM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears WDTM to 00H.

Figure 11-3. Format of Watchdog Timer Mode Register

Notes 1. Once set to 1, WDTM3 and WDTM4 cannot be cleared to 0 by software.

2. The watchdog timer starts operating as an interval timer as soon as RUN has been set to 1.

3. Once set to 1, RUN cannot be cleared to 0 by software.

Thus, once counting starts, it can only be stopped by RESET input.

Cautions 1. When RUN is set to 1 so that the watchdog timer is cleared, the actual overflow time is

up to 0.5% shorter than the time set by timer clock select register 2 (TCL2).

2. To use watchdog timer modes 1 and 2, make sure that the interrupt request flag (TMIF4)

is 0, and then set WDTM4 to 1.

If WDTM4 is set to 1 when TMIF4 is 1, the non-maskable interrupt request occurs,

regardless of the contents of WDTM3.

Remark ×: don’t care

RUM

<7>

WDTM4

WDTM3

3210

FFF9H

Address

WDTM

Symbol

000

00H

After

reset

R/W

RUN

Watchdog timer operation mode selection

Note 3

Count stop

Counter is cleared and counting starts.

WDTM3

Watchdog timer operation mode

selection selection

Note 1

Interval timer mode

Note 2

(Maskable interrupt request occurs upon

generation of an overflow.)

Watchdog timer mode 1

(Non-maskable interrupt request occurs

upon generation of an overflow.)

Watchdog timer mode 2

(Reset operation is activated upon

generation of an overflow.)

WDTM4

244

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

11.4 Watchdog Timer Operations

11.4.1 Watchdog timer operation

When bit 4 (WDTM4) of the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) is set to 1, the watchdog timer operates to

detect an inadvertent program loop.

The watchdog timer count clock (program loop detection time interval) can be selected using bits 0 to 2 (TCL20

to TCL22) of timer clock select register 2 (TCL2).

The watchdog timer starts by setting bit 7 (RUN) of WDTM to 1. After the watchdog timer is started, set RUN to

1 within the set loop detection time interval. The watchdog timer can be cleared and counting is started by setting

RUN to 1. If RUN is not set to 1 and the program loop detection time has elapsed, system reset or a non-maskable

interrupt request is generated according to the value of WDTM bit 3 (WDTM3).

By setting RUN to 1, the watchdog timer can be cleared.

The watchdog timer continues operating in the HALT mode but it stops in the STOP mode. Thus, set RUN to 1

before the STOP mode is set, clear the watchdog timer and then execute the STOP instruction.

Cautions 1. The actual loop detection time may be shorter than the set time by a maximum of

0.5%.

2. When the subsystem clock is selected for the CPU clock, the watchdog timer count operation

is stopped.

Table 11-4. Watchdog Timer Program Loop Detection Time

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20 Runaway Detection Time MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0002

11 × 1/fXX 211 × 1/fX (410

s) 212 × 1/fX (819

0012

12 × 1/fXX 212 × 1/fX (819

s) 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms)

0102

13 × 1/fXX 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms) 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms)

0112

14 × 1/fXX 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms) 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms)

1002

15 × 1/fXX 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms) 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms)

1012

16 × 1/fXX 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms) 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms)

1102

17 × 1/fXX 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms) 218 × 1/fX (52.4 ms)

1112

19 × 1/fXX 219 × 1/fX (104.9 ms) 220 × 1/fX (209.7 ms)

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. TCL20 to TCL22: Bits 0 to 2 of timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

5. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

245

CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

11.4.2 Interval timer operation

The watchdog timer operates as an interval timer which generates interrupt requests repeatedly at an interval of

the preset count value when bit 4 (WDTM4) of the watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) is cleared to 0.

The count clock (interval time) can be selected by bits 0 to 2 (TCL20 to TCL22) of timer clock select register 2

(TCL2). By setting bit 7 (RUN) of WDTM to 1, the watchdog timer starts operating as an interval timer.

When the watchdog timer operates as interval timer, the interrupt mask flag (TMMK4) and priority specification

flag (TMPR4) are validated and a maskable interrupt request (INTWDT) can be generated. Among the maskable

interrupt requests, the INTWDT default has the highest priority.

The interval timer continues operating in the HALT mode but it stops in STOP mode. Thus, set bit 7 (RUN) of

WDTM to 1 before the STOP mode is set, clear the interval timer and then execute the STOP instruction.

Cautions 1. Once bit 4 (WDTM4) of WDTM is set to 1 (with the watchdog timer mode selected), the interval

timer mode is not set unless RESET input is applied.

2. The interval time just after setting by WDTM may be shorter than the set time by a maximum

of 0.5%.

3. When the subsystem clock is selected for the CPU clock, the watchdog timer count operation

is stopped.

Table 11-5. Interval Timer Interval Time

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20 Interval Time MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0002

11 × 1/fXX 211 × 1/fX (410

s) 212 × 1/fX (819

0012

12 × 1/fXX 212 × 1/fX (819

s) 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms)

0102

13 × 1/fXX 213 × 1/fX (1.64 ms) 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms)

0112

14 × 1/fXX 214 × 1/fX (3.28 ms) 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms)

1002

15 × 1/fXX 215 × 1/fX (6.55 ms) 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms)

1012

16 × 1/fXX 216 × 1/fX (13.1 ms) 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms)

1102

17 × 1/fXX 217 × 1/fX (26.2 ms) 218 × 1/fX (52.4 ms)

1112

19 × 1/fXX 219 × 1/fX (104.9 ms) 220 × 1/fX (209.7 ms)

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. TCL20 to TCL22: Bits 0 to 2 of timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

5. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

246 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 12 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER

12.1 Clock Output Controller Functions

The clock output controller is used for carrier output during remote controlled transmission and clock output for

supply to peripheral LSI devices. The clock selected by timer clock select register 0 (TCL0) is output from the PCL/

P35 pin.

Follow the procedure below to output clock pulses.

(1) Select the clock pulse output frequency (with clock pulse output disabled) using bits 0 to 3 (TCL00 to TCL03)

of TCL0.

(2) Set the P35 output latch to 0.

(3) Set bit 5 (PM35) of port mode register 3 (PM3) to 0 (set to output mode).

(4) Set bit 7 (CLOE) of timer clock select register 0 (TCL0) to 1.

Caution Clock output cannot be used when the P35 output latch is set to 1.

Remark When clock output enable/disable is switched, the clock output controller does not output pulses with

small widths (see the portions marked with * in Figure 12-1).

Figure 12-1. Remote Controlled Output Application Example

CLOE

PCL/P35 pin output

247

CHAPTER 12 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

12.2 Clock Output Controller Configuration

The clock output controller consists of the following hardware.

Table 12-1. Clock Output Controller Configuration

Item Configuration

Control registers Timer clock select register 0 (TCL0)

Port mode register 3 (PM3)

Figure 12-2. Clock Output Controller Block Diagram

12.3 Clock Output Function Control Registers

The following two registers are used to control the clock output function.

• Timer clock select register 0 (TCL0)

• Port mode register 3 (PM3)

(1) Timer clock select register 0 (TCL0)

This register sets the PCL output clock.

TCL0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TCL0 to 00H.

Remark Besides setting the PCL output clock, TCL0 sets the 16-bit timer register count clock.

Internal Bus

fXX

fXX /2

fXX /22

fXX /23

fXX /24

fXX /25

fXX /26

fXX /27

fXT

CLOE TCL03 TCL02 TCL01 TCL00 P35

Output latch

Synchronizing

circuit

PM35

Selector

Timer clock select register 0 Port mode register 3

PCL /P35

248

CHAPTER 12 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 12-3. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 0

Cautions 1. The TI00/P00/INTP0 pin valid edge is set by external interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0),

and the sampling clock frequency is selected by the sampling clock select register

(SCS).

2. When enabling PCL output, set TCL00 to TCL03, then set CLOE to 1 with a 1-bit memory

manipulation instruction.

3. When reading the count value when TI00 has been specified as the TM0 count clock,

the value should be read from TM0, not from the 16-bit capture/compare register (CR01).

4. When rewriting TCL0 to other data, stop the clock operation beforehand.

CLOE

<7>

TCL06

TCL05 TCL04

TCL03

3210

FF40H

Address

TCL0

Symbol

TCL02 TCL01 TCL00

00H

After

reset

R/W

Other than above

TCL03 TCL02 TCL01

fXT (32.768 kHz)

fXX

fXX /2

fXX /22

fXX /23

fXX /24

fXX /25

fXX /26

fXX /27

Setting prohibited

MCS = 1

fX (5.0 MHz)

fX/2 (2.5 MHz)

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

MCS = 0

fX/2 (2.5 MHz)

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

PCL output clock selection

CLOE

PCL output control

Output disabled

Output enabled

Other than above

TCL06 TCL05 TCL04

TI00 (valid edge specifiable)

2fXX

fXX

fXX /2

fXX /22

Watch timer output (INTTM3)

Setting prohibited

MCS = 1

Setting prohibited

fX (5.0 MHz)

fX/2 (2.5 MHz)

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

MCS = 0

fX (5.0 MHz)

fX/2 (2.5 MHz)

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

16-bit timer register count clock selection

TCL00

249

CHAPTER 12 CLOCK OUTPUT CONTROLLER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

4. TI00: 16-bit timer/event counter input pin

5. TM0: 16-bit timer register

6. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

7. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz or fXT = 32.768 kHz.

(2) Port mode register 3 (PM3)

This register sets port 3 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P35/PCL pin for clock output, set PM35 and the output latch of P35 to 0.

PM3 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets PM3 to FFH.

Figure 12-4. Format of Port Mode Register 3

PM37

PM36

PM35 PM34

PM33

3210

FF23H

Address

PM3

Symbol

PM32 PM31 PM30

FFH

After

reset

R/W

PM3n

P3n pin input/output mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

250 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 13 BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER

13.1 Buzzer Output Controller Functions

The buzzer output controller outputs 1.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz, 4.9 kHz, or 9.8 kHz frequency square waves. The buzzer

frequency selected by timer clock select register 2 (TCL2) is output from the BUZ/P36 pin.

Follow the procedure below to output the buzzer frequency.

(1) Select the buzzer output frequency using bits 5 to 7 (TCL25 to TCL27) of TCL2.

(2) Set the P36 output latch to 0.

(3) Set bit 6 (PM36) of port mode register 3 (PM3) to 0 (set to output mode).

Caution Buzzer output cannot be used when the P36 output latch is set to 1.

13.2 Buzzer Output Controller Configuration

The buzzer output controller consists of the following hardware.

Table 13-1. Buzzer Output Controller Configuration

Item Configuration

Control registers Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

Port mode register 3 (PM3)

Figure 13-1. Buzzer Output Controller Block Diagram

Internal bus

fXX /29

fXX /210

fXX /211

TCL27 TCL26 TCL25

PM36

Selector

Timer clock select register 2 Port mode register 3

BUZ/P36

P36

Output latch

251

CHAPTER 13 BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

13.3 Buzzer Output Function Control Registers

The following two registers are used to control the buzzer output function.

• Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

• Port mode register 3 (PM3)

(1) Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2)

This register sets the buzzer output frequency.

TCL2 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears TCL2 to 00H.

Remark Besides setting the buzzer output frequency, TCL2 sets the watch timer count clock and the

watchdog timer count clock.

252

CHAPTER 13 BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 13-2. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 2

Cautions 1. Be sure to stop operation of the watch timer or buzzer to be changed before rewriting

TCL2 (stop operation is not necessary when rewriting the same data).

The operation is stopped by the following methods.

• Buzzer output: Input 0 to bit 7 of TCL2 (TCL27)

• Watch timer: Input 0 to bit 2 (TMC22) of watch timer mode control register 2

(TMC2)

2. Changing the count clock (rewriting TCL20 to TCL22) after watchdog timer operation

has started is prohibited.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fXT: Subsystem clock oscillation frequency

4. ×: don’t care

5. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

6. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz or fXT = 32.768 kHz.

TCL27

TCL26

TCL25 TCL24

3210

FF42H

Address

TCL2

Symbol

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20

00H

After

reset

R/W

TCL22 TCL21 TCL20

MCS = 1

MCS = 0

Watchdog timer count clock selection (see CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG TIMER)

TCL24

(32.768 kHz)

MCS = 1

(39.1 kHz)

MCS = 0

(19.5 kHz)

Watch timer count clock selection (see CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER)

TCL27 TCL26 TCL25

Buzzer output disabled

Setting prohibited

MCS = 1

(9.8 kHz)

(4.9 kHz)

(2.4 kHz)

MCS = 0

(4.9 kHz)

(2.4 kHz)

(1.2 kHz)

Buzzer output frequency selection

(625 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

(2.4 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

(4.9 kHz)

(1.2 kHz)

253

CHAPTER 13 BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Port mode register 3 (PM3)

This register sets port 3 input/output in 1-bit units.

When using the P36/BUZ pin for buzzer output, clear PM36 and the output latch of P36 to 0.

PM3 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets PM3 to FFH.

Figure 13-3. Format of Port Mode Register 3

PM37

PM36

PM35 PM34

PM33

3210

FF23H

Address

PM3

Symbol

PM32 PM31 PM30

FFH

After

reset

R/W

PM3n

P3n pin input/output mode selection (n = 0 to 7)

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

254 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

14.1 A/D Converter Functions

The A/D converter converts an analog input into a digital value. It consists of 8 channels (ANI0 to ANI7) with an

8-bit resolution.

The conversion method is based on successive approximation and the conversion result is held in the 8-bit A/D

conversion result register (ADCR).

A/D conversion can be started in the following two ways.

(1) Hardware start

Conversion is started by trigger input (INTP3).

(2) Software start

Conversion is started by setting the A/D converter mode register (ADM).

One analog input channel is selected from ANI0 to ANI7 and A/D conversion is carried out. In the case of hardware

start, A/D conversion stops when an A/D conversion operation ends, and an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated.

In the case of software start, A/D conversion is repeated. Each time an A/D conversion operation ends, an interrupt

request (INTAD) is generated.

14.2 A/D Converter Configuration

The A/D converter consists of the following hardware.

Table 14-1. A/D Converter Configuration

Item Configuration

Analog inputs 8 channels (ANI0 to ANI7)

Control registers A/D converter mode register (ADM)

A/D converter input select register (ADIS)

External interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1)

Registers Successive approximation register (SAR)

A/D conversion result register (ADCR)

255

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 14-1. A/D Converter Block Diagram

Notes 1. Selector to select the number of channels to be used for analog input.

2. Selector to select the channel for A/D conversion.

3. ES40, ES41: Bits 0 and 1 of external interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1)

ANI0/P10

ANI1/P11

ANI2/P12

ANI3/P13

ANI4/P14

ANI5/P15

ANI6/P16

ANI7/P17

Selector

A/D converter mode register

Trigger enable

ES40, ES41

Note 3

Sample & hold circuit

ADIS3

Internal bus

Edge

detector Controller

Series resistor string

(also functions

as analog

power supply)

Voltage

comparator

Tap selector

INTAD

INTP3

Successive

approximation

A/D converter input select register

ADIS2

ADIS1

ADIS0

Note 1 Note 2

ADM1 to ADM3

INTP3/P03

TRG FR1 FR0

ADM3 ADM2 ADM1

A/D conversion

result register

(ADCR)

REF0

Selector

HSC

256

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Successive approximation register (SAR)

This register compares the analog input voltage value to the voltage tap (compare voltage) value applied from

the series resistor string and holds the result from the most significant bit (MSB).

When up to the least significant bit (LSB) is held (end of A/D conversion), the SAR contents are transferred

to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).

(2) A/D conversion result register (ADCR)

This register holds the A/D conversion result. Each time A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is loaded

from the successive approximation register (SAR).

ADCR is read with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input makes ADCR undefined.

(3) Sample & hold circuit

The sample & hold circuit samples each analog input signal sequentially applied from the input circuit and

sends it to the voltage comparator. This circuit holds the sampled analog input voltage value during A/D

conversion.

(4) Voltage comparator

The voltage comparator compares the analog input to the series resistor string output voltage.

(5) Series resistor string

The series resistor string is connected between AVREF0 and AVSS, and generates a voltage to be compared

with the analog input.

(6) ANI0 to ANI7 pins

These are 8-channel analog input pins to input analog signals to undergo A/D conversion to the A/D converter.

Pins other than those selected as analog input by the A/D converter input select register (ADIS) can be used

as I/O ports.

Cautions 1. Use the ANI0 to ANI7 input voltages within the specified range. If a voltage higher than

or equal to AVREF0 or lower than or equal to AVSS is applied (even if within the absolute

maximum ratings), the converted value of the corresponding channel becomes undefined

and may adversely affect the converted values of other channels.

2. The analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) also function as I/O port pins (port 1). When A/D

conversion is performed with any of pins ANI0 to ANI7 selected, be sure not to execute

an instruction that inputs data to port 1 while conversion is in progress, as this may

reduce the conversion resolution.

Also, if digital pulses are applied to a pin adjacent to the pin in the process of A/D

conversion, the expected A/D conversion value may not be obtained due to coupling

noise. Therefore, avoid applying pulses to pins adjacent to the pin undergoing A/D

conversion.

257

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(7) AVREF0 pin

This pin inputs the A/D converter reference voltage.

It converts signals input to ANI0 to ANI7 into digital signals according to the voltage applied between AVREF0

and AVSS.

The current flowing in the series resistor string can be reduced by setting the voltage to be input to the AVREF0

pin to AVSS level in standby mode.

This pin also serves as an analog power supply pin. Supply power to this pin when the A/D converter is used.

Caution A series resistor string of approximately 10 kΩ is connected between the AVREF0 pin and

AVSS pin. Therefore, if the output impedance of the reference voltage source is high, this

will result in series connection to the series resistor string between AVREF0 pin and the

AVSS pin, resulting in a large reference voltage error.

(8) AVSS pin

This is a GND potential pin of the A/D converter. Keep it at the same potential as the VSS0 pin when not using

the A/D converter.

258

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

14.3 A/D Converter Control Registers

The following three registers are used to control the A/D converter.

• A/D converter mode register (ADM)

• A/D converter input select register (ADIS)

• External interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1)

(1) A/D converter mode register (ADM)

This register sets the analog input channel for A/D conversion, conversion time, conversion start/stop and

external trigger.

ADM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets ADM to 01H.

259

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 14-2. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register

Notes 1. Set so that the A/D conversion time is 16

s or more.

2. Setting is prohibited because the A/D conversion time is less than 16

s with fX set to this

condition.

Cautions 1. The following sequence is recommended for reducing the power consumption of the

A/D converter when the standby function is used: Clear bit 7 (CS) to 0 first to stop

the A/D conversion operation, and then execute the HALT or STOP instruction.

2. When restarting a stopped A/D conversion operation, start the A/D conversion

operation after clearing the interrupt request flag (ADIF) to 0.

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

<7>

TRG

<6>

FR1 FR0

ADM3

3210

FF80H

Address

ADM

Symbol

ADM2 ADM1 HSC

01H

After

reset

R/W

ADM3

ADM2

ADM1

Analog input channel selection

ANI0

ANI1

ANI2

ANI3

ANI4

ANI5

ANI6

ANI7

TRG

External trigger selection

No external trigger (software starts)

Conversion started by external trigger (hardware starts)

FR1

FR0

Other than above

A/D conversion time selection

Note 1

= 5.0 MHz operation

MCS = 1

80/f

(16.0 s)

40/f

(

Setting prohibited

Note 2)

50/f

(

Setting prohibited

Note 2)

100/f

(20.0 s)

Setting prohibited

MCS = 0

160/f

(32.0 s)

80/f

(16.0 s)

100/f

(20.0 s)

200/f

(40.0 s)

= 4.19 MHz operation

MCS = 1

80/f

(19.1 s)

40/f

(Setting prohibitedNote 2)

50/f

(Setting prohibitedNote 2)

100/f

(23.8 s)

MCS = 0

160/f

(38.1 s)

80/f

(19.1 s)

100/f

(23.8 s)

200/f

(47.7 s)

µµ

A/D conversion operation control

Operation stop

Operation start

HSC

µµ

260

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) A/D converter input select register (ADIS)

This register determines whether the ANI0/P10 to ANI7/P17 pins should be used for analog input channels

or ports. Pins other than those selected as analog input can be used as I/O ports.

ADIS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ADIS to 00H.

Cautions 1. Set the analog input channel using the following procedure.

(1) Set the number of analog input channels using ADIS.

(2) Using the A/D converter mode register (ADM), select one channel to undergo A/D

conversion from among the channels set to analog input by ADIS.

2. No internal pull-up resistor can be used for the channels set to analog input by ADIS,

irrespective of the value of bit 1 (PUO1) of pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).

Figure 14-3. Format of A/D Converter Input Select Register

ADIS3

3210

FF84H

Address

ADIS

Symbol

ADIS2 ADIS1 ADIS0

00H

After

reset

R/W

ADIS3

Other than above

Number of analog input channel selection

No analog input channel (P10 to P17)

1 channels (ANI0, P11 to P17)

2 channels (ANI0, ANI1, P12 to P17)

3 channels (ANI0 to ANI2, P13 to P17)

4 channels (ANI0 to ANI3, P14 to P17)

5 channels (ANI0 to ANI4, P15 to P17)

6 channels (ANI0 to ANI5, P16, P17)

7 channels (ANI0 to ANI6, P17)

8 channels (ANI0 to ANI7)

Setting prohibited

ADIS2

ADIS1

ADIS0

261

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) External interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1)

This register sets the valid edge for INTP3 to INTP5.

INTM1 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears INTM1 to 00H.

Figure 14-4. Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 1

ES61 ES60

ES51

3210

FFEDH

Address

INTM1

Symbol

ES50 ES41 ES40

00H

After

reset

R/W

ES41

ES40

INTP3 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES51

ES50

INTP4 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES61

ES60

INTP5 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

262

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

14.4 A/D Converter Operations

14.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter

(1) Set the number of analog input channels using the A/D converter input select register (ADIS).

(2) From among the analog input channels set by ADIS, select one channel for A/D conversion using the A/D

converter mode register (ADM).

(3) Sample the voltage input to the selected analog input channel using the sample & hold circuit.

(4) Sampling for the specified period of time sets the sample & hold circuit to the hold state so that the circuit

holds the input analog voltage until the end of A/D conversion.

(5) Bit 7 of the successive approximation register (SAR) is set. The series resistor string voltage tap is set to

(1/2) AVREF0 by the tap selector.

(6) The voltage difference between the series resistor string voltage tap and analog input is compared by the

voltage comparator. If the analog input is greater than (1/2) AVREF0, the MSB of SAR remains set. If the input

is smaller than (1/2) AVREF0, the MSB is reset.

(7) Next, bit 6 of SAR is automatically set and the operation proceeds to the next comparison. In this case, the

series resistor string voltage tap is selected according to the preset value of bit 7 as described below.

•Bit 7 = 1: (3/4) AVREF0

•Bit 7 = 0: (1/4) AVREF0

The voltage tap and analog input voltage are compared and bit 6 of SAR is manipulated with the result as

follows.

•Analog input voltage ≥ Voltage tap: Bit 6 = 1

•Analog input voltage < Voltage tap: Bit 6 = 0

(8) Comparison of this sort continues up to bit 0 of SAR.

(9) Upon completion of the comparison of 8 bits, a valid digital result remains in SAR and that value is transferred

to and latched in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).

At the same time, the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) can also be generated.

263

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 14-5. A/D Converter Basic Operation

A/D conversion operations are performed continuously until bit 7 (CS) of the AD converter mode register (ADM)

is reset to 0 by software.

RESET input makes ADCR undefined.

Check the completion of A/D conversion by using the A/D conversion end interrupt request flag (ADIF).

Table 14-2. A/D Converter Sampling Time and A/D Conversion Start Delay Time

FR01 FR00 HS0C Conversion TimeNote 1 Sampling Time A/D Conversion

Start Delay Time

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0 0 1 80/fX (16.0

s) 160/fX (32.0

s) 9/fX18/fX6/fX12/fX

0 1 1 40/fX (setting prohibitedNote 2) 80/fX (16.0

s) 4.5/fX9/fX3/fX6/fX

1 0 0 50/fX (setting prohibitedNote 2) 100/fX (20.0

s) 5.25/fX10.5/fX4.5/fX9/fX

1 0 1 100/fX (20.0

s) 200/fX (40.0

s) 10.5/fX21/fX9/fX18/fX

Other than above Setting prohibited ––

Notes 1. Set so that the A/D conversion time is 16

s or more.

2. Setting is prohibited because the A/D conversion time is less than 16

s with fX set to this condition.

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

Conversion time

A/D converter

operation

Undefined 80H C0H or

40H

SAR

ADCR

INTAD

Conversion

result

Sampling time

CS = 0 → 1,

or external trigger, or ADM rewrite

Sampling

A/D conversion

Conversion

result

A/D conversion start delay time

264

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

14.4.2 Input voltage and conversion results

The relationship between the analog input voltage input to the analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7) and the A/D

conversion result (the value stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR)) is shown by the following expression.

ADCR = INT ( × 256 + 0.5)

(ADCR – 0.5) ×≤ VIN < (ADCR + 0.5) ×

Where, INT( ): Function which returns integer part of value in parentheses.

VIN: Analog input voltage

AVREF0:AVREF0 pin voltage

ADCR Value of A/D conversion result register (ADCR)

Figure 14-6 shows the relationship between the analog input voltage and the A/D conversion result.

Figure 14-6. Relationship Between Analog Input Voltage and A/D Conversion Result

VIN

AVREF0

256

AVREF0

256

512

256

512

256

512

256

507

512

254

256

509

512

255

256

511

512 1

255

254

253

A/D conversion

results

(ADCR)

Input voltage/AV

REF0

265

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

14.4.3 A/D converter operating mode

One analog input channel is selected from among ANI0 to ANI7 by the A/D converter input select register (ADIS)

and A/D converter mode register (ADM) and A/D conversion is started.

A/D conversion can be stared in the following two ways.

•Hardware start: Conversion is started by trigger input (INTP3).

•Software start: Conversion is started by setting ADM.

The A/D conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register (ADCR) and the interrupt request signal

(INTAD) is simultaneously generated.

(1) A/D conversion by hardware start

When bit 6 (TRG) and bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) are set to 1, the A/D conversion

standby state is set. When the external trigger signal (INTP3) is input, the A/D conversion starts on the voltage

applied to the analog input pins specified by bits 1 to 3 (ADM1 to ADM3) of ADM.

Upon termination of A/D conversion, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register

(ADCR) and the interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After one A/D conversion operation is started

and terminated, another operation is not started until a new external trigger signal is input.

If data with CS set to 1 is written to ADM again during A/D conversion, the converter suspends the A/D

conversion operation and waits for a new external trigger signal to be input. When the external trigger input

signal is input again, A/D conversion is carried out from the beginning.

If data with CS cleared to 0 is written to ADM during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion operation stops

immediately.

Figure 14-7. A/D Conversion by Hardware Start

Remark n = 0, 1, ..., 7

m = 0, 1, ..., 7

ADM rewrite

CS = 1, TRG = 1

Standby

state ANIn

INTP3

A/D conversion

ADCR

INTAD

ANIn ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm

ANIn ANIn

Standby

state

Standby

state

ADM rewrite

CS = 1, TRG = 1

ANIm ANIm ANIm

266

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) A/D conversion operation in software start

When bit 6 (TRG) and bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) are set to 0 and 1, respectively,

A/D conversion starts on the voltage applied to the analog input pins specified by bits 1 to 3 (ADM1 to

ADM3) of ADM.

Upon termination of A/D conversion, the conversion result is stored in the A/D conversion result register

(ADCR) and the interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. After one A/D conversion operation is started

and terminated, the next A/D conversion operation starts immediately. The A/D conversion operation

continues repeatedly until new data is written to ADM.

If data with CS set to 1 is written to ADM again during A/D conversion, the converter suspends the A/D

conversion operation and starts A/D conversion on the newly written data.

If data with CS cleared to 0 is written to ADM during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion operation stops

immediately.

Figure 14-8. A/D Conversion by Software Start

Remark n = 0, 1, ..., 7

m = 0, 1, ..., 7

Conversion start

CS = 1, TRG = 0

A/D conversion

ADCR

INTAD

ANIn ANIn ANIm

ANIn ANIm ANImANInANIn

ADM rewrite

CS = 1, TRG = 0

ADM rewrite

CS = 0, TRG = 0

Conversion suspended

Conversion results are

not stored. Stop

267

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

14.5 How to Read the A/D Converter Characteristics Table

Here, special terms unique to the A/D converter are explained.

(1) Resolution

This is the minimum analog input voltage that can be identified. That is, the percentage of the analog input

voltage per 1 bit of digital output is called 1LSB (Least Significant Bit). The percentage of 1LSB with respect

to the full scale is expressed by %FSR (Full Scale Range).

When the resolution is 8 bits,

1LSB = 1/28 = 1/256

= 0.4%FSR

Accuracy has no relation to resolution, but is determined by overall error.

(2) Overall error

This shows the maximum error value between the actual measured value and the theoretical value.

Zero-scale offset, full-scale offset, integral linearity error, differential linearity error and errors which are

combinations of these express the overall error.

Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error in the characteristics table.

(3) Quantization error

When analog values are converted to digital values, a ±1/2LSB error naturally occurs. In an A/D converter,

an analog input voltage in a range of ±1/2LSB is converted to the same digital code, so a quantization error

cannot be avoided.

Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error, zero-scale offset, full-scale offset, integral

linearity error, and differential linearity error in the characteristics table.

Figure 14-9. Overall Error Figure 14-10. Quantization Error

Ideal line

0……0

1……1

Digital output

Overall

error

Analo

input

AVREF00

0……0

1……1

Digital output

Quantization error

1/2LSB

Analog input

REF0

268

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Conversion time

This expresses the time from when the analog input voltage was applied to the time when the digital output

was obtained.

The sampling time is included in the conversion time in the characteristics table.

(5) Sampling time

This is the time the analog switch is turned on for the analog voltage to be sampled by the sample & hold circuit.

Sampling

time Conversion time

269

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

14.6 A/D Converter Cautions

(1) Power consumption in standby mode

A/D converter stops operating in the standby mode. At this time, current consumption can be reduced by

stopping the conversion operation (by setting bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 0).

Figure 14-11 shows how to reduce the current consumption in the standby mode.

Figure 14-11. Example of Method of Reducing Current Consumption in Standby Mode

(2) Input range of ANI0 to ANI7

The input voltages of ANI0 to ANI7 should be within the specification range. In particular, if a voltage of AVREF0

or above or AVSS or below is input (even if within the absolute maximum rating range), the conversion value

for that channel will be undefined. The conversion values of the other channels may also be affected.

(3) Conflicting operations

<1> Conflict between A/D conversion result register (ADCR) write and ADCR read by instruction upon end

of conversion

ADCR read is given priority. After the read operation, the new conversion result is written to ADCR.

<2> Conflict between ADCR write and external trigger signal input upon end of conversion

The external trigger signal is not acknowledged during A/D conversion. Therefore, the external trigger

signal is not acknowledged during ADCR write.

<3> Conflict between ADCR write and A/D converter mode register (ADM) write or A/D converter input select

ADM or ADIS write is given priority. ADCR write is not performed, nor is the conversion end interrupt

request signal (INTAD) generated.

AVREF0

AVSS

P-ch

Series resistor string

270

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Noise countermeasures

In order to maintain 8-bit resolution, attention must be paid to noise on the AVREF0 and ANI0 to ANI7 pins.

Since the effect increases in proportion to the output impedance of the analog input source, it is recommended

that a capacitor be connected externally as shown in Figure 14-12 in order to reduce noise.

Figure 14-12. Analog Input Pin Handling

(5) ANI0/P10 to ANI7/P17 pins

The analog input pins ANI0 to ANI7 also function as I/O port pins (port 1). When A/D conversion is performed

with any of pins ANI0 to ANI7 selected, be sure not to execute an instruction that inputs data to port 1 while

conversion is in progress, as this may reduce the conversion resolution.

Also, if digital pulses are applied to a pin adjacent to the pin in the process of A/D conversion, the expected

A/D conversion value may not be obtainable due to coupling noise. Therefore, avoid applying pulses to pins

adjacent to the pin undergoing A/D conversion.

(6) Input impedance of ANI0 to ANI7 pins

In this A/D converter, the internal sampling capacitor is charged and sampling is performed for approx. one

tenth of the conversion time.

Since only the leakage current flows other than during sampling and the current for charging the capacitor

also flows during sampling, the input impedance fluctuates and has no meaning.

To perform sufficient sampling, however, it is recommended to make the output impedance of the analog input

source 10 kΩ or lower, or attach a capacitor of around 100 pF to the ANI0 to ANI7 pins (see Figure 14-12).

(7) AVREF0 pin input impedance

A series resistor string of approximately 10 kΩ is connected between the AVREF0 pin and the AVSS pin.

Therefore, if the output impedance of the reference voltage source is high, this will result in series connection

to the series resistor string between the AVREF0 pin and the AVSS pin, and there will be a large reference voltage

error.

ANI0 to ANI7

REF0

Reference

voltage input

C = 100 to 1,000 pF

If there is possibility that noise whose

level is AV

REF0

or higher or AV

or lower may enter,

clamp with a diode with a small V

(0.3 V or less).

DD0

SS0

271

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(8) Interrupt request flag (ADIF)

The interrupt request flag (ADIF) is not cleared even if the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is changed.

Caution is therefore required since, if a change of analog input pin is performed during A/D conversion, the

A/D conversion result and ADIF for the pre-change analog input may be set just before the ADM rewrite. At

this time, when ADIF is read immediately after the ADM rewrite, ADIF may be set despite the fact that the

A/D conversion for the post-change analog input has not ended.

When the A/D conversion is stopped and then resumed, clear ADIF before it is resumed.

Figure 14-13. A/D Conversion End Interrupt Request Generation Timing

Remark n = 0, 1, ..., 7

m = 0, 1, ..., 7

(9) Conversion result immediately after A/D converter start

The first A/D conversion value immediately after A/D conversion is started may not satisfy ratings. Therefore,

implement a countermeasure such as polling A/D conversion end interrupt requests (INTAD) to delete the first

conversion result.

A/D conversion

ADCR

INTAD

ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm

ADM rewrite

(start of ANIn conversion)

ADM rewrite

(start of ANIm conversion)

ADIF is set but ANIm

conversion has not ended.

272

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(10) Timing at which A/D conversion result is undefined

The A/D conversion value may be undefined if the timing of completion of A/D conversion and the timing of

stopping the A/D conversion conflict with each other. Therefore, read the A/D conversion result during the

A/D conversion operation. To read the conversion result after stopping the A/D conversion operation, be sure

to stop the A/D conversion before the next conversion ends.

Figures 14-14 and 14-15 show the timing of reading the conversion result.

Figure 14-14. Timing of Reading Conversion Result (When Conversion Result is Undefined)

Figure 14-15. Timing of Reading Conversion Result (When Conversion Result is Normal)

(11) Notes on board design

Locate analog circuits as far away from digital circuits as possible on the board because the analog circuits

may be affected by the noise of the digital circuits. In particular, do not cross an analog signal line with a digital

signal line, or wire an analog signal line in the vicinity of a digital signal line. Otherwise, the A/D conversion

characteristics may be affected by the noise of the digital line.

Connect AVSS and VSS0 at one location on the board where the voltages are stable.

Normal conversion result Undefined value

A/D conversion ends A/D conversion ends

Normal conversion result is read. A/D conversion

is stopped.

Undefined value

is read.

ADCR

INTAD

Normal conversion result

A/D conversion ends

Normal conversion

result is read.

A/D conversion is stopped.

ADCR

INTAD

273

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(12) AVREF0 pin

Connect a capacitor to the AVREF0 pin to minimize conversion errors due to noise. If an A/D conversion

operation has been stopped and then is started, the voltage applied to the AVREF0 pin becomes unstable,

causing the accuracy of the A/D conversion to drop. To prevent this, also connect a capacitor to the AVREF0

pin.

Figure 14-16 shows an example of connecting a capacitor. Capacitor C1 is effective for noise of low frequency

and capacitor C2 is effective for noise of high frequency.

Figure 14-16. Example of Connecting Capacitor to AVREF0 Pin

Remark C1: 4.7

F to 10

F (reference value)

C2: 0.01

F to 0.1

F (reference value)

Connect C2 as close to the pin as possible.

(13) Internal equivalent circuit of ANI0 to ANI7 pins and permissible signal source impedance

To complete sampling within the sampling time with sufficient A/D conversion accuracy, the impedance of the

signal source such as a sensor must be sufficiently low. Figure 14-17 shows the internal equivalent circuit

of the ANI0 to ANI7 pins.

If the impedance of the signal source is high, connect capacitors with a high capacitance to the ANI0 to ANI7

pins. An example of this is shown in Figure 14-18. In this case, however, the microcontroller cannot follow

an analog signal with a high differential coefficient because a low-pass filter is created.

To convert a high-speed analog signal or to convert an analog signal in the scan mode, insert a low-impedance

buffer.

REF0

274

CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 14-17. Internal Equivalent Circuit of Pins ANI0 to ANI7

Remark n = 0 to 7

Table 14-3. Resistances and Capacitances of Equivalent Circuit (Reference Values)

AVREF0 R1 R2 C1 C2 C3

1.8 V 75 kΩ30 kΩ8 pF 4 pF 2 pF

2.7 V 12 kΩ8 kΩ8 pF 3 pF 2 pF

4.5 V 4 kΩ2.7 kΩ8 pF 1.4 pF 2 pF

Caution The resistances and capacitances in Table 14-3 are not guaranteed values.

Figure 14-18. Example of Connection If Signal Source Impedance Is High

Remark n = 0 to 7

C3C2

R2R1

ANIn

C3C2

R2R1

C0 ≤ 0.1 F

ANIn

Low-pass filter

is created.

Output impedance

of sensor

275

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 15 D/A CONVERTER

15.1 D/A Converter Functions

The D/A converter converts a digital input into an analog value. The D/A converter used is a 2-channel 8-bit

resolution voltage output type D/A converter.

The conversion method used is the R-2R resistor ladder method.

Start D/A conversion by setting bits 0 and 1 (DACE0 and DACE1) of the D/A converter mode register (DAM).

There are two modes for the D/A converter, as follows.

(1) Normal mode

Outputs an analog voltage signal immediately after D/A conversion.

(2) Real-time output mode

Outputs an analog voltage signal synchronously with the output trigger after D/A conversion.

Since a sine wave can be generated in this mode, it is useful for an MSK modem for cordless telephone sets.

276

CHAPTER 15 D/A CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

15.2 D/A Converter Configuration

The D/A converter consists of the following hardware.

Table 15-1. D/A Converter Configuration

Item Configuration

Registers D/A conversion value set register 0 (DACS0)

D/A conversion value set register 1 (DACS1)

Control register D/A converter mode register (DAM)

Figure 15-1. D/A Converter Block Diagram

Selector

D/A conversion value

set register 1

(DACS1)

Internal bus

R2R

DAM5

ANO1/P131

ANO0/P130

D/A converter mode register

DACS1 write

INTTM2

DACS0 Write

INTTM1

REF1

D/A conversion value

set register 0

(DACS0)

DAM4

DACE1 DACE0

Selector

277

CHAPTER 15 D/A CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) D/A conversion value set registers 0, 1 (DACS0, DACS1)

DACS0 and DACS1 are registers that set the values used to determine the analog voltages to be output to

the ANO0 and ANO1 pins, respectively.

DACS0 and DACS1 are set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears DACS0 and DACS1 to 00H.

Analog voltage output to the ANO0 and ANO1 pins is determined by the following expression.

ANOn output voltage = AVREF1 ×

where, n = 0, 1

Cautions 1. In the real-time output mode, when data that is set in DACS0 and DACS1 is read before

an output trigger is generated, the previous data is read rather than the set data.

2. In the real-time output mode, data should be set to DACS0 and DACS1 after an output

trigger and before the next output trigger.

DACSn

256

278

CHAPTER 15 D/A CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

15.3 D/A Converter Control Registers

The D/A converter mode register (DAM) controls the D/A converter. This register sets D/A converter operation

enable/stop.

DAM is set with a 1-bit or an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears DAM to 00H.

Figure 15-2. Format of D/A Converter Mode Register

Cautions 1. When using the D/A converter, alternate-function port pins should be set to the input mode,

and pull-up resistors should be disconnected.

2. Always set bits 2, 3, 6, and 7 to 0.

3. When D/A conversion is stopped, the output state is high-impedance.

4. The output triggers are INTTM1 and INTTM2 for channel 0 and channel 1, respectively, in the

real-time output mode.

DAM5 DAM4

3 2 <1> <0>

FF98H

Address

DAM

Symbol

DACE1 DACE0

00H

After

reset

R/W

DAM5

Normal mode

Real-time output mode

DACE0

D/A conversion stop

D/A conversion enable

DACE1

D/A conversion stop

D/A conversion enable

DAM4

Normal mode

Real-time output mode

D/A converter channel 0 control

D/A converter channel 1 control

D/A converter channel 0 operating mode

D/A converter channel 1 operating mode

279

CHAPTER 15 D/A CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

15.4 D/A Converter Operations

(1) The channel 0 operating mode and channel 1 operating mode are selected by bits 4 and 5 (DAM4 and DAM5),

respectively, of the D/A converter mode register (DAM).

(2) Set the data corresponding to the analog voltages output to the ANO0/P130 and ANO1/P131 pins to

D/A conversion value setting registers 0 and 1 (DACS0 and DACS1), respectively.

(3) D/A conversion of channel 0 or channel 1 can be started by setting bits 0 or 1 (DACE0 or DACE1) of DAM,

respectively.

(4) In the normal mode, the analog voltage signals are output to the ANO0/P130 and ANO1/P131 pins immediately

after D/A conversion. In the real-time output mode, the analog voltage signals are output synchronously with

the output triggers.

(5) In the normal mode, the analog voltage signals to be output are held until new data is set in DACS0 and DACS1.

In the realtime output mode, new data is set in DACS0 and DACS1 and then held until the next trigger is

generated.

Caution Set DACE0 and DACE1 after setting data in DACS0 and DACS1.

280

CHAPTER 15 D/A CONVERTER

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

15.5 D/A Converter Cautions

(1) Output impedance of D/A converter

Because the output impedance of the D/A converter is high, use of current flowing from the ANOn pins (n =

0,1) is prohibited. If the input impedance of the load for the converter is low, insert a buffer amplifier between

the load and the ANOn pins. In addition, wiring from the ANOn pins to the buffer amplifier or the load should

be as short as possible (because of high output impedance). If the wiring may be long, design the ground

pattern so as to be close to those lines or use some other expedient to achieve shorter wiring.

Figure 15-3. Use Example of Buffer Amplifier

(a) Inverting amplifier

(b) Voltage-follower

(2) Output voltage of D/A converter

Because the output voltage of the converter changes in steps, use the D/A converter output signals in general

by connecting a low-pass filter.

(3) AVREF1 pin

When only one of the D/A converter channels is used with AVREF1 < VDD0, the other pins that are not used

as analog outputs must be set as follows:

• Set the PM13x bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 1 (input mode) and connect the pin to VSS0.

• Set the PM13x bit of port mode register 13 (PM13) to 0 (output mode) and the output latch to 0, and output

a low level from the pin.

When not using the D/A converter, use AVREF1 with its potential the same as that of the VDD0.

PD780058, 780058Y

Subseries

ANOn

• The input impedance of the buffer amplifier is R1.

PD780058, 780058Y

Subseries

ANOn

R1C

• The input impedance of the buffer amplifier is R1.

• If R1is not connected, the output becomes

undefined when RESET is low.

281

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SBI (serial bus interface) Use possible None None

2-wire serial I/O

UART None Use possible

(Asynchronous serial interface) Time-division

transfer function

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

The

PD780058 Subseries incorporates three serial interface channels. Differences between channels 0, 1,

and 2 are as follows (see CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1 for details of serial interface channel

1 and CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2 for details of serial interface channel 2).

Table 16-1. Differences Between Channels 0, 1, and 2

Serial Transfer Mode Channel 0

fXX/2, fXX/22, fXX/23,

fXX/24, fXX/25, fXX/26,

fXX/27, fXX/28, external

clock, TO2 output

MSB/LSB switchable

as the start bit

Serial transfer end

interrupt request flag

(CSIIF0)

Channel 1

fXX/2, fXX/22, fXX/23,

fXX/24, fXX/25, fXX/26,

fXX/27, fXX/28, external

clock, TO2 output

MSB/LSB switchable as

the start bit

Automatic transmit/

receive function

Serial transfer end

interrupt request flag

(CSIIF1)

Channel 2

External clock, baud

rate generator output

MSB/LSB switchable as

the start bit

Serial transfer end

interrupt request flag

(SRIF)

Clock selection

Transfer method

Transfer end flag

3-wire serial I/O

282

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 0

Serial interface channel 0 employs the following four modes.

• Operation stop mode

• 3-wire serial I/O mode

• SBI (serial bus interface) mode

• 2-wire serial I/O mode

Caution Do not change the operating mode (3-wire serial I/O, 2-wire serial I/O, or SBI) while serial interface

channel 0 is enabled to operate. To change the operating mode, stop the serial operation first.

(1) Operation stop mode

This mode is used when serial transfer is not carried out. Power consumption can be reduced in this mode.

(2) 3-wire serial I/O mode (MSB-/LSB-first selectable)

This mode is used for 8-bit data transfer using three lines, one each for the serial clock (SCK0), serial output

(SO0) and serial input (SI0). This mode enables simultaneous transmission/reception and therefore reduces

the data transfer processing time.

The start bit of transferred 8-bit data is switchable between MSB and LSB, so that devices can be connected

regardless of their start bit recognition.

This mode should be used when connecting with peripheral I/O devices or display controllers which incorporate

a conventional clocked serial interface as is the case with the 75X/XL, 78K, and 17K Series.

(3) SBI (serial bus interface) mode (MSB-first)

This mode is used for 8-bit data transfer with two or more devices using the serial clock (SCK0) and serial

data bus (SB0 or SB1) lines (see Figure 16-1).

The SBI mode conforms to the NEC Electronics serial bus format, and transmits or receives three types of

transfer data: “addresses”, “commands”, and “data”.

• Address: Data to select the target device for serial communication

• Command: Data to give an instruction to the target device

• Data: Data actually transferred

Actually, the master device outputs an “address” to the serial bus to select one of the slave devices with which

the master device is to communicate. After that, “commands” and “data” are transmitted or received between

the master and slave devices (this is the serial transfer). The receiver can automatically identify the received

data as an “address”, “command”, or “data” by hardware.

This function enables the I/O ports to be used effectively and the serial interface control portions of the

application program to be simplified.

In this mode, the wakeup function for handshake and the output function of acknowledge and busy signals

can also be used.

283

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) 2-wire serial I/O mode (MSB-first)

This mode is used for 8-bit data transfer using the two lines of the serial clock (SCK0) and serial data bus

(SB0 or SB1).

This mode enables support of any one of the possible data transfer formats by controlling the SCK0 level and

the SB0 or SB1 output level. Thus, the handshake line previously necessary for connection of two or more

devices can be removed, resulting in an increased number of available I/O ports.

Figure 16-1. Serial Bus Interface (SBI) System Configuration Example

Master CPU

SCK0

SB0

SCK0

SB0

Slave CPU1

SCK0

SB0

Slave CPU2

SCK0

SB0

Slave CPUn

DD0

284

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0

Serial interface channel 0 consists of the following hardware.

Table 16-2. Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0

Item Configuration

Registers Serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

Slave address register (SVA)

Control registers Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

Interrupt timing specify register (SINT)

Port mode register 2 (PM2)Note

Note See Figure 6-5 Block Diagram of P20, P21, and P23 to P26 and Figure 6-6 Block Diagram of P22

and P27.

285

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-2. Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 0

Remark The output control block performs selection between CMOS output and N-ch open-drain output.

CSIE0 COI WUP CSIM

CSIM

Serial operating mode register 0

Controller

Output

control

Selector

SI0/SB0/

P25

PM25

Output

control

SO0/SB1/

P26 PM26

Output

control

SCK0/

P27

PM27

Selector

P25

Output latch

P26 Output latch

CLD

P27

Output latch

Internal bus

BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

Internal bus

Bus release/

command/

acknowledge

detector

Serial clock

counter

Serial clock

controller

CLR

SET

Match

Busy/

acknowledge

output circuit

Interrupt

request

signal

generator

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

WUP

Selector Selector

TCL33 TCL32 TCL31 TCL30

Timer clock

select

/2 to f

INTCSI0

CLD SIC

SVAM

CSIM01

CSIM00

CSIM01

CSIM00

Slave address

SVAM

Serial bus interface

control register

Serial I/O shift

TO2

Interrupt timing

specify register

286

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

SIO0 is an 8-bit register used to carry out parallel/serial conversion and to carry out serial transmission/

reception (shift operation) in synchronization with the serial clock.

SIO0 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

When bit 7 (CSIE0) of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) is 1, writing data to SIO0 starts a serial

operation.

In transmission, data written to SIO0 is output to the serial output (SO0) or serial data bus (SB0/SB1). In

reception, data is read from the serial input (SI0) or SB0/SB1 to SIO0.

Note that, if a bus is driven in the SBI mode or 2-wire serial I/O mode, the bus pins must serve for both input

and output. Thus, in the case of a device for reception, write FFH to SIO0 in advance (except when address

reception is carried out by setting bit 5 (WUP) of CSIM0 to 1).

In the SBI mode, the busy state can be cleared by writing data to SIO0. In this case, bit 7 (BSYE) of the serial

bus interface control register (SBIC) is not cleared to 0.

RESET input makes SIO0 undefined.

(2) Slave address register (SVA)

SVA is an 8-bit register used to set the slave address value for connection of a slave device to the serial bus.

The SVA is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. This register is not used in the 3-wire serial

I/O mode.

The master device outputs a slave address to the connected slave devices for selection of a particular slave

device. These two data (the slave address output from the master device and the SVA value) are compared

by an address comparator. If they match, the slave device has been selected. In that case, bit 6 (COI) of

serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) becomes 1.

Address comparison can also be executed on the data of LSB-masked higher 7 bits by setting bit 4 (SVAM)

of the interrupt timing specify register (SINT) to 1.

If no matching is detected in address reception, bit 2 (RELD) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

is cleared to 0. In the SBI mode, the wakeup function can be used by setting bit 5 (WUP) of CSIM0 to 1. In

this case, the interrupt request signal (INTCSI0) is generated only when the slave address output by the master

matches with the SVA value, and it can be learned by this interrupt request that the master requests

communication. If bit 5 (SIC) of the interrupt timing specify register (SINT) is set to 1, the wakeup function

cannot be used even if WUP is set to 1 (an interrupt request signal is generated when bus release is detected).

To use the wakeup function, clear SIC to 0.

Further, an error can be detected by using SVA when the device transmits data as a master or slave device

in the SBI or 2-wire serial I/O mode.

RESET input makes SVA undefined.

287

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) SO0 latch

This latch holds the SI0/SB0/P25 and SO0/SB1/P26 pin levels. It can be directly controlled by software. In

the SBI mode, this latch is set upon termination of the 8th serial clock.

(4) Serial clock counter

This counter counts the serial clocks to be output and input during transmission/reception to check whether

8-bit data has been transmitted/received.

(5) Serial clock controller

This circuit controls serial clock supply to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0). When the internal system clock

is used, the circuit also controls clock output to the SCK0/P27 pin.

(6) Interrupt request signal generator

This circuit controls interrupt request signal generation. It generates an interrupt request signal in the following

cases.

• In the 3-wire serial I/O mode and 2-wire serial I/O mode

This circuit generates an interrupt request signal every eight serial clocks.

• In the SBI mode

When WUP is 0 ........... Generates an interrupt request signal every eight serial clocks.

When WUP is 1 ........... Generates an interrupt request signal when the serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

value matches the slave address register (SVA) value after address reception.

Remark WUP is the wakeup function specification bit. It is bit 5 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0).

When using the wakeup function (WUP = 1), clear bit 5 (SIC) of the interrupt timing specification

(7) Busy/acknowledge output circuit and bus release/command/acknowledge detector

These two circuits output and detect various control signals in the SBI mode.

These do not operate in the 3-wire serial I/O mode and 2-wire serial I/O mode.

288

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 0

The following four registers are used to control serial interface channel 0.

•Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

•Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

•Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

•Interrupt timing specification register (SINT)

(1) Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

This register sets the serial clock of serial interface channel 0.

TCL3 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets TCL3 to 88H.

289

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-3. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 3

Caution When rewriting TCL3 to other data, stop the serial transfer operation beforehand.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS:Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

Serial interface channel 0 serial clock selection

TCL33 TCL32 TCL31 TCL30

fXX/2

fXX/22

fXX/23

fXX/24

fXX/25

fXX/26

fXX/27

fXX/28

MCS = 1

Setting prohibited

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

MCS = 0

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

fX/29 (9.8 kHz)

Other than above Setting prohibited

Serial interface channel 1 serial clock selection

TCL37 TCL36 TCL35 TCL34

fXX/2

fXX/22

fXX/23

fXX/24

fXX/25

fXX/26

fXX/27

fXX/28

MCS = 1

Setting prohibited

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

MCS = 0

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

fX/29 (9.8 kHz)

Other than above Setting prohibited

65432107

Symbol

TCL3 TCL37 TCL36 TCL35 TCL34 TCL33 TCL32 TCL31 TCL30 FF43H 88H R/W

Address After reset R/W

290

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

This register sets the serial interface channel 0 serial clock, operating mode, operation enable/stop wakeup

function and displays the address comparator match signal.

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

Caution Do not change the operating mode (3-wire serial I/O, 2-wire serial I/O, or SBI) while serial

interface channel 0 is enabled to operate. To change the operating mode, stop the serial

operation first.

Figure 16-4. Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 0 (1/2)

(Cont’d)

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. Can be used as P25 (CMOS I/O) when used only for transmission.

3. Can be used freely as a port function.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

SBI mode

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP

CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

CSIM01

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

Input clock to SCK0 pin from off-chip

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

0SCK0

(CMOS I/O)

R/W

1 Clock specified by bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM

CSIM00

FF60H 00H R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

R/W

CSIM

PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27

Operation

mode

Start bit SI0/SB0/P25

pin function

SO0/SB1/P26

pin function

SCK0/P27

pin function

10 ×

Note 3 Note 3

MSB P25

(CMOS I/O)

SB0

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

SB1

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

P26

(CMOS I/O)

MSB

LSB

1×0001

Note 2

3-wire serial

l/O mode

SI0

Note 2

(input)

SO0

(CMOS output)

SCK0

(CMOS I/O)

2-wire serial

l/O mode

0SCK0

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

11 ×

Note 3 Note 3

MSB P25

(CMOS I/O)

SB0

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

SB1

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

P26

(CMOS I/O)

Note 2

291

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-4. Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 0 (2/2)

Notes 1. When using the wakeup function (WUP = 1), clear bit 5 (SIC) of the interrupt timing specification

2. When CSIE0 = 0, COI becomes 0.

WUP

Wakeup function control

Note 1

Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

Interrupt request signal generation when the address received after bus release (when CMDD = RELD = 1)

matches the slave address register (SVA) data in SBI mode

R/W

COI

Slave address comparison result flag

Note 2

Slave address register (SVA) not equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

Slave address register (SVA) equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

292

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

This register sets the serial bus interface operation and displays statuses.

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

Figure 16-5. Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register (1/2)

Note Bits 2, 3, and 6 (RELD, CMDD and ACKD) are read-only bits.

Remarks 1. Bits 0, 1, and 4 (RELT, CMDT, and ACKT) are 0 when read after data setting.

2. CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

RELT Used for bus release signal output.

When RELT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is set to 1. After the SO0 latch is set, is RELT automatically cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

FF61H 00H R/WNote

Address After reset R/W

CMDT Used for command signal output.

When CMDT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is cleared, CMDT is automatically

cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

RRELD Bus release detection

Set conditions (RELD = 1)Clear conditions (RELD = 0)

• When bus release signal (REL) is detected

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• If SIO0 and SVA values do not match in

address reception

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

RCMDD Command detection

Clear conditions (CMDD = 0)

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• When bus release signal (REL) is detected

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

Set conditions (CMDD = 1)

• When command signal (CMD) is detected

ACKT The acknowledge signal is output in synchronization with the falling edge of the SCK0 clock just after

execution of the instruction that sets this bit to 1, and after acknowledge signal output, ACKT is automatically

cleared to 0.

ACKT is used with ACKE = 0. ACKT is also cleared to 0 upon start of serial interface transfer or when

CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

293

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-5. Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register (2/2)

Note The busy mode can be cleared by start of serial interface transfer. However, the BSYE flag is

not cleared to 0.

Remark CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

ACKE Acknowledge signal automatic output control

0 Acknowledge signal automatic output disable (output by ACKT enabled)

The acknowledge signal is output in synchronization with the falling edge of the 9th

SCK0 clock (automatically output when ACKE = 1).

Before completion of

transfer

The acknowledge signal is output in synchronization with the falling edge of

SCK0 just after execution of the instruction that sets this bit to 1

(automatically output when ACKE = 1).

However, ACKE is not automatically cleared to 0 after acknowledge signal is output.

After completion of

transfer

R/W

RACKD Acknowledge detection

Clear conditions (ACKD = 0)

• Falling edge of SCK0 immediately after busy

mode is released after executing the transfer

start instruction

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

Set conditions (ACKD = 1)

• When acknowledge signal (ACK) is detected at the

rising edge of the SCK0 clock after completion of

transfer

BSYE Synchronizing busy signal output control

0Disable the busy signal which is output in synchronization with the falling edge the SCK0 clock just after

execution of the instruction that clears this bit to 0.

R/W

Note

1 Output the busy signal at the falling edge of the SCK0 clock following the acknowledge signal.

294

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Interrupt timing specification register (SINT)

This register sets the bus release interrupt and address mask functions and displays the SCK0/P27 pin level

status.

SINT is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SINT to 00H.

Figure 16-6. Format of Interrupt Timing Specification Register

Notes 1. Bit 6 (CLD) is a read-only bit.

2. When using wakeup function in the SBI mode, clear SIC to 0.

3. When CSIE0 = 0, CLD becomes 0.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 to 3 to 0.

Remark SVA: Slave address register

CSIIF0: Interrupt request flag corresponding to INTCSI0

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6><5><4>32107

Symbol

SINT 0 CLD SIC SVAM 0 0 0 0 FF63H 00H

R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

SVAM

SVA bit to be used as slave address

Bits 0 to 7

Bits 1 to 7

SIC

INTCSI0 interrupt source selection

Note 2

CSIIF0 is set upon termination of serial interface

channel 0 transfer

CSIIF0 is set upon bus release detection or

termination of serial interface channel 0 transfer

CLD

SCK0/P27 pin level

Note 3

Low level

High level

R/W

295

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.4 Operations of Serial Interface Channel 0

The following four operating modes are available for serial interface channel 0.

•Operation stop mode

•3-wire serial I/O mode

•SBI mode

•2-wire serial I/O mode

16.4.1 Operation stop mode

Serial transfer is not carried out in the operation stop mode. Thus, power consumption can be reduced. Serial

I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) does not carry out shift operations either and thus it can be used as an ordinary 8-bit register.

In the operation stop mode, the P25/SI0/SB0, P26/SO0/SB1, and P27/SCK0 pins can be used as ordinary I/O ports.

(1) Register setting

The operation stop mode is set by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0).

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00 FF60H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

296

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is valid for connection of peripheral I/O units and display controllers which incorporate

a conventional clocked serial interface as is the case with the 75X/XL, 78K, and 17K Series.

Communication is carried out with the three lines of the serial clock (SCK0), serial output (SO0), and serial input

(SI0).

(1) Register setting

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is set by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) and the serial bus interface control

(a) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

297

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. Can be used as P25 (CMOS input/output) when used only for transmission.

3. Be sure to clear WUP to 0 when the 3-wire serial I/O mode is selected.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0

CSIM01

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

Input clock to SCK0 pin from off-chip

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

SBI mode (see 16.4.3 SBI mode operation.)

R/W

1 Clock specified by bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM

CSIM00

FF60H 00H

R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

R/W

CSIM

PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27

Operation

mode

Start bit SIO/SB0/P25

pin function

SO0/SB1/P26

pin function

SCK0/P27

pin function

WUP

Wakeup function control

Note 3

Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

Interrupt request signal generation when the address received after bus release

(when CMDD = RELD = 1) matches the slave address register data in SBI mode

R/W

MSB

LSB

1×0001

Note 2

3-wire serial

l/O mode SI0

Note 2

(input)

SO0

(CMOS output)

SCK0

(CMOS I/O)

2-wire serial I/O mode (see 16.4.4 2-wire serial I/O mode operation.)

Note 2

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

CSIE0 COI WUP

CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

298

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

RELT When RELT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is set to 1. After the SO0 Iatch is set, RELT is automatically cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

FF61H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

CMDT When CMDT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is cleared, CMDT is automatically

cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

299

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Communication operation

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for data transmission/reception in 8-bit units. Data transmission/reception

is carried out bit-wise in synchronization with the serial clock.

Shift operations of serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) are carried out at the falling edge of the serial clock (SCK0).

The transmitted data is held in the SO0 latch and is output from the SO0 pin. The received data input to the

SI0 pin is latched in SIO0 at the rising edge of SCK0.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, SIO0 operation stops automatically and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF0)

is set.

Figure 16-7. 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing

The SO0 pin is a CMOS output pin and outputs the current SO0 latch status. Thus, the SO0 pin output status

can be manipulated by setting bit 0 (RELT) and bit 1 (CMDT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC).

However, do not carry out this manipulation during serial transfer.

Control the SCK0 pin output level in the output mode (internal system clock mode) by manipulating the P27

output latch (see 16.4.5 SCK0/P27 pin output manipulation).

(3) Other signals

Figure 16-8 shows the RELT and CMDT operations.

Figure 16-8. RELT and CMDT Operations

SI0

SCK0 12345678

DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0

SO0 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0

CSIIF0

Transfer start at the falling edge of SCK0

End of transfer

RELT

CMDT

SO0 latch

300

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) MSB/LSB switching as the start bit

In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, it is possible to select transfer to start from the MSB or LSB.

Figure 16-9 shows the configuration of serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) and the internal bus. As shown in the

figure, the MSB/LSB can be read or written in reverse form.

MSB/LSB switching as the start bit can be specified by bit 2 (CSIM02) of serial operating mode register 0

(CSIM0).

Figure 16-9. Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order

Start bit switching is realized by switching the bit order for data write to SIO0. The SIO0 shift order remains

unchanged.

Thus, switching between MSB-first and LSB-first must be performed before writing data to SIO0.

(5) Transfer start

Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) when the following two

conditions are satisfied.

•Serial interface channel 0 operation control bit (CSIE0) = 1.

•Internal serial clock is stopped or SCK0 is a high level after 8-bit serial transfer.

Caution If CSIE0 is set to 1 after data write to SIO0, transfer does not start.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, serial transfer automatically stops and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF0)

is set.

Internal bus

LSB-first

MSB-first Read/write gate

SI0 Serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

Read/write gate

SO0

SCK0

SO0 latch

301

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.4.3 SBI mode operation

SBI (Serial Bus Interface) is a high-speed serial interface that complies with the NEC Electronics serial bus format.

SBI uses a single master device and employs a clocked serial I/O format with the addition of a bus configuration

function. This function enables devices to communicate using only two lines. Thus, when making up a serial bus

with two or more microcontrollers and peripheral ICs, the number of ports to be used and the number of wires on

the board can be decreased.

The master device outputs three kinds of data to slave devices on the serial data bus: “addresses” to select a device

to be communicated with, “commands” to instruct the selected device, and “data” which is actually required.

The slave device can identify the received data as “address”, “command”, or “data” by hardware. An application

program that controls serial interface channel 0 can be simplified by using this function.

The SBI function is incorporated into various devices including the 75X/XL Series and 78K Series.

Figure 16-10 shows a serial bus configuration example when a CPU having a serial interface compliant with SBI

and peripheral ICs are used.

In SBI, the SB0 (SB1) serial data bus pin is an open-drain output pin and therefore the serial data bus line behaves

in the same way as a wired-OR configuration. In addition, a pull-up resistor must be connected to the serial data

bus line.

When the SBI mode is used, see (11) SBI mode precautions (d) described later.

Figure 16-10. Example of Serial Bus Configuration with SBI

Caution When exchanging the master CPU/slave CPU, a pull-up resistor is necessary for the serial clock

line (SCK0) as well because serial clock line (SCK0) input/output switching is carried out

asynchronously between the master and slave CPUs.

Master CPU

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

Slave CPU

Address 1

Slave CPU

Address 2

Slave IC

Address N

Serial clock

Serial data bus

•

DD0

302

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) SBI functions

In the conventional serial I/O format, when a serial bus is configured by connecting two or more devices, many

ports and wiring are necessary to provide chip select signals to identify commands and data, and to judge

the busy state, because only the data transfer function is available. If these operations are to be controlled

by software, the software load becomes very heavy.

In SBI, a serial bus can be configured with the two signal lines of the serial clock SCK0 and serial data bus

SB0 (SB1). Thus, use of SBI leads to a reduction in the number of microcontroller ports and the amount of

wiring and routing on the board.

The SBI functions are described below.

(a) Address/command/data identification function

Serial data is distinguished as addresses, commands, and data.

(b) Chip select function by address transmission

The master executes slave chip selection by address transmission.

The slave can easily judge address reception (chip select judgment) using the wakeup function (which

can be set/reset by software).

When the wakeup function is set, the interrupt request signal (INTCSI0) is generated upon reception of

a match address.

Thus, when communication is executed with two or more devices, the CPU except the selected slave

device can operate regardless of serial communications.

(d) Acknowledge signal (ACK) control function

The acknowledge signal used to check serial data reception is controlled.

(e) Busy signal (BUSY) control function

The busy signal used to report the slave busy state is controlled.

303

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) SBI definition

The SBI serial data format and the signals to be used are defined as follows.

Serial data to be transferred by SBI consists of three kinds of data: “address”, “command”, and “data”.

Figure 16-11 shows the address, command, and data transfer timing.

Figure 16-11. SBI Transfer Timing

Remark The broken lines indicate the READY status.

The bus release signal and the command signal are output by the master device. BUSY is output by the slave

device. ACK can be output by either the master or slave device (normally, the 8-bit data receiver outputs).

Serial clocks continue to be output by the master device from 8-bit data transfer start to BUSY reset.

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

A7 A0 ACK BUSY

C7 C0 ACK BUSY READY

D7 D0 ACK BUSY READY

Address transfer

Command transfer

Data transfer

Bus release

signal

Command signal

Address

Command

Data

304

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(a) Bus release signal (REL)

The bus release signal is recognized when the SB0 (SB1) line changes from low level to high level when

the SCK0 line is at high level (without serial clock output).

This signal is output by the master device.

Figure 16-12. Bus Release Signal

The bus release signal indicates that the master device is going to transmit an address to the slave device.

The slave device incorporates hardware to detect the bus release signal.

Caution The transition of the SB0 (SB1) line from low to high when the SCK0 line is high is

recognized as a bus release signal. If the transition timing of the bus is shifted due to

the influence of board capacitance, transmitted data may be judged as a bus release

signal. Exercise care in wiring so that noise is not superimposed on the signal lines.

(b) Command signal (CMD)

The command signal is recognized when the SB0 (SB1) line changes from high level to low level when

the SCK0 line is at high level (without serial clock output). This signal is output by the master device.

Figure 16-13. Command Signal

The command signal indicates that the master is going to transmit a command to the slave (however,

a command signal following a bus release signal indicates that an address is transmitted).

The slave device incorporates hardware to detect the command signal.

Caution The transition of the SB0 (SB1) line from high to low when the SCK0 line is high is

recognized as a command signal. If the transition timing of the bus is shifted due to the

influence of board capacitance, transmitted data may be judged as a command signal.

Exercise care in wiring so that noise is not superimposed on the signal lines.

SCK0 “H”

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0 “H”

SB0 (SB1)

305

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

An address is 8-bit data which the master device outputs to the slave devices connected to the bus line

in order to select a particular slave device.

Figure 16-14. Addresses

8-bit data following bus release and command signals is defined as an “address”. In the slave device,

this condition is detected by hardware and whether or not 8-bit data matches the own specification number

(slave address) is checked by hardware. If the 8-bit data matches the slave address, the slave device

has been selected. After that, communication with the master device continues until a release instruction

is received from the master device.

Figure 16-15. Slave Selection by Address

SCK0

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0

12345678

SB0 (SB1)

Address

Command signal

Bus release

signal

Master Slave 1 Not selected

Slave 2 Selected

Slave 3 Not selected

Slave 4 Not selected

Slave 2

Address transmission

306

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(d) Commands and data

The master device transmits commands to, and transmits/receives data to/from the slave device selected

by address transmission.

Figure 16-16. Commands

Figure 16-17. Data

8-bit data following a command signal is defined as “command” data. 8-bit data without a command signal

is defined as “data”. Command and data operation procedures can be determined by the user according

to their communication specifications.

SCK0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

12345678

SB0 (SB1)

Data

SCK0

C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0

12345678

SB0 (SB1)

Command

Command signal

307

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(e) Acknowledge signal (ACK)

The acknowledge signal is used to check serial data reception between the transmitter and receiver.

Figure 16-18. Acknowledge Signal

[When output in synchronization with 11th SCK0 clock]

[When output in synchronization with 9th SCK0 clock]

Remark The broken lines indicate the READY status.

The acknowledge signal is one-shot pulse generated at the falling edge of SCK0 after 8-bit data transfer.

It can be positioned anywhere and can be synchronized with any SCK0 clock.

After 8-bit data transmission, the transmitter checks whether the receiver has returned the acknowledge

signal. If the acknowledge signal is not returned for the preset period of time after data transmission,

it can be judged that data reception has not been carried out correctly.

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

8 9 10 11

ACK

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

308

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(f) Busy signal (BUSY) and ready signal (READY)

The BUSY signal is used to report to the master device that the slave device is not ready for data

transmission/reception.

The READY signal is used to report to the master device that the slave device is ready for data

transmission/reception.

Figure 16-19. BUSY and READY Signals

In SBI, the slave device notifies the master device of the busy state by setting the SB0 (SB1) line to low

level.

BUSY signal output follows acknowledge signal output from the master or slave device. It is set/reset

at the falling edge of SCK0. When the BUSY signal is reset, the master device automatically terminates

the output of the SCK0 serial clock.

When the BUSY signal is reset and the READY signal is set, the master device can start the next transfer.

Caution In the SBI mode, the BUSY signal is output until the next serial clock (SCK0) falls after

a command that resets the BUSY signal has been issued. If WUP is set to 1 during this

period by mistake, the BUSY signal is not reset. Therefore, be sure to confirm that the

SB0 (SB1) pin has gone high after resetting the BUSY signal, by setting WUP to 1.

READYACK

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

BUSY

309

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Register setting

The SBI mode is set by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0), the serial bus interface control register

(SBIC), and the interrupt timing specification register (SINT).

(a) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. Can be used as a port function.

3. When using the wakeup function (WUP = 1), clear bit 5 (SIC) of the interrupt timing specification

4. When CSIE0 = 0, COI becomes 0.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

SBI mode

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP

CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

CSIM01

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

Input clock to SCK0 pin from off-chip

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

R/W

1 Clock specified with bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM

CSIM00

FF60H 00H R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

R/W

CSIM

PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27

Operation

mode

Start bit SI0/SB0/P25

pin function

SO0/SB1/P26

pin function

SCK0/P27

pin function

10 ×

Note 2 Note 2

MSB P25

(CMOS I/O)

SB0

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

SB1

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

P26

(CMOS I/O)

WUP

Wakeup function control

Note 3

Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

Interrupt request signal generation when the address received after bus release

(when CMDD = RELD = 1) matches the slave address register (SVA) data in SBI mode

R/W

3-wire serial I/O mode (see 16.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation.)

2-wire serial I/O mode (see 16.4.4 2-wire serial I/O mode operation.)

COI

Slave address comparison result flag

Note 4

Slave address register (SVA) not equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

Slave address register (SVA) equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

SCK0

(CMOS I/O)

310

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

Note Bits 2, 3, and 6 (RELD, CMDD and ACKD) are read-only bits.

Remarks 1. Bits 0, 1, and 4 (RELT, CMDT, and ACKT) are 0 when read after data setting.

2. CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

(Cont’d)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

RELT Used for bus release signal output.

When RELT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is set to 1. After the SO0 latch is set, RELT is automatically cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

FF61H 00H R/W

Note

Address After reset R/W

CMDT Used for command signal output.

When CMDT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is cleared, CMDT is automatically

cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

RRELD Bus release detection

Set conditions (RELD = 1)Clear conditions (RELD = 0)

• When bus release signal (REL) is detected

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• If SIO0 and SVA values do not match in address

reception (only when WUP = 1)

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

RCMDD Command detection

Clear conditions (CMDD = 0)

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• When bus release signal (REL) is detected

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

Set conditions (CMDD = 1)

• When command signal (CMD) is detected

The acknowledge signal is output in synchronization with the falling edge of the SCK0 clock just after

execution of the instruction that sets this bit to 1 and, after acknowledge signal output, ACKT is automatically

cleared to 0.

ACKT is used with ACKE = 0. ACKT is also cleared to 0 upon start of serial interface transfer or when

CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

ACKE Acknowledge signal automatic output control

0 Acknowledge signal automatic output disable (output by ACKT enabled)

The acknowledge signal is output in synchronization with the falling edge of the 9th

SCK0 clock (automatically output when ACKE = 1).

Before completion of

transfer

The acknowledge signal is output in synchronization with falling edge of the SCK0

clock just after execution of the instruction that sets this bit to 1

(automatically output when ACKE = 1).

However, ACKE is not automatically cleared to 0 after acknowledge signal output.

After completion of

transfer

R/W

ACKT

311

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Note Busy mode can be cleared by start of serial interface transfer. However, the BSYE flag is not

cleared to 0.

Remark CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

RACKD Acknowledge detection

Clear conditions (ACKD = 0)

• When SCK0 falls immediately after busy mode is

released after transfer start instruction execution.

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

Set conditions (ACKD = 1)

• When the acknowledge signal (ACK) is detected at the

rising edge of the SCK0 clock after completion of

transfer

BSYE Synchronizing busy signal output control

0Disable the busy signal which is output in synchronization with the falling edge of SCK0 clock just after

execution of the instruction that clears this bit to 0 (set READY status).

R/W

Note

1 Output the busy signal at the falling edge of the SCK0 clock following the acknowledge signal.

312

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SINT is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SINT to 00H.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 to 3 to 0.

Notes 1. Bit 6 (CLD) is a read-only bit.

2. When using wakeup function in the SBI mode, clear SIC to 0.

3. When CSIE0 = 0, CLD becomes 0.

Remark SVA: Slave address register

CSIIF0: Interrupt request flag corresponding to INTCSI0

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6><5><4>32107

Symbol

SINT 0 CLD SIC SVAM 0 0 0 0 FF63H 00H R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

SVAM

SVA bit to be used as slave address

Bits 0 to 7

Bits 1 to 7

SIC

INTCSI0 interrupt source selection

Note 2

CSIIF0 is set upon termination of serial interface

channel 0 transfer

CSIIF0 is set upon bus release detection or

termination of serial interface channel 0 transfer

CLD

SCK0/P27 pin level

Note 3

Low level

High level

R/W

313

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Various signals

Figures 16-20 to 16-25 show various signals and flag operations in SBI. Table 16-3 lists various signals in

SBI.

Figure 16-20. RELT, CMDT, RELD, and CMDD Operations (Master)

Figure 16-21. RELD and CMDD Operations (Slave)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

RELT

CMDT

CMDD

RELD

SIO0

Slave address write to SIO0

(transfer start instruction)

Write FFH to SIO0

(transfer start instruction)

SIO0

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

RELD

CMDD

Transfer start instruction

A7 A6 A1 A0

12 789

READY

A7 A6 A1 A0 ACK

Slave address When addresses match

When addresses do not match

314

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-22. ACKT Operation

Caution Do not set ACKT before completion of transfer.

SCK0 6

SB0 (SB1)

ACKT

7 8 9

D2 D1 D0 ACK

If ACKT is set

during this period

ACK signal is output for

a period of one clock

just after setting

315

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-23. ACKE Operations

(a) When ACKE = 1 upon completion of transfer

(b) When set after completion of transfer

(d) When ACKE = 1 period is short

SB0 (SB1)

ACKE

12 789

D7 D6 D2 D1 D0 ACK

When ACKE = 1 at this point

ACK signal is output

at 9th clock

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

ACKE

12 789

D7 D6 D2 D1 D0

When ACKE = 0 at this point

ACK signal is not output

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

ACKE

789

D1 D0 ACK

If ACKE is set during this period and it is

still 1 at the fallin

e of the next SCK0

ACK signal is output for

a period of one clock

just after setting

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

ACKE

If ACKE is set and then cleared during this

period and it is still 0 at the falling edge of SCK0

ACK signal is not output

D2 D1 D0

SCK0

316

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-24. ACKD Operations

(a) When ACK signal is output at 9th SCK0 clock

(b) When ACK signal is output after 9th SCK0 clock

Figure 16-25. BSYE Operation

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

ACKD

789

D1 D0 ACK

Transfer Start

Instruction

SIO0

Transfer Start

SB0 (SB1)

ACKD

ACK

SIO0

D2 D0

Transfer start

instruction

Transfer start

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

BSYE

789

ACK

When BSYE = 1 at this point

BUSY

If BSYE is reset during this period and

it is still 0 at the falling edge of SCK0

D2 D1 D0

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

ACKD

ACK

Transfer start

instruction

SIO0

D2 D0 D6D7BUSY

317

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 16-3. Various Signals in SBI Mode (1/2)

Timing Chart

Definition

Signal Name Output

Device

Output

Conditions Effects on Flag Meaning of Signal

CMD signal is output

to indicate that

transmit data is an

address.

i) Transmit data is an

address after REL

signal output.

ii) REL signal is not

output and trans-

mit data is an

command.

Low-level signal output to

SB0 (SB1) during one-

clock period of SCK0 after

completion of serial

reception

[Synchronous BUSY signal]

Low-level signal output to

SB0 (SB1) following

acknowledge signal

1 BSYE = 0

2 Execution of

instruction for

data write to

SIO0

(transfer start

instruction)

Master/

slave

SB0 (SB1) rising edge

when SCK0 = 1

Master

Bus release

signal

(REL)

• RELT set • RELD set

• CMDD clear

• CMDD set

• CMDT set

Master

Command

signal

(CMD)

SB0 (SB1) falling edge

when SCK0 = 1

Acknowledge

signal

(ACK)

1 ACKE = 1

2 ACKT set

• ACKD set Completion of

reception

SlaveBusy signal

(BUSY)

• BSYE = 1 — Serial receive

disabled because of

processing

—Serial receive

enabled

SlaveReady signal

(READY)

High-level signal output to

SB0 (SB1) before serial

transfer start and after

completion of serial

transfer

[Synchronous BUSY output]

SCK0

D0 READY

SB0 (SB1)

D0 READY

SB0 (SB1)

ACK BUSY

BUSYACK

SCK0 “H”

SB0 (SB1)

“H”

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

318

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Timing Chart

Definition

Signal Name Output

Device

Output

Conditions Effects on Flag Meaning of Signal

Synchronous clock to output

address/command/data,

ACK signal, synchronous

BUSY signal, etc. Address/

command/data is transferred

with the first eight

synchronous clocks.

8-bit data transferred in

synchronization with SCK0

after output of only CMD

signal without REL signal

output

Master

Numeric values to be

processed by slave

or master device

Serial clock

(SCK0)

Timing of signal

output to serial data

bus

Address value of

slave device on the

serial bus

Address

(A7 to A0)

8-bit data transferred in

synchronization with SCK0

after output of REL and

CMD signals

Master

Command

(C7 to C0)

Instructions and

messages to the

slave device

Master/

slave

Data

(D7 to D0)

8-bit data transferred in

synchronization with SCK0

without output of REL and

CMD signals

Table 16-3. Various Signals in SBI Mode (2/2)

When CSIE0 = 1,

execution of

instruction for

data write to

SIO0 (serial

transfer start

instruction)Note 2

Notes 1. When WUP = 0, CSIIF0 is set at the rising edge of the 9th clock of SCK0.

When WUP = 1, an address is received. Only when the address matches the slave address register (SVA) value, CSIIF0 is set (if the address does not

match the value of SVA, RELD is cleared).

2. In the BUSY state, transfer starts after the READY state is set.

Master CSIIF0 set (rising

edge of 9th clock

of SCK0)Note 1

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

1278910

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

1278

REL CMD

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

1278

CMD

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

1278

319

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(5) Pin configuration

The serial clock pin SCK0 and serial data bus pin SB0 (SB1) have the following configurations.

(a) SCK0 ............ Serial clock I/O pin

1 Master ... CMOS and push-pull output

2 Slave...... Schmitt input

(b) SB0 (SB1) .... Serial data I/O alternate-function pin

Both master and slave devices have an N-ch open-drain output and a Schmitt input.

Because the serial data bus line has an N-ch open-drain output, an external pull-up resistor is necessary.

Figure 16-26. Pin Configuration

Caution Because the N-ch open-drain output must made to go into a high-impedance state during

data reception, write FFH to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) in advance. The N-ch open-drain

output can always go into a high-impedance state during transfer. However, when the wake-

up function specification bit (WUP) = 1, the N-ch open-drain output always goes into a high-

impedance state. Thus, it is not necessary to write FFH to SIO0 before reception.

SI0

SO0

SI0

SO0

(Clock input)

Clock output

Master service

Clock input

(Clock output)

Serial clock

SCK0 SCK0

Serial data bus

SB0 (SB1) SB0 (SB1)

N-ch open-drain N-ch open-drain

Slave device

VDD0

VSS0

320

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(6) Address match detection method

In the SBI mode, the master transmits a slave address to select a specific slave device.

A match of the addresses can be automatically detected by hardware. CSIIF0 is set only when the slave

address transmitted by the master matches the address set to SVA when the wakeup function specification

bit (WUP) = 1.

If bit 5 (SIC) of the interrupt timing specify register (SINT) is set, the wakeup function cannot be used even

if WUP is set (an interrupt request signal is generated when bus release is detected). To use the wake-up

function, clear SIC to 0.

Cautions 1. Slave selection/non-selection is detected by matching of the slave address received after

bus release (RELD = 1).

For this match detection, the match interrupt request (INTCSI0) of the address to be

generated with WUP = 1 is normally used. Thus, execute selection/non-selection

detection by slave address when WUP = 1.

2. When detecting selection/non-selection without the use of an interrupt request with WUP

= 0, do so by means of transmission/reception of the command preset by program instead

of using the address match detection method.

(7) Error detection

In the SBI mode, the serial bus SB0 (SB1) status being transmitted is fetched into the destination device, that

is, serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0). Thus, transmit errors can be detected in the following ways.

(a) Method of comparing SIO0 data before and after transmission

In this case, if the two data differ from each other, a transmit error is judged to have occurred.

(b) Method of using the slave address register (SVA)

Transmit data is set to both SIO0 and SVA and is transmitted. After termination of transmission, the COI

bit (match signal coming from the address comparator) of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) is

tested. If “1”, normal transmission is judged to have been carried out. If “0”, a transmit error is judged

to have occurred.

(8) Communication operation

In the SBI mode, the master device normally selects one slave device as the communication target from among

two or more devices by outputting an “address” to the serial bus.

After the communication target device has been determined, commands and data are transmitted/received

and serial communication is realized between the master and slave device.

Figures 16-27 to 16-30 show data communication timing charts.

Shift operations of serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) are carried out at the falling edge of the serial clock (SCK0).

Transmit data is latched into the SO0 latch and is output with the MSB set as the first bit from the SB0/P25

or SB1/P26 pin. Receive data input to the SB0 (or SB1) pin at the rising edge of SCK0 is latched into SIO0.

321

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-27. Address Transmission from Master Device to Slave Device (WUP = 1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9SCK0 pin

A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK BUSYSB0 (SB1) pin

Program processing

Serial transmission

INTCSI0

generation

ACKD

set

SCK0

stop

Hardware operation

WUP←0ACKT

set

Program processing

CMDD

set

INTCSI0

generation

ACK

output

Hardware operation

CMDT

set

RELT

set

CMDT

set

Write

to SIO0

Interrupt servicing

(preparation for the next serial transfer)

Master device processing (transmitter)

Transfer line

Slave device processing (receiver)

CMDD

clear

CMDD

set

RELD

set

Serial reception

BUSY

output

READY

(When SVA = SIO0)

Address

BUSY

clear

BUSY

clear

322

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-28. Command Transmission from Master Device to Slave Device

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9SCK0 pin

C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0 ACK BUSYSB0 (SB1) pin

Program processing

Serial transmission

INTCSI0

generation

ACKD

set

SCK0

stop

Hardware operation

ACKT

set

Program processing

INTCSI0

generation

ACK

output

Hardware operation

CMDT

set

Write

to SIO0

Interrupt servicing

(preparation for the next serial transfer)

Master device processing (transmitter)

Transfer line

Slave device processing (receiver)

CMDD

set

Serial reception

BUSY

output

READY

Command

BUSY

clear

BUSY

clear

SIO0

read

Command

analysis

323

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-29. Data Transmission from Master Device to Slave Device

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9SCK0 pin

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK BUSYSB0 (SB1) pin

Program processing

Serial transmission

INTCSI0

generation

ACKD

set

SCK0

stop

Hardware operation

ACKT

set

Program processing

INTCSI0

generation

ACK

output

Hardware operation

Write

to SIO0

Interrupt servicing

(preparation for the next serial transfer)

Master device processing (transmitter)

Transfer line

Slave device processing (receiver)

Serial reception

BUSY

output

READY

Data

BUSY

clear

BUSY

clear

SIO0

read

324

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 16-30. Data Transmission from Slave Device to Master Device

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9SCK0 pin

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK BUSYSB0 (SB1) pin

Program processing

Serial reception

INTCSI0

generation

ACK

output

Serial

reception

Hardware operation

Program processing

INTCSI0

generation ACKD

set

Hardware operation

FFH write

to SIO0

Master device processing (receiver)

Transfer line

Slave device processing (transmitter)

Serial transmission BUSY

output

READY

Data

BUSY

clear

Write

to SIO0

SCK0

stop

BUSY

clear

READYBUSY D7 D6

ACKT

set

SIO0

read Receive data processing

FFH Write

to SIO0

Write

to SIO0

325

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(9) Transfer start

Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) when the following two

conditions are satisfied.

•Serial interface channel 0 operation control bit (CSIE0) = 1

•Internal serial clock is stopped or SCK0 is at high level after 8-bit serial transfer.

Cautions 1. If CSIE0 is set to “1” after data write to SIO0, transfer does not start.

2. Because the N-ch open-drain output must go into a high-impedance state during data

reception, write FFH to SIO0 in advance.

However, when the wakeup function specification bit (WUP) = 1, the N-ch open-drain

output always goes into a high-impedance state. Thus, it is not necessary to write FFH

to SIO0 before reception.

3. If data is written to SIO0 when the slave is busy, the data is not lost.

When the busy state is cleared and SB0 (or SB1) input is set to the high level (READY)

state, transfer starts.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, serial transfer automatically stops and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF0)

is set.

For pins that are to be used for data I/O, be sure to carry out the following settings before serial transfer of

the 1st byte after RESET input.

<1> Set the P25 and P26 output latches to 1.

<2> Set bit 0 (RELT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC) to 1.

<3> Reset the P25 and P26 output latches from 1 to 0.

(10) Judging busy state of slave

When the device is in the master mode, follow the procedure below to judge whether the slave device is in

the busy state or not.

<1> Detect acknowledge signal (ACK) or interrupt request signal generation.

<2> Set the port mode register PM25 (or PM26) of the SB0/P25 (or SB1/P26) pin to the input mode.

<3> Read out the pin state (when the pin level is high, the READY state is set).

After detection of the READY state, clear the port mode register to 0 and return to the output mode.

326

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(11) SBI mode precautions

(a) Slave selection/non-selection is detected by match detection of the slave address received after bus

release (RELD = 1).

For this match detection, the match interrupt request (INTCSI0) of the address to be generated with WUP

= 1 is normally used. Thus, execute selection/non-selection detection by slave address when WUP =

(b) When detecting selection/non-selection without the use of an interrupt with WUP = 0, do so by means

of transmission/reception of the command preset by program instead of using the address match detection

method.

the BUSY signal has been issued. If WUP is set to 1 during this period by mistake, the BUSY signal is

not reset. Therefore, be sure to confirm that the SB0 (SB1) pin has gone high after resetting the BUSY

signal, by setting WUP to 1.

(d) For pins that are to be used for data I/O, be sure to carry out the following settings before serial transfer

of the 1st byte after RESET input.

<1> Set the P25 and P26 output latches to 1.

<2> Set bit 0 (RELT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC) to 1.

<3> Reset the P25 and P26 output latches from 1 to 0.

(e) The transition of the SB0 (SB1) line from low to high or from high to low when the SCK0 line is high is

recognized as a bus release signal or a command signal, respectively. If the transition timing of the bus

is shifted due to the influence of board capacitance, transmitted data may be judged as a bus release

signal (or a command signal). Exercise care in wiring so that noise is not superimposed on the signal

lines.

327

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.4.4 2-wire serial I/O mode operation

The 2-wire serial I/O mode can cope with any communication format by program.

Communication is basically carried out with the two lines of the serial clock (SCK0) and serial data input/output

(SB0 or SB1).

Figure 16-31. Serial Bus Configuration Example Using 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode

(1) Register setting

The 2-wire serial I/O mode is set by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0), the serial bus interface control

(a) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

Master

SCK0

Slave

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

DD0

328

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. Can be used freely as a port function.

3. Be sure to set WUP to 0 in the 2-wire serial I/O mode.

4. When CSIE0 = 0, COI becomes 0.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP

CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

CSIM01

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

Input clock to SCK0 pin from off-chip

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

R/W

1 Clock specified with bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM

CSIM00

FF60H 00H R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

R/W

CSIM

PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27

Operation

mode

Start bit SIO/SB0/P25

pin function

SO0/SB1/P26

pin function

SCK0/P27

pin function

WUP

Wakeup function control

Note 3

Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

Interrupt request signal generation when the address received after bus release

(when CMDD = RELD = 1) matches the slave address register (SVA) data in SBI mode

R/W

2-wire serial

l/O mode

11 ×

Note 2 Note 2

MSB P25

(CMOS I/O)

SB0

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

SB1

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

P26

(CMOS I/O)

3-wire serial I/O mode (see 16.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation)

SBI mode (see 16.4.3 SBI mode operation)

COI

Slave address comparison result flag

Note 4

Slave address register (SVA) not equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

Slave address register (SVA) equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

SCK0

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

329

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

SINT is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SINT to 00H.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 to 3 to 0.

Notes 1. Bit 6 (CLD) is a read-only bit.

2. When CSIE0 = 0, CLD becomes 0.

Remark CSIIF0: Interrupt request flag corresponding to INTCSI0

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

RELT When RELT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is set to 1. After the SO0 Iatch is set, RELT is automatically cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

FF61H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

CMDT When CMDT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is cleared, CMDT is automatically

cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

<6><5><4>32107

Symbol

SINT 0 CLD SIC 0 0 0 0 FF63H 00H R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

SIC

INTCSI0 interrupt factor selection

CSIIF0 is set upon termination of serial interface

channel 0 transfer

CSIIF0 is set upon bus release detection or

termination of serial interface channel 0 transfer

CLD

SCK0/P27 pin level

Note 2

Low level

High level

R/W

SVAM

330

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Communication operation

The 2-wire serial I/O mode is used for data transmission/reception in 8-bit units. Data transmission/reception

is carried out bit-wise in synchronization with the serial clock.

Shift operations of serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) are carried out in synchronization with the falling edge of

the serial clock (SCK0). The transmit data is held in the SO0 latch and is output from the SB0/P25 (or SB1/

P26) pin on an MSB-first basis. The receive data input from the SB0 (or SB1) pin is latched into the SIO0

at the rising edge of SCK0.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, the SIO0 operation stops automatically and the interrupt request flag

(CSIIF0) is set.

Figure 16-32. 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing

The SB0 (or SB1) pin specified for the serial data bus is an N-ch open-drain I/O and thus it must be externally

connected to a pull-up resistor. Because an N-ch open-drain output must go into a high-impedance state during

data reception, write FFH to SIO0 in advance.

The SB0 (or SB1) pin generates the SO0 latch status and thus the SB0 (or SB1) pin output status can be

manipulated by setting bit 0 (RELT) and bit 1 (CMDT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC).

However, do not carry out this manipulation during serial transfer.

Control the SCK0 pin output level in the output mode (internal system clock mode) by manipulating the P27

output latch (see 16.4.5 SCK0/P27 pin output manipulation).

1234 5 6 7 8

SCK0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SB0 (SB1)

CSIIF0

Transfer start at the falling edge of SCK0

End of transfer

331

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Other signals

Figure 16-33 shows the RELT and CMDT operations.

Figure 16-33. RELT and CMDT Operations

(4) Transfer start

Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) when the following two

conditions are satisfied.

•Serial interface channel 0 operation control bit (CSIE0) = 1

•Internal serial clock is stopped or SCK0 is high level after 8-bit serial transfer.

Cautions 1. If CSIE0 is set to 1 after data write to SIO0, transfer does not start.

2. Because the N-ch open-drain output must go into a high-impedance state during data

reception, write FFH to SIO0 in advance.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, serial transfer automatically stops and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF0)

is set.

(5) Error detection

In the 2-wire serial I/O mode, the serial bus SB0 (SB1) status being transmitted is fetched into the destination

device, that is, serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0). Thus, transmit errors can be detected in the following ways.

(a) Method of comparing SIO0 data before and after transmission

In this case, if the two data differ from each other, a transmit error is judged to have occurred.

(b) Method of using the slave address register (SVA)

Transmit data is set to both SIO0 and SVA and is transmitted. After termination of transmission, the COI

bit (match signal coming from the address comparator) of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) is

tested. If “1”, normal transmission is judged to have been carried out. If “0”, a transmit error is judged

to have occurred.

RELT

CMDT

SO0 latch

332

CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

16.4.5 SCK0/P27 pin output manipulation

Because the SCK0/P27 pin incorporates an output latch, static output is also possible by software in addition to

normal serial clock output.

P27 output latch manipulation enables any value of SCK0 to be set by software. (The SI0/SB0 and SO0/SB1 pins

are controlled by bits 0 and 1 (RELT and CMDT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC).)

The procedure for manipulating the SCK0/P27 pin output is described below.

1 Set serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) (SCK0 pin: Output mode, serial operation: Enabled). SCK0 =

1 while serial transfer is suspended.

2 Manipulate the P27 output latch with a bit manipulation instruction.

Figure 16-34. SCK0/P27 Pin Configuration

To internal

circuit

SCK0/P27 P27

Output Latch

When CSIE0 = 1

and

CSIM01 and CSIM00 are 1 and 0, or 1 and 1.

SCK0 (1 while transfer is stopped)

from serial clock

controller

Manipulated by bit

manipulation instruction

333

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

2-wire serial I/O

I2C bus (Inter IC Bus)

UART Use possible

(Asynchronous serial interface) Timer-division

transfer function

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

The

PD780058Y Subseries incorporates three serial interface channels. Differences between channels 0, 1,

and 2 are as follows (see CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1 for details of serial interface channel

1 and CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2 for details of serial interface channel 2).

Table 17-1. Differences Between Channels 0, 1, and 2

Serial Transfer Mode Channel 0

fXX/2, fXX/22, fXX/23,

fXX/24, fXX/25, fXX/26,

fXX/27, fXX/28, external

clock, TO2 output

MSB/LSB switchable as

the start bit

Serial transfer end

interrupt request flag

(CSIIF0)

Channel 1

fXX/2, fXX/22, fXX/23,

fXX/24, fXX/25, fXX/26,

fXX/27, fXX/28, external

clock, TO2 output

MSB/LSB switchable as

the start bit

Automatic transmit/

receive function

Serial transfer end

interrupt request flag

(CSIIF1)

Channel 2

External clock, baud

rate generator output

MSB/LSB switchable as

the start bit

Serial transfer end

interrupt request flag

(SRIF)

Clock selection

Transfer method

Transfer end flag

Use possible

None

None None

3-wire serial I/O

334

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 0

Serial interface channel 0 employs the following four modes.

• Operation stop mode

• 3-wire serial I/O mode

• 2-wire serial I/O mode

•I

2C (Inter IC) bus mode

Caution Do not change the operating mode (3-wire serial I/O, 2-wire serial I/O, or SBI) while serial interface

channel 0 is enabled to operate. To change the operating mode, stop the serial operation first.

(1) Operation stop mode

This mode is used when serial transfer is not carried out. Power consumption can be reduced in this mode.

(2) 3-wire serial I/O mode (MSB-/LSB-first selectable)

This mode is used for 8-bit data transfer using three lines, one each for the serial clock (SCK0), serial output

(SO0) and serial input (SI0). This mode enables simultaneous transmission/reception and therefore reduces

the data transfer processing time.

The start bit of transferred 8-bit data is switchable between MSB and LSB, so that devices can be connected

regardless of their start bit recognition.

This mode should be used when connecting with peripheral I/O devices or display controllers which incorporate

a conventional clocked serial interface as is the case with the 75X/XL, 78K, and 17K Series.

(3) 2-wire serial I/O mode (MSB-first)

This mode is used for 8-bit data transfer using two lines of serial clock (SCK0) and serial data bus (SB0 or

SB1).

This mode enables to cope with any one of the possible data transfer formats by controlling the SCK0 level

and the SB0 or SB1 output level. Thus, the handshake line previously necessary for connection of two or

more devices can be removed, resulting in the increased number of available I/O ports.

335

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) I2C (Inter IC) bus mode (MSB-first)

This mode is used for 8-bit data transfer with two or more devices using the two lines of the serial clock (SCL)

and serial data bus (SDA0 or SDA1).

This mode complies with the I2C bus format. In this mode, the transmitter outputs three kinds of data onto

the serial data bus: “start condition”, “data”, and “stop condition”, to be actually sent or received. The receiver

automatically distinguishes the received data as “start condition”, “data”, or “stop condition”, by hardware.

Figure 17-1. Serial Bus Configuration Example Using I2C Bus

Master CPU

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

Slave CPU1

Slave CPU2

Slave CPUn

DD0

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

336

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0

Serial interface channel 0 consists of the following hardware.

Table 17-2. Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 0

Item Configuration

Registers Serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

Slave address register (SVA)

Control registers Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

Interrupt timing specify register (SINT)

Port mode register 2 (PM2)Note

Note See Figure 6-7 Block Diagram of P20, P21, and P23 to P26 and Figure 6-8 Block Diagram of P22

and P27.

337

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-2. Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 0

Remark The output control block performs selection between CMOS output and N-ch open-drain output.

CSIE0 COI WUP CSIM

CSIM

Serial operating mode register 0

Controller

Output

control

Selector

SI0/SB0/

SDA0/P25

PM25

Output

control

SO0/SB1/

SDA1/P26 PM26

Output

control

SCK0/

SCL/P27

PM27

Selector

P25

Output latch

P26 Output latch

CLD

P27

Output latch

Internal bus

BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

Internal bus

Stop condition/

start condition/

acknowledge

detector

Serial clock

counter

Serial clock

controller

CLR

SET

Match

Acknowledge

output circuit

Interrupt

request

signal

generator

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

WUP

Selector Selector

TCL33 TCL32 TCL31 TCL30

Timer clock

select

/2 to f

INTCSI0

CLD SIC SVAM

BSYE

CLC WREL WAT1 WAT0

CSIM01

CSIM00

TO2

1/16

Divider

CSIM01

CSIM00

Interrupt timing

specify register

Slave address

SVAM

Serial bus interface

control register

Serial I/O shift

338

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

SIO0 is an 8-bit register used to carry out parallel-serial conversion and to carry out serial transmission/

reception (shift operation) in synchronization with the serial clock.

SIO0 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

When bit 7 (CSIE0) of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) is 1, writing data to SIO0 starts a serial

operation.

In transmission, data written to SIO0 is output to the serial output (SO0) or serial data bus (SB0/SB1). In

reception, data is read from the serial input (SI0) or SB0/SB1 to SIO0.

Note that, if a bus is driven in the I2C bus mode or 2-wire serial I/O mode, the bus pins must serve for both

input and output. Therefore, the transmission N-ch transistor of the device which will start reception of data

must be turned off beforehand. Consequently, write FFH to SIO0 in advance.

In the I2C bus mode, set SIO0 to FFH with bit 7 (BSYE) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC) set

to 1.

RESET input makes SIO0 undefined.

Caution Do not execute an instruction that writes SIO0 in the I2C bus mode while WUP (bit 5 of serial

operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)) = 1. Even if such an instruction is not executed, data

can be received when the wake-up function is used (WUP = 1). For the detail of the wake-

up function, see 17.4.4 (1) (c) Wake-up function.

(2) Slave address register (SVA)

SVA is an 8-bit register used to set the slave address value for connection of a slave device to the serial bus.

SVA is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. This register is not used in the 3-wire serial I/O

mode.

The master device outputs a slave address to the connected slave devices for selection of a particular slave

device. These two data (the slave address output from the master device and the SVA value) are compared

with an address comparator. If they match, the slave device has been selected. In that case, bit 6 (COI) of

serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) becomes 1.

Address comparison can also be executed on the data of LSB-masked higher 7 bits by setting bit 4 (SVAM)

of the interrupt timing specify register (SINT) to 1.

If no matching is detected in address reception, bit 2 (RELD) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

is cleared to 0. In the I2C bus mode, the wakeup function can be used by setting bit 5 (WUP) of CSIM0 to

1. In this case, the interrupt request signal (INTCSI0) is generated when the slave address output by the master

matches the SVA value (the interrupt request signal is also generated when the stop condition is detected),

and it can be learned by this interrupt request that the master requests for communication. To use the wakeup

function, set SIC to 1.

Further, an error can be detected by using SVA when the device transmits data as a master or slave device

in I2C bus mode or 2-wire serial I/O mode.

RESET input makes SVA undefined.

(3) SO0 latch

This latch holds the SI0/SB0/SDA0/P25 and SO0/SB1/SDA1/P26 pin levels. It can be directly controlled by

software.

(4) Serial clock counter

This counter counts the serial clocks to be output and input during transmission/reception to check whether

8-bit data has been transmitted/received.

339

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(5) Serial clock controller

This circuit controls serial clock supply to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0). When the internal system clock

is used, the circuit also controls clock output to the SCK0/SCL/P27 pin.

(6) Interrupt signal generator

This circuit controls interrupt request signal generation. It generates interrupt request signals according to

the settings of interrupt timing specification register (SINT) bits 0 and 1 (WAT0, WAT1) and serial operation

mode register 0 (CSIM0) bit 5 (WUP), as shown in Table 17-3.

(7) Acknowledge output circuit and stop condition/start condition/acknowledge detector

These two circuits output and detect various control signals in the I2C mode.

These do not operate in the 3-wire serial I/O mode and 2-wire serial I/O mode.

Table 17-3. Interrupt Request Signal Generation of Serial Interface Channel 0

Serial Transfer Mode

BSYE WUP WAT1 WAT0 ACKE

Description

3-wire or 2-wire serial I/O mode 0 0 0 0 0 An interrupt request signal is generated each time 8

serial clocks are counted.

Other than above Setting prohibited

I2C bus mode (transmit) 0 0 1 0 0 An interrupt request signal is generated each time 8

serial clocks are counted (8-clock wait).

Normally, during transmission the settings WAT21,

WAT0 = 1, 0, are not used. They are used only when

wanting to coordinate receive time and processing

systematically using software. ACK information is

generated by the receiving side, thus ACKE should be

set to 0 (disable).

1 1 0 An interrupt request signal is generated each time 9

serial clocks are counted (9-clock wait).

ACK information is generated by the receiving side,

thus ACKE should be set to 0 (disable).

Other than above Setting prohibited

I2C bus mode (receive) 1 0 1 0 0 An interrupt request signal is generated each time 8

serial clocks are counted (8-clock wait).

ACK information is output by manipulating ACKT by

software after an interrupt request is generated.

1 1 0/1 An interrupt request signal is generated each time 9

serial clocks are counted (9-clock wait).

To automatically generate ACK information, preset

ACKE to 1 before transfer start. However, in the case

of the master, set ACKE to 0 (disable) before receiving

the last data.

1 1 1 1 1 After an address is received, if the values of serial I/

O shift register 0 (SI00) and the slave address

detected, an interrupt request signal is generated.

To automatically generate ACK information, preset

ACKE to 1 (enable) before transfer start.

Other than above Setting prohibited

Remark BSYE: Bit 7 of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

ACKE: Bit 5 of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

340

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 0

The following four registers are used to control serial interface channel 0.

•Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

•Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

•Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

•Interrupt timing specification register (SINT)

(1) Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

This register sets the serial clock of serial interface channel 0.

TCL3 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets TCL3 to 88H.

341

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-3. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 3

Caution When rewriting TCL3 to other data, stop the serial transfer operation beforehand.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

Serial interface channel 0 serial clock selection

TCL33 TCL32 TCL31 TCL30

MCS = 1

Setting prohibited

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.77 kHz)

(4.88 kHz)

(2.44 kHz)

(1.22 kHz)

MCS = 1

Setting prohibited

(1.25 MHz)

(625 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

Other than above Setting prohibited

Serial interface channel 1 serial clock selection

TCL37 TCL36 TCL35 TCL34

MCS = 1

Setting prohibited

(1.25 MHz)

(625 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

MCS = 0

(1.25 MHz)

(625 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

Other than above Setting prohibited

65432107

Symbol

TCL3 TCL37 TCL36 TCL35 TCL34 TCL33 TCL32 TCL31 TCL30 FF43H 88H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

MCS = 0

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.77 kHz)

(4.88 kHz)

(2.44 kHz)

(1.22 kHz)

(0.61 kHz)

MCS = 0

(1.25 MHz)

(625 kHz)

(313 kHz)

(156 kHz)

(78.1 kHz)

(39.1 kHz)

(19.5 kHz)

(9.8 kHz)

Serial clock in I

C bus mode Serial clock in 2-wire or 3-wire

serial I/O mode

342

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

This register sets the serial interface channel 0 serial clock, operating mode, operation enable/stop wakeup

function and displays the address comparator match signal.

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

Caution Do not change the operating mode (3-wire serial I/O, 2-wire serial I/O, or SBI) while serial

interface channel 0 is enabled to operate. To change the operating mode, stop the serial

operation first.

Figure 17-4. Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 0

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. In I2C bus mode, the clock frequency becomes 1/16 of that output from TO2.

3. Can be used as P25 (CMOS input/output) when used only for transmission.

4. Can be used freely as a port function.

5. To use the wakeup function (WUP = 1), set bit 5 (SIC) of the interrupt timing specification

while WUP = 1.

6. When CSIE0 = 0, COI becomes 0.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

CSIM01

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

Input clock to SCK0/SCL pin from off-chip

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

R/W

1 Clock specified by bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM

CSIM00

FF60H 00H R/WNote 1

Address After reset R/W

R/W CSIM

CSIM

PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27 Operation

mode Start Bit SI0/SB0/SDA0/

P25 pin function

SO0/SB1/SDA1/

P26 pin function

SCK0/SCL/P27

pin function

MSB

LSB

1×0001

Note 3 3-wire serial

l/O mode

SI0Note 3

(Input)

SO0

(CMOS output)

SCK0

(CMOS I/O)

2-wire serial

l/O mode

I2C bus mode

0SCK0/SCL

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

11 ×

Note 4 Note 4

MSB P25

(CMOS I/O)

SB0/SDA0

(N-ch

open-drain

SB1/SDA1

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

P26

(CMOS I/O)

Note 3

WUP

Wake-up function controlNote 5

Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

Interrupt request signal generation when the address received after detecting start condition

(when CMDD = 1) matches the slave address register (SVA) data in I2C bus mode

R/W

COI

Slave address comparison result flagNote 6

Slave address register (SVA) not equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

Slave address register (SVA) equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

Note 2

343

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

This register sets the serial bus interface operation and displays statuses.

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

Figure 17-5. Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register (1/2)

Note Bits 2, 3, and 6 (RELD, CMDD, and ACKD) are read-only bits.

Remark CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

RELT Used for stop condition signal output.

When RELT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is set to 1. After the SO0 latch is set, RELT is automatically cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

FF61H 00H R/WNote

Address After reset R/W

CMDT Used for start condition signal output.

When CMDT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is cleared, CMDT is automatically

cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

RRELD Stop condition detection

Set conditions (RELD = 1)Clear conditions (RELD = 0)

•When stop condition signal is detected

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• If SIO0 and SVA values do not match in

address reception

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

RCMDD Start condition detection

Clear conditions (CMDD = 0)

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• When stop condition signal is detected

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

Set conditions (CMDD = 1)

• When start condition signal is detected

ACKT Used to generate the ACK signal by software when 8-clock wait mode is selected.

Keeps SDA0 (SDA1) low from set instruction (ACKT = 1) execution to the next falling edge of SCL.

ACKT is also cleared to 0 upon start of serial interface transfer or when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

344

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-5. Format of Serial Bus Interface Control Register (2/2)

Notes 1. Setting should be performed before transfer.

2. If 8-clock wait mode is selected, the acknowledge signal at reception must be output using ACKT.

3. The busy mode can be cleared by start of serial interface transfer or reception of address signal.

However, the BSYE flag is not cleared to 0.

4. When using the wakeup function, be sure to set BSYE to 1.

Remark CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

ACKE Acknowledge signal output control

Note 1

0Acknowledge signal automatic output disable (However, output by ACKT enabled)

Used for reception when 8-clock wait mode is selected or for transmission.

Note 2

Enables acknowledge signal automatic output.

Outputs the acknowledge signal in synchronization with the falling edge ofthe 9th SCL clock cycle

(automatically output when ACKE = 1).

However, ACKE is not automatically cleared to 0 after acknowledge signal is output.

Used in reception with 9-clock wait mode selected.

R/W

RACKD Acknowledge detection

Clear conditions (ACKD = 0)

•While executing the transfer start instruction

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

Set conditions (ACKD = 1)

• When acknowledge signal (ACK) is detected at the

rising edge of the SCL clock after completion of

transfer

BSYE Control of N-ch open-drain output for transmission in I

C Bus Mode

Note 4

0Output enabled (transmission)

R/W

Note 3

1Output disabled (reception)

345

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Interrupt timing specification register (SINT)

This register sets the bus release interrupt and address mask functions and displays the SCK0/SCL pin level

status.

SINT is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SINT to 00H.

Figure 17-6. Format of Interrupt Timing Specification Register (1/2)

Notes 1. Bit 6 (CLD) is a read-only bit.

2. When not using the I2C mode, clear CLC to 0.

Used in I2C bus mode.

Make SCL pin enter high-impedance state unless serial transfer is being performed

(except for clock line which is kept high).

Used to enable master device to generate start condition and stop condition signals.

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> 1 07

Symbol

SINT 0 CLD SIC SVAM CLC WREL WAT1 WAT0 FF63H 00H R/WNote 1

Address After reset R/W

WREL

0Wait state has been released.

Release wait state. Automatically cleared to 0 when the state is released

(Used to cancel wait state by means of WAT0 and WAT1.)

CLC

Clock level controlNote 2

Used in I2C bus mode.

Make output level of SCL pin low unless serial transfer is being performed.

R/W

Wait sate release control

R/W

WAT1

Wait and interrupt control

Generates interrupt servicing request at rising edge of 8th SCK0 clock cycle

(keeping clock output in high impedance).

R/W WAT0

0Used in I2C bus mode (8-clock wait).

Generates interrupt servicing request at rising edge of 8th SCK0 clock cycle.

(In the case of master device, makes SCL output low to enter wait state after 8 clock pulses are

output. In the case of slave device, makes SCL output low to request wait state after 8 clock

pulses are input.)

11Used in I2C bus mode (9-clock wait).

Generates interrupt servicing request at rising edge of 9th SCK0 clock cycle.

(In the case of master device, makes SCL output low to enter wait state after 9 clock pulses are

output. In the case of slave device, makes SCL output low to request wait state after 9 clock

pulses are input.)

0 Setting prohibited

346

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-6. Format of Interrupt Timing Specification Register (2/2)

Notes 1. When using the wakeup function in the I2C mode, clear SIC to 0.

2. When CSIE0 = 0, CLD becomes 0.

Remark SVA: Slave address register

CSIIF0: Interrupt request flag corresponding to INTCSI0

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

SVAM

SVA bit to be used as slave address

Bits 0 to 7

Bits 1 to 7

SIC

INTCSI0 interrupt source selection Note 1

CSIIF0 is set to 1 upon termination of serial interface channel 0 transfer

CSIIF0 is set to 1 upon stop condition detection or termination of serial interface channel 0 transfer

CLD

SCK0/SCL pin levelNote 2

Low level

High level

R/W

347

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.4 Operations of Serial Interface Channel 0

The following four operating modes are available for serial interface channel 0.

•Operation stop mode

•3-wire serial I/O mode

•2-wire serial I/O mode

•I2C (Inter IC) bus mode

17.4.1 Operation stop mode

Serial transfer is not carried out in the operation stop mode. Thus, power consumption can be reduced. Serial

I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) does not carry out shift operations either and thus it can be used as an ordinary 8-bit register.

In the operation stop mode, the P25/SI0/SB0/SDA0, P26/SO0/SB1/SDA1, and P27/SCK0/SCL pins can be used

as general I/O ports.

(1) Register setting

The operation stop mode is set by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0).

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP

CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

FF60H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

348

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is valid for connection of peripheral I/O units and display controllers which incorporate

a conventional clocked serial interface as is the case with the 75X/XL, 78K, and 17K Series.

Communication is carried out with the three lines of the serial clock (SCK0), serial output (SO0), and serial input

(SI0).

(1) Register setting

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is set by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) and the serial bus interface control

(a) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. Can be used as P25 (CMOS input/output) when used only for transmission.

3. Be sure to clear WUP to 0 when the 3-wire serial I/O mode is selected.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

CSIM01

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

Input clock to SCK0 pin from off-chip

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

2-wire serial I/O mode (see 17.4.3 2-wire serial I/O mode operation.)

R/W

1 Clock specified with bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM

CSIM00

FF60H 00H R/WNote 1

Address After reset R/W

R/W CSIM

CSIM

PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27 Operation

mode Start bit

SIO/SB0/SDA0

/P25 pin function

SO0/SB1/SDA1

/P26 pin function

SCK0/SCL/P27

pin function

WUP

Wake-up function controlNote 3

Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

Interrupt request signal generation when the address received after detecting start condition

(when CMDD = 1) matches the slave address register (SVA) data in I2C bus mode

R/W

MSB

LSB

1×0001

Note 2

3-wire serial

l/O mode

SI0Note 2

(input)

SO0

(CMOS output)

SCK0

(CMOS I/O)

I2C bus mode (see 17.4.4 I2C bus mode operation.)

Note 2

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

349

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

RELT When RELT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is set to 1. After the SO0 Iatch is set, RELT is automatically cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

FF61H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

CMDT When CMDT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is cleared, CMDT is automatically

cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

350

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Communication operation

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for data transmission/reception in 8-bit units. Data transmission/reception

is carried out bit-wise in synchronization with the serial clock.

Shift operations of serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) are carried out at the falling edge of the serial clock (SCK0).

The transmitted data is held in the SO0 latch and is output from the SO0 pin. The received data input to the

SI0 pin is latched in SIO0 at the rising edge of SCK0.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, SIO0 operation stops automatically and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF0)

is set.

Figure 17-7. 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing

The SO0 pin is a CMOS output pin and outputs the current SO0 latch status. Thus, the SO0 pin output status

can be manipulated by setting bit 0 (RELT) and bit 1 (CMDT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC).

However, do not carry out this manipulation during serial transfer.

Control the SCK0 pin output level in the output mode (internal system clock mode) by manipulating the P27

output latch (see 17.4.8 SCK0/SCL/P27 pin output manipulation).

(3) Other signals

Figure 17-8 shows RELT and CMDT operations.

Figure 17-8. RELT and CMDT Operations

SI0

SCK0 12345678

DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0

SO0 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0

CSIIF0

Transfer start at the falling edge of SCK0

End of transfer

RELT

CMDT

SO0 latch

351

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) MSB/LSB switching as the start bit

In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, it is possible to select transfer to start from the MSB or LSB.

Figure 17-9 shows the configuration of serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) and the internal bus. As shown in the

figure, the MSB/LSB can be read or written in reverse form.

MSB/LSB switching as the start bit can be specified by bit 2 (CSIM02) of serial operating mode register 0

(CSIM0).

Figure 17-9. Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order

Start bit switching is realized by switching the bit order for data write to SIO0. The SIO0 shift order remains

unchanged.

Thus, switching between MSB-first and LSB-first must be performed before writing data to SIO0.

(5) Transfer start

Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) when the following two

conditions are satisfied.

•Serial interface channel 0 operation control bit (CSIE0) = 1.

•Internal serial clock is stopped or SCK0 is a high level after 8-bit serial transfer.

Caution If CSIE0 is set to 1 after data write to SIO0, transfer does not start.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, serial transfer automatically stops and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF0)

is set.

Internal bus

LSB-first

MSB-first Read/write gate

SI0 Serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

Read/write gate

SO0

SCK0

SO0 latch

352

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.4.3 2-wire serial I/O mode operation

The 2-wire serial I/O mode can cope with any communication format by program.

Communication is basically carried out with the two lines of the serial clock (SCK0) and serial data input/output

(SB0 or SB1).

Figure 17-10. Serial Bus Configuration Example Using 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode

(1) Register setting

The 2-wire serial I/O mode is set by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0), the serial bus interface control

(a) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

Master

SCK0

Slave

SB0 (SB1)

SCK0

SB0 (SB1)

VDD0VDD0

353

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. Can be used freely as port function.

3. Be sure to clear WUP to 0 when the 2-wire serial I/O mode.

4. When CSIE0 = 0, COI becomes 0.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 CSIE0 COI WUP

CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

CSIM01

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

Input clock to SCK0 pin from off-chip

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

R/W

1 Clock specified by bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM

CSIM00

FF60H 00H

R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

R/W

CSIM

PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27

Operation

mode

Start bit

SI0/SB0/SDA0

/P25 pin function

SO0/SB1/SDA1

/P26 pin function

SCK0/SCL/P27

pin function

WUP

Wakeup function control

Note 3

Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

Interrupt request signal generation when the address received after detecting start condition

(when CMDD = 1) matches the slave address register (SVA) data in I

C bus mode

R/W

2-wire serial

l/O mode

C bus mode

0SCK0/SCL

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

11 ×

Note 2 Note 2

MSB P25

(CMOS I/O)

SB0/SDA0

(N-ch

open-drain I/O)

SB1/SDA1

(N-ch

open-drain I/O

P26

(CMOS I/O)

3-wire serial I/O mode (see 17.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation)

COI

Slave address comparison result flag

Note 4

Slave address register (SVA) not equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

Slave address register (SVA) equal to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) data

CSIE0

Serial interface channel 0 operation control

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

R/W

354

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

SINT is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SINT to 00H.

Notes 1. Bit 6 (CLD) is a read-only bit.

2. When CSIE0 = 0, CLD becomes 0.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 to 3 to 0 in the 2-wire serial I/O mode is used.

Remark CSIIF0: Interrupt request flag corresponding to INTCSI0

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

RELT When RELT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is set to 1. After the SO0 Iatch is set, RELT is automatically cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

FF61H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

CMDT When CMDT = 1, the SO0 Iatch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is cleared, CMDT is automatically

cleared to 0.

It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> 1 07

Symbol

SINT 0 CLD SIC CLC WREL WAT1 WAT0 FF63H 00H

R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

SVAM

SIC

INTCSI0 interrupt source selection

CSIIF0 is set to 1 upon termination of serial interface channel 0 transfer

CSIIF0 is set to 1 upon bus release detection or termination of serial interface channel 0 transfer

CLD

SCK0 pin level

Note 2

Low level

High level

R/W

355

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Communication operation

The 2-wire serial I/O mode is used for data transmission/reception in 8-bit units. Data transmission/reception

is carried out bit-wise in synchronization with the serial clock.

Shift operations of serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) are carried out in synchronization with the falling edge of

the serial clock (SCK0). The transmit data is held in the SO0 latch and is output from the SB0/SDA0/P25 (or

SB1/SDA1/P26) pin on an MSB-first basis. The receive data input from the SB0 (or SB1) pin is latched into

the SIO0 at the rising edge of SCK0.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, the SIO0 operation stops automatically and the interrupt request flag

(CSIIF0) is set.

Figure 17-11. 2-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing

The SB0 (or SB1) pin specified for the serial data bus is an N-ch open-drain input/output and thus it must be

externally connected to a pull-up resistor. Because N-ch open-drain output must go into a high-impedance

state during data reception, write FFH to SIO0 in advance.

The SB0 (or SB1) pin generates the SO0 latch status and thus the SB0 (or SB1) pin output status can be

manipulated by setting bit 0 (RELT) and bit 1 (CMDT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC).

However, do not carry out this manipulation during serial transfer.

Control the SCK0 pin output level in the output mode (internal system clock mode) by manipulating the P27

output latch (see 17.4.8 SCK0/SCL/P27 pin output manipulation).

1234 5 6 7 8

SCK0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SB0 (SB1)

CSIIF0

Transfer Start at the Falling Edge of SCK0

End of Transfer

356

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Other signals

Figure 17-12 shows the RELT and CMDT operations.

Figure 17-12. RELT and CMDT Operations

(4) Transfer start

Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) when the following two

conditions are satisfied.

•Serial interface channel 0 operation control bit (CSIE0) = 1

•Internal serial clock is stopped or SCK0 is at high level after 8-bit serial transfer.

Cautions 1. If CSIE0 is set to 1 after data write to SIO0, transfer does not start.

2. Because the N-ch open-drain output must go into a high-impedance state during data

reception, write FFH to SIO0 in advance.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, serial transfer automatically stops and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF0)

is set.

(5) Error detection

In the 2-wire serial I/O mode, the serial bus SB0 (SB1) status being transmitted is fetched into the destination

device, that is, serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0). Thus, transmit error can be detected in the following way.

(a) Method of comparing SIO0 data before transmission to that after transmission

In this case, if two data differ from each other, a transmit error is judged to have occurred.

(b) Method of using the slave address register (SVA)

Transmit data is set to both SIO0 and SVA and is transmitted. After termination of transmission, COI bit

(match signal coming from the address comparator) of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) is tested.

If “1”, normal transmission is judged to have been carried out. If “0”, a transmit error is judged to have

occurred.

RELT

CMDT

SO0 latch

357

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.4.4 I2C bus mode operation

The I2C bus mode is provided for when communication operations are performed between a single master device

and multiple slave devices. This mode configures a serial bus that includes only a single master device, and is

based on the clocked serial I/O format with the addition of bus configuration functions, which allow the master device

to communicate with a number of (slave) devices using only two lines: a serial clock (SCL) line and serial data bus

(SDA0 or SDA1) line. Consequently, when the user plans to configure a serial bus which includes multiple

microcontrollers and peripheral devices, using this configuration results in reduction of the required number of port

pins and on-board wires.

In the I2C bus specification, the master sends start condition, data, and stop condition signals to slave devices via

the serial data bus, while slave devices automatically detect and distinguish the type of signals using a signal detection

function incorporated as hardware. The application program that controls the I2C bus can be simplified by using this

function.

An example of a serial bus configuration is shown in Figure 17-13. This system below is composed of CPUs and

peripheral ICs having serial interface hardware that complies with the I2C bus specification.

Note that pull-up resistors are required to connect to both the serial clock line and serial data bus line, because

open-drain buffers are used for the serial clock pin (SCL) and the serial data bus pin (SDA0 or SDA1) on the I2C bus.

The signals used in the I2C bus mode are described in Table 17-4.

Figure 17-13. Example of Serial Bus Configuration Using I2C Bus

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

SCL

SDA

Slave IC

Slave CPU2

Slave CPU1

Master CPU

DD0

Serial clock

Serial data bus

DD0

358

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) I2C bus mode functions

In the I2C bus mode, the following functions are available.

(a) Automatic identification of serial data

Slave devices automatically detect and identify start condition, data, and stop condition signals sent in

series via the serial data bus.

(b) Chip selection by specifying device addresses

The master device can select a specific slave device connected to the I2C bus and communicate with it

by sending in advance the address data corresponding to the destination device.

When address data is sent from the master device, slave devices compare it with the value registered in

their internal slave address registers. If the values in one of the slave devices match, the slave device

internally generates an interrupt request signal to terminate the current processing and communicates

with the master device (the interrupt request also occurs when the stop condition is detected). Therefore,

CPUs other than the selected slave device on the I2C bus can perform independent operations during

the serial communication.

(d) Acknowledge signal (ACK) control function

The master device and a slave device send and receive acknowledge signals to confirm that the serial

communication has been executed normally.

(e) Wait signal (WAIT) control function

When a slave device is preparing for data transmission or reception and requires more waiting time, the

slave device outputs a wait signal on the bus to inform the master device of the wait status.

(2) I2C bus definition

This section describes the format of serial data communications and functions of the signals used in the

I2C bus mode.

First, the transfer timing of the “start condition”, “data”, and “stop condition” signals, which are output onto

the signal data bus of the I2C bus, is shown in Figure 17-14.

Figure 17-14. I2C Bus Serial Data Transfer Timing

The start condition, slave address, and stop condition signals are output by the master. The acknowledge

signal (ACK) is output by either the master or the slave device (normally by the device which has received

the 8-bit data that was sent). A serial clock (SCL) is continuously supplied from the master device.

1 to 7 8 9 1 to 7 8 9 1 to 7 8 9

Address R/W ACK Data ACK Data ACK

SCL

Start

condition

SDA0 (SDA1)

Stop

condition

359

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(a) Start condition

When the SDA0 (SDA1) pin level is changed from high to low while the SCL pin is high, this transition is

recognized as the start condition signal. This start condition signal, which is created using the SCL and

SDA0 (or SDA1) pins, is output from the master device to slave devices to initiate a serial transfer. See

17.4.5 Cautions on Use of I2C Bus Mode, for details of the start condition output.

The start condition signal is detected by hardware incorporated in slave devices.

Figure 17-15. Start Condition

(b) Address

The 7 bits following the start condition signal are defined as an address.

The 7-bit address data is output by the master device to specify a specific slave from among those

connected to the bus line. Each slave device on the bus line must therefore have a different address.

Therefore, after a slave device detects the start condition, it compares the 7-bit address data received

and the data of the slave address register (SVA). After the comparison, only the slave device in which

the data are a match becomes the communication partner, and subsequently performs communication

with the master device until the master device sends a start condition or stop condition signal.

Figure 17-16. Address

The 1 bit that follows the 7-bit address data will be sent from the master device, and it is defined as the

transfer direction specification bit. If this bit is 0, it is the master device which will send data to the slave.

If it is 1, it is the slave device which will send data to the master.

Figure 17-17. Transfer Direction Specification

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

1234567

A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W

Address

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

234567

A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W

Transfer direction

specification

SCL 81

SDA0 (SDA1)

360

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(d) Acknowledge signal (ACK)

The acknowledge signal indicates that the transferred serial data has definitely been received. This

signal is used between the transmitting side and receiving side devices for confirmation of correct data

transfer. In principle, the receiving side device returns an acknowledge signal to the transmitting device

each time it receives 8-bit data. The only exception is when the receiving side is the master device and

the 8-bit data is the last transfer data; the master device outputs no acknowledge signal in this case.

The transmitting side that has transferred 8-bit data waits for the acknowledge signal which will be sent

from the receiving side. If the transmitting side device receives the acknowledge signal, which means a

successful data transfer, it proceeds to the next processing. If this signal is not sent back from the slave

device, this means that the data sent has not been received by the slave device, and therefore the

master device outputs a stop condition signal to terminate subsequent transmissions.

Figure 17-18. Acknowledge Signal

(e) Stop condition

If the SDA0 (SDA1) pin level changes from low to high while the SCL pin is high, this transition is defined

as a stop condition signal.

The stop condition signal is output from the master to the slave device to terminate a serial transfer.

The stop condition signal is detected by hardware incorporated in the slave device.

Figure 17-19. Stop Condition

1234567

A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 R/W

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

ACK

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

361

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(f) Wait signal (WAIT)

The wait signal is output by a slave device to inform the master device that the slave device is in a wait

state due to preparing for transmitting or receiving data.

During the wait state, the slave device continues to output the wait signal by keeping the SCL pin low to

delay subsequent transfers. When the wait state is released, the master device can start the next transfer.

For the releasing operation of slave devices, see 17.4.5 Cautions on Use of I2C Bus Mode.

Figure 17-20. Wait Signal

(a) Wait of 8 clock cycles

(b) Wait of 9 clock cycles

SCL of

master device

D2 D1 D0 ACK D7

Output by manipulating ACKT

6789 1 324

D6 D5 D4

Set low because slave device drives low,

though master device returns to Hi-Z state.

No wait is inserted after 9th clock cycle

(and before master device starts next transfer).

SCL of

slave device

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

SCL of

master device

Set low because slave device drives low,

though master device returns to Hi-Z state.

SCL of

slave device

SCL

D2 D1 D0 ACK D7

Output based on the value set in ACKE in advance

6789 23

D6 D5

SDA0 (SDA1)

362

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Register setting

The I2C mode setting is performed by serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0), the serial bus interface

control register (SBIC), and the interrupt timing specification register (SINT).

(a) Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

CSIM0 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM0 to 00H.

R/W

CSIM01 CSIM00

Serial interface channel 0 clock selection

0×Input clock from off-chip to SCL pin

1 0 8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) outputNote 2

1 1 Clock specified with bits 0 to 3 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

R/W

CSIM CSIM CSIM PM25 P25 PM26 P26 PM27 P27

Operation Start

SI0/SB0/SDA0/

SO0/SB1/SDA1/

SCK0/SCL/P27

04 03 02 mode bit

P25 pin function

P26 pin function

pin function

0×3-wire serial I/O mode (see 17.4.2 Operation in 3-wire serial I/O mode)

11 0 ××0 0 0 1 2-wire MSB P25 SB1/SDA1 SCK0/SCL

Note 3 Note 3

serial I/O or (CMOS I/O) N-ch open- N-ch open-

I2C bus mode drain I/O drain I/O

11 1 0 0××0 1 2-wire MSB SB0/SDA0 P26 SCK0/SCL

Note 3 Note 3

serial I/O or N-ch open- (CMOS I/O) N-ch open-

I2C bus mode drain I/O drain I/O

R/W WUP Wake-up function controlNote 4

0 Interrupt request signal generation with each serial transfer in any mode

1 In I2C bus mode, interrupt request signal is generated when the address data received after start condition

detection (when CMDD = 1) matches data in slave address register (SVA).

R COI Slave address comparison result flagNote 5

0 Slave address register (SVA) not equal to data in serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

1 Slave address register (SVA) equal to data in serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

R/W CSIE0 Serial interface channel 0 operation control

0 Operation stopped.

1 Operation enabled.

Notes 1. Bit 6 (COI) is a read-only bit.

2. In the I2C bus mode, the clock frequency is 1/16 of the clock frequency output by TO2.

3. Can be used freely as a port.

4. To use the wakeup function (WUP = 1), set bit 5 (SIC) of the interrupt timing specification

while WUP = 1.

5. When CSIE0 = 0, COI is 0.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

<6><5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM0 FF60H 00H

R/WNote 1

Address After reset R/W

CSIE0 COI WUP

CSIM04 CSIM03 CSIM02 CSIM01 CSIM00

363

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

SBIC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SBIC to 00H.

R/W RELT Use for stop condition output. When RELT = 1, the SO0 latch is set to 1. After the SO0 latch is set, RELT

is automatically cleared to 0. Also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R/W CMDT Use for start condition output. When CMDT = 1, the SO0 latch is cleared to 0. After the SO0 latch is

cleared, CMDT is automatically cleared to 0. It is also cleared to 0 when CSIE0 = 0.

R RELD Stop condition detection

0 Clear conditions

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• If SIO0 and SVA values do not match in address reception

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

1 Setting condition

• When stop condition is detected

R CMDD Start condition detection

0 Clear conditions

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• When stop condition is detected

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

1 Setting condition

• When start condition is detected

R/W ACKT SDA0 (SDA1) is set to low after the Set instruction execution (ACKT = 1) before the next SCL falling edge.

Used for generating an ACK signal by software if the 8-clock wait mode is selected. Cleared to 0 if CSIE0

= 0 when a transfer by the serial interface is started.

R/W ACKE Acknowledge signal automatic output controlNote 2

0 Disabled (with ACKT enabled). Used when receiving data in the 8-clock wait mode or when transmitting

data.Note 3

1 Enabled.

After completion of transfer, the acknowledge signal is output in ACKE is synchronization with the 9th falling

edge of the SCL clock (automatically output when ACKE = 1). However, ACKE is not automatically cleared to

0 after acknowledge signal is output. It is used for reception when the 9-clock wait mode is selected.

R ACKD Acknowledge detection

0 Clear Conditions

• When transfer start instruction is executed

• When CSIE0 = 0

• When RESET input is applied

1 Set Conditions

• When the acknowledge signal is detected at the rising edge of SCL clock after completion of transfer

R/W Control of N-ch open-drain output for transmission in I2C bus modeNote 5

BSYE

0 Output enabled (transmission)

1 Output disabled (reception)

Notes 1. Bits 2, 3, and 6 (RELD, CMDD, ACKD) are read-only bits.

2. This setting must be performed prior to transfer start.

3. In the 8-clock wait mode, use ACKT for output of the acknowledge signal after normal data

reception.

4. The busy mode can be released by the start of a serial interface transfer or reception of an address

signal. However, the BSYE flag is not cleared.

5. When using the wakeup function, be sure to set BSYE to 1.

Remark CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

Note 4

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

SBIC BSYE ACKD ACKE FF61H 00H R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

ACKT CMDD RELD CMDT RELT

364

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SINT is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SINT to 00H.

R/W WAT1 WAT0 Interrupt control by waitNote 2

0 0 Interrupt service request is generated on rise of 8th SCK0 clock cycle (clock output is high

impedance).

0 1 Setting prohibited

1 0 Used in I2C bus mode (8-clock wait)

Generates an interrupt service request on rise of 8th SCL clock cycle. (In case of master device,

SCL pin is driven low after output of 8 clock cycles, to enter the wait state. In case of slave device,

SCL pin is driven low after input of 8 clock cycles, to require the wait state.)

1 1 Used in I2C bus mode (9-clock wait)

Generates an interrupt service request on rise of 9th SCL clock cycle. (In case of master device,

SCL pin is driven low after output of 9 clock cycles, to enter the wait state. In case of slave device,

SCL pin is driven low after input of 9 clock cycles, to require the wait state.)

R/W WREL Wait release control

0 Indicates that the wait state has been released.

1 Releases the wait state. Automatically cleared to 0 after releasing the wait state. This bit is used to release

the wait state set by means of WAT0 and WAT1.

R/W CLC Clock level control

0 Used in I2C bus mode. In cases other than serial transfer, SCL pin output is driven low.

1 Used in I2C bus mode. In cases other than serial transfer, SCL pin output is set to high impedance. (Clock

line is held high.) Used by master device to generate the start condition and stop condition signals.

R/W SVAM SVA bits used as slave address

0 Bits 0 to 7

1 Bits 1 to 7

R/W SIC INTCSI0 interrupt source selectionNote 3

0 CSIIF0 is set to 1 after end of serial interface channel 0 transfer.

1 CSIIF0 is set to 1 after end of serial interface channel 0 transfer or when stop condition is detected.

R CLD SCL pin levelNote 4

0 Low level

1 High level

Notes 1. Bit 6 (CLD) is read-only.

2. When the I2C bus mode is used, be sure to set WAT0 and WAT1 to 1 and 0, or 1 and 1, respectively.

3. When using the wakeup function in I2C mode, be sure to set SIC to 1.

4. When CSIE0 = 0, CLD is 0.

Remark SVA: Slave address register

CSIIF0: Interrupt request flag corresponding to INTCSI0

CSIE0: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> 1 07

Symbol

SINT 0 CLD SIC FF63H 00H R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

SVAM CLC WREL WAT1 WAT0

365

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Various signals

A list of signals in the I2C bus mode is given in Table 17-4.

Table 17-4. Signals in I2C Bus Mode

Signal name Description

Start condition Definition: SDA0 (SDA1) falling edge when SCL is highNote 1

Function:

Indicates that serial communication starts and subsequent data is address data.

Signaled by: Master

Signaled when: CMDT is set.

Affected flag(s): CMDD (is set.)

Stop condition Definition: SDA0 (SDA1) rising edge when SCL is highNote 1

Function: Indicates end of serial transmission.

Signaled by: Master

Signaled when: RELT is set.

Affected flag(s): RELD (is set) and CMDD (is cleared)

Acknowledge signal (ACK) Definition:

Low level of SDA0 (SDA1) pin during one SCL clock cycle after serial reception

Function: Indicates completion of reception of 1 byte.

Signaled by: Master or slave

Signaled when: ACKT is set with ACKE = 1.

Affected flag(s): ACKD (is set.)

Wait (WAIT) Definition: Low-level signal output to SCL

Function: Indicates state in which serial reception is not possible.

Signaled by: Slave

Signaled when: WAT1, WAT0 = 1x.

Affected flag(s): None

Serial clock (SCL) Definition: Synchronization clock for output of various signals

Function: Serial communication synchronization signal.

Signaled by: Master

Signaled when: See Note 2 below.

Affected flag(s): CSIIF0. Also see Note 3 below.

Address (A6 to A0) Definition: 7-bit data synchronized with SCL immediately after start condition signal

Function: Indicates address value for specification of slave on serial bus.

Signaled by: Master

Signaled when: See Note 2 below.

Affected flag(s): CSIIF0. Also see Note 3 below.

Transfer direction (R/W) Definition: 1-bit data output in synchronization with SCL after address output

Function: Indicates whether data transmission or reception is to be performed.

Signaled by: Master

Signaled when: See Note 2 below.

Affected flag(s): CSIIF0. Also see Note 3 below.

Data (D7 to D0) Definition: 8-bit data synchronized with SCL, not immediately after start condition

Function: Contains data to be actually sent.

Signaled by: Master or slave

Signaled when: See Note 2 below.

Affected flag(s): CSIIF0. Also see Note 3 below.

Notes 1. The level of the serial clock can be controlled with bit 3 (CLC) of interrupt timing specify register

(SINT).

2. Execution of instruction to write data to SIO0 when CSIE0 = 1 (serial transfer start directive). In

the wait state, the serial transfer operation will be started after the wait state is released.

3. If the 8-clock wait is selected when WUP = 0, CSIIF0 is set at the rising edge of the 8th clock cycle

of SCL. If the 9-clock wait is selected when WUP = 0, CSIIF0 is set at the rising edge of the 9th

clock cycle of SCL. CSIIF0 is set if an address is received and that address matches the value

of the slave address register (SVA) when WUP = 1, or if the stop condition is detected.

366

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(5) Pin configurations

The configurations of the serial clock pin SCL and the serial data bus pins SDA0 (SDA1) are shown below.

(a) SCL

Pin for serial clock input/output alternate-function pin.

<1> Master ..... N-ch open-drain output

<2> Slave ....... Schmitt input

(b) SDA0 (SDA1)

Serial data I/O alternate-function pin.

Uses N-ch open-drain output and Schmitt-input buffers for both master and slave devices.

Note that pull-up resistors are required to be connected to both the serial clock line and serial data bus

line, because open-drain buffers are used for the serial clock pin (SCL) and the serial data bus pin

(SDA0 or SDA1) on the I2C bus.

Figure 17-21. Pin Configuration

Caution To receive data, the N-ch open-drain output must made to go into a high-impedance

state. Therefore, set bit 7 (BSYE) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC) to

1 in advance, and write FFH to serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0).

When the wakeup function is used (by setting bit 5 (WUP) of serial operating mode

is not written to SIO0, the N-ch open-drain output always goes into a high-impedance

state.

(6) Address match detection method

In the I2C mode, the master can select a specific slave device by sending slave address data.

A match of the addresses can be automatically detected by hardware. CSIIF0 is set if the slave address

transmitted by the master matches the value set to the slave address register (SVA) when a slave device

address has a slave register (SVA), and the wakeup function specification bit (WUP) = 1 (CSIIF0 is also

set when the stop condition is detected).

When using the wakeup function, set SIC to 1.

Caution Slave selection/non-selection is detected by matching of the data (address) received after

the start condition.

For this match detection, the match interrupt request (INTCSI0) of the address to be

generated with WUP = 1 is normally used. Thus, execute selection/non-selection detection

by slave address when WUP = 1.

DD0

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

Master device

Clock output

(Clock input)

Data output

Data input

Slave devices

(Clock output)

Clock input

Data output

Data input

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

SS0

367

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(7) Error detection

In the I2C bus mode, transmission error detection can be performed by the following methods because the

serial bus SDA0 (SDA1) status during transmission is also taken into the serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0)

(a) Comparison of SIO0 data before and after transmission

In this case, a transmission error is judged to have occurred if the two data values are different.

(b) Using the slave address register (SVA)

Transmit data is set in SIO0 and SVA before transmission is performed. After transmission, the COI bit

(match signal from the address comparator) of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) is tested: “1”

indicates normal transmission, and “0” indicates a transmission error.

(8) Communication operation

In the I2C bus mode, the master selects the slave device to be communicated with from among multiple

devices by outputting address data onto the serial bus.

After the slave address data, the master sends the R/W bit which indicates the data transfer direction, and

starts serial communication with the selected slave device.

Data communication timing charts are shown in Figures 17-22 and 17-23.

In the transmitting device, serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) shifts transmission data to the SO latch in

synchronization with the falling edge of the serial clock (SCL), the SO0 latch outputs the data on an MSB-

first basis from the SDA0 or SDA1 pin to the receiving device.

In the receiving device, the data input from the SDA0 or SDA1 pin is taken into the SIO0 in synchronization

with the rising edge of SCL.

368

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-22. Data Transmission from Master to Slave

(Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) (1/3)

(a) Start condition to address

A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0

W ACK

2345678

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3

123459

SIO0 ← Address

Master device operation

Transfer line

Slave device operation

SIO0 ← Data

SIO0 ← FFH

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

SCL

SDA0

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

CSIE0

P25

PM25

PM27

369

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-22. Data Transmission from Master to Slave

(Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) (2/3)

(b) Data

D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

ACK

2345678

D6 D5 D4 D3

123459

SIO0 ← Address

Master device operation

Transfer line

SIO0 ← Data

SIO0 ← FFH SIO0 ← FFH

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

SCL

SDA0

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

CSIE0

P25

PM25

PM27

Slave device operation

370

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-22. Data Transmission from Master to Slave

(Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) (3/3)

D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

ACK

2345678

A6 A5 A4 A3

12349

SIO0 ← Data

Master device operation

Transfer line

SIO0 ← Address

SIO0 ← FFH

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

SCL

SDA0

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

CSIE0

P25

PM25

PM27

Slave device operation

SIO0 ← FFH

371

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-23. Data Transmission from Slave to Master

(Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) (1/3)

(a) Start condition to address

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6

ACK

2345678

D6D7 D5 D4 D3

21345

SIO0 ← Address

Master device operation

Transfer line

SIO0 ← FFH

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

SCL

SDA0

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

CSIE0

P25

PM25

PM27

Slave device operation

SIO0 ← Data

372

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-23. Data Transmission from Slave to Master

(Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) (2/3)

(b) Data

D1 D0D2D3D4D5D6D7

ACK

2345678

D6D7 D5 D4 D3

21345

SIO0 ← FFH

Master device operation

Transfer line

SIO0 ← FFH

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

SCL

SDA0

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

CSIE0

P25

PM25

PM27

Slave device operation

SIO0 ← DataSIO0 ← Data

373

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-23. Data Transmission from Slave to Master

(Both Master and Slave Selected 9-Clock Wait) (3/3)

D1 D0D2D3D4D5D6D7

NAK

2345678

A6 A5 A4 A3

1234

SIO0 ← FFH

Master device operation

Transfer line

SIO0 ← Address

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

SCL

SDA0

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

Write SIO0

COI

ACKD

CMDD

RELD

CLD

P27

WUP

BSYE

ACKE

CMDT

RELT

CLC

WREL

SIC

INTCSI0

CSIE0

P25

PM25

PM27

Slave device operation

SIO0 ← Data

374

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(9) Transfer start

A serial transfer is started by setting transfer data in serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) if the following two

conditions have been satisfied.

• The serial interface channel 0 operation control bit (CSIE0) = 1.

• After an 8-bit serial transfer, the internal serial clock is stopped or SCL is low.

Cautions 1. Be sure to set CSIE0 to 1 before writing data in SIO0. Setting CSIE0 to 1 after writing data

in SIO0 does not initiate transfer operation.

2. Because the N-ch open-drain output must made to go into a high-impedance state during

data reception, set bit 7 (BSYE) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC) to 1

before writing FFH to SIO0.

Do not write FFH to SIO0 before reception when the wakeup function is used (by setting

bit 5 (WUP) of serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0)). Even if FFH is not written to

SIO0, the N-ch open-drain output always goes into a high-impedance state.

3. If data is written to SIO0 while the slave is in the wait state, that data is held. The transfer

is started when SCL is output after the wait state is cleared.

When an 8-bit data transfer ends, serial transfer is stopped automatically and the interrupt request flag

(CSIIF0) is set.

17.4.5 Cautions on use of I2C bus mode

(1) Start condition output (master)

The SCL pin normally outputs a low-level signal when no serial clock is output. It is necessary to change

the SCL pin to high in order to output a start condition signal. Set CLC to 1 in the interrupt timing specification

After setting CLC, clear CLC to 0 and return the SCL pin to low. If CLC remains 1, no serial clock is

output.

If it is the master device which outputs the start condition and stop condition signals, confirm that CLD is

set to 1 after setting CLC to 1; a slave device may have set SCL to low (wait state).

Figure 17-24. Start Condition Output

SCL

CLC

CMDT

CLD

SDA0 (SDA1)

375

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Slave wait release (slave transmission)

Slave wait status is released by WREL flag (bit 2 of interrupt timing specification register (SINT)) setting or

execution of a serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) write instruction.

If the slave sends data, the wait is immediately released by execution of an SIO0 write instruction and the

clock rises without the start transmission bit being output in the data line. Therefore, as shown in Figure

17-25, data should be transmitted by manipulating the P27 output latch through the program. At this time,

control the low-level width (“a” in Figure 17-25) of the first serial clock at the timing used for setting the

P27 output latch to 1 after execution of an SIO0 write instruction.

In addition, if the acknowledge signal from the master is not output (if data transmission from the slave is

completed), set 1 in the WREL flag of SINT and release the wait.

For this timing, see Figure 17-23.

Figure 17-25. Slave Wait Release (Transmission)

Writing

FFH

to SIO0

Setting

CSIIF0

Setting

ACKD

Serial reception

A0 R ACK D7 D6 D5

P27

Output

latch 1

Setting

CSIIF0

ACK

output

Serial transmission

Write

data

to SIO0

P27

Output

latch 0

Wait

release

Software operation

Hardware operation

SCL

Software operation

Hardware operation

Transfer line

Master device operation

Slave device operation

SDA0 (SDA1)

376

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Slave wait release (slave reception)

The slave is released from the wait status when the WREL flag (bit 2 of the interrupt timing specification

When the slave receives data, the first bit of the data sent from the master may not be received if the SCL

line immediately goes into a high-impedance state after an instruction that writes data to SIO has been

executed.

This is because SIO0 does not start operating if the SCL line is in the high-impedance state while the

instruction that writes data to SIO0 is being executed (until the next instruction is executed).

Therefore, receive the data by manipulating the output latch of P27 by program, as shown in Figure 17-26.

For this timing, see Figure 17-22.

Figure 17-26. Slave Wait Release (Reception)

Writing

data to

SIO0

Setting

CSIIF0

Setting

ACKD

Serial transmission

923

A0 ACK D7 D6 D5

P27

Output

latch 1

Setting

CSIIF0

ACK

output

Serial reception

Write

FFH

to SIO0

P27

Output

latch 0

Wait

release

Software operation

Hardware operation

SCL

SDA0 (SDA1)

Software operation

Hardware operation

Master device operation

Transfer line

Slave device operation

377

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Reception completion of slave

In the reception completion processing of the slave, check bit 3 (CMDD) of the serial bus interface control

avoid the situation where the slave cannot judge which of the start condition and data comes first and

therefore the wakeup condition cannot be used when the slave receives an undefined number of data from

the master.

17.4.6 Restrictions in I2C bus mode 1

The following restrictions are applied to the

PD780058Y Subseries.

• Restrictions when used as slave device in I2C bus mode

Target device:

PD780053Y, 780054Y, 780055Y, 780056Y, 780058BY, 78F0058Y, IE-780308-R-EM,

IE-780308-NS-EM1

Description: If the wakeup function is executed (by setting bit 5 of serial operating mode register 0

(CSIM0) to 1) in the serial transfer statusNote, the

PD780058Y Subseries checks the

address of the data between the other slaves and the master. If that data happens to

match the slave address of the

PD780058Y Subseries, the

PD780058Y Subseries

takes part in communication, destroying the communication data.

Note The serial transfer status is the status from when data is written to serial I/O shift

of the serial transfer.

Preventive measure: The above phenomenon can be avoided by modifying the program.

Before executing the wakeup function, execute the following program that clears the

serial transfer status. When executing the wakeup function, do not execute an instruction

that writes data to SIO0. Even if such an instruction is not executed, data can be received

when the wakeup function is executed.

This program releases the serial transfer status. To release the serial transfer status,

serial interface channel 0 must be disabled once (by clearing the CSIE0 flag (bit 7 of the

serial operating mode register (CSIM0) to 0). If serial interface channel 0 is disabled in

the I2C bus mode, however, the SCL pin outputs a high level, and the SDA0 (SDA1) pin

outputs a low level, affecting communication of the I2C bus. Therefore, this program

makes the SCL and SDA0 (SDA1) pins go into a high-impedance state to prevent the

I2C bus from being affected.

In this example, the SDA0 (/P25) pin is used as a serial data input/output pin. When

SDA1 (/P26) is used, take P2.5 and PM2.5 in the program example below as P2.6 and

PM2.6.

For the timing of each signal when this program is executed, see Figure 17-22.

378

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

• Example of program releasing serial transfer status

SET1 P2.5; <1>

SET1 PM2.5; <2>

SET1 PM2.7; <3>

CLR1 CSIE0; <4>

SET1 CSIE0; <5>

SET1 RELT; <6>

CLR1 PM2.7; <7>

CLR1 P2.5; <8>

CLR1 PM2.5; <9>

<1> This instruction prevents the SDA0 pin from outputting a low level when the I2C bus mode is restored

by instruction <5>. The output of the SDA0 pin goes into a high-impedance state.

<2> This instruction sets the P25 (/SDA0) pin in the input mode to protect the SDA0 line from adverse

influence when the port mode is set by instruction <4>. The P25 pin is set in the input mode when

instruction <2> is executed.

<3> This instruction sets the P27 (/SCL) pin in the input mode to protect the SCL line from adverse influence

when the port mode is set by instruction <4>. The P27 pin is set in the input mode when instruction

<3> is executed.

<4> This instruction changes the mode from I2C bus mode to port mode.

<5> This instruction restores the I2C bus mode from the port mode.

<6> This instruction prevents the SDA0 pin from outputting a low level when instruction <8> is executed.

<7> This instruction sets the P27 pin in the output mode because the P27 pin must be in the output mode

in the I2C bus mode.

<8> This instruction clears the output latch of the P25 pin to 0 because the output latch of the P25 pin

must be cleared to 0 in the I2C bus mode.

<9> This instruction sets the P25 pin in the output mode because the P25 pin must be in the output mode

in the I2C bus mode.

Remark RELT: Bit 0 of serial bus interface control register (SBIC)

379

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.4.7 Restrictions in I2C bus mode 2

When using the I2C bus mode under the following conditions, the STOP condition is detected and an interrupt

occurs when CSIE0 is set to 1. To enable the operation (by setting CSIE0 to 1), therefore, perform the following

processing.

Condition: If a low level is used when CSIE0 is set to 1 when using the P26/SDA as the SDA line and P25/SDA0

as an input port

(1) When operation is enabled

SET1 CSIMK0 ; Disables INTCSI0 interrupt.

SET1 CSIE0 ; Enables IIC operation.

CLR1 CSIIF0 ; Clears INTCSI0 interrupt request flag.

CLR1 CSIMK0 ; Enables INTCSI0 interrupt.

Cautions 1. After that, RELD = 1 (stop condition is detected) until data that does not match the source

station slave address (SVA) is received.

2. Even if a start condition is satisfied while RELD = 1 (stop condition is detected), the

interrupt occurs if it is enabled and CMDD = 1 (start condition is detected).

(2) When using as slave device in I2C bus mode (if restrictions in 17.4.6 apply)

Example of program releasing serial transfer status

SET1 CSIMK0 ; Disables INTCSI0 interrupt.

SET1 P2.6

SET1 PM2.6

SET1 PM2.7

CLR1 CSIE0 ; Stops IIC operation.

SET1 CSIE0 ; Enables IIC operation.

CLR1 CSIIF0 ; Clears INTCSI0 interrupt request flag.

CLR1 CSIMK0 ; Enables INTCSI0 interrupt.

SET1 RELT

CLR1 PM2.7

CLR1 P2.6

CLR1 PM2.6

Cautions 1. After that, RELD = 1 (stop condition is detected) until data that does not match the source

station slave address (SVA) is received.

2. Even if a start condition is satisfied while RELD = 1 (stop condition is detected), the

interrupt occurs if it is enabled and CMDD = 1 (start condition is detected).

380

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

17.4.8 SCK0/SCL/P27 pin output manipulation

The SCK0/SCL/P27 pin can execute static output via software, in addition to outputting the normal serial clock.

The value of the serial clock can also be arbitrarily set by software (the SI0/SB0/SDA0 and SO0/SB1/SDA1 pins

are controlled by bit 0 (RELT) and bit 1 (CMDT) of the serial bus interface control register (SBIC)).

The SCK0/SCL/P27 pin output should be manipulated as described below.

(1) In 3-wire serial I/O mode and 2-wire serial I/O mode

The output level of the SCK0/SCL/P27 pin is manipulated by the P27 output latch.

<1> Set serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) (SCK0 pin: Output mode, serial operation: Enabled).

SCK0 = 1 while serial transfer is stopped.

<2> Manipulate the contents of the P27 output latch by executing a bit manipulation instruction.

Figure 17-27. SCK0/SCL/P27 Pin Configuration

(2) In I2C bus mode

The output level of the SCK0/SCL/P27 pin is manipulated by the CLC bit of the interrupt timing specification

<1> Set serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) (SCL pin: Output mode, serial operation: Enabled). Set

the P27 output latch to 1. SCL = 0 while serial transfer is stopped.

<2> Manipulate the CLC bit of SINT by executing a bit manipulation instruction.

Figure 17-28. SCK0/SCL/P27 Pin Configuration

Note The level of the SCL signal is in accordance with the contents of the logic circuits shown in Figure

17-29.

SCK0/SCL/P27 To internal logic

P27

Output latch

CSIE0 = 1 and CSIM01, CSIM00 are 1, 0 or 1, 1, respectively

SCK0 (1 while transfer is stopped)

From serial clock

controller

Manipulated by bit manipulation instruction

SCK0/SCL/P27 To internal logic

P27

Output latch

CSIE0 = 1 and CSIM01 and CSIM00 are 1, 0 or 1, 1, respectively

SCL

Note

Set 1

From serial clock

controller

381

CHAPTER 17 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 17-29. Logic Circuit of SCL Signal

Remarks 1. This figure indicates the relationship of the signals and does not indicate the internal circuit.

2. CLC: Bit 3 of interrupt timing specification register (SINT)

CLC (manipulated by bit manipulation instruction)

Wait request signal

Serial clock (low while transfer is stopped)

SCL

382 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

18.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 1

Serial interface channel 1 employs the following three modes.

• Operation stop mode

• 3-wire serial I/O mode

• 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function

(1) Operation stop mode

This mode is used when serial transfer is not carried out to reduce power consumption.

(2) 3-wire serial I/O mode (MSB-/LSB-first switchable)

This mode is used for 8-bit data transfer using three lines: a serial clock (SCK1), serial output (SO1), and

serial input (SI1).

The 3-wire serial I/O mode enables simultaneous transmission/reception and so decreases the data transfer

processing time.

Since the start bit of 8-bit data to undergo serial transfer is switchable between the MSB and LSB, connection

is enabled with either start bit device.

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is valid for connection of peripheral I/O units and display controllers which

incorporate a conventional synchronous serial interface such as the 75X/XL, 78K, and 17K Series.

(3) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (MSB-/LSB-first switchable)

This mode is equivalent to the 3-wire serial I/O mode with the addition of an automatic transmit/receive function.

The automatic transmit/receive function is used to transmit/receive data with a maximum of 32 bytes. This

function enables the hardware to transmit/receive data to/from the OSD (On Screen Display) device and a

device with built-in display controller/driver independently of the CPU, thus alleviating the software load.

Caution When using the P23/STB/TxD1 and P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins in the asynchronous serial interface

(UART) mode of serial interface channel 2, the busy control option and busy & strobe control

option are invalid.

383

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

18.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 1

Serial interface channel 1 consists of the following hardware.

Table 18-1. Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 1

Item Configuration

Registers Serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1)

Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer (ADTP)

Control registers Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

Serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1)

Automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI)

Port mode register 2 (PM2)Note

Note See Figures 6-5 and 6-7 Block Diagram of P20, P21, and P23 to P26 and Figures 6-6 and 6-8 Block

Diagram of P22 and P27.

384

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 1

RE ARLD ERCE ERR TRF STRB BUSY

BUSY

Internal bus

Automatic data

transmit/receive

control register

Serial operating

mode register 1

ADTI

5-bit counter

Serial I/O

shift register 1

(SIO1)

Hand-

shake

Serial clock

counter

Selector

SO1/

P21

PM21

P21 output

latch

DIR DIR

Buffer RAM

Automatic data

transmit/receive

address pointer

(ADTP)

SCK1/

P22

PM22

Internal bus

TRF

P22 output latch

Match ADTI0 to ADTI4

Selector

TO2

INTCSI1

Clear

SIOI write

Selector

TCL

Timer clock

select register 3

/2 to f

Internal bus

ARLD

CSIE1

DIR ATE CSIM

CSIM

ATE

SI1/

P20

STB/

TxD1/P23

PM23

BUSY/

RxD1/P24

Automatic data

transmit/receive interval

specify register

385

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1)

This is an 8-bit register used to carry out parallel/serial conversion and to carry out serial transmission/

reception (shift operations) in synchronization with the serial clock.

SIO1 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

When the value in bit 7 (CSIE1) of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is 1, writing data to SIO1 starts

serial operation.

In transmission, data written to SIO1 is output to the serial output (SO1). In reception, data is read from the

serial input (SI1) to SIO1.

RESET input makes SIO1 undefined.

Caution Do not write data to SIO1 while the automatic transmit/receive function is activated.

(2) Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer (ADTP)

This register stores the value of (the number of transmit data bytes – 1) while the automatic transmit/receive

function is activated. As data is transferred/received, the pointer is automatically decremented.

ADTP is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. The higher 3 bits must be cleared to 0.

RESET input clears ADTP to 00H.

Caution Do not write data to ADTP while the automatic transmit/receive function is activated.

(3) Serial clock counter

This counter counts the serial clocks to be output and input during transmission/reception to check whether

8-bit data has been transmitted/received.

386

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

18.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 1

The following four registers are used to control serial interface channel 1.

•Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

•Serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1)

•Automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

•Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI)

(1) Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

This register sets the serial clock of serial interface channel 1.

TCL3 is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets TCL3 to 88H.

Remark Besides setting the serial clock of serial interface channel 1, TCL3 sets the serial clock of serial

interface channel 0.

387

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-2. Format of Timer Clock Select Register 3

Caution When rewriting other data to TCL3 , stop the serial transfer operation beforehand.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS: Bit 0 of oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

Serial interface channel 1 serial clock selection

TCL37 TCL36 TCL35 TCL34

fXX/2

fXX/22

fXX/23

fXX/24

fXX/25

fXX/26

fXX/27

fXX/28

MCS = 1

Setting prohibited

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

MCS = 0

fX/22 (1.25 MHz)

fX/23 (625 kHz)

fX/24 (313 kHz)

fX/25 (156 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

fX/29 (9.8 kHz)

Other than above Setting prohibited

65432107

Symbol

TCL3 TCL37 TCL36 TCL35 TCL34 TCL33 TCL32 TCL31 TCL30 FF43H 88H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

388

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1)

This register sets the serial interface channel 1 serial clock, operating mode, operation enable/stop and

automatic transmit/receive operation enable/stop.

CSIM1 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM1 to 00H.

Figure 18-3. Format of Serial Operation Mode Register 1

Notes 1. If the external clock input has been selected with CSIM11 cleared to 0, clear bit 1 (BUSY1) and

bit 2 (STRB) of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) to 0, 0.

2. Can be used freely as a port function.

3. Can be used as P20 (CMOS I/O) when only transmission is performed (clear bit 7 (RE) of ADTC

to 0).

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

Operation

enable

6<5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM1 CSIE1 DIR ATE 0 0 0

CSIM11 CSIM10

CSIM11

Serial interface channel 1 clock selection

External clock input to SCK1 pin

Note 1

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

SCK1

(input)

1 Clock specified by bits 4 to 7 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIE1

CSIM10

FF68H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

CSIM11

P20 PM21 P21 PM22

Note 3

Shift register

1 operation

Serial clock counter

operation control

SI1/P20 pin

function

SCK1/P22

pin function

10 ×001×

Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2

Count

operation

SI1

(input)

××××× Operation

stop

Clear P20

(CMOS I/O)

P22

(CMOS I/O)

ATE

Serial interface channel 1 operating mode selection

3-wire serial I/O mode

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function

DIR

Start bit

MSB

LSB

SI1 pin function

SI1/P20 (input)

SO1 pin function

SO1 (CMOS output)

PM20

SO1/P21 pin

function

SO1 (CMOS

output)

P21

(CMOS I/O)

SCK1

(CMOS

output)

Note 2

Note 3Note 3

P22

389

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

This register sets automatic receive enable/disable, the operating mode, strobe output enable/disable, busy

input enable/disable, error check enable/disable and displays automatic transmit/receive execution and error

detection.

ADTC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ADTC to 00H.

Figure 18-4. Format of Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Control Register

Notes 1. Bits 3 and 4 (TRF and ERR) are read-only bits.

2. The termination of automatic transmission/reception should be judged by using TRF, not CSIIF1

(interrupt request flag).

Cautions 1. When an external clock input is selected by clearing bit 1 (CSIM11) of serial operating mode

2. When using the P23/STB/TxD1 and P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins in the asynchronous serial interface

(UART) mode of serial interface channel 2, the busy control option and busy & strobe control

option are invalid.

Remark ×: don’t care

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

ADTC RE ARLD ERCE ERR TRF STRB

BUSY1 BUSY0

FF69H 00H

R/WNote 1

Address After reset R/W

BUSY1

Busy input control

Not using busy input

Busy input enabled (active high)

Busy input enabled (active low)

BUSY0

STRB

Strobe output control

Strobe output disabled

Strobe output enabled

TRF

Status of automatic transmit/receive functionNote 2

Detection of termination of automatic transmission/

reception. (This bit is set to 0 upon suspension of

automatic transmission/reception or when ARLD = 0.)

During automatic transmission/reception

(This bit is set to 1 when data is written to SIO1.)

R/W

RERR

Error detection of automatic transmit/receive function

No error

(This bit is set to 0 when data is written to SIO1.)

Error occurred

R/W ARLD

Operating mode selection of automatic transmit/receive function

One-shot mode

Repetitive one-shot mode

R/W

Receive control of automatic transmit/receive function

Receive disabled

Receive enabled

R/W ERCE

Error check control of automatic transmit/receive function

Error check disabled

Error check enabled (only when BUSY1 = 1)

390

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI)

This register sets the automatic data transmit/receive function data transfer interval.

ADTI is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ADTI to 00H.

Figure 18-5. Format of Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Specification Register (1/4)

Notes 1. The interval is dependent only on the CPU processing.

2. The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals are

found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a minimum which

is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum interval time is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + + , Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write anything to ADTI while automatic transmission/reception is in progress (bit 3

(TRF) of the ADTC register = 1).

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/reception

using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

2628 0.5

fXX fXX fSCK

fXX

1.5

fSCK

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 5.0 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note 2

18.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

31.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

44.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

56.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

69.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

82.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

95.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

108.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

120.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

133.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

146.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

159.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

172.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

184.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

197.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

210.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note 2

20.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

32.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

45.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

58.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

71.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

84.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

96.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

109.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

122.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

135.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

148.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

160.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

173.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

186.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

199.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

212.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI7

Data transfer interval control

No control of interval by ADTI

Note 1

Control of interval by ADTI (ADTI0 to ADTI4) 1

ADTI0

391

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-5. Format of Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Specification Register (2/4)

Note The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals

are found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a minimum

which is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum interval time

is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + +

Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write to ADTI during operation of the automatic data transmit/receive function.

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/

reception using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

2628 0.5

fXX fXX fSCK

2636 1.5

fXX fXX fSCK

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 5.0 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note

223.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

236.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

248.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

261.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

274.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

287.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

300.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

312.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

325.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

338.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

351.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

364.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

376.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

389.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

402.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

415.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note

224.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

237.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

250.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

263.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

276.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

288.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

301.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

314.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

327.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

340.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

352.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

365.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

378.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

391.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

404.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

416.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI0

392

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-5. Format of Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Specification Register (3/4)

Notes 1. The interval is dependent only on the CPU processing.

2. The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals

are found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a

minimum which is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum

interval time is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + +

Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write to ADTI during operation of the automatic data transmit/receive function.

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/

reception using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

2628

fXX fXX

2636

fXX fXX

0.5

fSCK

1.5

fSCK

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 2.5 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note 2

36.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

62.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

88.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

113.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

139.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

164.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

190.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

216.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

241.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

267.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

292.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

318.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

344.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

369.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

395.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

420.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note 2

40.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

91.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

116.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

142.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

168.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

193.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

219.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

244.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

270.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

296.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

321.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

347.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

372.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

398.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

424.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI7

Data transfer interval control

No control of interval by ADTI

Note 1

Control of interval by ADTI (ADTI0 to ADTI4)

ADTI0

393

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-5. Format of Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Specification Register (4/4)

Note The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals

are found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a minimum

which is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum interval time

is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + +

Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write to ADTI during operation of the automatic data transmit/receive function.

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/

reception using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

2628 0.5

fXX fXX fSCK

2636 1.5

fXX fXX fSCK

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 2.5 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note

446.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

472.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

497.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

523.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

548.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

574.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

600.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

625.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

651.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

676.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

702.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

728.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

753.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

779.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

804.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

830.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note

449.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

475.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

500.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

526.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

552.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

577.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

603.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

628.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

654.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

680.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

705.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

731.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

756.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

782.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

808.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

833.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI0

394

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

18.4 Operations of Serial Interface Channel 1

The following three operating modes are available for serial interface channel 1.

•Operation stop mode

•3-wire serial I/O mode

•3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function

18.4.1 Operation stop mode

Serial transfer is not carried out in the operation stop mode. Thus, power consumption can be reduced. Serial

I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) does not carry out shift operations either, and thus it can be used as an ordinary 8-bit register.

In the operation stop mode, the P20/SI1, P21/SO1, P22/SCK1, P23/STB/TxD1, and P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins can

be used as ordinary I/O ports.

(1) Register setting

The operation stop mode is set by serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1).

CSIM1 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM1 to 00H.

Notes 1. Can be used freely as a port function.

2. Can be used as P20 (CMOS I/O) when only transmission is performed (clear bit 7 (RE) of the

automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) to 0).

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

Operation

enable

6<5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM1 CSIE1 DIR ATE 0 0 0 CSIM11 CSIM10

SCK1

(input)

CSIE1

FF68H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

CSIM11

P20 PM21 P21 PM22

Note 2

Shift register

1 operation

Serial clock counter

operation control

SI1/P20 pin

function

SCK1/P22

pin function

10 ×001×

Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1

Count

operation

SI1

(input)

××××× Operation

stop

Clear P20

(CMOS I/O)

P22

(CMOS I/O)

PM20 SO1/P21 pin

function

SO1 (CMOS

output)

P21

(CMOS I/O)

SCK1

(CMOS

output)

Note 1

Note 2Note 2

P22

395

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

18.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode operation

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is useful for connection of peripheral I/O units and display controllers which incorporate

a conventional clocked serial interface such as the 75X/XL, 78K and 17K Series.

Communication is carried out using the three lines of the serial clock (SCK1), serial output (SO1) and serial input

(SI1).

(1) Register setting

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is set by serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1).

CSIM1 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM1 to 00H.

Note If the external clock input has been selected by setting CSIM11 to 0, set bit 1 (BUSY1) and bit 2 (STRB)

of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) to 0, 0.

Remark ×: don’t care

6<5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM1 CSIE1 DIR ATE 0 0 0

CSIM11 CSIM10

CSIM11

Serial interface channel 1 clock selection

External clock input to SCK1 pin

Note

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

1 Clock specified by bits 4 to 7 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIM10

FF68H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

ATE

Serial interface channel 1 operating mode selection

3-wire serial I/O mode

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function

DIR

Start bit

MSB

LSB

SO1 pin function

SI1/P20 (Input)

SO1 pin function

SO1 (CMOS output)

396

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Communication operation

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for data transmission/reception in 8-bit units. Data transmission/reception

is carried out bit-wise in synchronization with the serial clock.

Shift operations of serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) are carried out at the falling edge of the serial clock SCK1.

The transmit data is held in the SO1 latch and is output from the SO1 pin. The receive data input to the SI1

pin is latched into SIO1 at the rising edge of SCK1.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, the SIO1 operation stops automatically and the interrupt request flag

(CSIIF1) is set.

Figure 18-6. 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing

Caution The SO1 pin becomes low level by writing SIO1.

SI1

SCK1

12345678

DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0

SO1

DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0

CSIIF1

Transfer start at the falling edge of SCK1

End of transfer

SIO1 write

Notes 1. Can be used freely as a port function.

2. Can be used as P20 (CMOS input/output) when only transmission is performed (clear bit 7 (RE)

of ADTC to 0).

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

Operation

enable

SCK1

(input)

CSIE1

CSIM11

P20 PM21 P21 PM22

Note 2

Shift register 1

operation

Serial clock counter

operation control

SI1/P20 pin

function

SCK1/P22

pin function

0×001×

Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1

Count

operation

SI1

(input)

××××× Operation

stop

Clear P20

(CMOS I/O)

P22

(CMOS I/O)

PM20

SO1/P21 pin

function

SO1 (CMOS

output)

P21

(CMOS I/O)

SCK1

(CMOS

output)

Note 1

Note 2Note 2

P22

397

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) MSB/LSB switching as the start bit

In 3-wire serial I/O mode, it is possible to select transfer to start from the MSB or LSB.

Figure 18-7 shows the configuration of serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) and the internal bus. As shown in the

figure, the MSB/LSB can be read or written in reverse form.

MSB/LSB switching as the start bit can be specified by bit 6 (DIR) of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1).

Figure 18-7. Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order

Start bit switching is realized by switching the bit order for data write to SIO1. The SIO1 shift order remains

unchanged.

Thus, switching between MSB-first and LSB-first must be performed before writing data to the shift register.

(4) Transfer start

Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) when the following two

conditions are satisfied.

•Serial interface channel 1 operation control bit (CSIE1) = 1

•Internal serial clock is stopped or SCK1 is a high level after 8-bit serial transfer.

Caution If CSIE1 is set to 1 after data write to SIO1, transfer does not start.

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, serial transfer automatically stops and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF1)

is set.

Internal bus

LSB-first

MSB-first Read/write gate

SI1 Shift register 1 (SIO1)

Read/write gate

SO1

SCK1

SO1 latch

398

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

18.4.3 3-wire serial I/O mode operation with automatic transmit/receive function

This 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for transmission/reception of a maximum of 32 bytes of data without the use

of software. Once transfer is started, the set number of bytes of the data prestored in the RAM can be transmitted,

and the set number of bytes of data can be received and stored in the RAM.

Handshake signals (STB and BUSY) are supported by hardware to transmit/receive data continuously. An OSD

(On Screen Display) LSI and peripheral LSI including an LCD controller/driver can thus be connected without difficulty.

(1) Register setting

The 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function is set by serial operating mode register

1 (CSIM1), the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) and the automatic data transmit/

receive interval specification register (ADTI).

(a) Serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1)

CSIM1 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM1 to 00H.

399

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Notes 1. If the external clock input has been selected by clearing CSIM11 to 0, clear bit 1 (BUSY 1)

and bit 2 (STRB) of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) to 0, 0.

2. Can be used freely as a port function.

3. Can be used as P20 (CMOS input/output) when only transmission is performed (clear bit 7

(RE) of ADTC to 0).

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

Operation

enable

6<5>43210<7>

Symbol

CSIM1 CSIE1 DIR ATE 0 0 0

CSIM11 CSIM10

CSIM11

Serial interface channel 1 clock selection

External clock input to SCK1 pin

Note 1

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) output

SCK1

(input)

1 Clock specified by bits 4 to 7 of timer clock select register 3 (TCL3)

CSIE1

CSIM10

FF68H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

CSIM11

P20 PM21 P21 PM22

Note 3

Shift register 1

operation

Serial clock counter

operation control

SI1/P20 pin

function

SCK1/P22

pin function

0×001×

Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2

Count

operation

SI1

(input)

××××× Operation

stop

Clear P20

(CMOS I/O)

P22

(CMOS I/O)

ATE

Serial interface channel 1 operating mode selection

3-wire serial I/O mode

DIR

Start bit

MSB

LSB

SI1 pin function

SI1/P20 (input)

SO1 pin function

SO1 (CMOS output)

PM20

SO1/P21 pin

function

SO1 (CMOS

output)

P21

(CMOS I/O)

SCK1

(CMOS

output)

Note 2

Note 3Note 3

P22

1 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function

400

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

ADTC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ADTC to 00H.

Notes 1. Bits 3 and 4 (TRF and ERR) are read-only bits.

2. The termination of automatic transmission/reception should be judged by using TRF, not CSIIF1

(interrupt request flag).

Caution When an external clock input is selected by clearing bit 1 (CSIM11) of serial operating

mode register 1 (CSIM1) to 0, clear STRB and BUSY1 of ADTC to 0, 0 (handshake control

cannot be executed when an external clock is input).

Remark ×: don’t care

<6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0><7>

Symbol

ADTC RE ARLD ERCE ERR TRF STRB BUSY1 BUSY0 FF69H 00H

R/W

Note 1

Address After reset R/W

BUSY1

Busy input control

Not using busy input

Busy input enabled (active high)

Busy input enabled (active low)

BUSY0

STRB

Strobe output control

Strobe output disabled

Strobe output enabled

TRF

Status of automatic transmit/receive function

Note 2

Detection of termination of automatic transmission/reception

(This bit is set to 0 upon suspension of automatic

transmission/reception or when ARLD = 0.)

During automatic transmission/reception

(This bit is set to 1 when data is written to SIO1.)

R/W

RERR

Error detection of automatic transmit/receive function

No error

(This bit is set to 0 when data is written to SIO1.)

Error occurred

R/W ARLD

Operating mode selection of automatic transmit/receive

function

One-shot mode

Repetitive one-shot mode

R/W RE

Receive control of automatic transmit/receive function

Receive disabled

Receive enabled

R/W ERCE

Error check control of automatic transmit/receive function

Error check disabled

Error check enabled (only when BUSY1 = 1)

401

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

This register sets the automatic data transmit/receive function data transfer interval.

ADTI is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ADTI to 00H.

Notes 1. The interval is dependent only on the CPU processing.

2. The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals

are found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a

minimum which is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum

interval time is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + + , Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write to ADTI during operation of the automatic data transmit/receive function.

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/

reception using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

fXX

fXX fSCK

28 0.5

fXX fSCK

36 1.5

fXX

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 5.0 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note 2

18.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

31.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

44.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

56.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

69.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

82.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

95.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

108.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

120.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

133.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

146.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

159.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

172.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

184.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

197.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

210.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note 2

20.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

32.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

45.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

58.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

71.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

84.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

96.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

109.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

122.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

135.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

148.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

160.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

173.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

186.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

199.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

212.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI7

Data transfer interval control

No control of interval by ADTI

Note 1

Control of interval by ADTI (ADTI0 to ADTI4)

ADTI0

402

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Note The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals

are found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a minimum

which is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum interval time

is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + +

Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write to ADTI during operation of the automatic data transmit/receive function.

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/

reception using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

fXX

28 0.5

fXX fSCK

36 1.5

fXX fSCK

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 5.0 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note

223.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

236.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

248.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

261.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

274.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

287.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

300.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

312.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

325.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

338.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

351.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

364.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

376.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

389.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

402.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

415.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note

224.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

237.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

250.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

263.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

276.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

288.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

301.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

314.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

327.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

340.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

352.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

365.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

378.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

391.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

404.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

416.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI0

403

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Notes 1. The interval is dependent only on the CPU processing.

2. The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals

are found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a

minimum which is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum

interval time is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + +

Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write to ADTI during operation of the automatic data transmit/receive function.

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/

reception using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

fXX

28 0.5

fXX fSCK

36 1.5

fXX fSCK

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 2.5 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note 2

36.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

62.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

88.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

113.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

139.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

164.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

190.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

216.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

241.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

267.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

292.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

318.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

344.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

369.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

395.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

420.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note 2

40.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

91.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

116.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

142.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

168.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

193.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

219.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

244.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

270.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

296.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

321.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

347.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

372.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

398.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

424.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI7

Data transfer interval control

No control of interval by ADT I

Note 1

Control of interval by ADTI (ADTI0 to ADTI4)

ADTI0

404

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Note The data transfer interval includes an error. The data transfer minimum and maximum intervals

are found from the following expressions (n: Value set in ADTI0 to ADTI4). However, if a minimum

which is calculated by the following expression is smaller than 2/fSCK, the minimum interval time

is 2/fSCK.

Minimum = (n + 1) × + +

Maximum = (n + 1) × + +

Cautions 1. Do not write to ADTI during operation of the automatic data transmit/receive function.

2. Be sure to clear bits 5 and 6 to 0.

3. When controlling the data transfer interval by means of automatic transmission/

reception using ADTI, busy control (see 18.4.3 (4) (a) Busy control option) is invalid.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. fSCK: Serial clock frequency

fXX

28 0.5

fXX fSCK

36 1.5

fXX fSCK

Data transfer interval specification (f

= 2.5 MHz operation)

ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1

Minimum

Note

446.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

472.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

497.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

523.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

548.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

574.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

600.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

625.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

651.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

676.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

702.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

728.0

s + 0.5/f

SCK

753.6

s + 0.5/f

SCK

779.2

s + 0.5/f

SCK

804.8

s + 0.5/f

SCK

830.4

s + 0.5/f

SCK

Maximum

Note

449.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

475.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

500.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

526.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

552.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

577.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

603.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

628.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

654.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

680.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

705.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

731.2

s + 1.5/f

SCK

756.8

s + 1.5/f

SCK

782.4

s + 1.5/f

SCK

808.0

s + 1.5/f

SCK

833.6

s + 1.5/f

SCK

65432107

Symbol

ADTI ADTI7 0 0 ADTI4 ADTI3 ADTI2 ADTI1 ADTI0 FF6BH 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

ADTI0

405

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Automatic transmit/receive data setting

(a) Transmit data setting

<1> Write transmit data from the least significant address FAC0H of buffer RAM (up to FADFH at

maximum). The transmit data should be in order from higher address to lower address.

<2> Set the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of transmit data bytes to the automatic

data transmit/receive address pointer (ADTP).

(b) Automatic transmit/receive mode setting

<1> Set CSIE1 and ATE of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) to 1.

<2> Set RE of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) to 1.

<3> Set a data transmit/receive interval in the automatic data transmit/receive interval specification

<4> Write any value to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) (transfer start trigger).

Caution Writing any value to SIO1 orders the start of the automatic transmit/receive operation;

the written value has no meaning.

The following operations are automatically carried out when (a) and (b) are carried out.

•After the buffer RAM data specified by ADTP is transferred to SIO1, transmission is carried out (start

of automatic transmission/reception).

•The received data is written to the buffer RAM address specified by ADTP.

•ADTP is decremented and the next data transmission/reception is carried out. Data transmission/

reception continues until the ADTP decremental output becomes 00H and the data at address FAC0H

is output (end of automatic transmission/reception).

•When automatic transmission/reception is terminated, TRF is cleared to 0.

406

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Communication operation

(a) Basic transmission/reception mode

This transmission/reception mode is the same as the 3-wire serial I/O mode in which the specified number

of data are transmitted/received in 8-bit units.

Serial transfer is started when any data is written to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) while bit 7 (CSIE1)

of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is set to 1.

When the final byte has been sent, an interrupt request flag (CSIIF1) is set. However, judge the

termination of auto transmit and receive not by CSIIF1, but by bit 3 (TRF) of the automatic data transmit/

receive control register (ADTC).

If busy control and strobe control are not executed, the P23/STB/TxD1 and P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins can

be used as normal I/O ports.

Figure 18-8 shows the basic transmission/reception mode operation timing, and Figure 18-9 shows the

operation flowchart. Figure 18-10 shows the operation of the internal buffer RAM when 6 bytes of data

are transmitted or received.

Figure 18-8. Basic Transmission/Reception Mode Operation Timing

Cautions 1. Because, in the basic transmission/reception mode, the automatic transmit/receive

function writes/reads data to/from the internal buffer RAM after 1-byte transmission/

reception, an interval is inserted until the next transmission/reception. As the buffer

RAM write/read is performed at the same time as CPU processing, the maximum

interval is dependent upon the CPU processing and the value of the automatic data

transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI) (see (5) Automatic data trans-

mit/receive interval).

2. When TRF is cleared, the SO1 pin becomes low level.

Remark CSIIF1: Interrupt request flag

TRF: Bit 3 of automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

SCK1

SO1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

CSIIF1

TRF

SI1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Interval

407

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-9. Basic Transmission/Reception Mode Flowchart

ADTP: Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer

ADTI: Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register

SIO1: Serial I/O shift register 1

TRF: Bit 3 of automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

Start

Write transmit data

in internal buffer RAM

Set ADTP to the value (pointer

value) obtained by subtracting 1

from the number of transmit

data bytes

Set the transmission/reception

operation interval time in ADTI

Write any data to SIO1

(Start trigger)

Write transmit data from

internal buffer RAM to SIO1

Transmission/reception

operation

Write receive data from

SIO1 to internal buffer RAM

Pointer value = 0 No

TRF = 0 No

End

Yes

Decrement pointer value

Software execution

Hardware execution

Software execution

408

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

In 6-byte transmission/reception (ARLD = 0, RE = 1) in basic transmit/receive mode, the internal buffer RAM

operates as follows.

(i) Before transmission/reception (see Figure 18-10 (a))

After any data has been written to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) (start trigger: this data is not

transferred), transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the internal buffer RAM to SIO1. When

transmission of the first byte is completed, receive data 1 (R1) is transferred from SIO1 to the buffer

RAM, and the automatic data transmit/receive address pointer (ADTP) is decremented. Then transmit

data 2 (T2) is transferred from the internal buffer RAM to SIO1.

(ii) 4th byte transmission/reception point (see Figure 18-10 (b))

Transmission/reception of the third byte is completed, and transmit data 4 (T4) is transferred from

the internal buffer RAM to SIO1. When transmission of the fourth byte is completed, receive data

4 (R4) is transferred from SIO1 to the internal buffer RAM, and ADTP is decremented.

(iii) Completion of transmission/reception (see Figure 18-10 (c))

When transmission of the sixth byte is completed, receive data 6 (R6) is transferred from SIO1 to

the internal buffer RAM, and the interrupt request flag (CSIIF1) is set (INTCSI1 generation).

Figure 18-10. Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission/Reception

(in Basic Transmit/Receive Mode) (1/2)

(a) Before transmission/reception

Transmit data 1 (T1)

Transmit data 2 (T2)

Transmit data 3 (T3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

Receive data 1 (R1) SIO1

0CSIIF1

5ADTP

–1

409

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-10. Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission/Reception

(in Basic Transmit/Receive Mode) (2/2)

(b) 4th byte transmission/reception

Receive data 1 (R1)

Receive data 2 (R2)

Receive data 3 (R3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

Receive data 4 (R4) SIO1

0CSIIF1

2ADTP

–1

Receive data 1 (R1)

Receive data 2 (R2)

Receive data 3 (R3)

Receive data 4 (R4)

Receive data 5 (R5)

Receive data 6 (R6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

SIO1

1CSIIF1

0ADTP

410

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Basic transmission mode

In this mode, 8-bit unit data is transmitted the specified number of times.

Serial transfer is started when any data is written to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) while bit 7 (CSIE1)

of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is set to 1.

When the final byte has been sent, an interrupt request flag (CSIIF1) is set. However, judge the termination

of automatic transmit and receive not by CSIIF1, but by bit 3 (TRF) of the automatic data transmit/receive

control register (ADTC).

If a receive operation, busy control and strobe control are not executed, the P20/SI1, P23/STB/TxD1 and

P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins can be used as normal I/O ports.

Figure 18-11 shows the basic transmission mode operation timing, and Figure 18-12 shows the operation

flowchart. Figure 18-13 shows the operation of the internal buffer RAM when 6 bytes of data are

transmitted or received.

Figure 18-11. Basic Transmission Mode Operation Timing

Cautions 1. Because, in the basic transmission mode, the automatic transmit/receive function

reads data from the internal buffer RAM after 1-byte transmission, an interval is

inserted until the next transmission. As buffer RAM read is performed at the same

time as CPU processing, the maximum interval is dependent upon the CPU process-

ing and the value of the automatic data transmit/receive interval specification

2. When TRF is cleared, the SO1 pin becomes low level.

Remark CSIIF1: Interrupt request flag

TRF: Bit 3 of automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

SCK1

SO1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

CSIIF1

TRF

Interval

411

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-12. Basic Transmission Mode Flowchart

ADTP: Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer

ADTI: Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register

SIO1: Serial I/O shift register 1

TRF: Bit 3 of automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

Start

Write transmit data

in internal buffer RAM

Set ADTP to the value (pointer

value) obtained by subtracting 1

from the number of transmit

data bytes

Set the transmission/reception

operation interval time in ADTI

Write any data to SIO1

(Start trigger)

Write transmit data from

internal buffer RAM to SIO1

Transmit operation

Pointer value = 0 No

TRF = 0 No

End

Yes

Decrement pointer value

Software execution

Hardware execution

Software execution

412

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

In 6-byte transmission (ARLD = 0, RE = 0) in basic transmit mode, the internal buffer RAM operates as follows.

(i) Before transmission (see Figure 18-13 (a).)

After any data has been written to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) (start trigger: this data is not

transferred), transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the internal buffer RAM to SIO1. When

transmission of the first byte is completed, the automatic data transmit/receive address pointer

(ADTP) is decremented. Then transmit data 2 (T2) is transferred from the internal buffer RAM to SIO1.

(ii) 4th byte transmission point (see Figure 18-13 (b).)

Transmission of the third byte is completed, and transmit data 4 (T4) is transferred from the internal

buffer RAM to SIO1. When transmission of the fourth byte is completed, ADTP is decremented.

(iii) Completion of transmission (see Figure 18-13 (c).)

When transmission of the sixth byte is completed, the interrupt request flag (CSIIF1) is set (INTCSI1

generation).

Figure 18-13. Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission

(in Basic Transmit Mode) (1/2)

(a) Before transmission

Transmit data 1 (T1)

Transmit data 2 (T2)

Transmit data 3 (T3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

SIO1

0CSIIF1

5ADTP

–1

413

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-13. Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission

(in Basic Transmit Mode) (2/2)

(b) 4th byte transmission point

Transmit data 1 (T1)

Transmit data 2 (T2)

Transmit data 3 (T3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

SIO1

0CSIIF1

2ADTP

–1

Transmit data 1 (T1)

Transmit data 2 (T2)

Transmit data 3 (T3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

SIO1

1CSIIF1

0ADTP

414

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

In this mode, data stored in the internal buffer RAM is transmitted repeatedly.

Serial transmission is started by writing any data to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) when bit 7 (CSIE1)

of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is set to 1.

Unlike the basic transmission mode, after the final byte (data at address FAC0H) has been transmitted,

the interrupt request flag (CSIIF1) is not set, the value at the time when transmission was started is set

in the automatic data transmit/receive address pointer (ADTP) again, and the internal buffer RAM contents

are transmitted again.

When a reception operation, busy control and strobe control are not performed, the P20/SI1, P23/STB/

TxD1 and P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins can be used as normal I/O ports.

The repeat transmission mode operation timing is shown in Figure 18-14, and the operation flowchart in

Figure 18-15. Figure 18-16 shows the operation of the internal buffer RAM when 6 bytes of data are

transmitted in the repeat transmission mode.

Figure 18-14. Repeat Transmission Mode Operation Timing

Caution Because, in the repeat transmission mode, a read is performed on the buffer RAM after

the transmission of one byte, an interval is inserted in the period up to the next

transmission. As buffer RAM read is performed at the same time as CPU processing,

the maximum interval is dependent upon the CPU operation and the value of the

automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI) (see (5) Automatic

data transmit/receive interval).

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Interval Interval

D7 D6 D5

SCK1

SO1

415

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-15. Repeat Transmission Mode Flowchart

ADTP: Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer

ADTI: Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register

SIO1: Serial I/O shift register 1

Start

Write transmit data

in internal buffer RAM

Set ADTP to the value (pointer

value) obtained by subtracting 1

from the number of transmit

data bytes

Set the transmission/reception

operation interval time in ADTI

Write any data to SIO1

(start trigger)

Write transmit data from

internal buffer RAM to SIO1

Transmit operation

Pointer value = 0 No

Yes

Decrement pointer value

Software execution

Hardware execution

Reset ADTP

416

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

In 6-byte transmission (ARLD = 1, RE = 0) in repeat transmit mode, the internal buffer RAM operates as follows.

(i) Before transmission (see Figure 18-16 (a).)

After any data has been written to serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) (start trigger: this data is not

transferred), transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the internal buffer RAM to SIO1. When

transmission of the first byte is completed, the automatic data transmit/receive address pointer

(ADTP) is decremented. Then transmit data 2 (T2) is transferred from the internal buffer RAM to SIO1.

(ii) Upon completion of transmission of 6 bytes (see Figure 18-16 (b).)

When transmission of the sixth byte is completed, the interrupt request flag (CSIIF1) is not set.

The internal pointer value is reset in ADTP.

(iii) 7th byte transmission point (see Figure 18-16 (c).)

Transmit data 1 (T1) is transferred from the internal buffer RAM to SIO1 again. When transmission

of the first byte is completed, ADTP is decremented. Then transmit data 2 (T2) is transferred from

the internal buffer RAM to SIO1.

Figure 18-16. Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission

(in Repeat Transmit Mode) (1/2)

(a) Before transmission

Transmit data 1 (T1)

Transmit data 2 (T2)

Transmit data 3 (T3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

SIO1

0CSIIF1

5ADTP

–1

417

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-16. Internal Buffer RAM Operation in 6-Byte Transmission

(in Repeat Transmit Mode) (2/2)

(b) Upon completion of transmission of 6 bytes

Transmit data 1 (T1)

Transmit data 2 (T2)

Transmit data 3 (T3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

SIO1

0CSIIF1

0ADTP

Transmit data 1 (T1)

Transmit data 2 (T2)

Transmit data 3 (T3)

Transmit data 4 (T4)

Transmit data 5 (T5)

Transmit data 6 (T6)

FADFH

FAC5H

FAC0H

SIO1

0CSIIF1

5ADTP

–1

418

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(d) Automatic transmission/reception suspending and restart

Automatic transmission/reception can be temporarily suspended by clearing bit 7 (CSIE1) of serial

operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) to 0.

If during 8-bit data transfer, the transmission/reception is not suspended if bit 7 (CSIE1) is cleared to 0.

It is suspended upon completion of 8-bit data transfer.

When suspended, bit 3 (TRF) of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) is cleared

to 0 after transfer of the 8th bit, and all the port pins used as serial interface alternate-function pins (P20/

SI1, P21/SO1, P22/SCK1, P23/STB/TxD1 and P24/BUSY/RxD1) are set to the port mode.

To restart automatic transmission/reception, set CSIE1 to 1 and write the desired value to serial I/O shift

Cautions 1. If the HALT instruction is executed during automatic transmission/reception, transfer

is suspended and the HALT mode is set, even if 8-bit data transfer is in progress.

When the HALT mode is cleared, automatic transmission/reception is restarted from

the suspended point.

2. When suspending automatic transmission/reception, do not change the operating

mode to 3-wire serial I/O mode while TRF = 1.

Figure 18-17. Automatic Transmission/Reception Suspension and Restart

CSIE1: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1)

SCK1

SO1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

SI1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Restart command

CSIE1 = 1, write to SIO1

Suspend

CSIE1 = 0 (suspended command)

419

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Synchronization control

Busy control and strobe control are functions to synchronize transmission/reception between the master

device and a slave device.

By using these functions, a shift in bits being transmitted or received can be detected.

(a) Busy control option

Busy control is a function to keep the serial transmission/reception by the master device waiting while

the busy signal output by a slave device to the master is active.

When using this busy control option, the following conditions must be satisfied.

•Bit 5 (ATE) of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is set to 1.

•Bit 1 (BUSY1) of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) is set to 1.

Figure 18-18 shows the system configuration of the master device and a slave device when the busy

control option is used.

Figure 18-18. System Configuration When Busy Control Option Is Used

SCK1

SO1

SI1

SCK1

SO1

SI1

BUSY

Master device

( PD780058, 780058Y Subseries) Slave device

The master device inputs the busy signal output by the slave device to the BUSY/P24 pin. The master

device samples the input busy signal in synchronization with the falling edge of the serial clock. Even

if the busy signal becomes active while 8-bit data is being transmitted or received, transmission/reception

by the master is not kept waiting. If the busy signal is active at the rising edge of the serial clock 2 clocks

after completion of transmission/reception of the 8-bit data, the busy input becomes valid. After that, the

master transmission/reception is kept waiting while the busy signal is active.

The active level of the busy signal is set by bit 0 (BUSY0) of ADTC.

BUSY0 = 0: Active high

BUSY0 = 1: Active low

When using the busy control option, select the internal clock as the serial clock. Control with the busy

signal cannot be implemented with an external clock.

Figure 18-19 shows the operation timing when the busy control option is used.

Caution Busy control cannot be used simultaneously with the interval time control function of

the automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI). If used, busy

control is invalid.

420

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-19. Operation Timing When Busy Control Option Is Used (When BUSY0 = 0)

SCK1

SO1

SI1

CSIIF1

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

BUSY

TRF

Clears busy input

Busy input is valid

Wait

Caution If TRF is cleared, the SO1 pin goes low.

Remark CSIIF1: Interrupt request flag

TRF: Bit 3 of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

When the busy signal becomes inactive, waiting is released. If the sampled busy signal is inactive,

transmission/reception of the next 8-bit data is started at the falling edge of the next clock.

Because the busy signal is asynchronous to the serial clock, it takes up to 1 clock until the busy signal

is sampled, even if made inactive by the slave. It takes 0.5 clock until data transfer is started after the

busy signal was sampled.

To accurately release waiting, the slave must keep the busy signal inactive at least for the duration of

1.5 clocks.

Figure 18-20 shows the timing of the busy signal and wait release. This figure shows an example where

the busy signal is active as soon as transmission/reception has been started.

421

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-20. Busy Signal and Wait Release (When BUSY0 = 0)

(b) Busy & strobe control option

Strobe control is a function to synchronize data transmission/reception between the master and slave

devices. The master device outputs the strobe signal from the STB/P23 pin when 8-bit transmission/

reception has been completed. By this signal, the slave device can determine the timing of the end of

data transmission. Therefore, synchronization is established even if a bit shift occurs because noise is

superimposed on the serial clock, and transmission of the next byte is not affected by the bit shift.

To use the strobe control option, the following conditions must be satisfied.

•Bit 5 (ATE) of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is set to 1.

•Bit 2 (STRB) of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) is set to 1.

Usually, the busy control and strobe control options are simultaneously used as handshake signals. In

this case, the strobe signal is output from the STB/P23 pin, the BUSY/P24 pin is sampled, and

transmission/reception can be kept waiting while the busy signal is input.

When the strobe control option is not used, the P23/STB pin can be used as a normal I/O port pin.

Figure 18-21 shows the operation timing when the busy & strobe control options are used.

When the strobe control option is used, the interrupt request flag (CSIIF1) that is set on completion of

transmission/reception is set after the strobe signal is output.

SCK1

SO1

SI1

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

BUSY

(Active high)

1.5 clocks (min.)

Busy input released

Busy input valid

Wait

If made inactive

immediately after

sampled

422

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 18-21. Operation Timing When Busy & Strobe Control Options Are Used (When BUSY0 = 0)

STB

SCK1

SO1

SI1

CSIIF1

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

BUSY

TRF

Busy input released

Busy input valid

Caution When TRF is cleared, the SO1 pin goes low.

Remark CSIIF1: Interrupt request flag

TRF: Bit 3 of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

423

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

During automatic transmission/reception, a bit shift of the serial clock of the slave device may occur

because noise is superimposed on the serial clock signal output by the master device. Unless the strobe

control option is used at this time, the bit shift affects transmission of the next byte. In this case, the master

can detect the bit shift by checking the busy signal during transmission by using the busy control option.

A bit shift is detected by using the busy signal as follows.

The slave outputs the busy signal after the rising of the eighth serial clock during data transmission/

reception (to not keep transmission/reception waiting by the busy signal at this time, make the busy signal

inactive within 2 clocks).

The master samples the busy signal in synchronization with the falling edge of the leading side of the

serial clock. If a bit shift does not occur, all the eight serial clocks that have been sampled are inactive.

If the sampled serial clocks are active, it is assumed that a bit shift has occurred, and error processing

is executed (by setting bit 4 (ERR) of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) to 1).

Figure 18-22 shows the operation timing of the bit shift detection function by the busy signal.

Figure 18-22. Operation Timing of Bit Shift Detection Function by Busy Signal (When BUSY0 = 1)

SCK1

(slave)

SO1

SI1

D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

BUSY

CSIIF1

CSIE1

ERR

Busy not detected Error interrupt request

generated

Error detected

Bit shift due to noise

SCK1

(master)

CSIIF1: Interrupt request flag

CSIE1: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1)

ERR: Bit 4 of the automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

424

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(5) Automatic transmit/receive interval time

When using the automatic transmit/receive function, the read/write operations from/to the internal buffer RAM

are performed after transmitting/receiving one byte. Therefore, an interval is inserted before the next transmit/

receive operation.

Since the read/write operations from/to the buffer RAM are performed in parallel with the CPU processing when

using the automatic transmit/receive function with the internal clock, the interval depends on the value which

is set in the automatic transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI) and the CPU processing at the

rising edge of the eighth serial clock. Whether it depends on the ADTI or not can be selected by setting bit

7 of ADTI (ADTI7). When it is cleared to 0, the interval depends only on the CPU processing. When it is set

to 1, the interval depends on the contents of ADTI or the CPU processing, whichever is greater.

When the automatic transmit/receive function is used with an external clock, it must be selected so that the

interval may be longer than the value indicated by paragraph (b).

Figure 18-23. Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Time

CSIIF1: Interrupt request flag

SCK1

SO1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

CSIIF1

SI1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Interval

425

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(a) When the automatic transmit/receive function is used with the internal clock

If bit 1 (CSIM11) of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is set to 1, the internal clock operates.

If the automatic transmit/receive function is operated with the internal clock, the interval timing according

to CPU processing is as follows.

When bit 7 (ADTI7) of the automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI) is cleared

to 0, the interval depends on the CPU processing. When ADTI7 is set to 1, it depends on the contents

of ADTI or the CPU processing, whichever is greater.

See Figure 18-5 Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Interval Specification Register Format for the

intervals set by ADTI.

Table 18-2. Interval Timing According to CPU Processing (When Internal Clock Is Operating)

CPU Processing Interval Time

When using multiplication instruction Max. (2.5TSCK, 13TCPU)

When using division instruction Max. (2.5TSCK, 20TCPU)

External access 1 wait mode Max. (2.5TSCK, 9TCPU)

Other than above Max. (2.5TSCK, 7TCPU)

TSCK:1/fSCK

fSCK: Serial clock frequency

TCPU: 1/fCPU

fCPU: CPU clock (set by bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) of the processor clock control register

(PCC) and bit 0 (MCS) of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS))

MAX. (a, b): a or b, whichever is greater

Figure 18-24. Operation Timing with Automatic Data Transmit/Receive Function Performed Using

Internal Clock

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

fCPU: CPU clock (set by bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) of the processor clock control register (PCC))

TCPU: 1/fCPU

TSCK:1/fSCK

fSCK: Serial clock frequency

fCPU

SCK1

SO1

SI1

TCPU

TSCK

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0

Interval

426

CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 1

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) When using automatic transmit/receive function with external clock

An external clock is used when bit 1 (CSIM11) of serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) is cleared to

To use the automatic transmit/receive function with an external clock, the external clock must be input

so that the interval time is as follows.

Table 18-3. Interval Time According to CPU Processing (with External Clock)

CPU Processing Interval Time

When using multiplication instruction 13TCPU or more

When using division instruction 20TCPU or more

External access 1 wait mode 9TCPU or more

Other than above 7TCPU or more

TCPU: 1/fCPU

fCPU: CPU clock (set by the bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) of the processor clock control register (PCC)

and bit 0 (MCS) of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS))

427User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

19.1 Functions of Serial Interface Channel 2

Serial interface channel 2 has the following three modes.

• Operation stop mode

• Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode (with time-division transfer function)

• 3-wire serial I/O mode

(1) Operation stop mode

This mode is used when serial transfer is not carried out to reduce power consumption.

(2) Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode (with time-division transfer function)

In this mode, one byte of data is transmitted/received following the start bit, and full-duplex operation is

possible.

A dedicated UART baud rate generator is incorporated, allowing communication over a wide range of baud

rates. In addition, the baud rate can be defined by dividing the clock input to the ASCK pin.

The MIDI standard baud rate (31.25 kbps) can be used by employing the dedicated UART baud rate generator.

Two sets of data I/O pins (RxD and TxD) are provided, and the pin to be used can be selected by software

(time-division transfer function). However, only one set of pins can be used at one time.

Cautions 1. If it is not necessary to change the data I/O pin, use of the RxD0/SI2/P70 and TxD0/SO2/

P71 pins is recommended. If only port 2 (RxD1/BUSY/P24 and TxD1/STB/P23) is used

as data I/O pins, the function of port 7 is limited.

2. When using the busy control option or busy & strobe control option in the 3-wire serial

I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function of serial interface channel 1, the RxD1/

BUSY/P24 and TxD1/STB/P23 pins cannot be used as data I/O pins.

(3) 3-wire serial I/O mode (MSB-first/LSB-first switchable)

In this mode, 8-bit data transfer is performed using three lines: the serial clock (SCK2), and serial data lines

(SI2, SO2).

In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, simultaneous transmission and reception is possible, increasing the data transfer

processing speed.

Either the MSB or LSB can be specified as the start bit for an 8-bit data serial transfer, allowing connection

to devices using either as the start bit.

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is useful for connection to peripheral I/Os and display controllers, etc., which

incorporate a conventional clocked serial interface, such as the 75X/XL Series, 78K Series, 17K Series, etc.

428

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.2 Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 2

Serial interface channel 2 consists of the following hardware.

Table 19-1. Configuration of Serial Interface Channel 2

Item Configuration

Registers Transmit shift register (TXS)

Receive shift register (RXS)

Receive buffer register (RXB)

Control registers Serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2)

Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)

Asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS)

Baud rate generator control register (BRGC)

Serial interface pin select register (SIPS)

429

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 19-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface Channel 2

Note See Figure 19-2 for the baud rate generator configuration.

Internal bus

Asynchronous

serial interface

mode register

Asynchronous

serial interface

status register

Receive buffer

(RXB/SIO2)

Direction

controller

Receive shift

Reception

controller INTSR/INTCSI2

CSIE2

CSIM

CSCK

INTSER

SCK Output

controller

Baud rate generator f

to f

Internal bus

CSCK

SCK

INTST

Baud rate generator

control register

Note

Serial operating

mode register 2

PE FE OVE

Transmission

controller

ISRM

ASCK/

SCK2/P72

PM72

Direction

controller

Transmit shift

(TXS/SIO2)

RXE PS1 PS0 CL SL ISRMTXE SCK

4 4

CSIE2

TXE

RXE

MDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0 TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0

TxD0/SO2/P71

PM71

TxD1/STB/P23

PM23

Selector

RxD0/SI2/P70

RxD1/BUSY/P24

SIPS21 SIPS20

Serial interface pin

select register

430

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 19-2. Baud Rate Generator Block Diagram

TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0

Internal bus

MDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0

Baud rate generator

control register

TXE

CSIE2

5-bit

counter

Selector

Decoder

1/2

Selector

Transmit

clock

1/2

Selector

Receive

clock

Match

MDL0 to MDL3

5-bit

counter

RXE

Start bit detection

Selector fXX to fXX/210

TPS0 to TPS3

SCK

CSCK

ASCK/SCK2/P72

Start bit

sampling clock

431

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Transmit shift register (TXS)

This register is used to set the transmit data. The data written in TXS is transmitted as serial data.

If the data length is specified as 7 bits, bits 0 to 6 of the data written in TXS are transferred as transmit data.

Writing data to TXS starts the transmit operation.

TXS is written with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. It cannot be read.

RESET input sets TXS to FFH.

Caution TXS must not be written during a transmit operation. TXS and the receive buffer register

(RXB) are allocated to the same address, and when a read is performed, the value of RXB

is read.

(2) Receive shift register (RXS)

This register is used to convert serial data input to the RxD0 (RxD1) pin into parallel data. When one byte

of data is received, the receive data is transferred to the receive buffer register (RXB).

RXS cannot be directly manipulated by a program.

(3) Receive buffer register (RXB)

This register holds receive data. Each time one byte of data is received, new receive data is transferred from

the receive shift register (RXS).

If the data length is specified as 7 bits, the receive data is transferred to bits 0 to 6 of RXB, and the MSB of

RXB is always cleared to 0.

RXB is read with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. It cannot be written to.

RESET input sets RXB to FFH.

Caution RXB and the transmit shift register (TXS) are allocated to the same address, and when a write

is performed, the value is written to TXS.

(4) Transmission controller

This circuit performs transmit operation control such as the addition of a start bit, parity bit, and stop bit to

data written in the transmit shift register (TXS) in accordance with the contents set in the asynchronous serial

interface mode register (ASIM).

(5) Reception controller

This circuit controls receive operations in accordance with the contents set in the asynchronous serial interface

mode register (ASIM). It performs error checks for parity errors, etc., during a receive operation, and if an

error is detected, sets a value in the asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS) in accordance with

the error contents.

432

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.3 Control Registers of Serial Interface Channel 2

Serial interface channel 2 is controlled by the following five registers.

•Serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2)

•Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)

•Asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS)

•Baud rate generator control register (BRGC)

•Serial interface pin select register (SIPS)

(1) Serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2)

This register is set when serial interface channel 2 is used in the 3-wire serial I/O mode.

CSIM2 is set with a 1-bit or an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets CSIM2 to 00H.

Figure 19-3. Format of Serial Operating Mode Register 2

Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 0 and 3 to 6 to 0.

2. When UART mode is selected, CSIM2 should be cleared to 00H.

6543210<7>

Symbol

CSIM2 CSIE2 0 0 0 0 CSIM

22 CSCK 0 FF72H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

CSCK

Clock selection in 3-wire serial I/O mode

Input clock from off-chip to SCK2 pin

Dedicated baud rate generator output

CSIM22

First bit specification

MSB

LSB

CSIE2

Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

433

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Note When SCK is set to 1 and the baud rate generator output is selected, the ASCK pin can be used as

an I/O port.

Cautions 1. When the 3-wire serial I/O mode is selected, ASIM should be cleared to 00H.

2. The serial transmit/receive operation must be stopped before changing the operating

mode.

(2) Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)

This register is set when serial interface channel 2 is used in the asynchronous serial interface mode.

ASIM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ASIM to 00H.

Figure 19-4. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Mode Register

<6>543210<7>

Symbol

ASIM TXE RXE PS1 PS0 CL SL ISRM SCK FF70H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

SCK

Clock selection in asynchronous serial interface

mode

Input clock from off-chip to ASCK pin

Dedicated baud rate generator output

Note

ISRM

Control of reception completion interrupt request

in case of error occurrence

Reception completion interrupt request generated

in case of error occurrence

Reception completion interrupt request not

generated in case of error occurrence

SL Transmit data stop bit length specification

Character length specification

7 bits

8 bits

RXE

Receive operation control

Receive operation stopped

Receive operation enabled

TXE

Transmit operation control

Transmit operation stopped

Transmit operation enabled

PS1

0 1 bit

1 2 bits

Parity bit specification

No parity

Even parity

PS0

0 parity always added in transmission.

No parity test in reception (parity error not

generated).

1 Odd parity

434

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 19-2. Operating Mode Settings of Serial Interface Channel 2 (1/2)

(1) Operation stop mode

(2) 3-wire serial I/O mode

Notes 1. Can be used freely as a port function.

2. Can be used as P70 (CMOS I/O) when only transmission is performed.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

P72/SCK2

/ASCK pin

function

P71/SO2/

TxD0 pin

function

P70/SI2/

RxD0 pin

function

Shift

clock

Start

bit

TXE RXE SCK

CSIE2

CSIM22

CSCK

PM70

P70

PM71

P71

PM72

P72

ASIM CSIM2

0 0 ×0×× ×

Note 1

PM23

P23

PM24

P24

—— P70 P71

P23/STB/

TxD1 pin

function

P23/STB

P24/BUSY/

RxD1 pin

function

P24/BUSY P72

Other than above Setting prohibited

SIPS

SIPS21 SIPS20

×× ×

Note 1

P72/SCK2

/ASCK pin

function

P71/SO2/

TxD0 pin

function

P70/SI2/

RxD0 pin

function

Shift

clock

Start

bit

TXE RXE SCK

CSIE2

CSIM22

CSCK

ASIM CSIM2

0001

Note 2

01×

Note 1

MSB

LSB

External

clock

Internal

clock

External

clock

Internal

clock

SI2

SO2

(CMOS

output)

SO2

(CMOS

output)

P23/STB/

TxD1 pin

function

P23/STB

P24/BUSY/

RxD1 pin

function

P24/BUSY SCK2 input

SCK2 output

SCK2 input

SCK2 output

Other than above Setting prohibited

SIPS

SIPS21 SIPS20

××

Note 2

PM70

P70

PM71

P71

PM72

P72

PM23

P23

PM24

P24

435

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 19-2. Operating Mode Setting of Serial Interface Channel 2 (2/2)

(3) Asynchronous serial interface mode

Notes 1. Can be used freely as a port function.

2. The set value differs between when the actual device operates and when emulation is executed

by the in-circuit emulator. For details, see 19.4.5 Restrictions in UART mode 2.

Remark ×: don’t care

PM××: Port mode register

P××: Port output latch

P72/SCK2

/ASCK pin

function

P71/SO2/

TxD0 pin

function

P70/SI2/

RxD0 pin

function

Shift

clock

Start

bit

TXE RXE SCK

CSIE2

CSIM22

CSCK

ASIM CSIM2

Note 1

LSB

External

clock

Internal

clock

External

clock

Internal

clock

External

clock

Internal

clock

External

clock

Internal

clock

External

clock

Internal

clock

External

clock

Internal

clock

P70

RxD0

P70

(Input)

P70

(Input)

TxD0

(CMOS

output)

P71

TxD0

(CMOS

output)

High

output

P71

High

output

P23/STB/

TxD1 pin

function

P23/STB

TxD1

P23/STB

TxD1

P24/BUSY/

RxD1 pin

function

P24/BUSY

RxD1

ASCK input

P72

ASCK input

P72

ASCK input

P72

ASCK input

P72

ASCK input

P72

ASCK input

P72

Other than above Setting prohibited

SIPS

SIPS21 SIPS20

Note 2

Note 1

1×

Note 1

PM70

P70

PM71

P71

PM72

P72

PM23

P23

PM24

P24

436

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Notes 1. The receive buffer register (RXB) must be read when an overrun error occurs. Overrun errors will

continue to occur until RXB is read.

2. Even if the stop bit length has been set as 2 bits by bit 2 (SL) of the asynchronous serial interface

mode register (ASIM), only single stop bit detection is performed during reception.

(3) Asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS)

This is a register which displays the type of error when a reception error occurs in the asynchronous serial

interface mode.

ASIS is read with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

In 3-wire serial I/O mode, the contents of ASIS are undefined.

RESET input clears ASIS to 00H.

Figure 19-5. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Status Register

65432107

Symbol

ASIS 0 0 0 0 0 FE OVE FF71H 00H R

Address After reset R/W

OVE

Overrun Error Flag

Overrun error did not occur

Overrun error occurred

Note 1

(When next receive operation is completed before

data is read from receive buffer register)

Framing error flag

Framing error did not occur

Framing error occurred

Note 2

(When stop bit is not detected)

Parity error flag

Parity error did not occur

Parity error occurred (when transmit data parity

does not match)

437

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Baud rate generator control register (BRGC)

This register sets the serial clock for serial interface channel 2.

BRGC is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears BRGC to 00H.

Figure 19-6. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register (1/2)

Note Can only be used in 3-wire serial I/O mode.

Remarks 1. fSCK: 5-bit counter source clock

2. k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤ 14)

Baud rate generator input clock selectionMDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0

SCK

/16

SCK

/17

SCK

/18

SCK

/19

SCK

/20

SCK

/21

SCK

/22

SCK

/23

SCK

/24

SCK

/25

SCK

/26

SCK

/27

SCK

/28

SCK

/29

SCK

/30

SCKNote

—

65432107

Symbol

BRGC TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 MDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0 FF73H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

438

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 19-6. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register (2/2)

TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 5-bit counter source clock selection n

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0000fXX/210 fXX/210 (4.9 kHz) fX/211 (2.4 kHz) 11

0101fXX fX(5.0 MHz) fX/2 (2.5 MHz) 1

0110fXX/2 fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/22(1.25 MHz) 2

0111fXX/22fX/22(1.25 MHz) fX/23(625 kHz) 3

1000fXX/23fX/23(625 kHz) fX/24(313 kHz) 4

1001fXX/24fX/24(313 kHz) fX/25(156 kHz) 5

1010fXX/25fX/25(156 kHz) fX/26(78.1 kHz) 6

1011fXX/26fX/26(78.1 kHz) fX/27(39.1 kHz) 7

1100fXX/27fX/27(39.1 kHz) fX/28(19.5 kHz) 8

1101fXX/28fX/28(19.5 kHz) fX/29(9.8 kHz) 9

1110fXX/29fX/29(9.8 kHz) fX/210 (4.9 kHz) 10

Other than above Setting prohibited

Caution When BRGC is written during a communication operation, baud rate generator output is

disrupted and communication cannot be performed normally. Therefore, BRGC must not

be written during a communication operation.

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

3. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. n: Value set in TPS0 to TPS3 (1 ≤ n ≤ 11)

5. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

439

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

The baud rate transmit/receive clock generated is either a signal divided from the main system clock, or a signal

divided from the clock input from the ASCK pin.

(a) Generation of baud rate transmit/receive clock from main system clock

The transmit/receive clock is generated by dividing the main system clock. The baud rate generated from

the main system clock is obtained from the following expression.

[Baud rate] = [Hz]

where, fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

n: Value set in TPS0 to TPS3 (1 ≤ n ≤ 11)

k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤14)

Table 19-3. Relationship Between Main System Clock and Baud Rate

fX = 5.0 MHz fX = 4.19 MHz

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

BRGC Set Value Error (%) BRGC Set Value Error (%) BRGC Set Value Error (%) BRGC Set Value Error (%)

75 –00H 1.73 0BH 1.14 EBH 1.14

110 06H 0.88 E6H 0.88 03H –2.01 E3H –2.01

150 00H 1.73 E0H 1.73 EBH 1.14 DBH 1.14

300 E0H 1.73 D0H 1.73 DBH 1.14 CBH 1.14

600 D0H 1.73 C0H 1.73 CBH 1.14 BBH 1.14

1,200 C0H 1.73 B0H 1.73 BBH 1.14 ABH 1.14

2,400 B0H 1.73 A0H 1.73 ABH 1.14 9BH 1.14

4,800 A0H 1.73 90H 1.73 9BH 1.14 8BH 1.14

9,600 90H 1.73 80H 1.73 8BH 1.14 7BH 1.14

19,200 80H 1.73 70H 1.73 7BH 1.14 6BH 1.14

31,250 74H 0 64H 0 71H –1.31 61H –1.31

38,400 70H 1.73 60H 1.73 6BH 1.14 5BH 1.14

76,800 60H 1.73 50H 1.73 5BH 1.14 ——

Remark MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

fXX

2n × (k + 16)

Baud

Rate

(bps)

440

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Generation of baud rate transmit/receive clock from external clock input from ASCK pin

The transmit/receive clock is generated by dividing the clock input from the ASCK pin. The baud rate

generated from the clock input from the ASCK pin is obtained from the following expression.

[Baud rate] = [Hz]

fASCK: Frequency of clock input to ASCK pin

k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤ 14)

Table 19-4. Relationship Between ASCK Pin Input Frequency and Baud Rate (When BRGC Is Set to 00H)

Baud Rate (bps) ASCK Pin Input Frequency

75 2.4 kHz

110 3.52 kHz

150 4.8 kHz

300 9.6 kHz

600 19.2 kHz

1,200 38.4 kHz

2,400 76.8 kHz

4,800 153.6 kHz

9,600 307.2 kHz

19,200 614.4 kHz

31,250 1,000.0 kHz

38,400 1,228.8 kHz

fASCK

2 × (k + 16)

441

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(5) Serial interface pin select register (SIPS)

This register selects the input/output pins when serial interface channel 2 is used in the asynchronous serial

interface mode (with time-division transfer function).

SIPS is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SIPS to 00H.

To select the input/output pins, the port mode register and the output latch of the port must be set. For details,

see Table 19-2 Operating Mode Settings of Serial Interface Channel 2.

Figure 19-7. Format of Serial Interface Pin Select Register

Cautions 1. Select the input/output pins after stopping serial transmission/reception.

2. When using the busy control option or busy & strobe control option in the 3-wire serial

I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function of serial interface channel 1, the RxD1/

BUSY/P24 and TxD1/STB/P23 pins cannot be used as data I/O pins.

3. SIPS21 is valid only when the TXE flag is “1” and SIPS20 is valid only when the RXE flag

is “1”.

4. There are restrictions when SIPS21 = 1 (when the TxD1 pin is used as an output pin for

UART transmission). For details, see 19.4.5 Restrictions in UART mode 2.

65432107

Symbol

SIPS 0 0

SIPS21 SIPS20

0000 FF75H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

SIPS21

Selection input/output pin of asynchronous serial interface

Input pin: RxD0/SI2/P70

Output pin:

TxD0/SO2/P71

Input pin: RxD1/BUSY/P24

Output pin:

TxD1/STB/P23

SIPS20

Input pin: RxD1/BUSY/P24

Output pin:

TxD0/SO2/P71

1Input pin: RxD0/SI2/P70

Output pin:

TxD1/STB/P23

442

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.4 Operation of Serial Interface Channel 2

The following three operating modes are available for serial interface channel 2.

•Operation stop mode

•Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode (with time-division transfer function)

•3-wire serial I/O mode

19.4.1 Operation stop mode

In the operation stop mode, serial transfer is not performed, and therefore power consumption can be reduced.

In the operation stop mode, the P70/SI2/RxD0, P71/SO2/TxD0, and P72/SCK2/ASCK pins can be used as normal

I/O ports and the P23/STB/TxD1, P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins can be used as normal I/O ports or as the strobe output and

busy input for serial interface automatic transmit/receive.

(1) Register setting

Operation stop mode is set by serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2) and the asynchronous serial interface

mode register (ASIM).

(a) Serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2)

CSIM2 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM2 to 00H.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 and 3 to 6 to 0.

CSIM

6543210<7>

Symbol

CSIM2 CSIE2 0 0 0 0 CSCK 0 FF72H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

CSIE2

Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

443

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)

ASIM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ASIM to 00H.

<6>543210<7>

Symbol

ASIM TXE RXE PS1 PS0 CL ISRM SCK FF70H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

RXE

Receive operation control

Receive operation stopped

Receive operation enabled

TXE

Transmit operation control

Transmit operation stopped

Transmit operation enabled

444

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode (with time-division transfer function)

In this mode, one byte of data is transmitted/received following the start bit, and full-duplex operation is possible.

A dedicated UART baud rate generator is incorporated, allowing communication over a wide range of baud rates.

In addition, the baud rate can be defined by dividing the clock input to the ASCK pin.

The MIDI standard baud rate (31.25 kbps) can be used by employing the dedicated UART baud rate generator.

Two sets of data I/O pins (RxD and TxD) are provided, and the pin to be used can be selected by software (time-

division transfer function). However, only one set of pins can be used at one time.

Cautions 1. If it is not necessary to change the data I/O pin, use of the RxD0/SI2/P70 and TxD0/SO2/P71

pins is recommended. If only port 2 (RxD1/BUSY/P24 and TxD1/STB/P23) is used as data I/O

pins, the function of port 7 is limited.

2. When using the busy control option or busy & strobe control option in the 3-wire serial I/O

mode with automatic transmit/receive function of serial interface channel 1, the RxD1/BUSY/

P24 and TxD1/STB/P23 pins cannot be used as data I/O pins.

(1) Register setting

UART mode (with time-division transfer function) is set by serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2), the

asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM), the asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS),

the baud rate generator control register (BRGC), and the serial interface pin select register (SIPS).

(a) Serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2)

CSIM2 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM2 to 00H.

When the UART mode is selected, CSIM2 should be cleared to 00H.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 and 3 to 6 to 0.

6543210<7>

Symbol

CSIM2 CSIE2 0 0 0 0 CSIM

22 CSCK 0

CSCK

Clock selection in 3-wire serial I/O mode

Input clock from off-chip to SCK2 pin

Dedicated baud rate generator output

CSIM22

First bit specification

MSB

LSB

CSIE2

Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

FF72H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

445

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Note When SCK is set to 1 and the baud rate generator output is selected, the ASCK pin can be used

as an I/O port.

Caution The serial transmit/receive operation must be stopped before changing the operating

mode.

(b) Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)

ASIM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ASIM to 00H.

<6>543210<7>

Symbol

ASIM TXE RXE PS1 PS0 CL SL ISRM SCK FF70H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

SCK

Clock selection in asynchronous serial interface mode

Input clock from off-chip to ASCK pin

Dedicated baud rate generator output

Note

ISRM

Control of reception completion interrupt request

in case of error occurrence

Reception completion interrupt request generated

in case of error occurrence

Reception completion interrupt request not

generated in case of error occurrence

SL Transmit data stop bit length specification

Character length specification

7 bits

8 bits

RXE

Receive operation control

Receive operation stopped

Receive operation enabled

TXE

Transmit operation control

Transmit operation stopped

Transmit operation enabled

PS1

0 1 bit

1 2 bits

Parity bit specification

No parity

Even parity

PS0

0 parity always added in transmission.

No parity test in reception (parity error not

generated).

1 Odd parity

446

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

ASIS is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ASIS to 00H.

Notes 1. The receive buffer register (RXB) must be read when an overrun error occurs. Overrun errors

will continue to occur until RXB is read.

2. Even if the stop bit length has been set as 2 bits by bit 2 (SL) of the asynchronous serial

interface mode register (ASIM), only single stop bit detection is performed during reception.

65432107

Symbol

ASIS 0 0 0 0 0 FE OVE FF71H 00H R

Address After reset R/W

OVE

Overrun error flag

Overrun error did not occur

Overrun error occurredNote 1

(When next receive operation is completed before

data from receive buffer register is read)

Framing error flag

Framing error did not occur

Framing error occurredNote 2

(When stop bit is not detected)

Parity error flag

Parity error did not occur

Parity error occurred

(When transmit data parity does not match)

447

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(d) Baud rate generator control register (BRGC)

BRGC is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears BRGC to 00H.

Remark fSCK: 5-bit counter source clock

k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤14)

(Cont’d)

Baud rate generator input clock selectionMDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0

fSCK/16

fSCK/17

fSCK/18

fSCK/19

fSCK/20

fSCK/21

fSCK/22

fSCK/23

fSCK/24

fSCK/25

fSCK/26

fSCK/27

fSCK/28

fSCK/29

fSCK/30

65432107

Symbol

BRGC TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 MDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0 FF73H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

448

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 5-Bit counter source clock selection n

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0000fXX/210 fX/210 (4.9 kHz) fX/211 (2.4 kHz) 11

0101fXX fX(5.0 MHz) fX/2 (2.5 MHz) 1

0110fXX/2 fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/22(1.25 MHz) 2

0111fXX/22fX/22(1.25 MHz) fX/23(625 kHz) 3

1000fXX/23fX/23(625 kHz) fX/24(313 kHz) 4

1001fXX/24fX/24(313 kHz) fX/25(156 kHz) 5

1010fXX/25fX/25(156 kHz) fX/26(78.1 kHz) 6

1011fXX/26fX/26(78.1 kHz) fX/27(39.1 kHz) 7

1100fXX/27fX/27(39.1 kHz) fX/28(19.5 kHz) 8

1101fXX/28fX/28(19.5 kHz) fX/29(9.8 kHz) 9

1110fXX/29fX/29(9.8 kHz) fX/210 (4.9 kHz) 10

Other than above Setting prohibited

Caution When BRGC is written during a communication operation, baud rate generator output

is disrupted and communication cannot be performed normally. Therefore, BRGC must

not be written to during a communication operation.

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

3. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. n: Value set in TPS0 to TPS3 (1 ≤ n ≤ 11)

5. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

449

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

The baud rate transmit/receive clock generated is either a signal divided from the main system clock, or

a signal divided from the clock input from the ASCK pin.

(i) Generation of baud rate transmit/receive clock from main system clock

The transmit/receive clock is generated by dividing the main system clock. The baud rate generated

from the main system clock is obtained from the following expression.

[Baud rate] = [Hz]

where, fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

n: Value set in TPS0 to TPS3 (1 ≤ n ≤ 11)

k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤14)

Table 19-5. Relationship Between Main System Clock and Baud Rate

fX = 5.0 MHz fX = 4.19 MHz

MCS = 1 MCS = 0 MCS = 1 MCS = 0

BRGC Set Value Error (%) BRGC Set Value Error (%) BRGC Set Value Error (%) BRGC Set Value Error (%)

75 –00H 1.73 0BH 1.14 EBH 1.14

110 06H 0.88 E6H 0.88 03H –2.01 E3H –2.01

150 00H 1.73 E0H 1.73 EBH 1.14 DBH 1.14

300 E0H 1.73 D0H 1.73 DBH 1.14 CBH 1.14

600 D0H 1.73 C0H 1.73 CBH 1.14 BBH 1.14

1,200 C0H 1.73 B0H 1.73 BBH 1.14 ABH 1.14

2,400 B0H 1.73 A0H 1.73 ABH 1.14 9BH 1.14

4,800 A0H 1.73 90H 1.73 9BH 1.14 8BH 1.14

9,600 90H 1.73 80H 1.73 8BH 1.14 7BH 1.14

19,200 80H 1.73 70H 1.73 7BH 1.14 6BH 1.14

31,250 74H 0 64H 0 71H –1.31 61H –1.31

38,400 70H 1.73 60H 1.73 6BH 1.14 5BH 1.14

76,800 60H 1.73 50H 1.73 5BH 1.14 ——

Remark MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

fXX

2n × (k + 16)

Baud

Rate

(bps)

450

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(ii) Generation of baud rate transmit/receive clock from external clock input from ASCK pin

The transmit/receive clock is generated by dividing the clock input from the ASCK pin. The baud rate

generated from the clock input from the ASCK pin is obtained from the following expression.

[Baud rate] = [Hz]

where, fASCK: Frequency of clock input to ASCK pin

k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤ 14)

Table 19-6. Relationship Between ASCK Pin Input Frequency and Baud Rate (When BRGC Is Set to 00H)

Baud Rate (bps) ASCK Pin Input Frequency

75 2.4 kHz

110 3.52 kHz

150 4.8 kHz

300 9.6 kHz

600 19.2 kHz

1,200 38.4 kHz

2,400 76.8 kHz

4,800 153.6 kHz

9,600 307.2 kHz

19,200 614.4 kHz

31,250 1,000.0 kHz

38,400 1,228.8 kHz

2 × (k + 16)

fASCK

451

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(e) Serial interface pin select register (SIPS)

SIPS is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SIPS to 00H.

To select the input/output pins, the port mode register and the output latch of the port must be set. For

details, see Table 19-2 Operating Mode Settings of Serial Interface Channel 2.

Cautions 1. Select the input/output pins after stopping serial transmission/reception.

2. When using the busy control option or busy & strobe control option in the 3-wire serial

I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function of serial interface channel 1, the RxD1/

BUSY/P24 and TxD1/STB/P23 pins cannot be used as data I/O pins.

3. SIPS21 is valid only when the TXE flag is “1” and SIPS20 is valid only when the RXE flag

is “1”.

4. There are restrictions when SIPS21 = 1 (when the TxD1 pin is used as an output pin for

UART transmission). For details, see 19.4.5 Restrictions in UART mode 2.

65432107

Symbol

SIPS 0 0

SIPS21 SIPS20

0000 FF75H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

SIPS21

Selection of input/output pin of asynchronous serial interface

Input pin: RxD0/SI2/P70

Output pin:

TxD0/SO2/P71

Input pin: RxD1/BUSY/P24

Output pin:

TxD1/STB/P23

SIPS20

Input pin: RxD1/BUSY/P24

Output pin:

TxD0/SO2/P71

1Input pin: RxD0/SI2/P70

Output pin:

TxD1/STB/P23

452

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Communication operation

(a) Data format

The transmit/receive data format is as shown in Figure 19-8.

Figure 19-8. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmit/Receive Data

One data frame consists of the following bits:

•Start bits .................. 1 bit

•Character bits ......... 7 bits/8 bits

•Parity bits ................ Even parity/odd parity/0 parity/no parity

•Stop bits .................. 1 bit/2 bits

The specification of character bit length, parity selection, and specification of stop bit length for each data

frame is carried out by the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM).

When 7 bits are selected as the number of character bits, only the lower 7 bits (bits 0 to 6) are valid; in

transmission the most significant bit (bit 7) is ignored, and in reception the most significant bit (bit 7) is

always “0”.

The serial transfer rate is selected by means of ASIM and the baud rate generator control register (BRGC).

If a serial data receive error occurs, the receive error contents can be determined by reading the status

of the asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS).

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity

bit Stop bit

Start

bit

One data frame

Character bit

453

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Parity types and operation

The parity bit is used to detect a bit error in the communication data. Normally, the same kind of parity

bit is used on the transmitting side and the receiving side. With even parity and odd parity, a 1-bit (odd

number) error can be detected. With 0 parity and no parity, an error cannot be detected.

(i) Even parity

•Transmission

The number of bits with a value of “1”, including the parity bit, in the transmit data is controlled to

be even.

The value of the parity bit is as follows:

Number of bits with a value of “1” in transmit data is odd: 1

Number of bits with a value of “1” in transmit data is even: 0

•Reception

The number of bits with a value of “1”, including the parity bit, in the receive data is counted. If

it is odd, a parity error occurs.

(ii) Odd parity

•Transmission

Conversely to the situation with even parity, the number of bits with a value of “1”, including the

parity bit, in the transmit data is controlled to be odd. The value of the parity bit is as follows:

Number of bits with a value of “1” in transmit data is odd: 0

Number of bits with a value of “1” in transmit data is even: 1

•Reception

The number of bits with a value of “1”, including the parity bit, in the receive data is counted. If

it is even, a parity error occurs.

(iii) 0 Parity

When transmitting, the parity bit is set to “0” irrespective of the transmit data.

At reception, a parity bit check is not performed. Therefore, a parity error does not occur, irrespective

of whether the parity bit is set to “0” or “1”.

(iv) No parity

A parity bit is not added to the transmit data. At reception, data is received assuming that there is

no parity bit. Since there is no parity bit, a parity error does not occur.

454

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data to the transmit shift register (TXS). The start bit,

parity bit and stop bit(s) are added automatically.

When the transmit operation starts, the data in the transmit shift register (TXS) is shifted out, and when

the transmit shift register (TXS) is empty, a transmission completion interrupt request (INTST) is

generated.

Figure 19-9. Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Completion Interrupt Request Generation Timing

(a) Stop bit length: 1

(b) Stop bit length: 2

Caution Rewriting the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) should not be per-

formed during a transmit operation. If rewriting the ASIM is performed during transmis-

sion, subsequent transmit operations may not be possible (the normal state is restored

by RESET input).

It is possible to determine whether transmission is in progress by software by using a

transmission completion interrupt request (INTST) or the interrupt request flag (STIF)

set by INTST.

D1 D2 D6 D7 ParityD0TxD0 (TxD1) (output)

INTST

STOP

START

D1 D2 D6 D7 ParityD0TxD0 (TxD1) (output)

INTST

STOP

START

455

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(d) Reception

When the RXE bit of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) is set to 1, a receive operation

is enabled and sampling of the RxD0 (RxD1) pin input is started.

RxD0 (RxD1) pin input sampling is performed using the serial clock specified by ASIM.

When the RxD0 (RxD1) pin input becomes low, the 5-bit counter of the baud rate generator (see Figure

19-2) starts counting, and at the time when the half time determined by specified baud rate has passed,

the data sampling start timing signal is output. If the RxD0 (RxD1) pin input sampled again as a result

of this start timing signal is low, it is identified as a start bit, the 5-bit counter is initialized and starts counting,

and data sampling is performed. When character data, a parity bit, and one stop bit are detected after

the start bit, reception of one frame of data ends.

When one frame of data has been received, the receive data in the shift register is transferred to the receive

buffer register (RXB), and a reception completion interrupt request (INTSR) is generated.

If an error occurs, the receive data in which the error occurred is still transferred to RXB. If bit 1 (ISRM)

of ASIM is cleared to 0 on occurrence of the error, INTSR is generated.

If the RXE bit is reset to 0 during the receive operation, the receive operation is stopped immediately.

In this case, the contents of RXB and the asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS) are not

changed, and INTSR and INTSER are not generated.

Figure 19-10. Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Completion Interrupt Request Generation Timing

Caution The receive buffer register (RXB) must be read even if a receive error occurs. If RXB

is not read, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the receive

error state will continue indefinitely.

D1 D2 D6 D7 ParityD0RxD0 (RxD1) (input)

INTSR

STOP

START

456

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(e) Receive errors

Three kinds of errors can occur during a receive operation: a parity error, framing error, or overrun error.

The data reception result error flag is set in the asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS) and

a receive error interrupt request (INTSER) is generated. The receive error interrupt is generated faster

than receive completion interrupt (INTSR). Receive error causes are shown in Table 19-7.

It is possible to determine what kind of error occurred during reception by reading the contents of ASIS

in the reception error interrupt servicing (see Figures 19-10 and 19-11).

The contents of ASIS are reset to 0 by reading the receive buffer register (RXB) or receiving the next data

(if there is an error in the next data, the corresponding error flag is set).

Table 19-7. Receive Error Causes

Receive Errors Cause

Parity error Transmission-time parity specification and reception data parity do not match

Framing error Stop bit not detected

Overrun error Reception of next data is completed before data is read from receive register buffer

Figure 19-11. Receive Error Timing

Note INTSR is not generated if a receive error occurs while bit 1 (ISRM) of the asynchronous serial

interface mode register (ASIM) is set to 1.

Cautions 1. The contents of the asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS) are reset to

0 by reading the receive buffer register (RXB) or receiving the next data. To ascertain

the error contents, ASIS must be read before reading RXB.

2. The receive buffer register (RXB) must be read even if a receive error occurs. If RXB

is not read, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the receive

error state will continue indefinitely.

Parity STOP

D7D6D2D1D0RXD (input)

INTSRNote

INTSER (when framing/

overrun error occurs)

INTSER (when parity

error occurs)

START

457

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) UART mode cautions

(a) When the transmission under execution has been stopped by clearing bit 7 (TXE) of the asynchronous

serial interface mode register (ASIM) to 0, be sure to set the transmit shift register (TXS) to FFH, then

set TXE to 1 before executing the next transmission.

(b) When the reception under execution has been stopped by clearing bit 6 (RXE) of the asynchronous serial

interface mode register (ASIM) to 0, the status of the receive buffer register (RXB) and whether the receive

completion interrupt request (INTSR) is generated differ depending on the timing at which reception is

stopped. Figure 19-12 shows the timing.

Figure 19-12. Status of Receive Buffer Register (RXB) and Generation of

Interrupt Request (INTSR) When Reception Is Stopped

When RXE is cleared to 0 at the time indicated by <1>, RXB holds the previous data and does not generate

INTSR.

When RXE is cleared to 0 at the time indicated by <2>, RXB renews the data and does not generate INTSR.

When RXE is cleared to 0 at the time indicated by <3>, RXB renews the data and generates INTSR.

ParityRxD0 (RxD1) pin

RXB

INTSR

<3><1>

<2>

458

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.4.3 3-wire serial I/O mode

The 3-wire serial I/O mode is useful for connection of peripheral I/Os and display controllers, etc., which incorporate

a conventional clocked serial interface, such as the 75X/XL Series, 78K Series, 17K Series, etc.

Communication is performed using three lines: the serial clock (SCK2), serial output (SO2), and serial input (SI2).

In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, the P23/STB/TxD1, P24/BUSY/RxD1 pins can be used as normal I/O ports.

(1) Register setting

3-wire serial I/O mode is set by serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2), the asynchronous serial interface

mode register (ASIM), and the baud rate generator control register (BRGC).

(a) Serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2)

CSIM2 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CSIM2 to 00H.

Caution Be sure to clear bits 0 and 3 to 6 to 0.

6543210<7>

Symbol

CSIM2 CSIE2 0 0 0 0 CSIM

22 CSCK 0

CSCK

Clock selection in 3-wire serial I/O mode

Input clock from off-chip to SCK2 pin

Dedicated baud rate generator output

CSIM22

First bit specification

MSB

LSB

CSIE2

Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode

Operation stopped

Operation enabled

FF72H 00H R/W

Address After reset R/W

459

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)

ASIM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears ASIM to 00H.

When the 3-wire serial I/O mode is selected, ASIM should be cleared to 00H.

<6>543210<7>

Symbol

ASIM TXE RXE PS1 PS0 CL SL ISRM SCK FF70H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

SCK

Clock selection in asynchronous serial interface mode

Input clock from off-chip to ASCK pin

Dedicated baud rate generator output

ISRM

Control of reception completion interrupt request

in case of error occurrence

Reception completion interrupt request generated

in case of error occurrence

Reception completion interrupt request not

generated in case of error occurrence

SL Transmit data stop bit length specification

Character length specification

7 bits

8 bits

RXE

Receive operation control

Receive operation stopped

Receive operation enabled

TXE

Transmit operation control

Transmit operation stopped

Transmit operation enabled

PS1

0 1 bit

1 2 bits

Parity bit specification

No parity

Even parity

PS0

0 parity always added in transmission.

No parity test in reception (parity error not

generated).

1 Odd parity

460

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

BRGC is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears BRGC to 00H.

(Cont’d)

Remark fSCK: 5-bit counter source clock

k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤14)

Baud rate generator input clock selectionMDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0

SCK

/16

SCK

/17

SCK

/18

SCK

/19

SCK

/20

SCK

/21

SCK

/22

SCK

/23

SCK

/24

SCK

/25

SCK

/26

SCK

/27

SCK

/28

SCK

/29

SCK

/30

SCK

—

65432107

Symbol

BRGC TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 MDL3 MDL2 MDL1 MDL0 FF73H 00H

R/W

Address After reset R/W

461

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

TPS3 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 5-bit counter source clock selection n

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

0000fXX/210 fX/210 (4.9 kHz) fX/211 (2.4 kHz) 11

0101fXX fX(5.0 MHz) fX/2 (2.5 MHz) 1

0110fXX/2 fX/2 (2.5 MHz) fX/22(1.25 MHz) 2

0111fXX/22fX/22(1.25 MHz) fX/23(625 kHz) 3

1000fXX/23fX/23(625 kHz) fX/24(313 kHz) 4

1001fXX/24fX/24(313 kHz) fX/25(156 kHz) 5

1010fXX/25fX/25(156 kHz) fX/26(78.1 kHz) 6

1011fXX/26fX/26(78.1 kHz) fX/27(39.1 kHz) 7

1100fXX/27fX/27(39.1 kHz) fX/28(19.5 kHz) 8

1101fXX/28fX/28(19.5 kHz) fX/29(9.8 kHz) 9

1110fXX/29fX/29(9.8 kHz) fX/210 (4.9 kHz) 10

Other than above Setting prohibited

Caution When BRGC is written during a communication operation, baud rate generator output

is disrupted and communication cannot be performed normally. Therefore, BRGC must

not be written during a communication operation.

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

3. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. n: Value set in TPS0 to TPS3 (1 ≤ n ≤ 11)

5. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

462

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

When the internal clock is used as the serial clock in the 3-wire serial I/O mode, set BRGC as described below.

BRGC setting is not required if an external serial clock is used.

(i) When the baud rate generator is not used:

Select the serial clock frequency using TPS0 to TPS3. Be sure then to set MDL0 to MDL3 to 1,1,1,1.

The serial clock frequency becomes the same as the source clock frequency for the 5-bit counter.

(ii) When the baud rate generator is used:

Select the serial clock frequency using TPS0 to TPS3. Be sure then to set MDL0 to MDL3 to 1,1,1,1.

The serial clock frequency is calculated by the following formula:

Serial clock frequency = [Hz]

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

3. n: Value set in TPS0 to TPS3 (1 ≤ n ≤ 11)

4. k: Value set in MDL0 to MDL3 (0 ≤ k ≤ 14)

fXX

2n × (k + 16)

463

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Communication operation

In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, data transmission/reception is performed in 8-bit units. Data is transmitted/

received bit-wise synchronization with the serial clock.

Transmit shift register (TXS/SIO2) and receive shift register (RXS) shift operations are performed in

synchronization with the fall of the serial clock SCK2. Then transmit data is held in the SO2 latch and output

from the SO2 pin. Also, receive data input to the SI2 pin is latched in the receive buffer register (RXB/SIO2)

on the rise of SCK2.

At the end of an 8-bit transfer, the operation of TXS/SIO2 or RXS stops automatically, and the interrupt request

flag (SRIF) is set.

Figure 19-13. 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode Timing

(3) MSB/LSB switching as the start bit

In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, it is possible to select transfer to start from the MSB or LSB.

Figure 19-14 shows the configuration of the transmit shift register (TXS/SIO2) and internal bus. As shown

in the figure, the MSB/LSB can be read or written in reverse form.

MSB/LSB switching as the start bit can be specified by bit 2 (CSIM22) of serial operating mode register 2

(CSIM2).

SI2

SCK2 12345678

DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1 DI0

SO2 DO7 DO6 DO5 DO4 DO3 DO2 DO1 DO0

SRIF

Transfer start at the falling edge of SCK2

End of transfer

464

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 19-14. Circuit for Switching Transfer Bit Order

Start bit switching is realized by switching the bit order for data write to SIO2. The SIO2 shift order remains

unchanged.

Thus, switching between MSB-first and LSB-first must be performed before writing data to the shift register.

(4) Transfer start

Serial transfer is started by setting transfer data to the transmission shift register (TXS/SIO2) when the

following two conditions are satisfied.

•Serial interface channel 2 operation control bit (CSIE2) = 1

•Internal serial clock is stopped or SCK2 is a high level after 8-bit serial transfer.

Caution If CSIE2 is set to 1 after data write to TXS/SIO2, transfer does not start.

Remark CSIE2: Bit 7 of serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2)

Upon termination of 8-bit transfer, serial transfer automatically stops and the interrupt request flag (SRIF) is

set.

Internal bus

LSB-first

MSB-first Read/write gate

SI2

Transmit shift register (TXS/SIO2)

Read/write gate

SO2

SCK2

SO2 latch

465

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.4.4 Restrictions in UART mode 1

In the UART mode, the reception completion interrupt request (INTSR) is generated a certain time after the

reception error interrupt (INTSER) is generated and then cleared. Consequently, the following phenomenon may

occur.

•Description

If bit 1 (ISRM) of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) is set to 1, the reception completion

interrupt request (INTSR) is not generated on occurrence of a reception error. If the receive buffer register (RXB)

is read at certain timing (“a” in Figure 19-15) during the reception error interrupt (INTSER) servicing, the internal

error flag is cleared to 0. As a result, it is judged that no reception error has occurred, and INTSR, which should

not be generated, is generated. Figure 19-15 illustrates this operation.

Figure 19-15. Reception Completion Interrupt Request Generation Timing (When ISRM = 1)

Remark ISRM: Bit 1 of the asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM)

fSCK: Source clock of 5-bit counter of baud rate generator

RXB: Receive buffer register

To avoid this phenomenon, take the following measures.

•Preventive measures

•In case of framing error or overrun error

Disable the receive buffer register (RXB) from being read for a certain period (T2 in Figure 19-16) after the

reception error interrupt request (INTSER) has been generated.

•In case of parity error

Disable the receive buffer register (RXB) from being read for a certain period (T1 + T2 in Figure 19-16) after

the reception error interrupt request (INTSER) has been generated.

fSCK

INTSER (when framing/

overrun error occurs)

Error Flag

(internal flag)

INTSR

Cleared on

reading RXB

Interrupt processing

routine of CPU

Reading RXB It is judged that reception error has not

occurred, and INTSR is generated

466

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 19-16. Receive Buffer Register Read Disable Period

T1: Time of one data of baud rate selected by baud rate generator control register (BRGC) (1/baud rate)

T2: Time of 2 clocks of source clock (fSCK) of 5-bit counter selected by BRGC

•Example of preventive measures

Here is an example of the above preventive measures.

[Conditions]

fX = 5.0 MHz

Processor clock control register (PCC) = 00H

Oscillation mode select register (OSMS) = 01H

Baud rate generator control register (BRGC) = B0H (2,400 bps selected as baud rate)

TCY = 0.4

s (tCY = 0.2

T1 = 1= 416.7

2,400

T2 = 12.8 × 2 = 25.6

T1 + T2 = 2,212 (clocks)

tCY

T1 T2

Parity STOP

D7D6D2D1D0RXD (input)

INTSR

INTSER (when framing/

overrun error occurs)

INTSER (when parity

error occurs)

START

467

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

[Example]

Main processing

INTSER generated

UART receive error interrupt

(INTSER) servicing

Seven CPU clocks (MIN.)

(time from generation of

interrupt request to processing)

RETI

MOV A, RXB

Instructions of

2,205 CPU

clocks (MIN.)

are necessary.

468

CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

19.4.5 Restrictions in UART mode 2

To use the TxD1/STB/P23 pin to output UART data by using the time-division transfer function, perform the

following processing when the transmit operation is enabled and when the transmit/receive operation is stopped.

The output circuit of the alternate function of this TxD1/STB/P23 pin differs between the actual device and the in-

circuit emulator (see Figure 19-17). Therefore, delete the underlined part in the examples below when executing

emulation with the in-circuit emulator (IE).

Condition: Serial interface pin select register (SIPS) = 20H or 30H

(when using TxD1 pin as output pin for UART transmission)

(1) When transmit operation is enabled

CLR1 PM2.3 ; Sets P23 (TXD1) pin to output mode.

SET1 P2.3 ; Sets output latch of P23 to “1”.

SET1 ASIM.7 ; Enables transmission (TXE = 1).

CLR1 P2.3 ; This line is necessary only for the actual device. Delete it when the IE is used.

MOV TXS, #BYTE ; Transfers transmit data (#BYTE) to transmit shift register.

Cautions 1. Perform this processing each time a transmit operation is enabled by using the TxD1 pin as

an output pin.

2. Perform this processing each time the output pin is switched from the TxD0 pin to the TxD1

pin because the transmit operation must be stopped once and then enabled again.

(2) When transmit operation is stopped

SET1 P2.3 ; This line is necessary only for the actual device. Delete it when the IE is used.

CLR1 ASIM.7 ; Stops transmission (TXE = 0).

Cautions 1. Perform this processing each time a transmit operation is enabled by using the TxD1 pin as

an output pin.

2. Perform this processing each time the output pin is switched from the TxD0 pin to the TxD1

pin because the transmit operation must be stopped once and then enabled again.

Figure 19-17. P23 Output Selector

P23/STB/TxD1

PM23

Alternate output signal (TxD1)

Output latch of P23

P23/STB/TxD1

PM23

Alternate output signal (TxD1)

Output latch of P23

(Actual device)

(In-circuit emulator)

469

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT

20.1 Real-Time Output Port Functions

Data set previously in the real-time output buffer register can be transferred to the output latch by hardware

concurrently with the generation of a timer interrupt request or external interrupt request, then output externally. This

is called the real-time output function. The pins that output data externally are called real-time output ports.

By using a real-time output, a signal which has no jitter can be output. This port is therefore suitable for control

of stepper motors, etc.

Port mode/real-time output port mode can be specified in 1-bit units.

470

CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

20.2 Real-Time Output Port Configuration

The real-time output port consists of the following hardware.

Table 20-1. Real-Time Output Port Configuration

Item Configuration

Control registers Port mode register 12 (PM12)

Real-time output port mode register (RTPM)

Real-time output port control register (RTPC)

Figure 20-1. Real-Time Output Port Block Diagram

Internal bus

Real-time output port

control register

EXTR

BYTE

Output trigger

controller

Real-time output

buffer register

higher 4 bits

(RTBH)

Real-time output

buffer register

lower 4 bits

(RTBL)

Output latch

P120

P127

Real-time output port

mode register (RTPM)

INTP2

INTTM1

INTTM2

Port mode

(PM12)

471

CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Real-time output buffer registers (RTBL, RTBH)

The addresses of RTBL and RTBH are mapped individually in the special function register (SFR) area as shown

in Figure 20-2.

When specifying 4 bits × 2 channels as the operating mode, data is set individually to RTBL and RTBH.

When specifying 8 bits × 1 channel as the operating mode, data is set to both RTBL and RTBH by writing 8-

bit data to either RTBL or RTBH.

Table 20-2 shows the operations during manipulation of RTBL and RTBH.

Figure 20-2. Real-Time Output Buffer Register Configuration

Table 20-2. Operation in Real-Time Output Buffer Register Manipulation

Operating Mode Register to Be ReadingNote 1 WritingNote 2

Manipulated Higher 4 Bits Lower 4 Bits Higher 4 Bits Lower 4 Bits

4 bits × 2 channels RTBL RTBH RTBL Invalid RTBL

RTBH RTBH RTBL RTBH Invalid

8 bits × 1 channel RTBL RTBH RTBL RTBH RTBL

RTBH RTBH RTBL RTBH RTBL

Notes 1. Only the bits set in the real-time output port mode can be read. When a bit set in the port mode

is read, 0 is read.

2. After setting data in the real-time output port, output data should be set to RTBL and RTBH by the

time a real-time output trigger is generated.

Higher

4 bits

Lower

4 bits

RTBL

RTBH

FF30H

FF31H

472

CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

20.3 Real-Time Output Port Control Registers

The following three registers control the real-time output port.

• Port mode register 12 (PM12)

• Real-time output port mode register (RTPM)

• Real-time output port control register (RTPC)

(1) Port mode register 12 (PM12)

This register sets the input or output mode of the port 12 pins (P120 to P127) which function alternately as

real-time output pins (RTP0 to RTP7). To use port 12 as a real-time output port, the port pin that performs

real-time output must be set in the output mode (PM12n = 0: n = 0 to 7).

PM12 is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets PM12 to FFH.

Figure 20-3. Format of Port Mode Register 12

(2) Real-time output port mode register (RTPM)

This register selects the real-time output port mode/port mode in 1-bit units.

RTPM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears RTPM to 00H.

Figure 20-4. Format of Real-Time Output Port Mode Register

Cautions 1. When using these bits as a real-time output port, set the ports at which real-time output

is performed to the output mode (clear the corresponding bit of port mode register 12

(PM12) to 0).

2. In ports specified as real-time output ports, data cannot be set to the output latch.

Therefore, when setting an initial value, data should be set to the output latch before

setting the real-time output mode.

RTPM7

RTPM6

RTPM5

RTPM4

RTPM3

RTPM2

RTPM1

RTPM0

Symbol

RTPM

Address

FF34H 00H

After reset R/W

R/W

RTPMn

Port mode

Real-time output port mode

Real-time output port selection (n = 0 to 7)

PM127

PM126

PM125

PM124

PM123

PM122

PM121

PM120

Symbol

PM12

Address

FF2CH

After reset

FFH

R/W

PM12n

Output mode (output buffer on)

Input mode (output buffer off)

Selection of I/O mode of P12n pin (n = 0 to 7)

473

CHAPTER 20 REAL-TIME OUTPUT PORT

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Real-time output port control register (RTPC)

This register sets the real-time output port operating mode and output trigger.

Table 20-3 shows the relationship between the operating mode of the real-time output port and output trigger.

RTPC is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears RTPC to 00H.

Figure 20-5. Format of Real-Time Output Port Control Register

Table 20-3. Real-Time Output Port Operating Mode and Output Trigger

BYTE EXTR Operating Mode RTBH → Port Output RTBL → Port Output

0 0 4 bits × 2 channels INTTM2 INTTM1

1 INTTM1 INTP2

1 0 8 bits × 1 channel INTTM1

1 INTP2

Symbol

RTPC

<1>

BYTE

<0>

EXTR

Address

FF36H 00H

After reset R/W

R/W

EXTR

Real-time output control by INTP2

INTP2 not specified as real-time output trigger

INTP2 specified as real-time output trigger

BYTE

Real-time output port operating mode

4 bits × 2 channels

8 bits × 1 channel

474 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

21.1 Interrupt Function Types

The following three types of interrupt functions are used.

(1) Non-maskable interrupt

This interrupt is acknowledged unconditionally even in the interrupt disabled status. It does not undergo

interrupt priority control and is given top priority over all other interrupt requests.

It generates a standby release signal.

One interrupt source from the watchdog timer is provided as a non-maskable interrupt source.

(2) Maskable interrupts

These interrupts undergo mask control. Maskable interrupts can be divided into a high interrupt priority group

and a low interrupt priority group by setting the priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L).

High-priority interrupts can be given priority over to low priority interrupts by using multiple interrupt servicing.

If two or more interrupts with the same priority are generated simultaneously, each interrupt has a predeter-

mined priority (see Table 21-1).

A standby release signal is generated.

Six external interrupt sources and thirteen internal interrupt sources are provided as maskable interrupt

sources.

(3) Software interrupt

This is a vectored interrupt that occurs when the BRK instruction is executed. It is acknowledged even in a

disabled state. The software interrupt does not undergo interrupt priority control.

475

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 21-1. Interrupt Source List (1/2)

Interrupt Default Interrupt Source Internal/

Type PriorityNote 1 Name Trigger External

Non- — INTWDT Watchdog timer overflow (with Internal 0004H (A)

maskable watchdog timer mode 1 selected)

Maskable 0 INTWDT Watchdog timer overflow (with (B)

interval timer mode selected)

1 INTP0 Pin input edge detection External 0006H (C)

2 INTP1 0008H (D)

3 INTP2 000AH

4 INTP3 000CH

5 INTP4 000EH

6 INTP5 0010H

7 INTCSI0 End of serial interface channel 0 Internal 0014H (B)

transfer

8 INTCSI1 End of serial interface channel 1 0016H

transfer

9 INTSER Occurrence of serial interface channel 2 0018H

UART reception error

10 INTSR End of serial interface channel 2 001AH

UART reception

INTCSI2 End of serial interface channel 2

3-wire transfer

11 INTST End of serial interface channel 2 001CH

UART transfer

21.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration

A total of 21 non-maskable, maskable, and software interrupts are provided as interrupt sources (see Table

21-1).

Vector

Table

Address

Basic

Configuration

TypeNote 2

Notes 1. The default priority is the priority used when two or more maskable interrupt requests are generated

simultaneously. 0 is the highest priority and 17 is the lowest.

2. Basic configuration types (A) to (E) correspond to (A) to (E) of Figure 21-1.

476

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 21-1. Interrupt Source List (2/2)

Interrupt Default Interrupt Source Internal/

Type PriorityNote 1 Name Trigger External

Maskable 12 INTTM3 Reference time interval signal from Internal 001EH (B)

watch timer

13 INTTM00 Generation of 16-bit timer register, 0020H

capture/compare register 00 (CR00)

match signal

14 INTTM01 Generation of 16-bit timer register, 0022H

capture/compare register 01 (CR01)

match signal

15 INTTM1 Generation of 8-bit timer/event 0024H

counter 1 match signal

16 INTTM2 Generation of 8 bit timer/event 0026H

counter 2 match signal

17 INTAD End of A/D converter conversion 0028H

Software — BRK BRK instruction execution — 003EH (E)

Vector

Table

Address

Basic

Configuration

TypeNote 2

Notes 1. The default priority is the priority used when two or more maskable interrupt requests are generated

simultaneously. 0 is the highest priority and 17 is the lowest.

2. Basic configuration types (A) to (E) correspond to (A) to (E) of Figure 21-1.

477

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (1/2)

(A) Internal non-maskable interrupt

(B) Internal maskable interrupt

Internal bus

Priority controller Vector table

address

generator

Standby

release si

nal

Interrupt

request

Internal bus

IE PR ISPMK

Interrupt

request

Priority controller Vector table

address

generator

Standby

release si

nal

Internal bus

IE PR ISPMK

IF Priority controller Vector table

address

generator

Standby

release si

nal

Interrupt

request

Sampling

clock

Edge

detector

Sampling clock

select register

(SCS)

External interrupt mode

478

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function (2/2)

(D) External maskable interrupt (except INTP0)

(E) Software interrupt

Remark IF: Interrupt request flag

IE: Interrupt enable flag

ISP: Inservice priority flag

MK: Interrupt mask flag

PR: Priority specification flag

External interrupt

mode register

(INTM0, INTM1)

Edge

detector

Interrupt

request

IE PR ISPMK

IF Priority controller Vector table

address

generator

Standby

release signal

Internal bus

Priority controller Vector table

address

generator

Interrupt

request

479

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

21.3 Interrupt Function Control Registers

The following six types of registers are used to control the interrupt functions.

•Interrupt request flag register (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L)

•Interrupt mask flag register (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L)

•Priority specification flag register (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L)

•External interrupt mode register (INTM0, INTM1)

•Sampling clock select register (SCS)

•Program status word (PSW)

Table 21-2 gives a listing of interrupt request flags, interrupt mask flags, and priority specification flags

corresponding to interrupt request sources.

Table 21-2. Various Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources

Interrupt Source Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag

INTWDT TMIF4 IF0L TMMK4 MK0L TMPR4 PR0L

INTP0 PIF0 PMK0 PPR0

INTP1 PIF1 PMK1 PPR1

INTP2 PIF2 PMK2 PPR2

INTP3 PIF3 PMK3 PPR3

INTP4 PIF4 PMK4 PPR4

INTP5 PIF5 PMK5 PPR5

INTCSI0 CSIIF0 IF0H CSIMK0 MK0H CSIPR0 PR0H

INTCSI1 CSIIF1 CSIMK1 CSIPR1

INTSER SERIF SERMK SERPR

INTSR/INTCSI2 SRIF SRMK SRPR

INTST STIF STMK STPR

INTTM3 TMIF3 TMMK3 TMPR3

INTTM00 TMIF00 TMMK00 TMPR00

INTTM01 TMIF01 TMMK01 TMPR01

INTTM1 TMIF1 IF1L TMMK1 MK1L TMPR1 PR1L

INTTM2 TMIF2 TMMK2 TMPR2

INTAD ADIF ADMK ADPR

480

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Note WTIF is the test input flag. A vectored interrupt request is not generated.

Cautions 1. The TMIF4 flag is R/W enabled only when the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer.

If the watchdog timer is used in watchdog timer mode 1, clear the TMIF4 flag to 0.

2. Be sure to clear IF0L bit 7 and IF1L bits 3 to 6 to 0.

3. When an interrupt is acknowledged, the interrupt request flag is automatically cleared,

and then servicing of the interrupt routine is started.

(1) Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L)

The interrupt request flag is set to 1 when the corresponding interrupt request is generated or an instruction

is executed. It is cleared to 0 when an instruction is executed upon acknowledgment of an interrupt request

or upon application of RESET input.

IF0L, IF0H, and IF1L are set with a 1-bit or an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If IF0L and IF0H are

used as the 16-bit register IF0, use a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction for setting.

RESET input clears these registers to 00H.

Figure 21-2. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Register

Symbol

IF0L

<6>

PIF5

<5>

PIF4

<4>

PIF3

<3>

PIF2

<2>

PIF1

<1>

PIF0

<0>

TMIF4

Address

FFE0H 00H

After reset R/W

R/W

× × IF×

Interrupt request flag

No interrupt request signal

Interrupt request signal is generated;

interrupt request state

<7>

TMIF01

IF0H

<6>

TMIF00

<5>

TMIF3

<4>

STIF

<3>

SRIF

<2>

SERIF

<1>

CSIIF1

<0>

CSIIF0

<7>

WTIF

Note

IF1L

<2>

ADIF

<1>

TMIF2

<0>

TMIF1

FFE1H 00H R/W

FFE2H 00H R/W

481

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Note WTMK controls standby mode release enable/disable; it does not control the interrupt function.

Cautions 1. If the TMMK4 flag is read when the watchdog timer is used in watchdog timer mode 1,

the MK0 value becomes undefined.

2. Because port 0 also functions as an external interrupt request input, when the output

level is changed by specifying the output mode of the port function, an interrupt request

flag is set. Therefore, the interrupt mask flag should be set to 1 before using the output

mode.

3. Be sure to set MK0L bit 7 and MK1L bits 3 to 6 to 1.

(2) Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L)

The interrupt mask flag is used to enable/disable the corresponding maskable interrupt service and to set

standby clear enable/disable.

MK0L, MK0H, and MK1L are set with a 1-bit or an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If MK0L and MK0H

are used as the 16-bit register MK0, use a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction for setting.

RESET input sets these registers to FFH.

Figure 21-3. Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Register

Symbol

MK0L

<6>

PMK5

<5>

PMK4

<4>

PMK3

<3>

PMK2

<2>

PMK

<1>

PMK

<0>

TMMK4

Address

FFE4H FFH

After reset R/W

R/W

× ×

Interrupt servicing control

Interrupt servicing enabled

Interrupt servicing disabled

<7>

TMMK01

MK0H

<6>

TMMK00

<5>

TMMK3

<4>

STMK

<3>

SRMK

<2>

SERMK

<1>

CSIMK1

<0>

CSIMK0

<7>

WTMKNote

MK1L

<2>

ADMK

<1>

TMMK2

<0>

TMMK1

FFE5H FFH R/W

FFE6H FFH R/W

482

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Cautions 1. If the watchdog timer is used in watchdog timer mode 1, set the TMPR4 flag to 1.

2. Be sure to set PR0L bit 7 and PR1L bits 3 to 7 to 1.

(3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L)

The priority specification flags are used to set the corresponding maskable interrupt priorities.

PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L are set with a 1-bit or an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If PR0L and PR0H

are used as the 16-bit register PR0, use a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction for setting.

RESET input sets these registers to FFH.

Figure 21-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Register

Symbol

PR0L

<6>

PPR5

<5>

PPR4

<4>

PPR3

<3>

PPR2

<2>

PPR1

<1>

PPR0

<0>

TMPR4

Address

FFE8H FFH

After reset R/W

R/W

Priority level selection

High priority level

Low priority level

<7>

TMPR01

PR0H

<6>

TMPR00

<5>

TMPR3

<4>

STPR

<3>

SRPR

<2>

SERPR

<1>

CSIPR1

<0>

CSIPR0

1PR1L

<2>

ADPR

<1>

TMPR2

<0>

TMPR1

FFE9H FFH R/W

FFEAH FFH R/W

× ×

483

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) External interrupt mode registers (INTM0, INTM1)

These registers set the valid edge for INTP0 to INTP5, TI00, and TI01.

INTM0 specifies the valid edges of interrupt pins INTP0 to INTP2, TI00, and TI01, and INTM1 specifies the

valid edges of INTP3 to INTP5.

INTM0 and INTM1 are set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears these registers to 00H.

Figure 21-5. Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0

Caution When using the TI00/P00/INTP0 and TI01/P01/INTP1 pins as timer input pins (TI00 and

TI01), stop the operation of 16-bit timer 0 by clearing bits 1 to 3 (TMC01 to TMC03) of

the 16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0) to 0, 0, 0, before setting the valid edge of

TI00 and TI01. The valid edge is set by bits 2 and 3 (ES10 and ES11) of external interrupt

mode register 0 (INTM0). When using the TI00/P00/INTP0 and TI01/P01/INTP1 pins as

external interrupt input pins (INTP0 and INTP1), the valid edge of INTP0 and INTP1 may

be set while 16-bit timer 0 is operating.

Address

FFECH 00H

After reset R/W

R/W

INTP0/TI00 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES11

ES31

Symbol

INTM0

ES30

ES21

ES20

ES11

ES10

INTP1/TI01 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES21

ES20

INTP2 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES31

ES30

484

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-6. Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 1

Address

FFEDH 00H

After reset R/W

R/W

INTP3 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES41

Symbol

INTM1

ES61

ES60

ES51

ES50

ES41

ES40

INTP4 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES51

ES50

INTP5 valid edge selection

Falling edge

Rising edge

Setting prohibited

Both rising and falling edges

ES61

ES60

485

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Caution fXX/2N is the clock supplied to the CPU and fXX/25, fXX/26, and fXX/27 are clocks supplied to the

peripheral hardware. fXX/2N stops in the HALT mode.

Remarks 1. N: Value (N = 0 to 4) of bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) of processor clock control register (PCC)

2. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

3. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

4. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

5. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

(5) Sampling clock select register (SCS)

This register is used to set the clock for sampling the valid edge input to INTP0. When remote controlled data

reception is carried out using INTP0, digital noise is eliminated using the sampling clock.

SCS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears SCS to 00H.

Figure 21-7. Format of Sampling Clock Select Register

Address

FF47H 00H

After reset R/W

R/W

INTP0 sampling clock selection

fXX/2N

fXX/27

fXX/25

fXX/26

SCS1

Symbol

SCS

SCS1

SCS0

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

fX/25 (156.3 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/28 (19.5 kHz)

fX/26 (78.1 kHz)

fX/27 (39.1 kHz)

486

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) When input is equal to or twice the sampling cycle (tSMP)

When the sampled INTP0 input level is the active level twice in succession, the noise eliminator sets the

interrupt request flag (PIF0) to 1.

Figure 21-8 shows the I/O timing of the noise eliminator.

Figure 21-8. Noise Eliminator I/O Timing (During Rising Edge Detection)

(a) When input is less than the sampling cycle (tSMP)

SMP

Sampling clock

INTP0

PIF0 “L”

Because the INTP0 level is not high when it is sampled,

PIF0 output remains at low level.

SMP

Sampling clock

INTP0

PIF0

Because the INTP0 level is high twice in succession,

the PIF0 fla

is set to 1.

SMP

Sampling clock

INTP0

PIF0

Because the sampled INTP0 level is high twice in succession in <2>,

the PIF0 fla

is set to 1.

<1> <2>

487

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(6) Program status word (PSW)

The program status word is a register used to hold the instruction execution result and the current status of

an interrupt request. The IE flag, which sets maskable interrupt enable/disable, and the ISP flag, which controls

multiple interrupt servicing, are mapped to the PSW.

Besides 8-bit unit read/write, this register can also be manipulated by a bit manipulation instructions and

dedicated instructions (EI and DI). When a vectored interrupt request is acknowledged or when the BRK

instruction is executed, the contents of the PSW are automatically saved to the stack and the IE flag is reset

to 0. If a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents of the priority specification flag of the

acknowledged interrupt are transferred to the ISP flag. The contents of the PSW can also be saved into the

stack with the PUSH PSW instruction. The contents are reset from the stack with the RETI, RETB, and POP

PSW instructions.

RESET input sets the PSW to 02H.

Figure 21-9. Format of Program Status Word

IEPSW

RBS1

RBS0

ISP

CY 02H

After reset

ISP

Used when normal instruction is executed

Priority of interrupt currently being received

High-priority interrupt servicing

(low-priority interrupts disabled)

1Interrupt request not acknowledged or low-priority

interrupt servicing

(all maskable interrupts enabled)

IE Interrupt request acknowledge enable/disable

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

488

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

21.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations

21.4.1 Non-maskable interrupt request acknowledgment operation

A non-maskable interrupt request is unconditionally acknowledged even if interrupt requests are in an acknowl-

edgment disabled state. It does not undergo interrupt priority control and has the highest priority of all interrupts.

If a non-maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents of the acknowledged interrupt are saved in the

stack, PSW and PC, in that order, the IE and ISP flags are reset to 0, and the vector table contents are loaded into

the PC and branched.

A new non-maskable interrupt request generated during execution of a non-maskable interrupt servicing program

is acknowledged after the current execution of the non-maskable interrupt servicing program is terminated (following

RETI instruction execution) and one main routine instruction is executed. If a new non-maskable interrupt request

is generated twice or more during non-maskable interrupt service program execution, only one non-maskable interrupt

request is acknowledged after termination of the non-maskable interrupt service program execution.

Figure 21-10 shows the flowchart illustrating how a non-maskable interrupt request occurs and is acknowledged.

Figure 21-11 shows the acknowledgment timing of a non-maskable interrupt request. Figure 21-12 shows the

acknowledgment operation of multiple non-maskable interrupt requests.

489

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-10. Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Occurrence and Acknowledgment Flowchart

WDTM: Watchdog timer mode register

WDT: Watchdog timer

Figure 21-11. Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing

WDTM4 = 1

(with watchdog timer

mode selected)?

Overflow in WDT?

WDTM3 = 0

(with non-maskable

interrupt selected)?

Interrupt request generation

WDT interrupt servicing?

Interrupt control

Interrupt

servicing start

Interrupt request

held pending

Reset processing

Interval timer

Start

Yes

Instruction Instruction CPU instruction

TMIF4

PSW and PC save, jump

to interrupt servicing

Interrupt servicing

program

An interrupt request generated during this period is acknowledged

at the timing marked .

TMIF4 : Watchdog timer interrupt request flag

490

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-12. Non-Maskable Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Operation

(a) If a new non-maskable interrupt request is generated during

non-maskable interrupt servicing program execution

(b) If two non-maskable interrupt requests are generated during

non-maskable interrupt servicing program execution

Main routine

NMI request <1>

1 instruction

execution

NMI request <2>

NMI request <1> execution

NMI request <2> held pending

Pending NMI request <2> serviced

Main routine

NMI request <1>

1 instruction

execution

NMI request <2>

NMI request <1> execution

NMI request <2> held pending

NMI request <3> held pending

Pending NMI request <2> serviced

NMI request <3>

NMI request <3> is not acknowledged

(NMI request is acknowledged only once

even if it occurs twice or more).

491

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

21.4.2 Maskable interrupt request acknowledgment operation

A maskable interrupt request becomes acknowledgeable when the corresponding interrupt request flag is set to

1 and the corresponding interrupt mask (MK) flag is cleared to 0. A vectored interrupt request is acknowledged in

an interrupt enabled state (with the IE flag set to 1). However, a low-priority interrupt is not acknowledged during

high-priority interrupt servicing (with the ISP flag reset to 0).

Wait times from maskable interrupt request generation to interrupt servicing are shown in Table 21-3.

For the timing to acknowledge an interrupt request, see Figures 21-14 and 21-15.

Table 21-3. Times from Maskable Interrupt Request Generation to Interrupt Servicing

Minimum Time Maximum TimeNote

When ××PR = 0 7 clocks 32 clocks

When ××PR = 1 8 clocks 33 clocks

Note If an interrupt request is generated just before a divide instruction, the wait time becomes the

maximum.

Remark 1 clock: (fCPU: CPU clock)

If two or more maskable interrupt requests are generated simultaneously, the request specified as higher priority

with the priority specification flag is acknowledged first. If two or more requests specified as the same priority by the

interrupt priority specification flag are generated simultaneously, the one with the higher default priority is acknowl-

edged first.

Any pending interrupt requests are acknowledged when they become acknowledgeable.

Figure 21-13 shows an interrupt request acknowledgment algorithm.

If a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents of acknowledged interrupt are saved in the stack,

program status word (PSW) and program counter (PC), in that order, the IE flag is reset to 0, and the acknowledged

interrupt priority specification flag contents are transferred to the ISP flag. Further, the vector table data determined

for each interrupt request is loaded into the PC and branched.

Restoration from the interrupt is possible with the RETI instruction.

fCPU

492

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-13. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Processing Algorithm

××IF: Interrupt request flag

××MK: Interrupt mask flag

××PR: Priority specification flag

IE: Flag that controls maskable interrupt request acknowledge (1 = enable, 0 = disable)

ISP: Flag indicating priority of interrupt currently being serviced (0 = interrupt with high priority is being

serviced.

1 = interrupt request is not acknowledged or interrupt with low priority being serviced).

Start

× × IF = 1?

× × MK = 0?

× × PR = 0?

Any

simultaneously

generated ××PR = 0

interrupt

requests?

Any

simultaneously

generated high-priority

interrupt

requests?

IE = 1?

ISP = 1?

Vectored interrupt

servicing

Interrupt request

held pending

Interrupt request

held pending

Interrupt request

held pending

Interrupt request

held pending

Interrupt request

held pending

Interrupt request

held pending

Interrupt request

held pending Vectored interrupt

servicing

Any high-

priority interrupt among

simultaneously generated

××

PR = 0 interrupt

requests?

IE = 1?

Yes (high priority)

Yes

Yes (Interrupt request

generation)

Yes

No (low priority)

Yes

493

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-14. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Minimum Time)

Remark 1 clock: (fCPU: CPU clock)

Figure 21-15. Interrupt Request Acknowledgment Timing (Maximum Time)

Remark 1 clock: (fCPU: CPU clock)

fCPU

Instruction Instruction

PSW and PC save,

jump to interrupt

servicing

6 clocks

Interrupt

servicing

program

8 clocks

7 clocks

CPU processing

× × IF

(× × PR = 1)

× × IF

(× × PR = 0)

Instruction Divide instruction

PSW and PC save,

jump to interrupt

servicing

6 clocks

Interrupt

servicing

program

33 clocks

32 clocks

CPU processing

× × IF

(× × PR = 1)

× × IF

(× × PR = 0)

25 clocks

494

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

21.4.3 Software interrupt request acknowledgment operation

A software interrupt request is acknowledged by BRK instruction execution. Software interrupts cannot be

disabled.

If a software interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents of the acknowledged interrupt are saved in the stack,

program status word (PSW) and program counter (PC), in that order, the IE flag is reset to 0 and the contents of the

vector tables (003EH and 003FH) are loaded into the PC and branched.

Restoration from the software interrupt is possible with the RETB instruction.

Caution Do not use the RETI instruction for restoring from the software interrupt.

21.4.4 Multiple interrupt servicing

Acknowledging another interrupt request while one interrupt is being serviced is called multiple interrupt servicing.

Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur unless interrupt requests are enabled (IE = 1) (except the non-maskable

interrupt). When an interrupt request is acknowledged, the other interrupts are disabled (IE = 0). To enable multiple

interrupt servicing, therefore, the IE flag must be set to 1 by executing the EI instruction during interrupt servicing

and interrupts must be enabled. Even if interrupt requests are enabled, multiple interrupt servicing may not be

possible. However, this is controlled by the programmable priority.

An interrupt has two types of priorities: the default priority and the programmable priority. Multiple interrupt servicing

is controlled by the programmable priority.

In the EI status, if an interrupt request with a priority that is the same or higher than that of the interrupt currently

being serviced is generated, the interrupt is acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. If an interrupt request with

a priority lower than that of the interrupt currently being serviced is generated, the interrupt is not acknowledged for

multiple interrupt servicing.

If interrupts are disabled, or if multiple interrupt servicing is not enabled because the interrupt has a low priority,

the interrupt is held pending. After the servicing of the current interrupt has been completed, and after one instruction

of the main processing has been executed, the pending interrupt is acknowledged.

Multiple interrupt servicing is not enabled while a non-maskable interrupt is being serviced.

Table 21-4 shows the interrupt requests enabled for multiple interrupt servicing. Figure 21-16 shows multiple

interrupt servicing examples.

Table 21-4. Interrupt Request Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing During Interrupt Servicing

Non-maskable Maskable Interrupt Request

Interrupt PR = 0 PR = 1

Request IE = 1 IE = 0 IE = 1 IE = 0

Non-maskable interrupt D D D D D

Maskable interrupt ISP = 0 E E D D D

ISP = 1 E E D E D

Software interrupt E E D E D

Remarks 1. E: Multiple interrupt servicing enabled

2. D: Multiple interrupt servicing disabled

3. ISP and IE are flags contained in the PSW

ISP = 0: An interrupt with a higher priority is being serviced

ISP = 1: An interrupt request is not acknowledged or an interrupt with a lower

priority is being serviced

IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment is disabled

IE = 1: Interrupt request acknowledgment is enabled

4. PR is a flag contained in PR0L, PR0H, and PR1L

PR = 0: Higher priority level

PR = 1: Lower priority level

Interrupt Being Serviced

Multiple Interrupt

Request

495

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-16. Multiple Interrupt Servicing Example (1/2)

Example 1. Multiple interrupt servicing occurs twice

Two interrupt requests, INTyy and INTzz, are acknowledged while the INTxx interrupt is being serviced. Before

each interrupt request is acknowledged, the EI instruction is always issued and interrupt requests are enabled.

Example 2. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur because of interrupt priority

INTyy, which occurs while INTxx is being serviced is not acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing because

the priority of INTyy is lower than that of INTxx. INTyy is held pending and is acknowledged after one instruction

of the main processing has been executed.

PR = 0: High-priority interrupt

PR = 1: Low-priority interrupt

IE = 0: Interrupt acknowledgment disabled

Main processing

INTxx

(PR = 1)

INTyy

(PR = 0)

IE = 0

RETI

INTxx

servicing

INTzz

(PR = 0)

IE = 0

RETI

INTyy

servicing

IE = 0

RETI

INTzz

servicing

Main processing INTxx

servicing

INTyy

servicing

INTxx

(PR = 0)

1 instruction

execution IE = 0

INTyy

(PR = 1)

EI IE = 0

RETI

496

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 21-16. Multiple Interrupt Servicing Example (2/2)

Example 3. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur because interrupts are not enabled

In the servicing of INTxx, other interrupts are not enabled (the EI instruction is not executed). Therefore, INTyy

is not acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. This interrupt is held pending and acknowledged after one

instruction of the main processing has been executed.

PR = 0: High-priority interrupt

IE = 0: Interrupt acknowledgment disabled

Main processing INTxx

servicing

INTyy

servicing

INTxx

(PR = 0)

1 instruction

execution

IE = 0

INTyy

(PR = 0)

IE = 0

RETI

497

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

21.4.5 Interrupt request pending

For some instructions, even if an interrupt is generated while that instruction is being executed, the interrupt is

held pending until execution of the next instruction is completed. The instructions that hold interrupt requests pending

(interrupt request pending) are shown below.

•MOV PSW, #byte

•MOV A, PSW

•MOV PSW, A

•MOV1 PSW.bit, CY

•MOV1 CY, PSW.bit

•AND1 CY, PSW.bit

•OR1 CY, PSW.bit

•XOR1 CY, PSW.bit

•SET1 PSW.bit

•CLR1 PSW.bit

•RETB

•RETI

•PUSH PSW

•POP PSW

•BT PSW.bit, $addr16

•BF PSW.bit, $addr16

•BTCLR PSW.bit, $addr16

•EI

•DI

•Manipulation instructions for IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, INTM0, INTM1

registers

Caution The BRK instruction is not an interrupt request pending instruction. However, the IE flag is

cleared to 0 by a software interrupt that is started by BRK instruction execution. Thus, even if

a maskable interrupt request is generated during BRK instruction execution, that interrupt

request is not acknowledged. However, a non-maskable interrupt request is acknowledged.

Figure 21-17 shows the timing at which an interrupt request is held pending.

Figure 21-17. Interrupt Request Pending Timing

Remarks 1. Instruction N: Instruction that holds interrupts requests pending

2. Instruction M: Instructions other than instruction N

3. The ××PR (priority level) values do not affect the operation of ××IF (interrupt request).

CPU processing

× × IF

Instruction N Instruction M Save PSW and PC,

jump to interrupt servicing

Interrupt servicing

program

498

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

21.5 Test Function

When the watch timer overflows and the port 4 falling edge is detected, the internal test input flag is set to 1, and

the standby release signal is generated.

Unlike the interrupt function, vectored processing is not performed.

There are two test input sources as shown in Table 21-5. The basic configuration is shown in Figure 21-18.

Table 21-5. Test Input Sources

Test Input Sources Internal/

Name Trigger External

INTWT Watch timer overflow Internal

INTPT4 Falling edge detection at port 4 External

Figure 21-18. Basic Configuration of Test Function

Remark IF: Test input flag

MK: Test mask flag

21.5.1 Registers controlling test function

The test function is controlled by the following three registers.

•Interrupt request flag register 1L (IF1L)

•Interrupt mask flag register 1L (MK1L)

•Key return mode register (KRM)

The names of the test input flags and test mask flags corresponding to the test input signals are listed in Table

21-6.

Table 21-6. Flags Corresponding to Test Input Signals

Test Input Signal Name Test Input Flag Test Mask Flag

INTWT WTIF WTMK

INTPT4 KRIF KRMK

Internal bus

Test input

signal

Standby

release signal

499

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Interrupt request flag register 1L (IF1L)

This register indicates whether a watch timer overflow is detected or not.

IF1L is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears IF1L to 00H.

Figure 21-19. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Register 1L

Caution Be sure to clear bits 3 to 6 to 0.

(2) Interrupt mask flag register 1L (MK1L)

This register is used to set the standby mode enable/disable at the time the standby mode is released by the

watch timer.

MK1L is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets MK1L to FFH.

Figure 21-20. Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Register 1L

Caution Be sure to set bits 3 to 6 to 1.

<7>

WTIF

Symbol

IF1L

<2>

ADIF

<1>

TMIF2

<0>

TMIF1

Address

FFE2H 00H

After reset R/W

R/W

Watch timer overflow detection flag

Not detected

Detected

WTIF

<7>

WTMK

Symbol

MK1L

<2>

ADMK

<1>

TMMK2

<0>

TMMK1

Address

FFE6H FFH

After reset R/W

R/W

Standby mode control by watch timer

Releasing the standby mode enabled

Releasing the standby mode disabled

WTMK

500

CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT AND TEST FUNCTIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Key return mode register (KRM)

This register is used to set enable/disable of standby function clear by the key return signal (port 4 falling edge

detection).

KRM is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets KRM to 02H.

Figure 21-21. Format of Key Return Mode Register

Caution When port 4 falling edge detection is used, be sure to clear KRIF to 0 (it is not cleared to 0

automatically).

21.5.2 Test input signal acknowledgment operation

(1) Internal test signal (INTWT)

INTWT is generated when the watch timer overflows, and sets the WTIF flag. Unless interrupts are masked

by the interrupt mask flag (WTMK) at this time, the standby release signal is generated.

The watch function is realized by checking the WTIF flag at a shorter cycle than the watch timer overflow cycle.

(2) External test input signal (INTPT4)

INTPT4 is generated when a falling edge is input to the port 4 pins (P40 to P47), and KRIF is set. Unless

interrupts are masked by the interrupt mask flag (KRMK) at this time, the standby release signal is generated.

If port 4 is used as a key matrix return signal input, whether or not a key input has been applied can be checked

from the KRIF status.

Symbol

KRM

<1>

KRMK

<0>

KRIF

Address

FFF6H 02H

After reset R/W

R/W

Key return signal

Not detected

Detected (port 4 falling edge detection)

KRIF

Standby mode control by key return signal

Standby mode release enabled

Standby mode release disabled

KRMK

501User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

22.1 External Device Expansion Function

The external device expansion function connects external devices to areas other than the internal ROM, RAM,

and SFR. Ports 4 to 6 are used for connection of external devices. Ports 4 to 6 control addresses/data, the read/

write strobe, wait, address strobe etc.

Table 22-1. Pin Functions in External Memory Expansion Mode

Pin Function When External Device Is Connected Alternate Function

Name Function

AD0 to AD7 Multiplexed address/data bus P40 to P47

A8 to A15 Address bus P50 to P57

RD Read strobe signal P64

WR Write strobe signal P65

WAIT Wait signal P66

ASTB Address strobe signal P67

Table 22-2. State of Port 4 to 6 Pins in External Memory Expansion Mode

Ports and Bits Port 4 Port 5 Port 6

0 to 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 to 3 4 to 7

Single-chip mode Port Port Port Port

256-byte expansion mode Address/data Port Port RD, WR, WAIT, ASTB

4 KB expansion mode Address/data Address Port Port RD, WR, WAIT, ASTB

16 KB expansion mode Address/data Address Port Port RD, WR, WAIT, ASTB

Full-address mode Address/data Address Port RD, WR, WAIT, ASTB

Caution When the external wait function is not used, the WAIT pin can be used as a port in all modes.

External

Expansion Modes

502

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Memory maps when using the external device expansion function are as follows.

Figure 22-1. Memory Map When Using External Device Expansion Function (1/3)

(a) Memory map of

PD780053 and 780053Y, (b) Memory map of

PD780054 and 780054Y,

and

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, and

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY,

78F0058, and 78F0058Y with internal ROM 78F0058, and 78F0058Y with internal ROM

(flash memory) set to 24 KB (flash memory) set to 32 KB

FFFFH

SFR

Internal high-speed RAM

FF00H

FEFFH

FB00H

FAFFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FA80H

FA7FH

A000H

9FFFH

0000H

Reserved

Internal buffer RAM

Reserved

Full-address mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 111)

Single-chip mode

16 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 101)

7000H

6FFFH

6100H

60FFH

6000H

5FFFH

4 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 100)

256-byte expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 011)

FFFFH

SFR

Internal high-speed RAM

FF00H

FEFFH

FB00H

FAFFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FA80H

FA7FH

C000H

BFFFH

0000H

Reserved

Internal buffer RAM

Reserved

Full-address mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 111)

Single-chip mode

16 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 101)

9000H

8FFFH

8100H

80FFH

8000H

7FFFH

4 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 100)

256-byte expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 011)

503

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 22-1. Memory Map When Using External Device Expansion Function (2/3)

PD780055 and 780055Y, (d) Memory map of

PD780056 and 780056Y,

and

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, and

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY,

78F0058, and 78F0058Y with internal ROM 78F0058, and 78F0058Y with internal ROM

(flash memory) set to 40 KB (flash memory) set to 48 KB

FFFFH

SFR

Internal high-speed RAM

FF00H

FEFFH

FB00H

FAFFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FA80H

FA7FH

E000H

DFFFH

0000H

Reserved

Internal buffer RAM

Reserved

Full-address mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 111)

Single-chip mode

16 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 101)

B000H

AFFFH

A100H

A0FFH

A000H

9FFFH

4 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 100)

256-byte expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 011)

FFFFH

SFR

Internal high-speed RAM

FF00H

FEFFH

FB00H

FAFFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FAC0H

FABFH

FA80H

FA7FH

D000H

CFFFH

C100H

C0FFH

C000H

BFFFH

0000H

Reserved

Internal buffer RAM

Reserved

Full-address mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 111)

16 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 101)

4 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 100)

Single-chip mode

256-byte expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 011)

504

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 22-1. Memory Map When Using External Device Expansion Function (3/3)

(e)

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, 78F0058, (f)

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, 78F0058,

78F0058Y Memory map when internal ROM 78F0058Y Memory map when internal ROM

(flash memory) size is 56 KB (flash memory) size is 60 KB

Caution When the internal ROM (flash memory) size is 60 KB, the area from F000H to F3FFH cannot be

used. F000H to F3FFH can be used as external memory by setting the internal ROM (flash

memory) size to 56 KB or less using the internal memory size switching register (IMS).

SFR

Internal high-speed RAM

FF00H

FEFFH

FB00H

FAFFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FAC0H

FABFH

F800H

F7FFH

F400H

F3FFH

F000H

EFFFH

E100H

F0FFH

E000H

DFFFH

0000H

Reserved

Internal buffer RAM

Reserved

Internal expansion RAM

Full-address mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 111)

16 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 101)

4 KB expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 100)

256-byte expansion mode

(when MM2 to MM0 = 011)

Single-chip mode

FFFFH

SFR

Internal high-speed RAM

FF00H

FEFFH

FB00H

FAFFH

FAE0H

FADFH

FAC0H

FABFH

F800H

F7FFH

F400H

F3FFH

F000H

EFFFH

0000H

Reserved

Internal buffer RAM

Reserved

Internal expansion RAM

Single-chip mode

Reserved

FFFFH

505

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

22.2 External Device Expansion Function Control Register

The external device expansion function is controlled by the memory expansion mode register (MM) and internal

memory size switching register (IMS).

(1) Memory expansion mode register (MM)

MM sets the wait count and external expansion area, and also sets the input/output mode of port 4.

MM is set with a 1-bit memory or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets MM to 10H.

Figure 22-2. Format of Memory Expansion Mode Register

Note The full-address mode allows external expansion to the entire 64 KB address space except for the

internal ROM, RAM, and SFR areas and the reserved areas.

Remark P60 to P63 are used as port pins without regard to the mode (single-chip mode or memory expansion

mode).

Symbol

PW1

PW0

MM2

MM1

MM0

Address

FFF8H 10H

After reset R/W

R/W

MM2 MM1 MM0 Single-chip/

memory expansion

mode selection

P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67 pin state

P40 to P47 P50 to P53 P54, P55 P56, P57 P64 to P67

000

001

011

100

101

111

Single-chip mode

256-byte

mode

4 KB

mode

16 KB

mode

Full-

address

modeNote

Memory

expansion

mode

Port

mode

Input

Output

Port mode

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A11

A12, A13

A14, A15

P64 = RD

P65 = WR

P66 = WAIT

P67 = ASTB

Other than above Setting prohibited

PW1 PW0

Wait control

No wait

Wait (one wait state insertion)

Setting prohibited

Wait control by external wait pin

506

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Internal memory size switching register (IMS)

This register specifies the internal memory size. In principle, use IMS in the default status. However, when

using the external device expansion function with the

PD780058, 780058B, and 780058BY, set IMS so that

the internal ROM capacity is 56 KB or less.

IMS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets IMS to the value indicated in Table 22-3.

Figure 22-3. Format of Internal Memory Size Switching Register

Note The values after reset depend on the product (see Table 22-3).

Table 22-3. Values After Internal Memory Size Switching Register Is Reset

Part Number Reset Value

PD780053, 780053Y C6H

PD780054, 780054Y C8H

PD780055, 780055Y CAH

PD780056, 780056Y CCH

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY CFH

48 KB

56 KB

RAM2

Symbol

IMS

RAM1

RAM0

ROM3

ROM2

ROM1

ROM0

Address

FFF0H Note

After reset R/W

R/W

Internal ROM size selectionROM3

60 KB1

ROM2

ROM1

ROM0

Setting prohibitedOther than above

Internal high-speed RAM size selection

RAM2 RAM1 RAM0

1,024 bytes110

Setting prohibitedOther than above

32 KB

40 KB

0 24 KB110

507

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

22.3 External Device Expansion Function Timing

The timing control signal output pins in the external memory expansion mode are as follows.

(1) RD pin (alternate function: P64)

Read strobe signal output pin. The read strobe signal is output upon the occurrence of data accesses and

instruction fetches from external memory.

During internal memory access, the read strobe signal is not output (maintains high level).

(2) WR pin (alternate function: P65)

Write strobe signal output pin. The write strobe signal is output upon the occurrence of data access to external

memory.

During internal memory access, the write strobe signal is not output (maintains high level).

(3) WAIT pin (alternate function: P66)

External wait signal input pin. When the external wait is not used, the WAIT pin can be used as an I/O port.

During internal memory access, the external wait signal is ignored.

(4) ASTB pin (alternate function: P67)

Address strobe signal output pin. The ASTB signal is output without regard to data accesses and instruction

fetches from external memory. The ASTB signal is also output when the internal memory is accessed.

(5) AD0 to AD7, A8 to A15 pins (alternate function: P40 to P47, P50 to P57)

Address/data signal output pin. A valid signal is output or input during data accesses and instruction fetches

from external memory.

These signals change when the internal memory is accessed (output values are undefined).

The timing charts are shown in Figures 22-4 to 22-7.

508

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 22-4. Instruction Fetch from External Memory

(a) No wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 0) setting

(b) Wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 1) setting

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Lower address Operation code

Higher address

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Lower address Operation code

Higher address

Internal wait signal

(

1-clock wait

)

ASTB

Lower address Operation code

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15 Higher address

WAIT

509

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 22-5. External Memory Read Timing

(a) No wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 0) setting

(b) Wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 1) setting

Higher address

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Lower address Read data

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Lower address

Read data

Higher address

Internal wait signal

(1-clock wait)

ASTB

Lower address

Read dataAD0 to AD7

A8 to A15 Higher address

WAIT

510

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 22-6. External Memory Write Timing

(a) No wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 0) setting

(b) Wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 1) setting

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Lower address

Write data

Hi-Z

Higher address

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Lower address

Write data

Higher address

Internal wait signal

(

1-clock wait

)

Hi-Z

ASTB

Higher address

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

WAIT

Hi-Z

Lower address

Write data

511

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 22-7. External Memory Read Modify Write Timing

(a) No wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 0) setting

(b) Wait (PW1, PW0 = 0, 1) setting

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Lower address

Write data

Higher address

Hi-Z

Read data

Lower address

Higher address

Internal wait signal

(

1-clock wait

)

Hi-Z

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

Write dataRead data

ASTB

Higher address

AD0 to AD7

A8 to A15

WAIT

Hi-Z

Lower address

Write dataRead data

512

CHAPTER 22 EXTERNAL DEVICE EXPANSION FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

22.4 Example of Connection with Memory

Figure 22-8 shows an example of the connection between the

PD780054 and external memory. SRAM is used

as the external memory in this diagram. In addition, the external device expansion function is used in the full-address

mode, and the addresses from 0000H to 7FFFH (32 KB) are allocated to internal ROM, and the addresses after 8000H

to SRAM.

Figure 22-8. Example of Connection Between

PD780054 and Memory

PD43256B

A0 to A14

I/O1 to I/O8

Address

bus

PD780054

74HC573

D0 to D7

Q0 to Q7

A8 to A14

ASTB

AD0 to AD7

Data

bus

513User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

23.1 Standby Function and Configuration

23.1.1 Standby function

The standby function is designed to decrease the power consumption of the system. The following two modes

are available.

(1) HALT mode

HALT instruction execution sets the HALT mode. The HALT mode is used to stop the CPU operation clock.

The system clock oscillator continues oscillating. In this mode, the current consumption cannot be decreased

as much as in the STOP mode, but the HALT mode is effective for restarting immediately upon interrupt request

and to carry out intermittent operations such as in watch applications.

(2) STOP mode

STOP instruction execution sets the STOP mode. In the STOP mode, the main system clock oscillator stops

and the whole system stops. The CPU current consumption can be considerably decreased.

Data memory low-voltage hold (down to VDD = 1.8 V) is possible. Thus, the STOP mode is effective for holding

data memory contents with ultra-low current consumption. Because this mode can be cleared upon interrupt

request, it enables intermittent operations to be carried out.

However, because a wait time is necessary to secure oscillation stabilization after the STOP mode is released,

select the HALT mode if it is necessary to start processing immediately upon interrupt request.

In any mode, all the contents of the registers, flags and data memory just before standby mode is set are held.

The I/O port output latches and output buffer statuses are also held.

Cautions 1. The STOP mode can be used only when the system operates on the main system clock

(subsystem clock oscillation cannot be stopped). The HALT mode can be used with either

the main system clock or the subsystem clock.

2. When shifting to the STOP mode, be sure to stop the peripheral hardware operation before

executing the STOP instruction.

3. The following sequence is recommended for power consumption reduction of the A/D

converter when the standby function is used: first clear bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode

instruction.

514

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

23.1.2 Standby function control register

The wait time after the STOP mode is released upon interrupt request until the oscillation stabilizes is controlled

by the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS).

OSTS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets OSTS to 04H. However, it takes 217/fX, not 218/fX, until the STOP mode is released by RESET

input.

Figure 23-1. Format of Oscillation Stabilizat Time Select Register

Caution The wait time that elapses when the STOP mode is released does not include the time required

for the clock to start oscillation (see “a” in the illustration below) after the STOP mode is released.

The same applies when the STOP mode is released by RESET input and by generation of an

interrupt request.

Remarks 1. fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

2. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

3. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

4. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz

Address

FFFAH 04H

After reset R/W

R/W

Selection of oscillation stabilization

time when STOP mode is released

OSTS2

Symbol

OSTS

OSTS2

OSTS1

OSTS0

Other than above

OSTS1

MCS = 1 MCS = 0

(819 s)

(3.28 ms)

(6.55 ms)

(13.1 ms)

(26.2 ms)

(1.64 ms)

(6.55 ms)

(13.1 ms)

(26.2 ms)

(52.4 ms)

OSTS0

Setting prohibited

STOP mode release

X1 pin voltage

waveform

515

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

23.2 Standby Function Operations

23.2.1 HALT mode

(1) HALT mode setting and operating status

The HALT mode is set by executing the HALT instruction. It can be set when using either the main system

clock or the subsystem clock.

The operating status in the HALT mode is described below.

Table 23-1. HALT Mode Operating Status

Setting of HALT Mode On Execution of HALT Instruction During Main On Execution of HALT Instruction during

System Clock Operation Subsystem Clock Operation

Without subsystem With subsystem When main system clock When main system

Item clockNote 1 clockNote 2 continues oscillation clock stops oscillation

Clock generator Both main system and subsystem clocks can be oscillated. Clock supply to the CPU stops.

CPU Operation stops

Ports (output latches) Status before HALT mode setting is held

16-bit timer/event counter Operable Operable when watch

timer output is selected

as count clock (fXT is

selected as count clock

of watch timer) or when

TI00 is selected

8-bit timer/event counter Operable Operable when TI1 or

TI2 is selected as

count clock

Watch timer Operable when fXX/27 is Operable Operable when fXT is

selected as count clock selected as count clock

Watchdog timer Operable Operation stops

A/D converter Operable Operation stops

D/A converter Operable

Real-time output port Operable

Serial interface Other than Operable Operable when

automatic external SCK is used

transmit/

receive

function

Automatic Operation stops

transmit/

receive

function

External interrupt INTP0 INTP0 is operable when clock supplied for peripheral hardware is selected Operation stops

requests as sampling clock (fXX/25, fXX/26, fXX/27)

INTP1 to INTP5 Operable

Bus line for AD0 to AD7 High impedance

external A0 to A15 Status before HALT mode setting is held

expansion

ASTB Low level

WR, RD High level

WAIT High impedance

Notes 1. Including when an external clock is not supplied

2. Including when an external clock is supplied

516

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) HALT mode release

The HALT mode can be released by the following four types of sources.

(a) Release by unmasked interrupt request

If an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the HALT mode is released. If interrupt request

acknowledgment is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried out. If disabled, the next address

instruction is executed.

Figure 23-2. HALT Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation

Remarks 1. The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request which has released the

standby status is acknowledged.

2. The wait time will be as follows:

• When the program branches to the vector table: 8 to 9 clocks

• When the program does not branch to the vector table: 2 to 3 clocks

(b) Release by non-maskable interrupt request generation

If a non-maskable interrupt request is generated, the HALT mode is released and vectored interrupt

servicing is carried out irrespective of whether interrupt request acknowledgment is enabled or disabled.

If an unmasked test signal is input, the HALT mode is released, and the next address instruction of the

HALT instruction is executed.

HALT

instruction Interrupt

request Wait

Standby

release signal

Operating

mode

Clock

HALT mode Wait

Oscillation

Operating mode

517

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(d) Release by RESET input

If the RESET signal is input, the HALT mode is released. As is the case with a normal reset operation,

the program is executed after branch to the reset vector address.

Figure 23-3. HALT Mode Release by RESET Input

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

Table 23-2. Operation After HALT Mode Release

Release Source MK×× PR×× IE ISP Operation

Maskable interrupt 0 0 0 ×Next address instruction execution

request 001×Interrupt servicing execution

0 1 0 1 Next address instruction execution

01×0

0 1 1 1 Interrupt servicing execution

1×××HALT mode hold

Non-maskable interrupt ––××Interrupt servicing execution

request

Test input 0 –××Next address instruction execution

1–××HALT mode hold

RESET input ––××Reset processing

Remark ×: don’t care

HALT

Instruction

RESET

signal

Operating

mode

Clock

Reset

periodHALT mode

Oscillation

stop

Oscillation

stabilization

wait status

Operating

mode

Oscillation

Wait

(217/fX : 26.2 ms)

518

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

23.2.2 STOP mode

(1) STOP mode setting and operating status

The STOP mode is set by executing the STOP instruction. It can be set only when using the main system

clock.

Cautions 1. When the STOP mode is set, the X2 pin is internally connected to VDD1 via a pull-up resistor

to minimize the leakage current at the crystal oscillator. Thus, do not use the STOP mode

in a system where an external clock is used for the main system clock.

2. Because the interrupt request signal is used to clear the standby mode, if there is an

interrupt source with the interrupt request flag set and the interrupt mask flag reset, the

standby mode is immediately cleared if set. Thus, the STOP mode is reset to the HALT

mode immediately after execution of the STOP instruction. After the wait time set using

the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) elapses, the operating mode is

set.

The operating status in the STOP mode is described below.

Table 23-3. STOP Mode Operating Status

Setting of STOP Mode

With Subsystem Clock Without Subsystem Clock

Item

Clock generator Only main system clock stops oscillation

CPU Operation stops

Ports (output latches) Status before STOP mode setting is held

16-bit timer/event counter Operable when watch timer output is Operation stops

selected as count clock (fXT is selected as

count clock of watch timer)

8-bit timer/event counter Operable when TI1 and TI2 are selected for the count clock

Watch timer Operable when fXT is selected for the Operation stops

count clock

Watchdog timer Operation stops

A/D converter

D/A converter Operable

Real-time output port Operable when external trigger is used or TI1 and TI2 are selected for the 8-bit

timer/event counter count clock

Serial interface Other than Operable when externally supplied clock is specified as the serial clock

automatic

transmit/receive

function and

UART

Automatic Operation stops

transmit/receive

function and

UART

External interrupt INTP0 Not operable

requests INTP1 to INTP5 Operable

Bus line for AD0 to AD7 High impedance

external A0 to A15 Status before STOP mode setting is held

expansion

ASTB Low level

WR, RD High level

WAIT High impedance

519

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) STOP mode release

The STOP mode can be released by the following three types of sources.

(a) Release by unmasked interrupt request

If an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the STOP mode is released. If interrupt request

acknowledgment is enabled after the lapse of oscillation stabilization time, vectored interrupt servicing

is carried out. If interrupt request acknowledgment is disabled, the next address instruction is executed.

Figure 23-4. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation

Remark The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request which has released the standby

status is acknowledged.

(b) Release by unmasked test input

If an unmasked test signal is input, the STOP mode is released. After the lapse of oscillation stabilization

time, the instruction at the next address of the STOP instruction is executed.

STOP

instruction Interrupt

request

Wait

(time set by OSTS)

Oscillation stabilization

wait status

Operating

mode

Oscillation

Operating

mode STOP mode

Oscillation stopOscillation

Standby

release signal

Clock

520

CHAPTER 23 STANDBY FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

If the RESET signal is input, the STOP mode is released and after the lapse of oscillation stabilization

time, a reset operation is carried out.

Figure 23-5. STOP Mode Release by RESET Input

Remarks 1. fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

2. Values in parentheses apply to operation with fX = 5.0 MHz.

Table 23-4. Operation After STOP Mode Release

Release Source MK×× PR×× IE ISP Operation

Maskable interrupt request 0 0 0 ×Next address instruction execution

001×Interrupt servicing execution

0 1 0 1 Next address instruction execution

01×0

0 1 1 1 Interrupt servicing execution

1×× ×STOP mode hold

Test input 0 –××Next address instruction execution

1–××STOP mode hold

RESET input ––××Reset processing

Remark ×: don’t care

RESET

signal

Operating

mode

Clock

Reset

periodSTOP mode

Oscillation stop

Oscillation

stabilization

wait status

Operating

mode

Oscillation

Wait

: 26.2 ms)

STOP

instruction

Oscillation

521

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION

24.1 Reset Function

The following two operations are available to generate a reset signal.

(1) External reset input by RESET pin

(2) Internal reset by watchdog timer program loop time detection

The external reset and internal reset have no functional differences. In both cases, program execution starts at

the address at 0000H and 0001H by RESET input.

When a low level is input to the RESET pin or the watchdog timer overflows, a reset is applied and each hardware

unit is set to the status shown in Table 24-1. Each pin is high impedance during reset input or during the oscillation

stabilization time just after reset is released.

When a high level is input to the RESET pin, the reset is cleared and program execution starts after the lapse of

oscillation stabilization time (217/fX). The reset applied by watchdog timer overflow is automatically cleared after a

reset and program execution starts after the lapse of oscillation stabilization time (217/fX) (see Figures 24-2 to 24-

4).

Cautions 1. For an external reset, input a low level to the RESET pin for 10

s or more.

2. During reset input, main system clock oscillation remains stopped but subsystem clock

oscillation continues.

3. When the STOP mode is cleared by reset, the STOP mode contents are held during reset input.

However, the port pin becomes high impedance.

Figure 24-1. Reset Function Block Diagram

RESET

Count clock

Reset controller

Watchdog timer

Stop

Over-

flow

Reset

signal

Interrupt

function

522

CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 24-2. Reset Timing by RESET Input

Figure 24-3. Reset Timing due to Watchdog Timer Overflow

Figure 24-4. Reset Timing by RESET Input in STOP Mode

RESET

Internal

reset signal

Port pin

Delay

Hi-Z

Normal operation Reset period

(oscillation

stop)

Oscillation

stabilization

time wait

Normal operation

(reset processing)

Normal operation

Watchdog

timer

overflow

Internal

reset signal

Port pin

Reset period

(oscillation

stop)

Oscillation

stabilization

time wait

Normal operation

(reset processing)

Hi-Z

RESET

Internal

reset signal

Port pin

Delay Delay

Hi-Z

Normal operation

Reset period

(oscillation

stop)

Oscillation

stabilization

time wait

Normal operation

(reset processing)

Stop status

(oscillation

stop)

STOP instruction execution

523

CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 24-1. Hardware Status After Reset (1/2)

Hardware Status After Reset

Program counter (PC)Note 1 The contents of the reset vector

tables (0000H and 0001H) are

set.

Stack pointer (SP) Undefined

Program status word (PSW) 02H

RAM Data memory UndefinedNote 2

General register UndefinedNote 2

Ports (output latches) Ports 0 to 3, 7, 12, 13 00H

(P0 to P3, P7, P12, P13)

Ports 4 to 6 (P4 to P6) Undefined

Port mode registers (PM0 to PM3, PM5 to PM7, PM12, PM13) FFH

Pull-up resistor option registers (PUOH, PUOL) 00H

Processor clock control register (PCC) 04H

Oscillation mode select register (OSMS) 00H

Internal memory size switching register (IMS) Note 3

Internal expansion RAM size switching register (IXS)Note 4 0AH

Memory expansion mode register (MM) 10H

Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) 04H

16-bit timer/event counter Timer register (TM0) 00H

Capture/compare registers (CR00, CR01) Undefined

Clock select register (TCL0) 00H

Mode control register (TMC0) 00H

Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0) 04H

Output control register (TOC0) 00H

8-bit timer/event counters 1 and 2 Timer register (TM1, TM2) 00H

Compare registers (CR10, CR20) Undefined

Clock select register (TCL1) 00H

Mode control registers (TMC1) 00H

Output control register (TOC1) 00H

Notes 1. During reset input or oscillation stabilization time wait, only the PC contents among the hardware

statuses become undefined. All other hardware statuses remain unchanged after reset.

2. If the reset signal is input in the standby mode, the status before reset is retained even after reset.

3. The values after reset depend on the product.

PD780053, 780053Y: C6H,

PD780054, 780054Y: C8H,

PD780055, 780055Y: CAH,

PD780056, 780056Y: CCH,

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY: CFH,

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y: CFH

4. Provided only in the

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, 78F0058, and 78F0058Y.

524

CHAPTER 24 RESET FUNCTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 24-1. Hardware Status After Reset (2/2)

Hardware Status After Reset

Watch timer Mode control register (TMC2) 00H

Clock select register (TCL2) 00H

Mode register (WDTM) 00H

Serial interface Clock select register (TCL3) 88H

Shift registers (SIO0, SIO1) Undefined

Mode registers (CSIM0, CSIM1, CSIM2) 00H

Serial bus interface control register (SBIC) 00H

Slave address register (SVA) Undefined

Automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC)

00H

Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer (ADTP)

00H

Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI)

00H

Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) 00H

Asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS) 00H

Baud rate generator control register (BRGC) 00H

Serial interface pin select register (SIPS) 00H

Transmit shift register (TXS) FFH

Receive buffer register (RXB)

Interrupt timing specification register (SINT) 00H

A/D converter Mode register (ADM) 01H

Conversion result register (ADCR) Undefined

Input select register (ADIS) 00H

D/A converter Mode register (DAM) 00H

Conversion value setting registers (DACS0, DACS1) 00H

Real-time output port Mode register (RTPM) 00H

Control register (RTPC) 00H

Buffer registers (RTBL, RTBH) 00H

ROM correctionNote Correction address registers (CORAD0, CORAD1) 0000H

Correction control register (CORCN) 00H

Interrupts Request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L) 00H

Mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L) FFH

Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L)

FFH

External interrupt mode registers (INTM0, INTM1) 00H

Key return mode register (KRM) 02H

Sampling clock select register (SCS) 00H

Note Provided only in the

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, 78F0058, and 78F0058Y.

Watchdog timer

525

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

25.1 ROM Correction Function

The

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, 78F0058, 78F0058Y can replace part of a program in the mask ROM or

flash memory with a program in the internal expansion RAM.

Instruction bugs found in the mask ROM or flash memory can be avoided, and program flow can be changed by

using the ROM correction function.

The ROM correction function can be used to correct two places (max.) of the internal ROM or flash memory

(program).

Cautions 1. ROM correction can be used only for the

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, 78F0058, and

78F0058Y.

2. ROM correction function cannot be emulated by the in-circuit emulator (IE-78000-R, IE-78000-

R-A, IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A, IE-78001-R-A).

25.2 ROM Correction Configuration

The ROM correction function consists of the following hardware.

Table 25-1. ROM Correction Configuration

Item Configuration

Registers Correction address registers 0, 1 (CORAD0, CORAD1)

Control register Correction control register (CORCN)

Figure 25-1 shows a block diagram of the ROM correction function.

Figure 25-1. ROM Correction Block Diagram

Remark n = 0, 1

Match

CORENn CORSTn

Program counter (PC)

Comparator

Correction address

Internal bus

Correction control register

Correction branch request

signal (BR !F7FDH)

526

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Correction address registers 0, 1 (CORAD0, CORAD1)

These registers set the start address (correction address) of the instruction(s) to be corrected in the mask ROM

or flash memory.

The ROM correction function corrects two places (max.) of the program. Addresses are set to two registers,

CORAD0 and CORAD1. If only one place needs to be corrected, set the address to either of the registers.

CORAD0 and CORAD1 are set with a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CORAD0 and CORAD1 to 0000H.

Figure 25-2. Format of Correction Address Registers 0 and 1

Cautions 1. Set CORAD0 and CORAD1 when bit 1 (COREN0) and bit 3 (COREN1) of the correction

control register (CORCN: See Figure 25-3) are 0.

2. Only addresses where operation codes are stored can be set to CORAD0 and CORAD1.

3. Do not set the following addresses to CORAD0 and CORAD1.

• Address value in table area of table reference instruction (CALLT instruction): 0040H

to 007FH

• Address value in vector table area: 0000H to 003FH

(2) Comparator

The comparator continuously compares the correction address value set in correction address registers 0 and

1 (CORAD0, CORAD1) with the fetch address value. When bit 1 (COREN0) or bit 3 (COREN1) of the correction

control register (CORCN) is 1 and the correction address matches the fetch address value, the correction

branch request signal (BR !F7FDH) is generated from the ROM correction circuit.

FF3AH/FF3BH 0000H

Symbol 15

CORAD0

0 Address

FF38H/FF39H

After reset

0000H

R/W

CORAD1 R/W

527

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

25.3 ROM Correction Control Registers

The ROM correction function is controlled by the correction control register (CORCN).

(1) Correction control register (CORCN)

This register controls whether or not the correction branch request signal is generated when the fetch

address matches the correction address set in correction address registers 0 and 1. The correction control

CORST1). The correction enable flags enable or disable the comparator match detection signal, and

correction status flags show that the values match.

CORCN is set with a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input clears CORCN to 00H.

Figure 25-3. Format of Correction Control Register

Note Bits 0 and 2 are read-only bits.

COREN1 CORST1 COREN0 CORST0

Symbol

CORCN

Address

FF8AH

After reset

COREN0

CORST0

COREN1

CORST1

R/W

Note

00H

Correction address register 0 and fetch address match detection

Not detected

Detected

Correction address register 0 and fetch address

match detection control

Disabled

Enabled

Correction address register 1 and fetch address match detection

Not detected

Detected

Correction address register 1 and fetch address

match detection control

Disabled

Enabled

<3> <2> <1> <0>

528

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

25.4 ROM Correction Application

(1) Store the correction address and instruction after correction (patch program) to nonvolatile memory (such as

EEPROMTM) outside the microcontroller.

When two places should be corrected, store the branch destination judgment program as well. The branch

destination judgment program checks which one of the addresses set to correction address registers 0 and

1 (CORAD0 or CORAD1) generates the correction branch.

Figure 25-4. Example of Storing to EEPROM (When One Place Is Corrected)

RA78K/0

EEPROM Source program

00H

01H

02H

FFH

CSEG AT 1000H

ADD A, #2

BR !1002H

529

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Assemble in advance the initialization routine as shown in Figure 25-5 to correct the program.

Figure 25-5. Initialization Routine

Note Whether the ROM correction function is used or not should be judged by the port input level. For example,

when the P20 input level is high, ROM correction is used, otherwise, it is not used.

(3) After reset, store the contents that were previously stored in the external nonvolatile memory by the user

initialization routine for ROM correction to internal expansion RAM (see Figure 25-5).

Set the start address of the instruction to be corrected to CORAD0 and CORAD1, and set bits 1 and 3

(COREN0, COREN1) of the correction control register (CORCN) to 1.

(4) Set the entire-space branch instruction (BR !addr16) to the specified address (F7FDH) of the internal

expansion RAM using the main program.

(5) After the main program is started, the fetch address value and the values set in CORAD0 and CORAD1 are

continuously compared by the comparator in the ROM correction circuit. When these values match, the

correction branch request signal is generated. Simultaneously the corresponding correction status flag

(CORST0 or CORST1) is set to 1.

(6) Branch to the address F7FDH via the correction branch request signal.

(7) Branch to the internal expansion RAM address set by the main program via the entire-space branch instruction

of the address F7FDH.

(8) When one place is corrected, the correction program is executed. When two places are corrected, the

correction status flag is checked by the branch destination judgment program, and the program branches to

the correction program.

Yes

Initialization

Load the contents of external nonvolatile memory

into internal expansion RAM

Correction address register setting

ROM correction operation enabled

Is ROM

correction used?

Note

ROM correction

Main program

530

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 25-6. ROM Correction Operation

Yes

Internal ROM (flash memory) program start

Does fetch address

match correction

address?

Set correction status flag

Correction branch

(branch to address F7FDH)

Correction program execution

ROM correction

531

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

25.5 ROM Correction Usage Example

An example of ROM correction when the instruction at address 1000H “ADD A, #1” is changed to “ADD A, #2”

is shown below.

Figure 25-7. ROM Correction Usage Example

(1) The program branches to address F7FDH when the preset value 1000H in the correction address register

matches the fetch address value after the main program is started.

(2) The program branches to any address (address F702H in this example) by setting the entire-space branch

instruction (BR !addr16) to address F7FDH by the main program.

(3) The program returns to the internal ROM (flash memory) program after executing the substitute instruction

ADD A, #2.

ADD A, #2

BR !1002H

BR !F702H

ADD A, #1

MOV B, A

0000H

0080H Program start

1000H

1002H

Internal ROM or flash memory Internal expansion RAM

F400H

F702H

F7FDH

F7FFH

(1)

(2)

(3)

EFFFH

532

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

25.6 Program Execution Flow

Figures 25-8 and 25-9 show the program transition diagrams when the ROM correction is used.

Figure 25-8. Program Transition Diagram (When One Place Is Corrected)

(1) The program branches to address F7FDH when the fetch address matches the correction address

(2) The program branches to the correction program

(3) The program returns to the internal ROM (flash memory) program

Remark Shaded area: Internal expansion RAM

JUMP: Correction program start address

Correction place

Internal ROM

(flash memory)

JUMP

FFFFH

F7FFH

F7FDH

xxxxH

0000H

(1)

(2)

(3)

BR !JUMP

Correction program

533

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 25-9. Program Transition Diagram (When Two Places Are Corrected)

(1) The program branches to address F7FDH when the fetch address matches the correction address

(2) The program branches to the branch destination judgment program

(3) The program branches to correction program 1 via the branch destination judgment program (BTCLR

!CORST0, $xxxxH)

(4) The program returns to the internal ROM (flash memory) program

(5) The program branches to address F7FDH when the fetch address matches the correction address

(6) The program branches to the branch destination judgment program

(7) The program branches to correction program 2 via the branch destination judgment program (BTCLR

!CORST1, $yyyyH)

(8) The program returns to the internal ROM (flash memory) program

Remark Shaded Area: Internal expansion RAM

JUMP: Destination judge program start address

Internal ROM

(flash memory)

Correction place 1

Internal ROM

(flash memory)

JUMP

Internal ROM

(flash memory)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

FFFFH

F7FFH

F7FDH

yyyyH

xxxxH

0000H

BR !JUMP

Destination judge program

Correction program 2

Correction program 1

Correction place 2

534

CHAPTER 25 ROM CORRECTION

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

25.7 ROM Correction Cautions

(1) Address values set in correction address registers 0 and 1 (CORAD0, CORAD1) must be addresses where

instruction codes are stored.

(2) Correction address registers 0 and 1 (CORAD0, CORAD1) should be set when the correction enable flag

(COREN0, COREN1) is 0 (when the correction branch is in the disabled state). If an address is set to CORAD0

or CORAD1 when COREN0 or COREN1 is 1 (when the correction branch is in the enabled state), the correction

branch may start with a different address from the set address value.

(3) Do not set the address value of an instruction immediately after the instruction that sets the correction enable

flag (COREN0, COREN1) to 1, to correction address register 0 or 1 (CORAD0, CORAD1); otherwise the

correction branch may not start.

(4) Do not set the address value in the table area of the table reference instruction (CALLT instruction) (0040H

to 007FH), and the address value in the vector table area (0000H to 003FH) to correction address registers

0 and 1 (CORAD0, CORAD1).

(5) Do not set two addresses immediately after the instructions shown below to correction address registers 0

and 1 (CORAD0, CORAD1). (That is, when the mapped terminal address of these instructions is N, do not

set the address values of N + 1 and N + 2.)

• RET

• RETI

• RETB

• BR $addr16

• STOP

• HALT

535

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

The

PD78F0058 and 78F0058Y have flash memory whose contents can be written, erased, rewritten with the

device mounted on a PC board. Table 26-1 lists the differences between the flash memory versions (

PD78F0058

and 78F0058Y) and the mask ROM versions (

PD780053, 780054, 780055, 780056, 780058, 780058B, 780053Y,

780054Y, 780055Y, 780056Y, and 780058BY).

Table 26-1. Differences Between

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y and Mask ROM Versions

Item

PD78F0058

PD78F0058Y Mask ROM Versions

PD780058 Subseries

PD780058Y Subseries

Internal ROM structure Flash memory Mask ROM

Internal ROM capacity 60 KB

PD780053, 780053Y: 24 KB

PD780054, 780054Y: 32 KB

PD780055, 780055Y: 40 KB

PD780056, 780056Y: 48 KB

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY: 60 KB

Internal expansion RAM capacity 1,024 bytes

PD780053, 780053Y: None

PD780054, 780054Y: None

PD780055, 780055Y: None

PD780056, 780056Y: None

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY: 1,024 bytes

Internal ROM capacity ChangeableNote 1 Not changeable

changeable/not changeable using

internal memory size switching

Internal expansion RAM capacity ChangeableNote 2 Not changeable

changeable/not changeable using

interna expansion RAM size

switching register (IXS)

Supply voltage VDD = 2.7Note 3 to 5.5 V VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

IC pin Not provided Provided

VPP pin Provided Not provided

P60 to P63 pin mask option Not provided Provided

with on-chip pull-up resistors

Serial interface (SBI) Provided Not provided Provided Not provided

Serial interface (I2C) Not provided Provided Not provided Provided

Notes 1. Flash memory is set to 60 KB by RESET input.

2. Internal expansion RAM is set to 1,024 bytes by RESET input.

3. VDD = 2.2 V can also be supplied. Contact an NEC Electronics sales representative for details.

Caution There are differences in noise immunity and noise radiation between the flash memory and mask

ROM versions. When pre-producing an application set with the flash memory version and then

mass-producing it with the mask ROM version, be sure to conduct sufficient evaluations for the

commercial samples (not engineering samples) of the mask ROM version.

Remark Only the

PD780058, 780058B, 78F0058, 780058BY, and 78F0058Y are provided with an internal

expansion RAM size switching register.

536

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

26.1 Internal memory Size Switching Register

The

PD78F0058 and 78F0058Y allow users to define the internal ROM size using the internal memory size

switching register (IMS), so that the same memory mapping as that of a mask ROM version with a different-size internal

ROM is possible.

IMS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets IMS to CFH.

Figure 26-1. Format of Memory Size Switching Register

Note When using the external device expansion function of the

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY, 78F0058,

and 78F0058Y, set the internal ROM capacity to 56 KB or less.

The IMS settings to give the same memory map as mask ROM versions are shown in Table 26-2.

Table 26-2. Internal Memory Size Switching Register Setting Values

Target Mask ROM Version IMS Setting Value

PD780053, 780053Y C6H

PD780054, 780054Y C8H

PD780055, 780055Y CAH

PD780056, 780056Y CCH

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY CFH

RAM2

Symbol

IMS

RAM1

RAM0

ROM3

ROM2

ROM1

ROM0

Address

FFF0H CFH

After reset R/W

R/W

Internal ROM capacity selection

32 KB

ROM3 ROM2 ROM1 ROM0

Setting prohibitedOther than above

Internal high-speed RAM capacity selection

RAM2 RAM1 RAM0

Setting prohibitedOther than above

24 KB

1,024 bytes110

56 KB

Note

40 KB

48 KB

60 KB

0110

1000

1010

1100

1110

1111

537

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

26.2 Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register

The

PD78F0058 and 78F0058Y allow users to define the internal expansion RAM size by using the internal

expansion RAM size switching register (IXS), so that the same memory mapping as that of a mask ROM version with

a different-size internal expansion RAM is possible.

IXS is set with an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.

RESET input sets IXS to 0AH.

Figure 26-2. Format of Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register

The IXS settings that give the same memory map as the mask ROM versions are shown in Table 26-3.

Table 26-3. Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register Setting Values

Target Mask ROM Version IXS Setting Value

PD780053, 780053Y 0CH

PD780054, 780054Y

PD780055, 780055Y

PD780056, 780056Y

PD780058, 780058B, 780058BY 0AH

Remark If a program for the

PD78F0058 or 78F0058Y

which includes “MOV IXS, #0CH” is implemented

with the

PD780053, 780053Y, 780054, 780054Y,

780055, 780055Y, 780056, or 780056Y, this

instruction is ignored and causes no malfunction.

Symbol

IXS

IXRAM3

IXRAM2

IXRAM1

IXRAM0

Address

FFF4H 0AH

After reset

Internal extension RAM capacity selection

IXRAM3

IXRAM2 IXRAM1

1,024 bytes101

Setting prohibitedOther than above

IXRAM0

R/W

0 bytes1100

538

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

26.3 Flash Memory Characteristics

Flash memory programming is performed by connecting a dedicated flash programmer (Flashpro III (part no. FL-

PR3, PG-FP3)/Flashpro IV (part no. FL-PR4, PG-FP4)) to the target system with the flash memory mounted on the

target system (on-board). A flash memory writing adapter (program adapter), which is a target board used exclusively

for programming, is also provided.

Remark FL-PR3, FL-PR4, and the program adapter are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd. (TEL

+81-45-475-4191).

Programming using flash memory has the following advantages.

•Software can be modified after the microcontroller is solder-mounted on the target system.

•Distinguishing software facilities low-quantity, varied model production

•Easy data adjustment when starting mass production

26.3.1 Programming environment

The following shows the environment required for

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y flash memory programming.

When Flashpro III (part no. FL-PR3, PG-FP3) or Flashpro IV (part no. FL-PR4, PG-FP4) is used as a dedicated

flash programmer, a host machine is required to control the dedicated flash programmer. Communication between

the host machine and flash programmer is performed via RS-232C/USB (Rev. 1.1).

For details, refer to the manuals for Flashpro III/Flashpro IV.

Remark USB is supported by Flashpro IV only.

Figure 26-3. Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory

Host machine

RS-232C

USB

Dedicated flash

programmer

PD78F0058,

PD78F0058Y

RESET

SIO/UART/PORT

539

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

26.3.2 Communication mode

Use the communication mode shown in Table 26-4 to perform communication between the dedicated flash

programmer and

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y.

Table 26-4. Communication Mode List

Communication TYPE SettingNote 1 Pins Used Number

Mode COMM PORT SIO Clock CPU Flash Clock Multiple of VPP

CLOCK Rate Pulses

3-wire serial I/O SIO ch-0 100 Hz to Optional 1 to 1.0 P27/SCK0/SCL 0

(3 wired, sync.) 1.25 MHzNote 2 5 MHzNote 2 P26/SO0/SB1/SDA1

P25/SI0/SB0/SDA0

SIO ch-1 P22/SCK1 1

(3 wired, sync.) P21/SO1

P20/SI1

SIO ch-2 P72/SCK2/ASCK 2

(3 wired, sync.) P71/SO2/TxD0

P70/SI2/RxD0

UART (UART0) UART ch-0 4,800 to Optional 1 to 1.0 P71/SO2/TxD0 8

(Async.) 76,800 bpsNotes 2, 3 5 MHzNote 2 P70/SI2/RxD0

UART ch-1 P23/TxD1 9

(Async.) P24/RxD1

Pseudo 3-wire Port A 100 Hz to Optional 1 to 1.0 P32/TO2 12

serial I/O (Pseudo-3 wired) 1 kHz 5 MHzNote 2 (Serial clock I/O)

P31/TO1

(Serial data output)

P30/TO0

(Serial data input)

Notes 1. Selection items for TYPE settings on the dedicated flash programmer (Flashpro III (part no. FL-PR3,

PG-FP3)/Flashpro IV (part no. FL-PR4, PG-FP4)).

2. The possible setting range differs depending on the voltage. For details, see CHAPTER 29 ELEC-

TRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION), CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFI-

CATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V).

3. Because factors other than the baud rate error, such as the signal waveform slew, also affect UART

communication, thoroughly evaluate the slew as well as the baud rate error.

Figure 26-4. Communication Mode Selection Format

10 V

VPP

VPP pulses

Flash memory write mode

RESET

VDD

VSS

VDD

VSS

540

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 26-5. Example of Connection with Dedicated Flash Programmer (1/2)

(a) 3-wire serial I/O (SIO ch-0)

Dedicated flash programmer

VPP1

VDD

RESET

SCK

CLKNote

GND

DD0

, V

DD1

, AV

REF

RESET

SCK0

SI0

SO0

SS0

, V

SS1

, AV

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

(b) 3-wire serial I/O (SIO ch-1)

Dedicated flash programmer

VPP1

VDD

RESET

SCK

GND

DD0

, V

DD1

, AV

REF

RESET

SCK1

SI1

SO1

CLK

Note

SS0

SS1

, AV

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

Dedicated flash programmer

VPP1

VDD

RESET

SCK

CLK

Note

GND

VPP

VDD0, VDD1, AVREF

RESET

SCK2

SI2

SO2

VSS0, VSS1, AVSS

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

Note Connect this pin when the system clock is supplied from the dedicated flash programmer. If a resonator

is already connected to the X1 pin, the CLK pin does not need to be connected.

Caution The VDD0 and VDD1 pins, if already connected to the power supply, must be connected to the VDD

pin of the dedicated flash programmer. When using the power supply connected to the VDD0 and

VDD1 pins, supply voltage before starting programming.

541

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 26-5. Example of Connection with Dedicated Flash Programmer (2/2)

(d) UART (UART ch-0)

Dedicated flash programmer

VPP1

VDD

RESET

SO (T

SI (R

CLKNote

GND

DD0

, V

DD1

, AV

REF

RESET

SS0

, V

SS1

, AV

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

(e) UART (UART ch-1)

Dedicated flash programmer

VPP1

VDD

RESET

SO (T

SI (R

CLKNote

GND

DD0

, V

DD1

, AV

REF

RESET

SS0

, V

SS1

, AV

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

(f) Pseudo 3-wire serial I/O

Dedicated flash programmer

VPP1

VDD

RESET

SCK

CLKNote

GND

DD0

, V

DD1

, AV

REF

RESET

P32

P30

P31

SS0

, V

SS1

, AV

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

Note Connect this pin when the system clock is supplied from the dedicated flash programmer. If a resonator

is already connected to the X1 pin, the CLK pin does not need to be connected.

Caution The VDD0 and VDD1 pins, if already connected to the power supply, must be connected to the VDD

pin of the dedicated flash programmer. When using the power supply connected to the VDD0 and

VDD1 pins, supply voltage before starting programming.

542

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

If Flashpro III (part no. FL-PR3, PG-FP3)/Flashpro IV is used as a dedicated flash programmer, the following signals

are generated for the

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y. For details, refer to the manual of Flashpro III/Flashpro IV.

Table 26-5. Pin Connection List

Signal Name I/O Pin Function Pin Name 3-Wire UART

Pseudo 3-Wire

Serial I/O Serial I/O

VPP1 Output Write voltage VPP

VPP2 − − − ×××

VDD I/O VDD voltage generation/ VDD0, VDD1, AVREF Note Note Note

voltage monitoring

GND −Ground VSS0, VSS1, AVSS

CLK Output Clock output X1 ×

RESET Output Reset signal RESET

SI (RxD) Input Reception signal SO0/SO1/SO2/TxD0/TxD1/P31

SO (TxD) Output Transmit signal SI0/SI1/SI2/RxD0/RxD1/P30

SCK Output Transfer clock SCK0/SCK1/SCK2/P32 ×

HS Input Handshake signal − ×××

Note VDD voltage must be supplied before programming is started.

Remark : Pin must be connected.

: If the signal is supplied on the target board, pin does not need to be connected.

×: Pin does not need to be connected.

543

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

26.3.3 On-board pin processing

When performing programming on the target system, provide a connector on the target system to connect the

dedicated flash programmer.

An on-board function that allows switching between normal operation mode and flash memory programming mode

may be required in some cases.

In normal operation mode, input 0 V to the VPP pin. In flash memory programming mode, a write voltage of 10.0

V (TYP.) is supplied to the VPP pin, so perform the following.

(1) Connect a pull-down resistor (RVPP = 10 kΩ) to the VPP pin.

(2) Use the jumper on the board to switch the VPP pin input to either the programmer or directly to GND.

A VPP pin connection example is shown below.

Figure 26-6. VPP Pin Connection Example

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

VPP

Connection pin of dedicated flash programmer

Pull-down resistor (RVPP)

The following shows the pins used by the serial interface.

Serial Interface Pins Used

3-wire serial I/O SI0, SO0, SCK0

SI1, SO1, SCK1

SI2, SO2, SCK2

UART RxD0, TxD0

RxD1, TxD1

Pseudo 3-wire serial I/O P30, P31, P32

When connecting the dedicated flash programmer to a serial interface pin that is connected to another device on-

board, signal conflict or abnormal operation of the other device may occur. Care must therefore be taken with

such connections.

544

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(1) Signal conflict

If the dedicated flash programmer (output) is connected to a serial interface pin (input) that is connected to

another device (output), a signal conflict occurs. To prevent this, isolate the connection with the other device

or set the other device to the output high impedance status.

Figure 26-7. Signal Conflict (Input Pin of Serial Interface)

Input pin Signal conflict

Connection pin of

dedicated flash

programmer

Other device

Output pin

In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by another

device and the signal sent by the dedicated flash programmer conflict,

therefore, isolate the signal of the other device.

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

(2) Abnormal operation of other device

If the dedicated flash programmer (output or input) is connected to a serial interface pin (input or output) that

is connected to another device (input), a signal is output to the device, and this may cause an abnormal

operation. To prevent this abnormal operation, isolate the connection with the other device or set so that the

input signals to the other device are ignored.

Figure 26-8. Abnormal Operation of Other Device

Connection pin of

dedicated flash

programmer

Other device

Input pin

If the signal output by the PD78F0058, 78F0058Y affects another device

in the flash memory programming mode, isolate the signals of the other

device.

Connection pin of

dedicated flash

programmer

Other device

Input pin

If the signal output by the dedicated flash programmer affects another

device in the flash memory programming mode, isolate the signals of the

other device.

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

545

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

If the reset signal of the dedicated flash programmer is connected to the RESET pin connected to the reset signal

generator on-board, a signal conflict occurs. To prevent this, isolate the connection with the reset signal generator.

If the reset signal is input from the user system in the flash memory programming mode, a normal programming

operation cannot be performed. Therefore, do not input reset signals from other than the dedicated flash

programmer.

Figure 26-9. Signal Conflict (RESET Pin)

RESET

Connection pin of

dedicated flash

programmer

Reset signal generator

Signal conflict

Output pin

The signal output by the reset signal generator and the signal output from

the dedicated flash programmer conflict in the flash memory programming

mode, so isolate the signal of the reset signal generator.

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

When the

PD78F0058 and 78F0058Y enter the flash memory programming mode, all the pins other than those

that communicate in flash memory programming are in the same status as immediately after reset.

If the external device does not recognize initial statuses such as the output high impedance status, therefore,

connect the external device to VDD0 or VSS0 via a resistor.

When using the on-board clock, connect X1, X2, XT1, and XT2 as required in the normal operation mode.

When using the clock output of the flash programmer, connect it directly to X1, disconnecting the main oscillator

on-board, and leave the X2 pin open. The subsystem clock conforms to the normal operation mode.

To use the power output from the flash programmer, connect the VDD0 and VDD1 pins to VDD of the flash programmer,

and the VSS0 and VSS1 pins to GND of the flash programmer.

To use the on-board power supply, make connections that accord with the normal operation mode. However,

because the voltage is monitored by the flash programmer, be sure to connect VDD of the flash programmer.

Supply the same power as in the normal operation mode to the other power supply pins (AVREF0, AVREF1, and AVSS).

546

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

26.3.4 Connection of adapter for flash writing

The following figures show examples of the recommended connection when the adapter for flash writing is used.

Figure 26-10. Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (SIO ch-0)

PD78F0058

PD78F0058Y

GND

VDD

SI SO SCK CLKOUT RESET VPP RESERVE/HS

WRITER INTERFACE

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

GND

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

VDD2 (LVDD)

547

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 26-11. Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (SIO ch-1)

PD78F0058

PD78F0058Y

GND

VDD

SI SO SCK CLKOUT RESET VPP RESERVE/HS

WRITER INTERFACE

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

GND

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

VDD2 (LVDD)

548

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 26-12. Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (SIO ch-2)

PD78F0058

PD78F0058Y

GND

VDD

VDD2 (LVDD)

SI SO SCK CLKOUT RESET VPP RESERVE/HS

WRITER INTERFACE

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

GND

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

549

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 26-13. Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in UART Mode (UART ch-0)

PD78F0058

PD78F0058Y

GND

VDD

VDD2 (LVDD)

SI SO SCK CLKOUT RESET VPP RESERVE/HS

WRITER INTERFACE

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

GND

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

550

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 26-14. Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in UART Mode (UART ch-1)

PD78F0058

PD78F0058Y

GND

VDD

VDD2 (LVDD)

SI SO SCK CLKOUT RESET VPP RESERVE/HS

WRITER INTERFACE

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

GND

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

551

CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure 26-15. Wiring Example for Flash Writing Adapter in Pseudo 3-Wire Mode

PD78F0058

PD78F0058Y

GND

VDD

VDD2 (LVDD)

SI SO SCK CLKOUT RESET VPP RESERVE/HS

WRITER INTERFACE

VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)

GND

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

552 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

This chapter describes each instruction set of the

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries in table form. For details

of the operations and operation codes, refer to the separate document 78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual

(U12326E).

553

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

27.1 Conventions Used in Operation List

27.1.1 Operand identifiers and description methods

Operands are described in the “Operand” column of each instruction in accordance with the description method

of the instruction operand identifier (refer to the assembler specifications for details). When there are two or more

description methods, select one of them. Uppercase letters and the symbols #, !, $ and [ ] are keywords and must

be described as they are. Each symbol has the following meaning.

• #: Immediate data specification

• !: Absolute address specification

• $: Relative address specification

• [ ]: Indirect address specification

In the case of immediate data, describe an appropriate numeric value or a label. When using a label, be sure to

describe the #, !, $, and [ ] symbols.

For operand register identifiers, r and rp, either function names (X, A, C, etc.) or absolute names (names in

parentheses in the table below, R0, R1, R2, etc.) can be used for description.

Table 27-1. Operand Identifiers and Description Methods

Identifier Description Method

r X (R0), A (R1), C (R2), B (R3), E (R4), D (R5), L (R6), H (R7),

rp AX (RP0), BC (RP1), DE (RP2), HL (RP3)

sfr Special-function register symbolNote

sfrp Special-function register symbol (16-bit manipulatable register even addresses only)Note

saddr FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or label

saddrp FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or label (even address only)

addr16 0000H to FFFFH Immediate data or label

(Only even addresses for 16-bit data transfer instructions)

addr11 0800H to 0FFFH Immediate data or label

addr5 0040H to 007FH Immediate data or label (even address only)

word 16-bit immediate data or label

byte 8-bit immediate data or label

bit 3-bit immediate data or label

RBn RB0 to RB3

Note Addresses from FFD0H to FFDFH cannot be accessed with these operands.

Remark For special-function register symbols, see Table 5-2 Special-Function Register List.

554

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

27.1.2 Description of operation column

A: A register; 8-bit accumulator

X: X register

B: B register

C: C register

D: D register

E: E register

H: H register

L: L register

AX: AX register pair; 16-bit accumulator

BC: BC register pair

DE: DE register pair

HL: HL register pair

PC: Program counter

SP: Stack pointer

PSW: Program status word

CY: Carry flag

AC: Auxiliary carry flag

Z: Zero flag

RBS: Register bank select flag

IE: Interrupt request enable flag

NMIS: Non-maskable interrupt servicing flag

( ): Memory contents indicated by address or register contents in parentheses

×H, ×L: Higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits of 16-bit register

: Logical product (AND)

: Logical sum (OR)

: Exclusive logical sum (exclusive OR)

——: Inverted data

addr16: 16-bit immediate data or label

jdisp8: Signed 8-bit data (displacement value)

27.1.3 Description of flag operation column

(Blank): Nt affected

0: Cleared to 0

1: Set to 1

×: Set/cleared according to the result

R: Previously saved value is restored

555

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

27.2 Operation List

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

8-bit data MOV r, #byte 2 4 – r ← byte

transfer saddr, #byte 3 6 7 (saddr) ← byte

sfr, #byte 3 – 7 sfr ← byte

A, r Note 3 12 –A ← r

r, A Note 3 12 –r ← A

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← (saddr)

saddr, A 2 4 5 (saddr) ← A

A, sfr 2 – 5 A ← sfr

sfr, A 2 – 5 sfr ← A

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A ← (addr16)

!addr16, A 3 8 9 + m (addr16) ← A

PSW, #byte 3 – 7 PSW ← byte ×××

A, PSW 2 – 5 A ← PSW

PSW, A 2 – 5 PSW ← A ×××

A, [DE] 1 4 5 + n A ← (DE)

[DE], A 1 4 5 + m (DE) ← A

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A ← (HL)

[HL], A 1 4 5 + m (HL) ← A

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A ← (HL + byte)

[HL + byte], A 2 8 9 + m (HL + byte) ← A

A, [HL + B] 1 6 7 + n A ← (HL + B)

[HL + B], A 1 6 7 + m (HL + B) ← A

A, [HL + C] 1 6 7 + n A ← (HL + C)

[HL + C], A 1 6 7 + m (HL + C) ← A

XCH A, r Note 3 12 –A ↔ r

A, saddr 2 4 6 A ↔ (saddr)

A, sfr 2 – 6 A ↔ sfr

A, !addr16 3 8

10 + n + m

A ↔ (addr16)

A, [DE] 1 4

6 + n + m

A ↔ (DE)

A, [HL] 1 4

6 + n + m

A ↔ (HL)

A, [HL + byte] 2 8

10 + n + m

A ↔ (HL + byte)

A, [HL + B] 2 8

10 + n + m

A ↔ (HL + B)

A, [HL + C] 2 8

10 + n + m

A ↔ (HL + C)

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed.

3. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

3. n is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is read from.

4. m is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is written to.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

556

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

16-bit MOVW rp, #word 3 6 – rp ← word

data saddrp, #word 4 8 10 (saddrp) ← word

transfer

sfrp, #word 4 – 10 sfrp ← word

AX, saddrp 2 6 8 AX ← (saddrp)

saddrp, AX 2 6 8 (saddrp) ← AX

AX, sfrp 2 – 8 AX ← sfrp

sfrp, AX 2 – 8 sfrp ← AX

AX, rp Note 3 1 4 – AX ← rp

rp, AX Note 3 1 4 – rp ← AX

AX, !addr16 3 10 12 + 2n AX ← (addr16)

!addr16, AX 3 10 12 + 2m (addr16) ← AX

XCHW AX, rp Note 3 1 4 – AX ↔ rp

8-bit ADD A, #byte 2 4 – A, CY ← A + byte ×××

operation saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte ×××

A, r Note 4 2 4 – A, CY ← A + r ×××

r, A 2 4 – r, CY ← r + A ×××

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A + (saddr) ×××

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (addr16) ×××

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A, CY ← A + (HL) ×××

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (HL + byte) ×××

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (HL + B) ×××

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (HL + C) ×××

ADDC A, #byte 2 4 – A, CY ← A + byte + CY ×××

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte + CY ×××

A, r Note 4 2 4 – A, CY ← A + r + CY ×××

r, A 2 4 – r, CY ← r + A + CY ×××

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A + (saddr) + CY ×××

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (addr16) + CY ×××

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A, CY ← A + (HL) + CY ×××

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (HL + byte) + CY ×××

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (HL + B) + CY ×××

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A + (HL + C) + CY ×××

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

3. Only when rp = BC, DE, or HL

4. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

3. n is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is read from.

4. m is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is written to.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

557

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

8-bit SUB A, #byte 2 4 – A, CY ← A – byte ×××

operation saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) – byte ×××

A, r Note 3 2 4 – A, CY ← A – r ×××

r, A 2 4 – r, CY ← r – A ×××

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A – (saddr) ×××

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (addr16) ×××

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A, CY ← A – (HL) ×××

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (HL + byte) ×××

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (HL + B) ×××

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (HL + C) ×××

SUBC A, #byte 2 4 – A, CY ← A – byte – CY ×××

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) – byte – CY ×××

A, r Note 3 2 4 – A, CY ← A – r – CY ×××

r, A 2 4 – r, CY ← r – A – CY ×××

A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A – (saddr) – CY ×××

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (addr16) – CY ×××

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A, CY ← A – (HL) – CY ×××

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (HL + byte) – CY ×××

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (HL + B) – CY ×××

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A, CY ← A – (HL + C) – CY ×××

AND A, #byte 2 4 – A ← A byte ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) byte ×

A, r Note 3 24 –A ← A r×

r, A 2 4 – r ← r A×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A (saddr) ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A ← A (addr16) ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A ← A(HL) ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + byte) ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + B) ×

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + C) ×

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

3. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

3. n is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is read from.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

558

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

8-bit OR A, #byte 2 4 – A ← A byte ×

operation saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) byte ×

A, r Note 3 24 –A ← A r×

r, A 2 4 – r ← r A×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A (saddr) ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A ← A (addr16) ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A ← A (HL) ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + byte) ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + B) ×

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + C) ×

XOR A, #byte 2 4 – A ← A byte ×

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) byte ×

A, r Note 3 24 –A ← A r×

r, A 2 4 – r ← r A×

A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A (saddr) ×

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A ← A (addr16) ×

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A ← A (HL) ×

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + byte) ×

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + B) ×

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A ← A (HL + C) ×

CMP A, #byte 2 4 – A – byte ×××

saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) – byte ×××

A, r Note 3 24 –A – r ×××

r, A 2 4 – r – A ×××

A, saddr 2 4 5 A – (saddr) ×××

A, !addr16 3 8 9 + n A – (addr16) ×××

A, [HL] 1 4 5 + n A – (HL) ×××

A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 + n A – (HL + byte) ×××

A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 + n A – (HL + B) ×××

A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 + n A – (HL + C) ×××

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

3. Except “r = A”

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

3. n is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is read from.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

559

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

16-bit ADDW AX, #word 3 6 – AX, CY ← AX + word ×××

operation SUBW AX, #word 3 6 – AX, CY ← AX – word ×××

CMPW AX, #word 3 6 – AX – word ×××

Multiply/ MULU X 2 16 – AX ← A × X

divide DIVUW C 2 25 – AX (Quotient), C (Remainder) ← AX ÷ C

Increment/ INC r12–r ← r + 1 ××

decrement saddr 2 4 6 (saddr) ← (saddr) + 1 ××

DEC r12–r ← r – 1 ××

saddr 2 4 6 (saddr) ← (saddr) – 1 ××

INCW rp 1 4 – rp ← rp + 1

DECW rp 1 4 – rp ← rp – 1

Rotate ROR A, 1 1 2 – (CY, A7 ← A0, Am – 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

ROL A, 1 1 2 – (CY, A0 ← A7, Am + 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

RORC A, 1 1 2 – (CY ← A0, A7 ← CY, Am – 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

ROLC A, 1 1 2 – (CY ← A7, A0 ← CY, Am + 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×

ROR4 [HL] 2 10

12 + n + m

A3 – 0 ← (HL)3 – 0, (HL)7 – 4 ← A3 – 0,

(HL)3 – 0 ← (HL)7 – 4

ROL4 [HL] 2 10

12 + n + m

A3 – 0 ← (HL)7 – 4, (HL)3 – 0 ← A3 – 0,

(HL)7 – 4 ← (HL)3 – 0

BCD ADJBA 2 4 – Decimal Adjust Accumulator after ×××

adjust Addition

ADJBS 2 4 – Decimal Adjust Accumulator after ×××

Subtract

Bit MOV1 CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← (saddr.bit) ×

manipu- CY, sfr.bit 3 – 7 CY ← sfr.bit ×

lation CY, A.bit 2 4 – CY ← A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 – 7 CY ← PSW.bit ×

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 + n CY ← (HL).bit ×

saddr.bit, CY 3 6 8 (saddr.bit) ← CY

sfr.bit, CY 3 – 8 sfr.bit ← CY

A.bit, CY 2 4 – A.bit ← CY

PSW.bit, CY 3 – 8 PSW.bit ← CY ××

[HL].bit, CY 2 6

8 + n + m

(HL).bit ← CY

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

3. n is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is read from.

4. m is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is written to.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

560

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

Bit AND1 CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY (saddr.bit) ×

manipu- CY, sfr.bit 3 – 7 CY ← CY sfr.bit ×

lation

CY, A.bit 2 4 – CY ← CY A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 – 7 CY ← CY PSW.bit ×

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 + n CY ← CY (HL).bit ×

OR1 CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY (saddr.bit) ×

CY, sfr.bit 3 – 7 CY ← CY sfr.bit ×

CY, A.bit 2 4 – CY ← CY A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 – 7 CY ← CY PSW.bit ×

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 + n CY ← CY (HL).bit ×

XOR1 CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY (saddr.bit) ×

CY, sfr.bit 3 – 7 CY ← CY sfr.bit ×

CY, A.bit 2 4 – CY ← CY A.bit ×

CY, PSW.bit 3 – 7 CY ← CY PSW.bit ×

CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 + n CY ← CY (HL).bit ×

SET1 saddr.bit 2 4 6 (saddr.bit) ← 1

sfr.bit 3 – 8 sfr.bit ← 1

A.bit 2 4 – A.bit ← 1

PSW.bit 2 – 6 PSW.bit ← 1 ×××

[HL].bit 2 6

8 + n + m

(HL).bit ← 1

CLR1 saddr.bit 2 4 6 (saddr.bit) ← 0

sfr.bit 3 – 8 sfr.bit ← 0

A.bit 2 4 – A.bit ← 0

PSW.bit 2 – 6 PSW.bit ← 0 ×××

[HL].bit 2 6

8 + n + m

(HL).bit ← 0

SET1 CY 1 2 – CY ← 11

CLR1 CY 1 2 – CY ← 00

NOT1 CY 1 2 – CY ← CY ×

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

3. n is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is read from.

4. m is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is written to.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

561

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

Call/return CALL !addr16 3 7 – (SP – 1) ← (PC + 3)H, (SP – 2) ← (PC + 3)L,

PC ← addr16, SP ← SP – 2

CALLF !addr11 2 5 – (SP – 1) ← (PC + 2)H, (SP – 2) ← (PC + 2)L,

PC15 – 11 ← 00001, PC10 – 0 ← addr11,

SP ← SP – 2

CALLT [addr5] 1 6 – (SP – 1) ← (PC + 1)H, (SP – 2) ← (PC + 1)L,

PCH ← (00000000, addr5 + 1),

PCL ← (00000000, addr5),

SP ← SP – 2

BRK 1 6 – (SP – 1) ← PSW, (SP – 2) ← (PC + 1)H,

(SP – 3) ← (PC + 1)L, PCH ← (003FH),

PCL ← (003EH), SP ← SP – 3, IE ← 0

RET 16 –PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),

SP ← SP + 2

RETI 16 –PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),

PSW ← (SP + 2), SP ← SP + 3, R R R

NMIS ← 0

RETB 16 –PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP), R R R

PSW ← (SP + 2), SP ← SP + 3

Stack PUSH PSW 1 2 – (SP – 1) ← PSW, SP ← SP – 1

manipu- rp 1 4 – (SP – 1) ← rpH, (SP – 2) ← rpL,

lation SP ← SP – 2

POP PSW 1 2 – PSW ← (SP), SP ← SP + 1 R R R

rp 1 4 – rpH ← (SP + 1), rpL ← (SP),

SP ← SP + 2

MOVW SP, #word 4 – 10 SP ← word

SP, AX 2 – 8 SP ← AX

AX, SP 2 – 8 AX ← SP

Uncondi- BR !addr16 3 6 – PC ← addr16

tional $addr16 2 6 – PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8

branch AX 2 8 – PCH ← A, PCL ← X

Conditional BC $addr16 2 6 – PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 1

branch BNC $addr16 2 6 – PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 0

BZ $addr16 2 6 – PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 1

BNZ $addr16 2 6 – PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 0

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

562

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Clocks Flag

Note 1 Note 2 ZACCY

Condi- BT saddr.bit, $addr16 3 8 9 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 1

tional sfr.bit, $addr16 4 – 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1

branch

A.bit, $addr16 3 8 – PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1

PSW.bit, $addr16 3 – 9 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1

[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 11 + n PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1

BF saddr.bit, $addr16 4 10 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if (saddr.bit) = 0

sfr.bit, $addr16 4 – 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 0

A.bit, $addr16 3 8 – PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 0

PSW.bit, $addr16 4 – 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW. bit = 0

[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 11 + n PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 0

BTCLR saddr.bit, $addr16 4 10 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8

if (saddr.bit) = 1

then reset (saddr.bit)

sfr.bit, $addr16 4 – 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1

then reset sfr.bit

A.bit, $addr16 3 8 – PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1

then reset A.bit

PSW.bit, $addr16 4 – 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1 ×××

then reset PSW.bit

[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10

12 + n + m

PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1

then reset (HL).bit

DBNZ B, $addr16 2 6 – B ← B – 1, then

PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if B ≠ 0

C, $addr16 2 6 – C ← C –1, then

PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if C ≠ 0

saddr, $addr16 3 8 10 (saddr) ← (saddr) – 1, then

PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (saddr) ≠ 0

CPU SEL RBn 2 4 – RBS1, 0 ← n

control NOP 1 2 – No Operation

EI 2 – 6 IE ← 1 (Enable Interrupt)

DI 2 – 6 IE ← 0 (Disable Interrupt)

HALT 2 6 – Set HALT Mode

STOP 2 6 – Set STOP Mode

Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or instruction that performs no data access is

executed.

2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed

Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock

control register (PCC).

2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.

3. n is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is read from.

4. m is the number of waits when external memory expansion area is written to.

Mnemonic Operands Bytes Operation

Instruction

Group

563

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

27.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type

(1) 8-bit instructions

MOV, XCH, ADD, ADDC, SUB, SUBC, AND, OR, XOR, CMP, MULU, DIVUW, INC, DEC, ROR, ROL, RORC,

ROLC, ROR4, ROL4, PUSH, POP, DBNZ

564

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Second Operand

[HL + byte]

#byte A rNote sfr saddr

!addr16

PSW [DE] [HL]

[HL + B] $addr16

1 None

First Operand

[HL + C]

A ADD MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV ROR

ADDC XCH XCH XCH XCH XCH XCH XCH ROL

SUB ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD RORC

SUBC ADDC ADDC ADDC ADDC ADDC ROLC

AND SUB SUB SUB SUB SUB

OR SUBC SUBC SUBC SUBC SUBC

XOR AND AND AND AND AND

CMP OR OR OR OR OR

XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR

CMP CMP CMP CMP CMP

r MOV MOV INC

ADD DEC

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

XOR

CMP

B, C DBNZ

sfr MOV MOV

saddr MOV MOV DBNZ INC

ADD DEC

ADDC

SUB

SUBC

AND

XOR

CMP

!addr16 MOV

PSW MOV MOV PUSH

POP

[DE] MOV

[HL] MOV ROR4

ROL4

[HL + byte] MOV

[HL + B]

[HL + C]

MULU

DIVUW

Note Except r = A

565

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) 16-bit instructions

MOVW, XCHW, ADDW, SUBW, CMPW, PUSH, POP, INCW, DECW

Second Operand

1st Operand

AX ADDW MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW

SUBW XCHW

CMPW

rp MOVW

MOVW

Note

INCW

DECW

PUSH

POP

sfrp MOVW MOVW

saddrp MOVW MOVW

!addr16 MOVW

SP MOVW MOVW

Note Only when rp = BC, DE, HL

(3) Bit manipulation instructions

MOV1, AND1, OR1, XOR1, SET1, CLR1, NOT1, BT, BF, BTCLR

Second Operand

First Operand

A.bit MOV1 BT SET1

BF CLR1

BTCLR

sfr.bit MOV1 BT SET1

BF CLR1

BTCLR

saddr.bit MOV1 BT SET1

BF CLR1

BTCLR

PSW.bit MOV1 BT SET1

BF CLR1

BTCLR

[HL].bit MOV1 BT SET1

BF CLR1

BTCLR

CY MOV1 MOV1 MOV1 MOV1 MOV1 SET1

AND1 AND1 AND1 AND1 AND1 CLR1

OR1 OR1 OR1 OR1 OR1 NOT1

XOR1 XOR1 XOR1 XOR1 XOR1

#word AX rp Note sfrp saddrp !addr16 SP None

A.bit sfr.bit saddr.bit PSW.bit [HL].bit CY $addr16 None

566

CHAPTER 27 INSTRUCTION SET OVERVIEW

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(4) Call/instructions/branch instructions

CALL, CALLF, CALLT, BR, BC, BNC, BZ, BNZ, BT, BF, BTCLR, DBNZ

Second Operand

First Operand

Basic instruction BR CALL CALLF CALLT BR

BR BC

BNC

BNZ

Compound BT

instruction BF

BTCLR

DBNZ

(5) Other instructions

ADJBA, ADJBS, BRK, RET, RETI, RETB, SEL, NOP, EI, DI, HALT, STOP

AX !addr16 !addr11 [addr5] $addr16

567User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

Supply voltage VDD –0.3 to +6.5 V

AVREF0 –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

AVREF1 –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

AVSS –0.3 to +0.3 V

Input voltage VI1 P00 to P05, P07, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P37, –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, X1, X2, XT2, RESET

VI2 P60 to P63 N-ch open drain –0.3 to +16 V

Output voltage VO–0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

Analog input voltage VAN P10 to P17 Analog input pin AVSS – 0.3 to AVREF0 + 0.3 V

Output IOH Per pin –10 mA

current, high Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, P56, P57, P60 to P67, –15 mA

P120 to P127

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P40 to P47, –15 mA

P50 to P55, P70 to P72, P130, P131

Output IOLNote Per pin for other than P50 to P57, Peak value 20 mA

current, low P60 to P63 rms value 15 mA

Per pin for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 Peak value 30 mA

rms value 10 mA

Total for P50 to P55 Peak value 100 mA

rms value 70 mA

Total for P56, P57, P60 to P63 Peak value 100 mA

rms value 70 mA

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, Peak value 50 mA

P40 to P47, P70 to P72, P130, P131 rms value 20 mA

Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, Peak value 50 mA

P64 to P67, P120 to P127 rms value 20 mA

Operating ambient TA –40 to +85 °C

temperature

Storage Tstg –65 to +150 °C

temperature

Note The rms value should be calculated as follows: [rms value] = [Peak value] × √Duty

Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any

parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the

verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

568

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

Recommended Circuit TYP. MAX.

5.0

500

Unit

MHz

Resonator

Ceramic

resonator

Crystal

resonator

External

clock

Parameter

Oscillation

frequency (fX)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

Oscillation

frequency (fX)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

X1 input

frequency (fX)Note 1

X1 input

high-/low-level width

(tXH , tXL)

Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. See AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

2. Time required to stabilize oscillation after reset or STOP mode release.

Cautions 1. When using the main system clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS1.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. When the main system clock is stopped and the system is operating on the subsystem clock,

wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching

back to the main system clock.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the

oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

MIN.

1.0

Conditions

VDD = Oscillation

voltage range

After VDD reaches

oscillation voltage range

MIN.

X1 ICX2

1.0

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

569

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Capacitance (TA = 25°C, VDD = VSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input CIN f = 1 MHz 15 pF

capacitance Unmeasured pins returned to 0 V.

I/O CIO f = 1 MHz P01 to P05, P10 to P17, 15 pF

capacitance Unmeasured pins returned P20 to P27, P30 to P37,

to 0 V. P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131

P60 to P63 20 pF

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

MIN.

Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. See AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

2. Time required to stabilize oscillation after VDD reaches oscillation voltage MIN.

Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS1.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing current

consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the main system clock

oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem

clock is used.

Resonator

Crystal

resonator

External

clock

Parameter

Oscillation

frequency (fXT)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

XT1 input

frequency (fXT)Note 1

XT1 input

high-/low-level width

(tXTH , tXTL)

Conditions

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

TYP.

32.768

1.2

MAX.

Unit

kHz

Recommended Circuit

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the

oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

XT1IC XT2

C4 C3

XT1

XT2

570

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input voltage, VIH1 P10 to P17, P21, P23, P30 to P32, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.7VDD VDD V

high P35 to P37, P40 to P47,

P50 to P57, P64 to P67, P71, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0.8VDD VDD V

P120 to P127, P130, P131

VIH2 P00 to P05, P20, P22, P24 to P27, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.8VDD VDD V

P33, P34, P70, P72, RESET VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0.85VDD VDD V

VIH3 P60 to P63 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.7VDD 15 V

(N-ch open drain) VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0.8VDD 15 V

VIH4 X1, X2 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V VDD – 0.5 VDD V

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V VDD – 0.2 VDD V

VIH5 XT1/P07, XT2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.8VDD VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0.9VDD VDD V

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 VNote 0.9VDD VDD V

Input voltage, VIL1 P10 to P17, P21, P23, P30 to P32, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.3VDD V

low

P35 to P37, P40 to P47,

P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P71, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0 0.2VDD V

P120 to P127, P130, P131

VIL2 P00 to P05, P20, P22, P24 to P27, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.2VDD V

P33, P34, P70, P72, RESET VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0 0.15VDD V

VIL3 P60 to P63 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.3VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 0.2VDD V

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.1VDD V

VIL4 X1, X2 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.4 V

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0 0.2 V

VIL5 XT1/P07, XT2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.2VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 0.1VDD V

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 VNote 0 0.1VDD V

Output voltage, VOH VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, IOH = –1 mA VDD – 1.0 V

high VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V, IOH = –100

AVDD – 0.5 V

Output voltage, VOL1 P50 to P57, P60 to P63 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.4 2.0 V

low IOL = 15 mA

P01 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.4 V

P27,

P30 to P37, P40 to P47,

IOL = 1.6 mA

P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120 to

P127, P130, P131

VOL2 SB0, SB1, SCK0 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.2VDD V

open drain,

pulled-up (R = 1 kΩ)

VOL3 IOL = 400

A0.5 V

Note When P07/XT1 pin is used as P07, the inverse phase of P07 should be input to XT2 pin using an inverter.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

571

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input leakage ILIH1 VIN = VDD P00 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 3

current, high P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P60 to P67, P70 to P72, P120 to

P127, P130, P131, RESET

ILIH2 X1, X2, XT1/P07, XT2 20

ILIH3 VIN = 15 V P60 to P63 80

Input leakage ILIL1 VIN = 0 V P00 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, –3

current, low P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, RESET

ILIL2 X1, X2, XT1/P07, XT2 –20

ILIL3 P60 to P63 –3

Note

Mask option pull-up R1VIN = 0 V, P60 to P63 20 40 120 kΩ

resistor

Software pull-up R2VIN = 0 V, P01 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 15 30 90 kΩ

resistor P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120 to P127, P130, P131

Note When pull-up resistors are not connected to P60 to P63 (specified by the mask option), a low-level input

leakage current of –200

A (MAX.) flows only for 1.5 clocks (without wait) after a read instruction has been

executed to port 6 (P6) or port mode register 6 (PM6). At times other than this 1.5-clock interval, a –3

(MAX.) current flows.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Output current, high IOH Per pin –1 mA

Total for all pins –15 mA

Output current, low IOL Per pin for P01 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 10 mA

P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120 to P127, P130, P131

Per pin for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 15 mA

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P40 to P47, 10 mA

P70 to P72, P130, P131

Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, P64 to P67, 10 mA

P120 to P127

Total for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 70 mA

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

572

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 1 3.5 7.7 mA

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 2 0.92 2.2 mA

VDD = 2.0 V ±10%Note 2 0.47 1.2 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 1 6.1 12.3 mA

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 2 1.6 3.5 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 5.5 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.97 2.4 mA

not operating

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 2.1 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.38 0.92 mA

not operating

VDD = 2.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 1.1 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.19 0.46 mA

not operating

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 7.5 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 1.2 2.9 mA

not operating

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 3.3 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.48 1.2 mA

not operating

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 46 92

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 25 50

VDD = 2.0 V ±10% 12.5 25

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 22.5 50

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 3.2 13.2

VDD = 2.0 V ±10% 1.5 11.5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 1.0 30

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.5 10

VDD = 2.0 V ±10% 0.3 10

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.1 30

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.05 10

VDD = 2.0 V ±10% 0.05 10

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

IDD1 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

operating mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 3

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

operating mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 4

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

HALT mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 4

IDD2 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

HALT mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 3

IDD3 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation

operating modeNote 6

IDD4 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation

HALT modeNote 6

IDD5 XT1 = VDD

STOP mode

When feedback resistor is used

IDD6 XT1 = VDD

STOP mode

When feedback resistor is not

used

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Power supply

currentNote 5

573

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

TCY Operating with main system VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.8 64

clock (fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 1 VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 2.0 64

Operating with main system 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.4 32

clock (fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 2 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 0.8 32

Operating on subsystem clock 40Note 3 122 125

TI00 input high-/ tTIH00 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V

2/fsam + 0.1

Note 4

low-level width tTIL00 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V

2/fsam + 0.2

Note 4

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V

2/fsam + 0.5

Note 4

TI01 input high-/ tTIH01 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

low-level width tTIL01 VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 20

TI1, TI2 input fTI1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 4 MHz

frequency VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0 275 kHz

TI1, TI2 input tTIH1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 100 ns

high-/low-level tTIL1 VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 1.8

width

Interrupt request tINTH INTP0 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V

2/fsam + 0.1

Note 4

input high-/ tINTL 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V

2/fsam + 0.2

Note 4

low-level width 1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V

2/fsam + 0.5

Note 4

INTP1 to INTP5, P40 to P47 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 20

RESET low- tRSL VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

level width VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 20

Notes 1. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX/2 (when the oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is cleared

to 00H)

2. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX (when OSMS is set to 01H)

3. Value when external clock is used. When a crystal resonator is used, it is 114

s (MIN.)

4. Selection of fsam = fXX/2N, fXX/32, fXX/64, and fXX/128 is possible with bits 0 and 1 (SCS0, SCS1) of the sampling

clock select register (SCS) (when N = 0 to 4).

Cycle time

(Minimum

instruction

execution time)

Notes 1. High-speed mode operation (when the processor clock control register (PCC) is cleared to 00H).

2. Low-speed mode operation (when the PCC is set to 04H).

3. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX/2 (when the oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is cleared

to 00H)

4. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX (when OSMS is set to 01H)

5. Refer to the current flowing to the VDD0 and VDD1 pins. The current flowing to the A/D converter, D/A

converter, and on-chip pull-up resistor is not included.

6. When the main system clock operation is stopped.

AC Characteristics

(1) Basic operation

(TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

574

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

TCY vs. VDD (@fXX = fX main system clock operation)

TCY vs. VDD (@fXX = fX/2

main system clock operation)

2.0

1.0

0.5

0.4

1234 56

Supply voltage VDD [V]

Operation guaranteed

range

2.0

1.0

0.5

0.4

1234 56

Supply voltage VDD [V]

Operation

guaranteed

range

Cycle time TCY [ s]

575

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH 0.85tCY – 50 ns

Address setup time tADS 0.85tCY – 50 ns

Address hold time tADH 50 ns

Time from address to data input tADD1 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 80 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Time from RD↓ to data input tRDD1 (2 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

tRDD2 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (2 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

tRDL2 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

Time from RD↓ to WAIT↓ input tRDWT1 0.85tCY – 50 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 60 ns

Time from WR↓ to WAIT↓ input tWRWT 2tCY – 60 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1.15 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

Delay time from ASTB↓ to RD↓tASTRD 25 ns

Delay time from ASTB↓ to WR↓tASTWR 0.85tCY + 20 ns

Delay time from RD↑ to ASTB↑tRDAST 0.85tCY – 10 1.15tCY + 20 ns

at external fetch

Time from RD↑ to address hold tRDADH 0.85tCY – 50 1.15tCY + 50 ns

at external fetch

Time from RD↑ to write data output

tRDWD 40 ns

Time from WR↓ to write data output

tWRWD 050ns

Time from WR↑ to address hold tWRADH 0.85tCY 1.15tCY + 40 ns

Delay time from WAIT↑ to RD↑tWTRD 1.15tCY + 40 3.15tCY + 40 ns

Delay time from WAIT↑ to WR↑tWTWR 1.15tCY + 30 3.15tCY + 30 ns

(2) Read/write operation

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

(a) When MCS = 1, PCC2 to PCC0 = 000B (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V)

576

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH tCY – 80 ns

Address setup time tADS tCY – 80 ns

Address hold time tADH 0.4tCY – 10 ns

Time from address to data input

tADD1 (3 + 2n)tCY – 160 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 200 ns

Time from RD↓ to data input tRDD1 (1.4 + 2n)tCY – 70 ns

tRDD2 (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 70 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (1.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

tRDL2 (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

Time from RD↓ to WAIT↓ input tRDWT1 tCY – 100 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 100 ns

Time from WR↓ to WAIT↓ input

tWRWT 2tCY – 100 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

Delay time from ASTB↓ to RD↓

tASTRD 0.4tCY – 30 ns

Delay time from ASTB↓ to WR↓

tASTWR 1.4tCY – 30 ns

Delay time from RD↑ to tRDAST tCY – 10 tCY + 20 ns

ASTB↑ at external fetch

Time from RD↑ to address tRDADH tCY – 50 tCY + 50 ns

hold at external fetch

Time from RD↑ to write data tRDWD 0.4tCY – 20 ns

output

Time from WR↓ to write data tWRWD 060ns

output

Time from WR↑ to address hold

tWRADH tCY tCY + 60 ns

Delay time from WAIT↑ to RD↑tWTRD 0.6tCY + 180 2.6tCY + 180 ns

Delay time from WAIT↑ to WR↑

tWTWR 0.6tCY + 120 2.6tCY + 120 ns

(b) When MCS = 0 or PCC2 to PCC0 ≠ 000B (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

577

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH tCY – 150 ns

Address setup time tADS tCY – 150 ns

Address hold time tADH 0.37tCY – 40 ns

Time from address to data input tADD1 (3 + 2n)tCY – 320 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 300 ns

Time from RD↓ to data input tRDD1 (1.37 + 2n)tCY – 120 ns

tRDD2 (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 120 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (1.37 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

tRDL2 (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

Time from RD↓ to WAIT↓ input tRDWT1 tCY – 200 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 200 ns

Time from WR↓ to WAIT↓ input tWRWT 2tCY – 200 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

Delay time from ASTB↓ to RD↓tASTRD 0.37tCY – 50 ns

Delay time from ASTB↓ to WR↓tASTWR 1.37tCY – 50 ns

Delay time from RD↑ to ASTB at tRDAST tCY – 10 tCY + 20 ns

external fetch

Time from RD↑ to address hold tRDADH tCY – 50 tCY + 50 ns

at external fetch

Time from RD↑ to write data output

tRDWD 0.37tCY – 40 ns

Time from WR↓ to write data output

tWRWD 0 120 ns

Time from WR↑ to address hold tWRADH tCY tCY + 120 ns

Delay time from WAIT↑ to RD↑tWTRD 0.63tCY + 350 2.63tCY + 350 ns

Delay time from WAIT↑ to WR↑tWTWR 0.63tCY + 240 2.63tCY + 240 ns

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

578

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-/low-level

width

SI0 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SI0 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

Delay time from SCK0↓

to SO0 output

(3) Serial interface (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)

(a) Serial interface channel 0

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY1 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

tKH1, tKL1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY1/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V tKCY1/2 – 100 ns

tSIK1 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 400 ns

tKSI1 400 ns

tKSO1 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK0 and SO0 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

tKH2, tKL2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,400 ns

tSIK2 2.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 150 ns

tKSI2 400 ns

tKSO2 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.0 to 5.5V 300 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5V 500 ns

tR2, tF2 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-/low-level

width

SI0 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SI0 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

Delay time from SCK0↓

to SO0 output

SCK0 rise/fall time

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... External clock input)

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO0 output line.

579

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iv) 2-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

tKH4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 650 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,100 ns

tKL4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,400 ns

tSIK4 VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 100 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 150 ns

tKSI4 tKCY4/2 ns

tKSO4 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 300 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 500 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 0 800 ns

tR4, tF4 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

R = 1 kΩ,

C = 100 pFNote

(iii) 2-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY3 R = 1 kΩ, 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1,600 ns

C = 100 pFNote 2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK0 high-level width tKH3 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 160 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 190 ns

SCK0 low-level width tKL3 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 100 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK3 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 300 ns

(to SCK0↑)2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 350 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 400 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 500 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI3 600 ns

(from SCK0↑)ns

Delay time from SCK0↓tKSO3 0 300 ns

to SB0, SB1 output

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCK0, SB0, and SB1 output lines.

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SB0 and SB1 output lines.

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-level width

SCK0 low-level width

SB0, SB1 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

Delay time from SCK0↓

to SB0, SB1 output

SCK0 rise/fall time

580

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(v) SBI mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output) (

PD78005x only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK0 high-/low-level tKH5, tKL5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V tKCY5/2 – 50 ns

width 1.8 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V tKCY5/2 – 150 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(to SCK0↑)2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 400 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI5 tKCY5/2 ns

(from SCK0↑)

Delay time from SCK0↓tKSO5 R = 1 kΩ, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 250 ns

to SB0, SB1 output

C = 100 pFNote

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0 1,000 ns

SB0, SB1↓ from SCK0↑

tKSB tKCY5 ns

SCK0↓ from SB0, SB1↓

tSBK tKCY5 ns

SB0, SB1 high-level width

tSBH tKCY5 ns

SB0, SB1 low-level width

tSBL tKCY5 ns

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCK0, SB0, and SB1 output lines.

(vi) SBI mode (SCK0 ... External clock input) (

PD78005x only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK0 high-/low-level tKH6, tKL6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

width 2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,400 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(to SCK0↑)2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 400 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI6 tKCY6/2 ns

(from SCK0↑)

Delay time from SCK0↓tKSO6 R = 1 kΩ, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 300 ns

to SB0, SB1 output

C = 100 pFNote

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 0 1,000 ns

SB0, SB1↓ from SCK0↑tKSB tKCY6 ns

SCK0↓ from SB0, SB1↓tSBK tKCY6 ns

SB0, SB1 high-level width

tSBH tKCY6 ns

SB0, SB1 low-level width

tSBL tKCY6 ns

SCK0 rise/fall time tR6, tF6 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SB0 and SB1 output lines.

581

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(vii) I2C bus mode (SCL ... Internal clock output) (

PD78005xY only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCL cycle time tKCY7 R = 1 KΩ, 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10

C = 100 pFNote 2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 20

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 30

SCL high-level width tKH7 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 160 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 190 ns

SCL low-level width tKL7 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 50 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 100 ns

SDA0, SDA1 setup time tSIK7 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 200 ns

(to SCL↑)2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 400 ns

SDA0, SDA1 hold time tKSI7 0ns

(from SCL↓)

Delay time from SCL↓tKSO7 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 300 ns

to SDA0, SDA1 output 2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 500 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 0 600 ns

SDA0, SDA1↓ from SCL↑ or tKSB 200 ns

SDA0, SDA1↑ from SCL↓

SCL↓ from SDA0, SDA1↓tSBK VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 400 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 500 ns

SDA0, SDA1 high-level width tSBH 500 ns

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCL, SDA0, and SDA1 output lines.

(viii) I2C bus mode (SCL ... External clock input) (

PD78005xY only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCL cycle time tKCY8 1,000 ns

SCL high-/low-level width tKH8,VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL8 VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 600 ns

SDA0, SDA1 setup time tSIK8 VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 200 ns

(to SCL↑)VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 300 ns

SDA0, SDA1 hold time tKSI8 0ns

(from SCL↓)

Delay time from SCL↓tKSO8 R = 1 kΩ, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 300 ns

to SDA0, SDA1 output C = 100 pFNote 2.0 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 500 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 0 600 ns

SDA0, SDA1↓ from SCL↑ or tKSB 200 ns

SDA0, SDA1↑ from SCL↑

SCL↓ from SDA0, SDA1↓tSBK VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 400 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 500 ns

SDA0, SDA1 high-level width tSBH VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 500 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 800 ns

SCL rise/fall time tR8, When using external device expansion 160 ns

tF8 function

When not using external device 1

expansion function

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SDA0 and SDA1 output lines.

582

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial interface channel 1

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK1 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY9 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK1 high/low-level width tKH9, tKL9 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY9/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

tKCY9/2 – 100

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK9 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 400 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI9 400 ns

Delay time from SCK1↓ to SO1 tKSO9 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

output

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK1 ... External clock input)

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK1 and SO1 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY10 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK1 high/low-level width tKH10,tKL10 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,400 ns

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK10 VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 100 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 150 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKIS10 400 ns

Delay time from SCK1↓ to SO1 tKSO10 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 300 ns

output VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 500 ns

SCK1 rise/fall time tR10, tF10 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO1 output line.

583

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iii) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (SCK1 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY11 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width tKH11,tKL11 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

tKCY11/2 – 50

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

tKCY11/2 – 100

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK11 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 400 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI11 400 ns

Delay time from SCK1↓ to SO1 tKSO11 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

output

STB↑ from SCK1↑tSBD

tKCY11/2 – 100 tKCY11/2 + 100

Strobe signal high-level width tSBW 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V

tKCY11 – 30 tKCY11 + 30

2.0 V < VDD < 2.7 V

tKCY11 – 60 tKCY11 + 60

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V

tKCY11 – 90 tKCY11 + 90

Busy signal setup time tBYS 100 ns

(to busy signal detection timing)

Busy signal hold time tBYH 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(from busy signal detection timing) 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 300 ns

SCK1↓ from busy inactive tSPS 2tKCY11 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK1 and SO1 output lines.

584

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iv) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (SCK1...External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY12 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width tKH12, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL12 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,400 ns

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK12 VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 100 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 150 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI12 400 ns

Delay time from SCK1↓ to SO1 tKSO12 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 300 ns

output VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 500 ns

SCK1 rise/fall time tR12, tF12 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO1 output line.

585

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK2...Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK2 cycle time 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK2 high-/low-level width VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY13/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V

tKCY13/2 – 100

SI2 setup time (to SCK2↑) 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 400 ns

SI2 hold time (from SCK2↑) 400 ns

Delay time from SCK2↓ to SO2 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

output

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO2 output line.

tKCY13

tKH13,

tKL13

tSIK13

tKSI13

tKSO13

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK2...External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK2 cycle time tKCY14 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

SCK2 high-/low-level width tKH14, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL14 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,400 ns

SI2 setup time (to SCK2↑)tSIK14 VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 100 ns

VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V 150 ns

SI2 hold time (from SCK2↑)tKSI14 400 ns

Delay time from SCK2↓ to SO2 tKSO14 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 300 ns

output VDD = 2.0 to 5.5 V 500 ns

SCK2 rise/fall time tR14, Other than below 160 ns

tF14 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 1

When not using external device

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO2 output line.

586

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iii) UART mode (dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 78,125 bps

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 39,063 bps

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 19,531 bps

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 9,766 bps

(iv) UART mode (external clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

ASCK cycle time tKCY15 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 4,800 ns

ASCK high-/low-level width tKH15, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL15 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 2,400 ns

Transfer rate 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 39,063 bps

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 19,531 bps

2.0 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 9,766 bps

1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.0 V 6,510 bps

ASCK rise/fall time tR15, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 1,000 ns

tF15 when not using external device

expansion function.

Other than above 160 ns

587

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

AC Timing Measurement Points (Excluding X1, XT1 Inputs)

Clock Timing

TI Timing

tXL tXH

1/fX

VIH4 (MIN.)

VIL4 (MAX.)

tXTL tXTH

1/fXT

VIH5 (MIN.)

VIL5 (MAX.)

X1 input

XT1 input

1/f

TI1

TIL1

TIH1

TI1, TI2

TIL00

, t

TIL01

TIH00

, t

TIH01

TI00, TI01

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Point of

measurement

588

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Interrupt Request Input Timing

RESET Input Timing

RSL

RESET

INTL

INTH

INTP0 to INTP5,

P40 to P47

589

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Read/Write Operation

External fetch (no wait):

External fetch (wait insertion):

ASTH

ADH

ADD1

Hi-Z

ADS

RDD1

RDADH

RDAST

ASTRD

RDL1

RDH

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

Higher 8-bit address

Lower

8-bit

address

Operation

code

ASTH

ADH

ADD1

Hi-Z

ADS

RDADH

RDAST

ASTRD

RDL1

RDH

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WTRD

WTL

RDWT1

WAIT

RDD1

Higher 8-bit address

Operation

code

Lower

8-bit

address

590

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

External data access (no wait):

External data access (wait insertion):

ASTRD

ASTH

ADH

ADD2

Hi-Z

ADS

RDL2

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WDS

WRL

RDH

Hi-Z

WRWD

ASTWR

WRADH

Higher 8-bit address

Write dataRead data

RDD2

WDH

RDWD

Lower

8-bit

address

ASTRD

ASTH

ADH

ADD2

Hi-Z

ADS

RDL2

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WDS

WRL

RDH

Hi-Z

WDWR

ASTWR

WRADH

Higher 8-bit address

Write dataRead data

RDD2

WDH

RDWT2

WTL

WRWT

WTWR

WTL

WAIT

WTRD

RDWD

Lower

8-bit

address

591

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3-wire serial I/O mode:

2-wire serial I/O mode:

Serial Transfer Timing

KCYm

KLm

KHm

SCK0 to SCK2

SI0 to SI2

SO0 to SO2

m = 1, 2, 9, 10, 13, 14

n = 2, 10, 14

SIKm

KSIm

KSOm

Input data

Output data

tKSO3, 4

tSIK3, 4

tKCY3, 4

KL3, 4

KH3, 4

SCK0

tKSI3, 4

SB0, SB1

tF4

tR4

592 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

SBI mode (bus release signal transfer):

SBI mode (command signal transfer):

I2C bus mode:

tSIK5, 6

tKCY5, 6

tKL5, 6 tKH5, 6

SCK0

tSBL tSBH

tKSB tSBK tKSI5, 6

tKSO5, 6

SB0, SB1

tR6 tF6

tSIK5, 6

tKCY5,6

tKL5, 6

tKH5, 6

SCK0

tKSB tSBK tKSI5, 6

tKSO5, 6

SB0, SB1

tR6 tF6

SCL

SDA0,

SDA1

tKLm

tSBH tSIKm

tKSB tKSB

tKHm

tKCYm

tR8tF8

tSIKm

tKSOm tSBK

tKSIm

m = 7, 8

593

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function:

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (busy processing):

UART mode (external clock input):

SBW

SBD

KCY11, 12

KH11, 12

KSI11, 12

SIK11, 12

D2 D1 D0 D7

D7D2 D1 D0

SO1

SI1

SCK1

STB

tR12

KL11, 12

tF12

KSO11, 12

KCY15

KH15

KL15

F15

R15

ASCK

Note The signal is not actually driven low here; it is shown as such to indicate the timing.

tBYS

SCK1

tSPS

BUSY

(Active high)

789

Note 10Note 10 + nNote 1

tBYH

594 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

A/D Converter Characteristics

(

PD780053, 780053(A), 780054, 780054(A), 780055, 780055(A), 780056, 780056(A), 780058B, 780058B(A),

780053Y, 780053Y(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A), 780058BY,

780058BY(A))

(TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 8 8 bit

Overall errorNote 1 1.8 V ≤ AVREF0 < 2.7 V ±1.4 %FSR

2.7 V ≤ AVREF0 ≤ 5.5 V ±0.6 %FSR

Conversion time TCONV1 1.8 V ≤ AVREF0 < 2.7 V 40 100

TCONV2 2.7 V ≤ AVREF0 ≤ 5.5 V 16 100

Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF0 V

Reference voltage AVREF0 1.8 VDD V

AVREF0 current IREF0 When A/D converter is operatingNote 2 500 1,500

When A/D converter is not operating

Note 3

Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB). This value is indicated as a ratio to the full-scale value (%FSR).

2. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 1.

3. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 0.

A/D Converter Characteristics (

PD780058)

(TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 8 8 bit

Overall errorNote 1 ±0.6 %FSR

Conversion time TCONV 16 100

Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF0 V

Reference voltage AVREF0 2.7 VDD V

AVREF0 current IREF0 When A/D converter is operatingNote 2 500 1,500

When A/D converter is not operating

Note 3

Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB). This value is indicated as a ratio to the full-scale value (%FSR).

2. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 1.

3. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 0.

Caution The operating voltage range of the A/D converter and D/A converter of the

PD780058 is VDD = 2.7 to

5.5 V.

595

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 bit

Overall error R = 2 MΩNote 1 ±1.2 %

R = 4 MΩNote 1 ±0.8 %

R = 10 MΩNote 1 ±0.6 %

Settling time

C = 30 pFNote 1

AVREF1 = 1.8 to 2.7 V 10

AVREF1 = 1.8 to 5.5 V 15

Output resistance RONote 2 8kΩ

Analog reference voltage AVREF1 1.8 VDD V

AVREF1 current IREF1 Note 2 2.5 mA

Resistance between AVREF1 and AVSS RAIREF1 DACS0, DACS1 = 55HNote 2 48 kΩ

D/A Converter Characteristics

(

PD780053, 780053(A), 780054, 780054(A), 780055, 780055(A), 780056, 780056(A), 780058B, 780058B(A),

780053Y, 780053Y(A), 780054Y, 780054Y(A), 780055Y, 780055Y(A), 780056Y, 780056Y(A), 780058BY,

780058BY(A))

(TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 bit

Overall error R = 2 MΩNote 1 ±1.2 %

R = 4 MΩNote 1 0.8 %

R = 10 MΩNote 1 0.6 %

Settling time

C = 30 pFNote 1

Output resistance RONote 2 8kΩ

Analog reference voltage AVREF1 2.7 VDD V

AVREF1 current IREF1 Note 2 2.5 mA

Resistance between AVREF1 and AVSS RAIREF1 DACS0, DACS1 = 55HNote 2 48 kΩ

D/A Converter Characteristics (

PD780058)

(TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Notes 1. R and C are the D/A converter output pin load resistance and load capacitance, respectively.

2. Value for one D/A converter channel

Remark DACS0 and DACS1: D/A conversion value setting registers 0, 1

Caution The operating voltage range of the A/D converter and D/A converter of the

PD780058 is VDD = 2.7 to

5.5 V.

Notes 1. R and C are the D/A converter output pin load resistance and load capacitance, respectively.

2. Value for one D/A converter channel

Remark DACS0 and DACS1: D/A conversion value setting registers 0, 1

596 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM VERSION)

Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C)

Note Selection of 212/fXX and 214/fXX to 217/fXX is possible with bits 0 to 2 (OSTS0 to OSTS2) of the oscillation stabilization

time select register (OSTS).

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Data retention supply VDDDR 1.8 5.5 V

voltage

Data retention supply IDDDR VDDDR = 1.8 V 0.1 10

current Subsystem clock stop and feed-back resistor

disconnected

Release signal set time tSREL 0

Oscillation stabilization tWAIT Release by RESET 217/fXms

wait time Release by interrupt request Note ms

Remark fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

Data Retention Timing (STOP Mode Release by RESET)

Data Retention Timing (Standby Release Signal: STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Signal)

tSREL

tWAIT

VDD

STOP instruction execution

STOP mode

Data retention mode

HALT mode

Operating mode

Standby release signal

(Interrupt request)

VDDDR

SREL

WAIT

RESET

STOP instruction execution

STOP mode

Data retention mode

Internal reset operation

HALT mode

Operating mode

DDDR

597

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

Supply voltage VDD –0.3 to +6.5 V

VPP Note 1 –0.3 to +10.5 V

AVREF0 –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

AVREF1 –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

AVSS –0.3 to +0.3 V

Input voltage VI1 P00 to P05, P07, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P37, –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, X1, X2, XT2, RESET

VI2 P60 to P63 N-ch open drain –0.3 to +16 V

Output voltage VO–0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

Analog input voltage VAN P10 to P17 Analog input pin AVSS – 0.3 to AVREF0 + 0.3 V

Output IOH Per pin –10 mA

current, high Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, P56, P57, P60 to P67, –15 mA

P120 to P127

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P40 to P47, –15 mA

P50 to P55, P70 to P72, P130, P131

Output IOLNote 2 Per pin for other than P50 to P57, Peak value 20 mA

current, low P60 to P63 rms value 10 mA

Per pin for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 Peak value 30 mA

rms value 15 mA

Total for P50 to P55 Peak value 100 mA

rms value 70 mA

Total for P56, P57, P60 to P63 Peak value 100 mA

rms value 70 mA

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, Peak value 50 mA

P40 to P47, P70 to P72, P130, P131 rms value 20 mA

Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, Peak value 50 mA

P64 to P67, P120 to P127 rms value 20 mA

Operating ambient TADuring normal operation –40 to +85 °C

temperature During flash memory programming 10 to 40 °C

Storage Tstg –65 to +125 °C

temperature

Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any

parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the

verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

(The Note is described on the next page.)

598

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Notes 1. Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash

memory is written.

- When supply voltage rises

VPP must exceed VDD 10

s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating

voltage range (see a in the figure below).

- When supply voltage drops

VDD must be lowered 10

s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (2.7 V) of the operating

voltage range of VDD (see b in the figure below).

2. The rms value should be calculated as follows: [rms value] = [Peak value] × √Duty

2.7 V

0 V

2.7 V

a b

599

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Recommended Circuit TYP. MAX.

5.0

500

Unit

MHz

Resonator

Ceramic

resonator

Crystal

resonator

External

clock

Parameter

Oscillation

frequency (fX)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

Oscillation

frequency (fX)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

X1 input

frequency (fX)Note 1

X1 input

high-/low-level width

(tXH , tXL)

Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. See AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

2. Time required to stabilize oscillation after reset or STOP mode release.

Cautions 1. When using the main system clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS1.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. When the main system clock is stopped and the system is operating on the subsystem clock,

wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching

back to the main system clock.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the

oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

MIN.

1.0

Conditions

VDD = Oscillation

voltage range

After VDD reaches

oscillation voltage range

MIN.

1.0

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

X1 VPPX2

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

600

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input CIN f = 1 MHz 15 pF

capacitance Unmeasured pins returned to 0 V.

I/O CIO f = 1 MHz P01 to P05, P10 to P17, 15 pF

capacitance Unmeasured pins returned P20 to P27, P30 to P37,

to 0 V. P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131

P60 to P63 20 pF

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

MIN.

Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. See AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

2. Time required to stabilize oscillation after VDD reaches oscillation voltage range MIN.

Resonator

Crystal

resonator

External

clock

Parameter

Oscillation

frequency (fXT)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

XT1 input

frequency (fXT)Note 1

XT1 input

high-/low-level width

(tXTH , tXTL)

Conditions

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

TYP.

32.768

1.2

MAX.

Unit

kHz

Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS1.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing current

consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the main system clock

oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem

clock is used.

Recommended Circuit

Capacitance (TA = 25°C, VDD = VSS = 0 V)

XT1VPP XT2

C4 C3

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the

oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

XT1

XT2

601

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input voltage, VIH1 P10 to P17, P21, P23, P30 to P32, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.7 VDD VDD V

high P35 to P37, P40 to P47,

P50 to P57, P64-P67, P71,

P120 to P127, P130, P131

VIH2 P00 to P05, P20, P22, P24 to P27, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V

P33, P34, P70, P72, RESET

VIH3 P60 to P63 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.7 VDD 15 V

(N-ch open drain)

VIH4 X1, X2 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V VDD – 0.5 VDD V

VIH5 XT1/P07, XT2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0.9 VDD VDD V

Input voltage, VIL1 P10 to P17, P21, P23, P30 to P32, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.3 VDD V

low

P35 to P37, P40 to P47,

P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P71,

P120 to P127, P130, P131

VIL2 P00 to P05, P20, P22, P24 to P27, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.2VDD V

P33, P34, P70, P72, RESET

VIL3 P60 to P63 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.3VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 0.2VDD V

VIL4 X1, X2 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.4 V

VIL5 XT1/P07, XT2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.2VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 0.1VDD V

Output voltage, VOH VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, IOH = –1 mA VDD – 1.0 V

high VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, IOH = –100

AVDD – 0.5 V

Output voltage, VOL1 P50 to P57, P60 to P63 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.4 2.0 V

low IOL = 15 mA

P01 to P05, P10 to P17,

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.4 V

P20 to P27, P30 to P37,

IOL = 1.6 mA

P40 to P47, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120-P127, P130,

P131

VOL2 SB0, SB1, SCK0 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.2 VDD V

open drain,

pulled-up (R = 1 kΩ)

VOL3 IOL = 400

A 0.5 V

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

602

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input leakage ILIH1 VIN = VDD P00 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 3

current, high P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P60 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, RESET

ILIH2 X1, X2, XT1/P07, XT2 20

ILIH3 VIN = 15 V P60 to P63 80

Input leakage ILIL1 VIN = 0 V P00 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, –3

current, low P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, RESET

ILIL2 X1, X2, XT1/P07, XT2 –20

ILIL3 P60-P63 –3

Note

Software pull-up R VIN = 0 V, P01 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 15 30 90 kΩ

resistor P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120 to P127, P130, P131

Note A low-level input leakage current of –200

A (MAX.) flows only for 1.5 clocks (without wait) after a read

instruction has been executed to port 6 (P6) or port mode register 6 (PM6). At times other than this 1.5-clock

interval, a –3

A (MAX.) current flows.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Output current, high IOH Per pin –1mA

Total for all pins –15 mA

Output current, low IOL Per pin for P01 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 10 mA

P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120 to P127, P130, P131

Per pin for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 15 mA

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P40 to P47, 10 mA

P70 to P72, P130, P131

Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, P64 to P67, 10 mA

P120 to P127

Total for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 70 mA

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

603

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 1 6.2 12.5 mA

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 2 1.3 3.1 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 1 13.1 25.7 mA

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 2 2.1 4.9 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 5.6 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 1.0 2.8 mA

not operating

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 2.9 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.44 1.1 mA

not operating

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 8.4 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 1.3 3.1 mA

not operating

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 4.5 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.6 1.5 mA

not operating

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 110 220

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 86 172

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 22.5 50

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 3.2 13.2

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 1.0 30

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.5 10

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.1 30

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.05 10

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

IDD1Note 5

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

operating mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 4

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

HALT mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 4

IDD2 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

HALT mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 3

IDD3Note 5 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation

operating modeNote 6

IDD4Note 5 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation

HALT modeNote 6

IDD5Note 5

IDD6Note 5 XT1 = VDD

STOP mode

When feedback resistor is not

used

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Power supply

current

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

operating mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 3

Notes 1. High-speed mode operation (when the processor clock control register (PCC) is cleared to 00H).

2. Low-speed mode operation (when PCC is set to 04H).

3. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX/2 (when the oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is cleared

to 00H)

4. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX (when OSMS is set to 01H)

5. Refers to the current flowing to the VDD0 and VDD1 pins. The current flowing to the A/D converter, D/A

converter, and on-chip pull-up resistor is not included.

6. When the main system clock operation is stopped.

XT1 = VDD

STOP mode

When feedback resistor is used

604

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

AC Characteristics

(1) Basic operation

(TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Cycle time TCY Operating with main system VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.8 64

(Min. instruction clock (fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 1

execution time) Operating with main system 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.4 32

clock (fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 2 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 0.8 32

Operating with subsystem clock 40Note 3 122 125

TI00 input high-/ tTIH00 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V

2/fsam + 0.1Note 4

low-level width tTIL00 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V

2/fsam + 0.2Note 4

TI01 input high-/ tTIH01 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

low-level width tTIL01

TI1, TI2 input fTI1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 4 MHz

frequency VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 275 kHz

TI1, TI2 input tTIH1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 100 ns

high-/low-level tTIL1 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 1.8

width

Interrupt request tINTH INTP0 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V

2/fsam + 0.1Note 4

input high-/ tINTL 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V

2/fsam + 0.2Note 4

low-level width INTP1 to INTP5, P40 to P47 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

RESET low- tRSL VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

level width

Notes 1. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX/2 (when the oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is cleared

to 00H)

2. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX (when OSMS is set to 01H)

3. Value when external clock is used. When a crystal resonator is used, it is 114

s (MIN.)

4. Selection of fsam = fXX/2N, fXX/32, fXX/64, and fXX/128 is possible with bits 0 and 1 (SCS0, SCS1) of the sampling

clock select register (SCS) (when N = 0 to 4).

605

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

TCY vs. VDD (@fXX = fX main system clock operation)

TCY vs. VDD (@fXX = fX/2

main system clock operation)

2.0

1.0

0.5

0.4

1234 56

Supply voltage VDD [V]

Guaranteed

operation

range

Cycle time TCY [ s]

2.0

1.0

0.5

0.4

1234 56

Supply voltage VDD [V]

Operation

guaranteed

range

Cycle time TCY [ s]

606

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Read/write operation

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH 0.85tCY – 50 ns

Address setup time tADS 0.85tCY – 50 ns

Address hold time tADH 50 ns

Data input time from address tADD1 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 80 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Data input time from RD↓tRDD1 (2 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

tRDD2 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (2 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

tRDL2 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

WAIT↓ input time from RD↓tRDWT1 0.85tCY – 50 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 60 ns

WAIT↓ input time from WR↓tWRWT 2tCY – 60 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1.15 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

RD↓ delay time from ASTB↓tASTRD 25 ns

WR↓ delay time from ASTB↓tASTWR 0.85tCY + 20 ns

ASTB↑ delay time from tRDAST 0.85tCY – 10 1.15tCY + 20 ns

RD↑ at external fetch

Address hold time from tRDADH 0.85tCY – 50 1.15tCY + 50 ns

RD↑ at external fetch

Write data output time from RD↑tRDWD 40 ns

Write data output time from WR↓tWRWD 050ns

Address hold time from WR↑tWRADH 0.85tCY 1.15tCY + 40 ns

RD↑ delay time from WAIT↑tWTRD 1.15tCY + 40 3.15tCY + 40 ns

WR↑ delay time from WAIT↑tWTWR 1.15tCY + 30 3.15tCY + 30 ns

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

(a) When MCS = 1, PCC2 to PCC0 = 000B (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V)

607

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) When MCS = 0 or PCC2 to PCC0 ≠ 000B (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH tCY – 80 ns

Address setup time tADS tCY – 80 ns

Address hold time tADH 0.4tCY – 10 ns

Data input time from address tADD1 (3 + 2n)tCY – 160 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 200 ns

Data input time from RD↓tRDD1 (1.4 + 2n)tCY – 70 ns

tRDD2 (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 70 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (1.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

tRDL2 (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

WAIT↓ input time from RD↓tRDWT1 tCY – 100 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 100 ns

WAIT↓ input time from WR↓tWRWT 2tCY – 100 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

RD↓ delay time from ASTB↓

tASTRD 0.4tCY – 30 ns

WR↓ delay time from ASTB↓

tASTWR 1.4tCY – 30 ns

ASTB↑ delay time from RD↑tRDAST tCY – 10 tCY + 20 ns

at external fetch

Address hold time from tRDADH tCY – 50 tCY + 50 ns

RD↑ at external fetch

Write data output time from tRDWD 0.4tCY – 20 ns

RD↑

Write data output time from tWRWD 060ns

WR↓

Address hold time from WR↑tWRADH tCY tCY + 60 ns

RD↑ delay time from WAIT↑tWTRD 0.6tCY + 180 2.6tCY + 180 ns

WR↑ delay time from WAIT↑

tWTWR 0.6tCY + 120 2.6tCY + 120 ns

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

608

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Serial interface (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

(a) Serial interface channel 0

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY1 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

tKH1, tKL1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY1/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tKCY1/2 – 100 ns

tSIK1 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

tKSI1 400 ns

tKSO1 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK0 and SO0 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

tKH2, tKL2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

tSIK2 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

tKSI2 400 ns

tKSO2 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

tR2, tF2 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-/low-level

width

SI0 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SI0 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

SO0 output delay time

from SCK0↓

SCK0 rise/fall time

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... External clock input)

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO0 output line.

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-/low-level

width

SI0 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SI0 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

SO0 output delay time

from SCK0↓

609

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iv) 2-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1,600 ns

tKH4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 650 ns

tKL4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

tSIK4 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 100 ns

tKSI4 tKCY4/2 ns

tKSO4 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 300 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 500 ns

tR4, tF4 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

R = 1 kΩ,

C = 100 pFNote

(iii) 2-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY3 R = 1 kΩ, 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1,600 ns

SCK0 high-level width tKH3 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 160 ns

SCK0 low-level width tKL3 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 100 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK3 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 300 ns

(to SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI3 600 ns

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay tKSO3 0 300 ns

time from SCK0↓

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCK0, SB0, and SB1 output lines.

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SB0 and SB1 output lines.

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-level width

SCK0 low-level width

SB0, SB1 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay

time from SCK0↓

SCK0 rise/fall time

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 350 ns

610

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(v) SBI mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output) (

PD78F0058 only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 3,200 ns

SCK0 high-/low-level tKH5, tKL5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V tKCY5/2 – 50 ns

width 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V tKCY5/2 – 150 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(to SCK0↑)2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 300 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI5 tKCY5/2 ns

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay tKSO5 R = 1 kΩ, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 250 ns

time from SCK0↓

C = 100 pFNote

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 1,000 ns

SB0, SB1↓ from SCK0↑

tKSB tKCY5 ns

SCK0↓ from SB0, SB1↓

tSBK tKCY5 ns

SB0, SB1 high-level width

tSBH tKCY5 ns

SB0, SB1 low-level width

tSBL tKCY5 ns

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCK0, SB0, and SB1 output lines.

(vi) SBI mode (SCK0 ... External clock input) (

PD78F0058 only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 3,200 ns

SCK0 high-/low-level tKH6, tKL6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

width 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(to SCK0↑)2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 300 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI6 tKCY6/2 ns

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay tKSO6 R = 1 kΩ, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 300 ns

time from SCK0↓

C = 100 pFNote

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 1,000 ns

SB0, SB1↓ from SCK0↑tKSB tKCY6 ns

SCK0↓ from SB0, SB1↓tSBK tKCY6 ns

SB0, SB1 high-level width

tSBH tKCY6 ns

SB0, SB1 low-level width

tSBL tKCY6 ns

SCK0 rise/fall time tR6, tF6 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SB0 and SB1 output lines.

611

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(viii) I2C bus mode (SCL ... External clock input) (

PD78F0058Y only)

(vii) I2C bus mode (SCL ... Internal clock output) (

PD78F0058Y only)

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCL, SDA0, and SDA1 output lines.

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SDA0 and SDA1 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCL cycle time tKCY7 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 10

SCL high-level width tKH7 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V tKCY7 – 160

SCL low-level width tKL7 4.5 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V tKCY7 – 50 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V tKCY7 – 100 ns

SDA0, SDA1 setup time

tSIK7 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 200 ns

(to SCL↑)

SDA0, SDA1 hold time tKSI7 0ns

(from SCL

↓

)

SDA0, SDA1 output delay

tKSO7 4.5 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 0 300 ns

time from SCL↓

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 500 ns

SDA0, SDA1

↓

from SCL↑

tKSB 200 ns

or SDA0, SDA1

↑

from SCL↑

SCL↓ from SDA0, SDA1↓

tSBK 400 ns

SDA0, SDA1 high-level width

tSBH 500 ns

R = 1 kΩ,

C = 100 pFNote

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCL cycle time tKCY8 1

SCL high-level width tKH8 400 ns

SDA0, SDA1 setup time

tSIK8 200 ns

(to SCL↑)

SDA0, SDA1 hold time tKSI8 0ns

(from SCL

↓

)

SDA0, SDA1 output delay

tKSO8 4.5 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V 0 300 ns

time from SCL↓

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V

SDA0, SDA1↓ from SCL↑

tKSB 200 ns

or SDA0, SDA1↑ from SCL↑

SCL↓ from SDA0, SDA1↓

tSBK 400 ns

SDA0, SDA1 high-level width

tSBH 500 ns

R = 1 kΩ,

C = 100 pFNote

0ns

500

612

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial interface channel 1

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK1 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY9 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width tKH9, tKL9 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

tKCY9/2 – 50

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

tKCY9/2 – 100

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK9 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI9 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO9 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK1 ... External clock input)

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK1 and SO1 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY10 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width

tKH10, tKL10

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK10 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 100 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKIS10 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO10 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 300 ns

SCK1 rise/fall time tR10, tF10 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO1 output line.

613

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iii) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (SCK1 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY11 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width

tKH11, tKL11

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

tKCY11/2 – 50

VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

tKCY11/2 – 100

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK11 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI11 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO11 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

STB↑ from SCK1↑tSBD

tKCY11/2 – 100 tKCY11/2 + 100

Strobe signal high-level width tSBW 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V

tKCY11 – 30 tKCY11 + 30

Busy signal setup time tBYS 100 ns

(to busy signal detection timing)

Busy signal hold time tBYH 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(from busy signal detection timing) 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

SCK1↓ from busy inactive tSPS 2tKCY11 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK1 and SO1 output lines.

(iv) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (SCK1 ... External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY12 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width tKH12, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL12 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK12 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 100 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI12 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO12 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 300 ns

SCK1 rise/fall time tR12, tF12 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO1 output line.

614

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK2 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK2 cycle time tKCY13 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SCK2 high-/low-level width tKH13,VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

tKCY13/2 – 50

tKL13 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V

tKCY13/2 – 100

SI2 setup time (to SCK2↑)tSIK13 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

SI2 hold time (from SCK2↑)tKSI13 400 ns

SO2 output delay time from SCK2↓tKSO13 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO2 output line.

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK2 ... External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK2 cycle time tKCY14 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SCK2 high-/low-level width tKH14, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL14 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

SI2 setup time (to SCK2↑)tSIK14 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 100 ns

SI2 hold time (from SCK2↑)tKSI14 400 ns

SO2 output delay time from SCK2↓tKSO14 C = 100 pFNote VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 300 ns

SCK2 rise/fall time tR14, Other than below 160 ns

tF14 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 1

When not using external device

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO2 output line.

615

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iii) UART mode (dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 78,125 bps

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 39,063 bps

(iv) UART mode (external clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

ASCK cycle time tKCY15 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

ASCK high-/low-level width tKH15, tKL15 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

Transfer rate 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 39,063 bps

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 19,531 bps

ASCK rise/fall time tR15, tF15 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 1,000 ns

when not using external device

expansion function.

Other than above 160 ns

616

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

AC Timing Measurement Points (Excluding X1, XT1 Inputs)

Clock Timing

TI Timing

tXL tXH

1/fX

VIH4 (MIN.)

VIL4 (MAX.)

tXTL tXTH

1/fXT

VIH5 (MIN.)

VIL5 (MAX.)

X1 input

XT1 input

1/f

TI1

TIL1

TIH1

TI1, TI2

TIL00

, t

TIL01

TIH00

, t

TIH01

TI00, TI01

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Point of

measurement

617

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Interrupt Request Input Timing

RESET Input Timing

RSL

RESET

tINTL tINTH

INTP0 to INTP5,

P40 to P47

618

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Read/Write Operation

External fetch (no wait):

External fetch (wait insertion):

ASTH

ADH

ADD1

Hi-Z

ADS

RDD1

RDADH

RDAST

ASTRD

RDL1

RDH

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

Higher 8-bit address

Lower

8-bit

address

Operation

code

ASTH

ADH

ADD1

Hi-Z

ADS

RDADH

RDAST

ASTRD

RDL1

RDH

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WTRD

WTL

RDWT1

WAIT

RDD1

Higher 8-bit address

Operation

code

Lower

8-bit

address

619

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

External data access (no wait):

External data access (wait insertion):

ASTRD

ASTH

ADH

ADD2

Hi-Z

ADS

RDL2

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WDS

WRL

RDH

Hi-Z

WRWD

ASTWR

WRADH

Higher 8-bit address

Write dataRead data

RDD2

WDH

RDWD

Lower

8-bit

address

ASTRD

ASTH

ADH

ADD2

Hi-Z

ADS

RDL2

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WDS

WRL

RDH

Hi-Z

WRWD

ASTWR

WRADH

Higher 8-bit address

Write dataRead data

RDD2

WDH

RDWT2

WTL

WRWT

WTWR

WTL

WAIT

WTRD

RDWD

Lower

8-bit

address

620

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3-wire serial I/O mode:

Serial Transfer Timing

KCYm

KLm

KHm

SCK0 to SCK2

SI0 to SI2

SO0 to SO2

m = 1, 2, 9, 10, 13, 14

n = 2, 10, 14

SIKm

KSIm

KSOm

Input data

Output data

2-wire serial I/O mode:

KSO3, 4

SIK3, 4

KCY3, 4

tKL3, 4 tKH3, 4

SCK0

KSI3, 4

SB0, SB1

621

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SBI mode (bus release signal transfer):

SBI mode (command signal transfer):

tSIK5, 6

tKCY5, 6

tKL5, 6 tKH5, 6

SCK0

tSBL tSBH

tKSB tSBK tKSI5, 6

tKSO5, 6

SB0, SB1

tR6 tF6

SIK5, 6

KCY5,6

KL5, 6

KH5, 6

SCK0

KSB

SBK

KSI5, 6

KSO5, 6

SB0, SB1

I2C bus mode:

SCL

SDA0,

SDA1

KLm

SBH

m = 7, 8

SIKm

KSB

KHm

KCYm

SIKm

KSOm

SBK

KSIm

622

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function:

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (busy processing):

Note The signal is not actually driven low here; it is shown as such to indicate the timing.

BYS

SCK1

SPS

BUSY

(Active high)

789

Note 10Note 10 + nNote 1

BYH

tSBWtSBD

tKCY11, 12

tKH11, 12

tKSI11, 12

tSIK11, 12

D2 D1 D0 D7

D7D2 D1 D0

SO1

SI1

SCK1

STB

tR12

tKL11, 12

tF12

tKSO11, 12

UART mode (external clock input):

KCY15

KH15

KL15

F15

R15

ASCK

623

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

A/D Converter Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 8 8 bit

Overall errorNote 1 2.7 V ≤ AVREF0 < 4.5 V ±1.0 %FSR

4.5 V ≤ AVREF0 ≤ 5.5 V ±0.6 %FSR

Conversion time TCONV 2.7 V ≤ AVREF0 ≤ 5.5 V 16 100

Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF0 V

Reference voltage AVREF0 2.7 VDD V

AVREF0 current IREF0 When A/D converter is operatingNote 2 500 1,500

When A/D converter is not operating

Note 3

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 bit

Overall error R = 2 MΩNote 1 ±1.2 %

R = 4 MΩNote 1 ±0.8 %

R = 10 MΩNote 1 ±0.6 %

Settling time

C = 30 pFNote 1

Output resistance RONote 2 8kΩ

Analog reference voltage AVREF1 1.8 VDD V

AVREF1 current IREF1 Note 2 2.5 mA

Resistance between AVREF1 and AVSS RAIREF1 DACS0, DACS1 = 55HNote 2 48 kΩ

Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB). This value is indicated as a ratio to the full-scale value (%FSR).

2. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 1.

3. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 0.

D/A Converter Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Notes 1. R and C are the D/A converter output pin load resistance and load capacitance, respectively.

2. Value for one D/A converter channel

Remark DACS0 and DACS1: D/A conversion value set registers 0, 1

624

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C)

Note Selection of 212/fXX and 214/fXX to 217/fXX is possible with bits 0 to 2 (OSTS0 to OSTS2) of the oscillation stabilization

time select register (OSTS).

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Data retention power VDDDR 1.8 5.5 V

supply voltage

Data retention power IDDDR VDDDR = 1.8 V 0.1 10

supply current Subsystem clock stop and feed-back resistor

disconnected

Release signal set time tSREL 0

Oscillation stabilization tWAIT Release by RESET 217/fXms

wait time Release by interrupt request Note ms

Remark fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

Data Retention Timing (STOP Mode Release by RESET)

Data Retention Timing (Standby Release Signal: STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Signal)

tSREL

tWAIT

VDD

STOP instruction execution

STOP mode

Data retention mode

HALT mode

Operating mode

Standby release signal

(Interrupt request)

VDDDR

tSREL

tWAIT

VDD

RESET

STOP instruction execution

STOP mode

Data retention mode

Internal reset operation

HALT mode

Operating mode

VDDDR

625

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Flash Memory Programming Characteristics (VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, TA = 10 to 40°C)

(1) Write/delete characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Write current (VDD pin)Note 1 IDDW When VPP = VPP1 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 15.5 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 2

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 28.7 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 3

Write current (VPP pin)Note 1 IPPW When VPP = VPP1 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 19.5 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 2

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 32.7 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 3

Delete current (VDD pin)Note 1 IDDE When VPP = VPP1 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 15.5 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 2

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 28.7 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 3

Delete current (VPP pin)Note 1 IPPE When VPP = VPP1 100 mA

Unit delete time tER 0.5 1 1 s

Total

delete time tERA 20 s

Number of overwrite CWRT Delete and write are counted as one cycle 20 times

power supply voltage

VPP0 In normal mode 0 0.2 VDD V

VPP1 At flash memory programming 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

Notes 1. AVREF current and Port current (current flowing to internal pull-up resistor) are not included.

2. When main system clock is operating at fXX = fXX/2 (when oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is

cleared to 00H).

3. When main system clock is operating at fXX = fXX (when OSMS is set to 01H).

2) Serial write operation characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VPP setup time tPSRON VPP high voltage 1.0

VPP

↑

setup time from VDD

↑

tDRPSR VPP high voltage 10

RESET

↑

setup time from VPP

↑

tPSRRF VPP high voltage 1.0

VPP count start time from RESET↑

tRFCF 1.0

Count execution time tCOUNT 2.0 ms

VPP counter high-level width tCH 8.0

VPP counter low-level width tCL 8.0

VPP counter noise elimination width

tNFW 40 ns

626

CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Flash Write Mode Setting Timing

0 V

RESET (input)

0 V

PPH

PPL

RFCF

PSRON

PSRRF

DRPSR

COUNT

627

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

Caution The product that can operate on VDD = 2.2 V has “0232” or later as the first 4 digits of the lot number

inscribed on the package.

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C)

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

Supply voltage VDD –0.3 to +6.5 V

VPP Note –0.3 to +10.5 V

AVREF0 –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

AVREF1 –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

AVSS –0.3 to +0.3 V

Input voltage VI1 P00 to P05, P07, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P30 to P37, –0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, X1, X2, XT2, RESET

VI2 P60 to P63 N-ch open drain –0.3 to +16 V

Output voltage VO–0.3 to VDD + 0.3 V

Analog input voltage VAN P10 to P17 Analog input pin AVSS – 0.3 to AVREF0 + 0.3 V

Note Make sure that the following conditions of the VPP voltage application timing are satisfied when the flash

memory is written.

• When supply voltage rises

VPP must exceed VDD 10

s or more after VDD has reached the lower-limit value (2.2 V) of the operating voltage

range (see a in the figure below).

• When supply voltage drops

VDD must be lowered 10

s or more after VPP falls below the lower-limit value (2.2 V) of the operating voltage

range of VDD (see b in the figure below).

2.2 V

0 V

2.2 V

a b

If this number is “0232” or later,

= 2.2 V

Internal control code

Rank

Week

code

Year

code

Lot number

628

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit

Output IOH Per pin –10 mA

current, high Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, P56, P57, P60 to P67, –15 mA

P120 to P127

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P40 to P47, –15 mA

P50 to P55, P70 to P72, P130, P131

Output IOLNote Per pin for other than P50 to P57, Peak value 20 mA

current, low P60 to P63 rms value 10 mA

Per pin for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 Peak value 30 mA

rms value 15 mA

Total for P50 to P55 Peak value 100 mA

rms value 70 mA

Total for P56, P57, P60 to P63 Peak value 100 mA

rms value 70 mA

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, Peak value 50 mA

P40 to P47, P70 to P72, P130, P131 rms value 20 mA

Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, Peak value 50 mA

P64 to P67, P120 to P127 rms value 20 mA

Operating ambient TADuring normal operation –40 to +85 °C

temperature During flash memory programming 10 to 40 °C

Storage Tstg –65 to +125 °C

temperature

Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C)

Caution Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for any

parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is on the

verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under conditions that

ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.

Note The rms value should be calculated as follows: [rms value] = [Peak value] × √Duty

629

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Main System Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V)

Recommended Circuit TYP. MAX.

5.0

500

Unit

MHz

Resonator

Ceramic

resonator

Crystal

resonator

External

clock

Parameter

Oscillation

frequency (fX)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

Oscillation

frequency (fX)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

X1 input

frequency (fX)Note 1

X1 input

high-/low-level width

(tXH , tXL)

Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. See AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

2. Time required to stabilize oscillation after reset or STOP mode release.

Cautions 1. When using the main system clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS1.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. When the main system clock is stopped and the system is operating on the subsystem clock,

wait until the oscillation stabilization time has been secured by the program before switching

back to the main system clock.

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the

oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

MIN.

1.0

Conditions

VDD = Oscillation

voltage range

After VDD reaches

oscillation voltage range

MIN.

1.0

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

X1 VPPX2

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V

630

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input CIN f = 1 MHz 15 pF

capacitance Unmeasured pins returned to 0 V.

I/O CIO f = 1 MHz P01 to P05, P10 to P17, 15 pF

capacitance Unmeasured pins returned P20 to P27, P30 to P37,

to 0 V. P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131

P60 to P63 20 pF

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V)

MIN.

Notes 1. Indicates only oscillator characteristics. See AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.

2. Time required to stabilize oscillation after VDD reaches oscillation voltage range MIN.

Resonator

Crystal

resonator

External

clock

Parameter

Oscillation

frequency (fXT)Note 1

Oscillation

stabilization timeNote 2

XT1 input

frequency (fXT)Note 1

XT1 input

high-/low-level width

(tXTH , tXTL)

Conditions

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

TYP.

32.768

1.2

MAX.

Unit

kHz

Cautions 1. When using the subsystem clock oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken

lines in the above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.

• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.

• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.

• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.

• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS1.

• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.

• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.

2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing current

consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the main system clock

oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem

clock is used.

Recommended Circuit

Capacitance (TA = 25°C, VDD = VSS = 0 V)

XT1VPP XT2

C4 C3

Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the

oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V

XT1

XT2

631

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input voltage, VIH1 P10 to P17, P21, P23, P30 to P32, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.7 VDD VDD V

high P35 to P37, P40 to P47, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V

P50 to P57, P64 to P67, P71,

P120 to P127, P130, P131

VIH2 P00 to P05, P20, P22, P24 to P27, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V

P33, P34, P70, P72, RESET VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0.85 VDD VDD V

VIH3 P60 to P63 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.7 VDD 15 V

(N-ch open drain) VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0.8 VDD 15 V

VIH4 X1, X2 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V VDD – 0.5 VDD V

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V VDD – 0.2 VDD V

VIH5 XT1/P07, XT2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.8 VDD VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0.9 VDD VDD V

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.9 VDD VDD V

Input voltage, VIL1 P10 to P17, P21, P23, P30 to P32, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.3 VDD V

low

P35 to P37, P40 to P47,

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0 0.2 VDD V

P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P71,

P120 to P127, P130, P131

VIL2 P00 to P05, P20, P22, P24 to P27, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.2 VDD V

P33, P34, P70, P72, RESET VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0 0.15 VDD V

VIL3 P60 to P63 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.3 VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 0.2 VDD V

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.1 VDD V

VIL4 X1, X2 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0 0.4 V

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0 0.2 V

VIL5 XT1/P07, XT2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 0.2 VDD V

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 0.1 VDD V

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0 0.1 VDD V

Output voltage, VOH VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, IOH = –1 mA VDD – 1.0 V

high VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V, IOH = –100

AVDD – 0.5 V

Output voltage, VOL1 P50 to P57, P60 to P63 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.4 2.0 V

low IOL = 15 mA

P01 to P05, P10 to P17,

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.4 V

P20 to P27, P30 to P37,

IOL = 1.6 mA

P40 to P47, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120-P127, P130,

P131

VOL2 SB0, SB1, SCK0 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 0.2VDD V

open drain,

pulled-up (R = 1 kΩ)

VOL3 IOL = 400

A 0.5 V

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

632

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Input leakage ILIH1 VIN = VDD P00 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 3

current, high P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P60 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, RESET

ILIH2 X1, X2, XT1/P07, XT2 20

ILIH3 VIN = 15 V P60 to P63 80

Input leakage ILIL1 VIN = 0 V P00 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, –3

current, low P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57,

P64 to P67, P70 to P72,

P120 to P127, P130, P131, RESET

ILIL2 X1, X2, XT1/P07, XT2 –20

ILIL3 P60-P63 –3

Note

Software pull-up R VIN = 0 V, P01 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 15 30 90 kΩ

resistor P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120 to P127, P130, P131

Note A low-level input leakage current of –200

A (MAX.) flows only for 1.5 clocks (without wait) after a read

instruction has been executed to port 6 (P6) or port mode register 6 (PM6). At times other than this 1.5-clock

interval, a –3

A (MAX.) current flows.

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Output current, high IOH Per pin –1mA

Total for all pins –15 mA

Output current, low IOL Per pin for P01 to P05, P10 to P17, P20 to P27, 10 mA

P30 to P37, P40 to P47, P50 to P57, P64 to P67,

P70 to P72, P120 to P127, P130, P131

Per pin for P50 to P57, P60 to P63 15 mA

Total for P10 to P17, P20 to P27, P40 to P47, 10 mA

P70 to P72, P130, P131

Total for P01 to P05, P30 to P37, P64 to P67, 10 mA

P120 to P127

Total for P50 to P57. P60 to P63 70 mA

Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.

633

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 1 6.2 12.5 mA

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 2 1.3 3.1 mA

VDD = 2.2 VNote 2 0.68 1.6 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%Note 1 13.1 25.7 mA

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%Note 2 2.1 4.9 mA

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 5.6 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 1.0 2.8 mA

not operating

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 2.9 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.44 1.1 mA

not operating

VDD = 2.2 V

Peripheral functions 1.5 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.25 0.6 mA

not operating

VDD = 5.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 8.4 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 1.3 3.1 mA

not operating

VDD = 3.0 V ±10%

Peripheral functions 4.5 mA

operating

Peripheral functions 0.6 1.5 mA

not operating

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 110 220

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 86 172

VDD = 2.2 V 70 140

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 22.5 56

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 3.2 13.2

VDD = 2.2 V 1.5 11.5

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 1.0 30

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.5 10

VDD = 2.2 V 0.3 10

VDD = 5.0 V ±10% 0.1 30

VDD = 3.0 V ±10% 0.05 10

VDD = 2.2 V 0.05 10

DC Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V)

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

HALT mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 4

IDD3Note 5 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation

operating modeNote 6

IDD4Note 5 32.768 kHz crystal oscillation

HALT modeNote 6

IDD5Note 5 XT1 = VDD

STOP mode

When feedback resistor is used

IDD6Note 5 XT1 = VDD

STOP mode

When feedback resistor is not used

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

operating mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 3

Notes 1. High-speed mode operation (when the processor clock control register (PCC) is cleared to 00H).

2. Low-speed mode operation (when PCC is set to 04H).

3. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX/2 (when the oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is cleared

to 00H)

4. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX (when OSMS is set to 01H)

5. Refers to the current flowing to the VDD0 and VDD1 pins. The current flowing to the A/D converter, D/A

converter, and on-chip pull-up resistor is not included.

6. When the main system clock operation is stopped.

Power supply

current

IDD1Note 5

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

operating mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 4

IDD2 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation

HALT mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 3

634

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

AC Characteristics

(1) Basic operation

(TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Cycle time TCY Operating with main system VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 0.8 64

(Min. instruction clock (fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 1 VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 2.0 64

execution time) Operating with main system 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.4 32

clock (fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 2 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V 0.8 32

Operating with subsystem clock 40Note 3 122 125

TI00 input high-/ tTIH00 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V

2/fsam + 0.1Note 4

low-level width tTIL00 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V

2/fsam + 0.2Note 4

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V

2/fsam + 0.5Note 4

TI01 input high-/ tTIH01 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

low-level width tTIL01 VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 20

TI1, TI2 input fTI1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 4 MHz

frequency VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0 275 kHz

TI1, TI2 input tTIH1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 100 ns

high-/low-level tTIL1 VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 1.8

width

Interrupt request tINTH INTP0 3.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V

2/fsam + 0.1Note 4

input high-/ tINTL 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 3.5 V

2/fsam + 0.2Note 4

low-level width 2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V

2/fsam + 0.5Note 4

INTP1 to INTP5, P40 to P47 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 20

RESET low- tRSL VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V 10

level width VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 20

Notes 1. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX/2 (when the oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is cleared

to 00H)

2. Operation with main system clock fXX = fX (when OSMS is set to 01H)

3. Value when external clock is used. When a crystal resonator is used, it is 114

s (MIN.)

4. Selection of fsam = fXX/2N, fXX/32, fXX/64, and fXX/128 is possible with bits 0 and 1 (SCS0, SCS1) of the sampling

clock select register (SCS) (when N = 0 to 4).

635

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

TCY vs. VDD (@fXX = fX main system clock operation)

TCY vs. VDD (@fXX = fX/2

main system clock operation)

2.0

1.0

0.5

0.4

1234 56

Supply voltage V

[V]

Guaranteed

operation

range

Cycle time T

[ s]

2.0

1.0

0.5

0.4

1234 56

Supply voltage V

[V]

Operation

guaranteed

range

Cycle time T

[ s]

636

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) Read/write operation

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH 0.85tCY – 50 ns

Address setup time tADS 0.85tCY – 50 ns

Address hold time tADH 50 ns

Data input time from address tADD1 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 80 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Data input time from RD↓tRDD1 (2 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

tRDD2 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (2 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

tRDL2 (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

WAIT↓ input time from RD↓tRDWT1 0.85tCY – 50 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 60 ns

WAIT↓ input time from WR↓tWRWT 2tCY – 60 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1.15 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.85 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

RD↓ delay time from ASTB↓tASTRD 25 ns

WR↓ delay time from ASTB↓tASTWR 0.85tCY + 20 ns

ASTB↑ delay time from tRDAST 0.85tCY – 10 1.15tCY + 20 ns

RD↑ at external fetch

Address hold time from tRDADH 0.85tCY – 50 1.15tCY + 50 ns

RD↑ at external fetch

Write data output time from RD↑tRDWD 40 ns

Write data output time from WR↓tWRWD 050ns

Address hold time from WR↑tWRADH 0.85tCY 1.15tCY + 40 ns

RD↑ delay time from WAIT↑tWTRD 1.15tCY + 40 3.15tCY + 40 ns

WR↑ delay time from WAIT↑tWTWR 1.15tCY + 30 3.15tCY + 30 ns

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

(a) When MCS = 1, PCC2 to PCC0 = 000B (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 3.5 to 5.5 V)

637

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) When MCS = 0 or PCC2 to PCC0 ≠ 000B (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH tCY – 80 ns

Address setup time tADS tCY – 80 ns

Address hold time tADH 0.4tCY – 10 ns

Data input time from address tADD1 (3 + 2n)tCY – 160 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 200 ns

Data input time from RD↓tRDD1 (1.4 + 2n)tCY – 70 ns

tRDD2 (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 70 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (1.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

tRDL2 (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

WAIT↓ input time from RD↓tRDWT1 tCY – 100 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 100 ns

WAIT↓ input time from WR↓tWRWT 2tCY – 100 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 60 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.4 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

RD↓ delay time from ASTB↓

tASTRD 0.4tCY – 30 ns

WR↓ delay time from ASTB↓

tASTWR 1.4tCY – 30 ns

ASTB↑ delay time from RD↑tRDAST tCY – 10 tCY + 20 ns

at external fetch

Address hold time from tRDADH tCY – 50 tCY + 50 ns

RD↑ at external fetch

Write data output time from tRDWD 0.4tCY – 20 ns

RD↑

Write data output time from tWRWD 060ns

WR↓

Address hold time from WR↑tWRADH tCY tCY + 60 ns

RD↑ delay time from WAIT↑tWTRD 0.6tCY + 180 2.6tCY + 180 ns

WR↑ delay time from WAIT↑

tWTWR 0.6tCY + 120 2.6tCY + 120 ns

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

638

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. MAX. Unit

ASTB high-level width tASTH tCY – 150 ns

Address setup time tADS tCY – 150 ns

Address hold time tADH 0.37tCY – 40 ns

Data input time from address tADD1 (3 + 2n)tCY – 320 ns

tADD2 (4 + 2n)tCY – 300 ns

Data input time from RD↓tRDD1 (1.37 + 2n)tCY – 120 ns

tRDD2 (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 120 ns

Read data hold time tRDH 0ns

RD low-level width tRDL1 (1.37 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

tRDL2 (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

WAIT↓ input time from RD↓tRDWT1 tCY – 200 ns

tRDWT2 2tCY – 200 ns

WAIT↓ input time from WR↓tWRWT 2tCY – 200 ns

WAIT low-level width tWTL (1 + 2n)tCY (2 + 2n)tCY ns

Write data setup time tWDS (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 100 ns

Write data hold time tWDH 20 ns

WR low-level width tWRL (2.37 + 2n)tCY – 20 ns

RD↓ delay time from ASTB↓

tASTRD 0.37tCY – 50 ns

WR↓ delay time from ASTB↓

tASTWR 1.37tCY – 50 ns

ASTB↑ delay time from RD↑tRDAST tCY – 10 tCY + 20 ns

at external fetch

Address hold time from tRDADH tCY – 50 tCY + 50 ns

RD↑ at external fetch

Write data output time from tRDWD 0.37tCY – 40 ns

RD↑

Write data output time from tWRWD 0 120 ns

WR↓

Address hold time from WR↑tWRADH tCY tCY + 120 ns

RD↑ delay time from WAIT↑tWTRD 0.63tCY + 350 2.63tCY + 350 ns

WR↑ delay time from WAIT↑

tWTWR 0.63tCY + 240 2.63tCY + 240 ns

Remarks 1. MCS: Bit 0 of the oscillation mode select register (OSMS)

2. PCC2 to PCC0: Bits 2 to 0 of the processor clock control register (PCC)

3. tCY = TCY/4

4. n indicates the number of waits.

639

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(3) Serial interface (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)

(a) Serial interface channel 0

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY1 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

tKH1, tKL1 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY1/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V tKCY1/2 – 100 ns

tSIK1 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

tKSI1 400 ns

tKSO1 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK0 and SO0 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

tKH2, tKL2 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

tSIK2 100 ns

tKSI2 400 ns

tKSO2 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

tR2, tF2 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-/low-level

width

SI0 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SI0 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

SO0 output delay time

from SCK0↓

SCK0 rise/fall time

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... External clock input)

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO0 output line.

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-/low-level

width

SI0 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SI0 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

SO0 output delay time

from SCK0↓

640

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iv) 2-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

tKCY4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

tKH4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 650 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,300 ns

tKL4 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

tSIK4 100 ns

tKSI4 tKCY4/2 ns

tKSO4 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 300 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 500 ns

tR4, tF4 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

R = 1 kΩ,

C = 100 pFNote

(iii) 2-wire serial I/O mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY3 R = 1 kΩ, 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1,600 ns

C = 100 pFNote 2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

SCK0 high-level width tKH3 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 160 ns

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 190 ns

SCK0 low-level width tKL3 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 50 ns

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V tKCY3/2 – 100 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK3 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 300 ns

(to SCK0↑)350 ns

400 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI3 600 ns

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay tKSO3 0 300 ns

time from SCK0↓

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCK0, SB0, and SB1 output lines.

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SB0 and SB1 output lines.

SCK0 cycle time

SCK0 high-level width

SCK0 low-level width

SB0, SB1 setup time

(to SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 hold time

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay

time from SCK0↓

SCK0 rise/fall time

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V

641

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(v) SBI mode (SCK0 ... Internal clock output) (

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 3,200 ns

SCK0 high-/low-level tKH5, tKL5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V tKCY5/2 – 50 ns

width 2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V tKCY5/2 – 150 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK5 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(to SCK0↑)2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 300 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI5 tKCY5/2 ns

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay tKSO5 R = 1 kΩ, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 250 ns

time from SCK0↓

C = 100 pFNote

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0 1,000 ns

SB0, SB1↓ from SCK0↑

tKSB tKCY5 ns

SCK0↓ from SB0, SB1↓

tSBK tKCY5 ns

SB0, SB1 high-level width

tSBH tKCY5 ns

SB0, SB1 low-level width

tSBL tKCY5 ns

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCK0, SB0, and SB1 output lines.

(vi) SBI mode (SCK0 ... External clock input) (

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y only)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK0 cycle time tKCY6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 3,200 ns

SCK0 high-/low-level tKH6, tKL6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

width 2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

SB0, SB1 setup time tSIK6 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(to SCK0↑)2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 300 ns

SB0, SB1 hold time tKSI6 tKCY6/2 ns

(from SCK0↑)

SB0, SB1 output delay tKSO6 R = 1 kΩ, VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 0 300 ns

time from SCK0↓

C = 100 pFNote

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V 0 1,000 ns

SB0, SB1↓ from SCK0↑tKSB tKCY6 ns

SCK0↓ from SB0, SB1↓tSBK tKCY6 ns

SB0, SB1 high-level width

tSBH tKCY6 ns

SB0, SB1 low-level width

tSBL tKCY6 ns

SCK0 rise/fall time tR6, tF6 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SB0 and SB1 output lines.

642

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(viii) I2C bus mode (SCL ... External clock input) (

PD78F0058Y only)

(vii) I2C bus mode (SCL ... Internal clock output) (

PD78F0058Y only)

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SCL, SDA0, and SDA1 output lines.

Note R and C are the load resistance and load capacitance of the SDA0 and SDA1 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCL cycle time tKCY7 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 10

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 20 ns

SCL high-level width tKH7 VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 160 ns

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 190 ns

SCL low-level width t KL7 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 50 ns

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V tKCY7 – 100 ns

SDA0, SDA1 setup time

tSIK7 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 200 ns

(to SCL↑)

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

SDA0, SDA1 hold time tKSI7 0ns

(from SCL

↓

)

SDA0, SDA1 output delay

tKSO7 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 300 ns

time from SCL↓

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 500 ns

SDA0, SDA1

↓

from SCL↑

tKSB 200 ns

or SDA0, SDA1

↑

from SCL↑

SCL↓ from SDA0, SDA1↓

tSBK 400 ns

SDA0, SDA1 high-level width

tSBH 500 ns

R = 1 kΩ,

C = 100 pFNote

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCL cycle time tKCY8 1

SCL high-level width tKH8 400 ns

SDA0, SDA1 setup time

tSIK8 200 ns

(to SCL↑)

SDA0, SDA1 hold time tKSI8 0ns

(from SCL

↓

)

SDA0, SDA1 output delay

tKSO8 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0 300 ns

time from SCL↓

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 0 ns

SDA0, SDA1↓ from SCL↑

tKSB 200 ns

or SDA0, SDA1↑ from SCL↑

SCL↓ from SDA0, SDA1↓

tSBK 400 ns

SDA0, SDA1 high-level width

tSBH 500 ns

R = 1 kΩ,

C = 100 pFNote

500

643

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(b) Serial interface channel 1

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK1 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY9 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width tKH9, tKL9 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

tKCY9/2 – 50

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V

tKCY9/2 – 100

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK9 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI9 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO9 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK1 ... External clock input)

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK1 and SO1 output lines.

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY10 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width

tKH10, tKL10

4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK10 100 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKIS10 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO10 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

SCK1 rise/fall time tR10, tF10 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO1 output line.

644

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iii) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (SCK1 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY11 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width

tKH11, tKL11

VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

tKCY11/2 – 50

VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V

tKCY11/2 – 100

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK11 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI11 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO11 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

STB↑ from SCK1↑tSBD

tKCY11/2 – 100 tKCY11/2 + 100

Strobe signal high-level width tSBW 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 5.5 V

tKCY11 – 30 tKCY11 + 30

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V

tKCY11 – 60 tKCY11 + 60

Busy signal setup time tBYS 100 ns

(to busy signal detection timing)

Busy signal hold time tBYH 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

(from busy signal detection timing) 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V

200

SCK1↓ from busy inactive tSPS 2tKCY11 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SCK1 and SO1 output lines.

(iv) 3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (SCK1 ... External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK1 cycle time tKCY12 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

SCK1 high-/low-level width tKH12, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL12 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

SI1 setup time (to SCK1↑)tSIK12 100 ns

SI1 hold time (from SCK1↑)tKSI12 400 ns

SO1 output delay time from SCK1↓tKSO12 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

SCK1 rise/fall time tR12, tF12 When using external device 160 ns

expansion function

When not using external device 1,000 ns

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO1 output line.

645

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(i) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK2 ... Internal clock output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK2 cycle time tKCY13 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

SCK2 high-/low-level width tKH13,VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V

tKCY13/2 – 50

tKL13 VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V

tKCY13/2 – 100

SI2 setup time (to SCK2↑)tSIK13 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 100 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 150 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 300 ns

SI2 hold time (from SCK2↑)tKSI13 400 ns

SO2 output delay time from SCK2↓tKSO13 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO2 output line.

(ii) 3-wire serial I/O mode (SCK2 ... External clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

SCK2 cycle time tKCY14 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

SCK2 high-/low-level width tKH14, 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

tKL14 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

SI2 setup time (to SCK2↑)tSIK14 100 ns

SI2 hold time (from SCK2↑)tKSI14 400 ns

SO2 output delay time from SCK2↓tKSO14 C = 100 pFNote 300 ns

SCK2 rise/fall time tR14, Other than below 160 ns

tF14 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V 1

When not using external device

expansion function

Note C is the load capacitance of the SO2 output line.

646

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(iii) UART mode (dedicated baud rate generator output)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Transfer rate 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 78,125 bps

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 39,063 bps

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 19,531 bps

(iv) UART mode (external clock input)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

ASCK cycle time tKCY15 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 800 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 1,600 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 3,200 ns

ASCK high-/low-level width tKH15, tKL15 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 400 ns

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 800 ns

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 1,600 ns

Transfer rate 4.5 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 39,063 bps

2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.5 V 19,531 bps

2.2 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 9,766 bps

ASCK rise/fall time tR15, tF15 VDD = 4.5 to 5.5 V, 1,000 ns

when not using external device

expansion function.

Other than above 160 ns

647

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

AC Timing Measurement Points (Excluding X1, XT1 Inputs)

Clock Timing

TI Timing

tXL tXH

1/fX

VIH4 (MIN.)

VIL4 (MAX.)

tXTL tXTH

1/fXT

VIH5 (MIN.)

VIL5 (MAX.)

X1 input

XT1 input

1/f

TI1

TIL1

TIH1

TI1, TI2

TIL00

, t

TIL01

TIH00

, t

TIH01

TI00, TI01

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

0.8VDD

0.2VDD

Point of

measurement

648

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Interrupt Request Input Timing

RESET Input Timing

RSL

RESET

tINTL tINTH

INTP0 to INTP5,

P40 to P47

649

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Read/Write Operation

External fetch (no wait):

External fetch (wait insertion):

ASTH

ADH

ADD1

Hi-Z

ADS

RDD1

RDADH

RDAST

ASTRD

RDL1

RDH

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

Higher 8-bit address

Lower

8-bit

address

Operation

code

ASTH

ADH

ADD1

Hi-Z

ADS

RDADH

RDAST

ASTRD

RDL1

RDH

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WTRD

WTL

RDWT1

WAIT

RDD1

Higher 8-bit address

Operation

code

Lower

8-bit

address

650

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

External data access (no wait):

External data access (wait insertion):

ASTRD

ASTH

ADH

ADD2

Hi-Z

ADS

RDL2

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WDS

WRL

RDH

Hi-Z

WRWD

ASTWR

WRADH

Higher 8-bit address

Write dataRead data

RDD2

WDH

RDWD

Lower

8-bit

address

ASTRD

ASTH

ADH

ADD2

Hi-Z

ADS

RDL2

A8 to A15

AD0 to AD7

ASTB

WDS

WRL

RDH

Hi-Z

WRWD

ASTWR

WRADH

Higher 8-bit address

Write dataRead data

RDD2

WDH

RDWT2

WTL

WRWT

WTWR

WTL

WAIT

WTRD

RDWD

Lower

8-bit

address

651

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3-wire serial I/O mode:

Serial Transfer Timing

KCYm

KLm

KHm

SCK0 to SCK2

SI0 to SI2

SO0 to SO2

m = 1, 2, 9, 10, 13, 14

n = 2, 10, 14

SIKm

KSIm

KSOm

Input data

Output data

2-wire serial I/O mode:

KSO3, 4

SIK3, 4

KCY3, 4

tKL3, 4 tKH3, 4

SCK0

KSI3, 4

SB0, SB1

652

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SBI mode (bus release signal transfer):

SBI mode (command signal transfer):

SIK5, 6

KCY5, 6

KL5, 6

KH5, 6

SCK0

SBL

SBH

KSB

SBK

KSI5, 6

KSO5, 6

SB0, SB1

SIK5, 6

KCY5,6

KL5, 6

KH5, 6

SCK0

KSB

SBK

KSI5, 6

KSO5, 6

SB0, SB1

I2C bus mode:

SCL

SDA0,

SDA1

KLm

SBH

m = 7, 8

SIKm

KSB

KHm

KCYm

SIKm

KSOm

SBK

KSIm

653

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function:

3-wire serial I/O mode with automatic transmit/receive function (busy processing):

Note The signal is not actually driven low here; it is shown as such to indicate the timing.

BYS

SCK1

SPS

BUSY

(Active high)

789

Note

10 + n

Note

BYH

tSBWtSBD

tKCY11, 12

tKH11, 12

tKSI11, 12

tSIK11, 12

D2 D1 D0 D7

D7D2 D1 D0

SO1

SI1

SCK1

STB

tR12

tKL11, 12

tF12

tKSO11, 12

UART mode (external clock input):

KCY15

KH15

KL15

F15

R15

ASCK

654

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

A/D Converter Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 8 8 bit

Overall errorNote 1 2.7 V ≤ AVREF0 ≤ 5.5 V ±0.6 %FSR

2.2 V ≤ AVREF0 < 2.7 V ±1.4 %FSR

Conversion time TCONV1 2.2 V ≤ AVREF0 < 2.7 V 40 100

TCONV2 2.7 V ≤ AVREF0 < 5.5 V 16 100

Analog input voltage VIAN AVSS AVREF0 V

Reference voltage AVREF0 2.2 VDD V

AVREF0 current IREF0 When A/D converter is operatingNote 2 500 1,500

When A/D converter is not operating

Note 3

0 3.0

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Resolution 8 bit

Overall error R = 2 MΩNote 1 ±1.2 %

R = 4 MΩNote 1 ±0.8 %

R = 10 MΩNote 1 ±0.6 %

Overall errorNote 1 AVREF1 = 2.2 to 2.7 V 10

AVREF1 = 2.2 to 5.5 V 15

Output resistance RONote 2 8kΩ

Analog reference voltage AVREF1 1.8 VDD V

AVREF1 current IREF1 Note 2 2.5 mA

Resistance between AVREF1 and AVSS RAIREF1 DACS0, DACS1 = 55HNote 2 48 kΩ

Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB). This value is indicated as a ratio to the full-scale value (%FSR).

2. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 1.

3. The current flowing to the AVREF0 pin when bit 7 (CS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) is 0.

D/A Converter Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C, VDD = 2.2 to 5.5 V, AVSS = VSS = 0 V)

Notes 1. R and C are the D/A converter output pin load resistance and load capacitance, respectively.

2. Value for one D/A converter channel

Remark DACS0 and DACS1: D/A conversion value set registers 0, 1

C= 30 pFNote 1

655

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = –40 to +85°C)

Note Selection of 212/fXX and 214/fXX to 217/fXX is possible with bits 0 to 2 (OSTS0 to OSTS2) of the oscillation stabilization

time select register (OSTS).

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Data retention power VDDDR 1.8 5.5 V

supply voltage

Data retention power IDDDR VDDDR = 1.8 V 0.1 10

supply current Subsystem clock stop and feed-back resistor

disconnected

Release signal set time tSREL 0

Oscillation stabilization tWAIT Release by RESET 217/fXms

wait time Release by interrupt request Note ms

Remark fXX: Main system clock frequency (fX or fX/2)

fX: Main system clock oscillation frequency

Data Retention Timing (STOP Mode Release by RESET)

Data Retention Timing (Standby Release Signal: STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Signal)

tSREL

tWAIT

VDD

STOP instruction execution

STOP mode

Data retention mode

HALT mode

Operating mode

Standby release signal

(Interrupt request)

VDDDR

SREL

WAIT

RESET

STOP instruction execution

STOP mode

Data retention mode

Internal reset operation

HALT mode

Operating mode

DDDR

656

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Flash Memory Programming Characteristics (VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V, TA = 10 to 40°C)

(1) Write/erase characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

Write current (VDD pin)Note 1 IDDW When VPP = VPP1 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 15.5 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 2

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 28.7 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 3

Write current (VPP pin)Note 1 IPPW When VPP = VPP1 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 19.5 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 2

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 32.7 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 3

Erase current (VDD pin)Note 1 IDDE When VPP = VPP1 5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 15.5 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 2.5 MHz)Note 2

5.0 MHz crystal oscillation 28.7 mA

operation mode

(fXX = 5.0 MHz)Note 3

Erase current (VPP pin)Note 1 IPPE When VPP = VPP1 100 mA

Unit erase time tER 0.5 1 1 s

Total

erase time tERA 20 s

Number of overwrites CWRT Erase and write are counted as one cycle 20 times

power supply voltage

VPP0 In normal mode 0 0.2 VDD V

VPP1 During flash memory programming 9.7 10.0 10.3 V

Notes 1. AVREF current and port current (current flowing to internal pull-up resistors) are not included.

2. When main system clock is operating at fXX = fXX/2 (when oscillation mode select register (OSMS) is cleared

to 00H).

3. When main system clock is operating at fXX = fXX (when OSMS is set to 01H).

2) Serial write operation characteristics

Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit

VPP setup time tPSRON VPP high voltage 1.0

VPP

↑

setup time from VDD

↑

tDRPSR VPP high voltage 10

RESET

↑

setup time from VPP

↑

tPSRRF VPP high voltage 1.0

VPP count start time from RESET↑

tRFCF 1.0

Count execution time tCOUNT 2.0 ms

VPP counter high-level width tCH 8.0

VPP counter low-level width tCL 8.0

VPP counter noise elimination width

tNFW 40 ns

657

CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V))

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Flash Write Mode Setting Timing

0 V

RESET (input)

0 V

PPH

PPL

RFCF

PSRON

PSRRF

DRPSR

COUNT

658 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 31 CHARACTERISTICS CURVES (REFERENCE VALUES)

VDD vs IDD (mask ROM version, fX = 5.0 MHz, fXX = 2.5 MHz)

0.1

0.01

0.001

20 34567

Supply voltage V

[V]

= 25°C)

Supply current I

[mA]

PCC = 00H

PCC = B0H

PCC = 01H

PCC = 02H

PCC = 03H

PCC = 04H

PCC = 30H

HALT (X1 oscillating, XT1 oscillating)

HALT (X1 stopped, XT1 oscillating)

659

CHAPTER 31 CHARACTERISTICS CURVES (REFERENCE VALUES)

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

VDD vs IDD (mask ROM version, fX = fXX = 5.0 MHz)

0.1

0.01

0.001

20 34567

Supply voltage V

[V]

Supply current I

[mA]

PCC = 00H

PCC = 01H

PCC = 02H

PCC = 03H

PCC = 04H

PCC = 30H

HALT (X1 oscillating,

XT1 oscillating) Approximately the same curve

PCC = B0H

HALT (X1 stopped, XT1 oscillating)

= 25°C)

660 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS

80-PIN PLASTIC QFP (14x14)

NOTE

Each lead centerline is located within 0.13 mm of

its true position (T.P.) at maximum material condition.

ITEM MILLIMETERS

17.20±0.20

14.00±0.20

0.13

0.825

17.20±0.20

C 14.00±0.20

H 0.32±0.06

0.65 (T.P.)

K1.60±0.20

P1.40±0.10

Q0.125±0.075

L0.80±0.20

F 0.825

N 0.10

M 0.17+0.03

−0.07

P80GC-65-8BT-1

S 1.70 MAX.

R3°+7°

−3°

4160 4061

2180 201

detail of lead end

C D

661

CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

60 41

120

80-PIN PLASTIC TQFP (FINE PITCH) (12x12)

NOTE

Each lead centerline is located within 0.10 mm of

its true position (T.P.) at maximum material condition.

ITEM MILLIMETERS

14.0±0.2

12.0±0.2

1.25

14.0±0.2

C 12.0±0.2

0.10I

H 0.22±0.05

0.5 (T.P.)

K1.0±0.2

F 1.25

M 0.145±0.05

1.0±0.05P

N 0.10

0.1±0.05

L 0.5±0.2

S80GK-50-9EU-1

S 1.2 MAX.

R3°+7°

−3°

detail of lead end

C D

662 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

The

PD780058 and 780058Y Subseries should be soldered and mounted under the following recommended

conditions.

For details of the recommended soldering conditions, refer to the document Semiconductor Device

Mounting Technology Manual (C10535E).

For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended below, contact an NEC Electronics

sales representative.

Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (1/4)

(1)

PD780053GC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780054GC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780055GC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780056GC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780058GC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780058BGC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780053YGC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780054YGC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780055YGC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780056YGC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780058BYGC-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780053GC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780054GC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780055GC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780056GC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780058BGC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780053YGC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780054YGC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780055YGC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780056YGC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD780058BYGC(A)-×××-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

Soldering Soldering Conditions Recommended

Method Condition Symbol

Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235°C, Time: 30 seconds max. IR35-00-2

(at 210°C or higher), Count: Twice or less

VPS Package peak temperature: 215°C, Time: 40 seconds max. VP15-00-2

(at 200°C or higher), Count: Twice or less

Wave soldering Soldering bath temperature: 260°C or less, Time: 10 seconds max., WS60-00-1

Count: Once, Preheating temperature: 120°C max. (package surface temperature)

Partial heating Pin temperature: 300°C or less, Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) –

Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating).

663

CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (2/4)

(2)

PD78F0058GC-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

PD78F0058YGC-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (14 × 14)

Soldering Soldering Conditions Recommended

Method Condition Symbol

Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235°C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210°C or higher), IR35-107-2

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

VPS Package peak temperature: 215°C, Time: 40 seconds max. (at 200°C or higher), VP15-107-2

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

Wave soldering Soldering bath temperature: 260°C or less, Time: 10 seconds max., WS60-107-1

Count: Once, Preheating temperature: 120°C max. (package surface temperature),

Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

Partial heating Pin temperature: 300°C or less, Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) –

Note After opening the dry pack, store it below 25°C and 65% RH for the allowable storage period.

Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating).

664

CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (3/4)

(3)

PD780053GK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780054GK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780055GK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780056GK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780058GK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780058BGK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780053YGK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780054YGK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780055YGK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780056YGK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD780058BYGK-×××-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

Soldering Soldering Conditions Recommended

Method Condition Symbol

Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235°C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210°C or higher), IR35-107-2

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

VPS Package peak temperature: 215°C, Time: 40 seconds max. (at 200°C or higher), VP15-107-2

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

Wave soldering – –

Partial heating Pin temperature: 300°C or less, Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) –

Note After opening the dry pack, store it below 25°C and 65% RH for the allowable storage period.

Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating).

665

CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table 33-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions (4/4)

(4)

PD78F0058GK-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

PD78F0058YGK-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (12 × 12)

Soldering Soldering Conditions Recommended

Method Condition Symbol

Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 235°C, Time: 30 seconds max. (at 210°C or higher), IR35-103-2

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 3 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

VPS Package peak temperature: 215°C, Time: 40 seconds max. (at 200°C or higher), VP15-103-2

Count: Twice or less, Exposure limit: 3 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for 10 hours)

Wave soldering – –

Partial heating Pin temperature: 300°C or less, Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) –

Note After opening the dry pack, store it below 25°C and 65% RH for the allowable storage period.

Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating).

666 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES BETWEEN

PD78054, 78058F, AND 780058 SUBSERIES

Table A-1 shows the major differences between the

PD78054, 78058F, and 780058 Subseries.

Table A-1. Major Differences Between

PD78054, 78058F, and 780058 Subseries (1/2)

Product Name

PD78054 Subseries

PD78058F Subseries

PD780058 Subseries

Item

EMI noise measures None Provided Provided

Supply voltage VDD = 2.0 to 6.0 V VDD = 2.7 to 6.0 V VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 VNote

PROM version

PD78P054, 78P058

PD78P058F None

Flash memory version None None

PD78F0058

Internal ROM size

PD78052: 16 KB

PD78056F: 48 KB

PD780053: 24 KB

PD78053: 24 KB

PD78058F: 60 KB

PD780054: 32 KB

PD78054: 32 KB

PD78P058F: 60 KB

PD780055: 40 KB

PD78P054: 32 KB

PD780056: 48 KB

PD78056: 48 KB

PD780058B: 60 KB

PD78058: 60 KB

PD780058: 60 KB

PD78P058: 60 KB

PD78F0058: 60 KB

Internal high-speed RAM size

PD78052: 512 bytes 1,024 bytes 1,024 bytes

PD78053, 78054, 78P054,

78056, 78058, 78P058:

1,024 bytes

I/O ports Total: 69 pins Total: 68 pins

• CMOS input: 2 pins • CMOS input: 2 pins

• CMOS I/O: 63 pins • CMOS I/O: 62 pins

• N-ch open-drain I/O: 4 pins

• N-ch open-drain I/O:

4 pins

AVDD pin Power supply for A/D Power supply for A/D None (power supplied to port

converter converter and port output output buffer is VDD0)

buffer

AVREF0 pin Reference voltage input to A/D converter Reference voltage input and

analog power supply to A/D

converter

Caution on operation – – The results of the first A/D

immediately after A/D conversion immediately after

conversion starts the A/D conversion operation

has started (CS set to 1)

may not satisfy the ratings;

therefore take appropriate

measures such as discarding

the results.

Serial interface channel 2 3-wire serial I/O/UART mode 3-wire serial I/O/UART mode

with time division function

External maskable interrupts 7 sources 6 sources

Emulation probe EP-78230GC-R, EP-78054GK-R NP-80GC,

NP-80GK,

EP-78230GC-R,

EP-78054GK-R

Device file DF78054 DF780058

Note VDD of flash memory version (

PD78F0058) = 2.7 to 5.5 V

667

APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES BETWEEN

PD78054, 78058F, AND 780058 SUBSERIES

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Table A-1. Major Differences Between

PD78054, 78058F, and 780058 Subseries (2/2)

Product Name

PD78054 Subseries

PD78058F Subseries

PD780058 Subseries

Item

Package • 80-pin plastic QFP • 80-pin plastic QFP • 80-pin plastic QFP

(14 × 14) (14 × 14) (14 × 14)

• 80-pin plastic QFP • 80-pin plastic QFP • 80-pin plastic TQFP

(14 × 14) (14 × 14) (Fine pitch) (12 × 12)

• 80-pin ceramic WQFN • 80-pin plastic TQFP

(14 × 14) (Fine pitch) (12 × 12)

(

PD78P054, 78P058 only)

(

PD78058F only)

Electrical specifications and Refer to data sheet of individual product. See CHAPTERS 28 to 30

recommended soldering ELECTRICAL

conditions SPECIFICATIONS and

CHAPTER 33

RECOMMENDED

SOLDERING CONDITIONS.

668 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

The following development tools are available for the development of systems which employ the

PD780058,

780058Y Subseries.

Figure B-1 shows a configuration example of the tools.

•Support for PC98-NX series

Unless otherwise specified, products supported by IBM PC/ATTM compatible machines can be used for PC98-

NX series computers. When using PC98-NX series computers, refer to the description for IBM PC/AT

compatible machines.

•Windows

Unless otherwise specified, “Windows” means the following OSs.

• Windows 3.1

• Windows 95

• Windows 98

• Windows 2000

• Windows NTTM Ver. 4.0

669

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure B-1. Configuration of Development Tools

Notes 1. The C library source file is not included in the software package.

2. The Project Manager is included in the assembler package.

The Project Manager is only used for Windows.

Language processing software

• Assembler package

• C compiler package

• Device file

• C library source fileNote 1

Debugging software

• Integrated debugger

• System simulator

Host machine (PC or EWS)

Interface adapter,

PC card interface, etc.

In-circuit emulator

Emulation board

Emulation probe

Conversion socket or

conversion adapter

Target system

Flash programmer

Flash memory

write adapter

Flash memory

• Software package

• Project Manager

(Windows only)Note 2

Software package

Flash memory

write environment

Control software

Embedded software

• Real-time OS

I/O board

Performance board

Power supply unit

670

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.1 Software Package

SP78K0 This package contains various software tools for 78K/0 Series development.

Software package The following tools are included.

RA78K0, CC78K0, ID78K0-NS, SM78K0, and various device files

Part Number:

S××××SP78K0

Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the OS used.

S××××SP78K0

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB17 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) CD-ROM

BB17 IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)

B.2 Language Processing Software

RA78K0

Assembler package

CC78K0

C compiler package

DF780058Note 1

Device file

CC78K0-LNote 2

C library source file

Notes 1. The DF780058 can be used in common with the RA78K0, CC78K0, SM78K0, ID78K0-NS, ID78K0, and

RX78K0.

2. CC78K0-L is not included in the software package (SP78K0).

This assembler converts programs written in mnemonics into object codes executable

with a microcontroller.

Further, this assembler is provided with functions capable of automatically creating

symbol tables and branch instruction optimization.

This assembler should be used in combination with a device file (DF780058) (sold

separately).

This assembler package is a DOS-based application. It can also be used in Windows,

however, by using the Project Manager (included in assembler package) in Windows.

Part Number:

S××××RA78K0

This compiler converts programs written in C language into object codes executable with

a microcontroller.

This compiler should be used in combination with an assembler package and device file

(both sold separately).

This C compiler package is a DOS-based application. It can also be used in Windows,

however, by using the Project Manager (included in assembler package) in Windows.

Part Number:

S××××CC78K0

This file contains information peculiar to the device.

This device file should be used in combination with tools (RA78K0, CC78K0, SM78K0,

ID78K0-NS, ID78K0, and RX78K0) (sold separately).

The corresponding OS and host machine differ depending on the tool used.

Part Number:

S××××DF780058

This is a source file of functions configuring the object library included in the C compiler

package.

This file is required to match the object library included in C compiler package to the

user’s specifications.

It does not depend on the operating environment because it is a source file.

Part Number:

S××××CC78K0-L

671

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.

S××××RA78K0

S××××CC78K0

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB13 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) 3.5-inch 2HD FD

BB13

IBM PC/AT and compatibles

Windows (English version)

AB17 Windows (Japanese version) CD-ROM

BB17 Windows (English version)

3P17 HP9000 series 700TM HP-UXTM (Rel. 10.10)

3K17 SPARCstationTM SunOSTM (Rel. 4.1.4),

SolarisTM (Rel. 2.5.1)

S××××DF780058

S××××CC78K0-L

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB13 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) 3.5-inch 2HD FD

BB13

IBM PC/AT and compatibles

Windows (English version)

3P16 HP9000 series 700 HP-UX (Rel. 10.10) DAT

3K13 SPARCstation SunOS (Rel. 4.1.4), 3.5-inch 2HD FD

3K15 Solaris (Rel. 2.5.1) 1/4-inch CGMT

B.3 Control Software

Project Manager This is control software designed to enable efficient user program development in the

Windows environment. All operations used in development of a user program, such as

starting the editor, building, and starting the debugger, can be performed from the Project

Manager.

The Project Manager is included in the assembler package (RA78K0).

It can only be used in Windows.

B.4 Flash Memory Writing Tools

Flashpro III

(Part number: FL-PR3, PG-FP3)

Flashpro IV

(Part number: FL-PR4, PG-FP4)

Flash programmer

FA-80GC-8BT

FA-80GK-9EU

Flash memory writing adapter

Remark FL-PR3, FL-PR4, FA-80GC-8EU, and FA-80GK-9EU are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co.,

Ltd.

Contact: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

Flash programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash memory.

Flash memory writing adapter used connected to Flashpro III/Flashpro IV.

• FA-80GC-8BT: 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type)

• FA-80GK-9EU: 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type)

672

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware)

B.5.1 When using in-circuit emulator IE-78K0-NS, IE-78K0-NS-A

IE-78K0-NS

In-circuit emulator

IE-78K0-NS-PA

Performance board

IE-78K0-NS-A

In-circuit emulator

IE-70000-MC-PS-B

Power supply unit

IE-70000-98-IF-C

Interface adapter

IE-70000-CD-IF-A

PC card interface

IE-70000-PC-IF-C

Interface adapter

IE-70000-PCI-IF-A

Interface adapter

IE-780308-NS-EM1

Emulation board

NP-80GC-TQ

NP-H80GC-TQ

Emulation probe

TGC-080SBP

Conversion adapter

(See Figure B-2)

NP-80GC

Emulation Probe

EV-9200GC-80

Conversion Socket

(See Figure B-2)

NP-80GK

Emulation Probe

TGK-080SDW

Conversion Adapter

(See Figure B-3)

Remarks 1. NP-80GC, NP-80GC-TQ, NP-H80GC-TQ, and NP-80GK are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg.

Co., Ltd.

Contact: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

2. TGC-080SBP and TGK-080SDW are products of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

Inquiry: Daimaru Kogyo, Ltd. Phone: Tokyo +81-3-3820-7112 Electronics Dept.

Osaka +81-6-6244-6672 Electronics 2nd Dept.

The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing

application systems using a 78K/0 Series product. It corresponds to an integrated

debugger (ID78K0-NS). This emulator should be used in combination with a power

supply unit, emulation probe, and interface adapter which is required to connect this

emulator to the host machine.

This board is used for extending the IE-78K0-NS functions, and is used connected to

the IE-78K0-NS. With the addition of this board, the addition of a coverage function,

enhancement of tracer and timer functions, and other such debugging function

enhancements are possible.

In-circuit emulator that combines the IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-PA

This adapter is used for supplying power from a 100 to 240 V AC output.

This adapter is required when using a PC-9800 series computer (except notebook type)

as the IE-78K0-NS host machine (C bus compatible).

This is PC card and interface cable required when using a notebook-type computer as

the IE-78K0-NS host machine (PCMCIA socket compatible).

This adapter is required when using an IBM PC/AT compatible computer as the IE-78K0-

NS host machine (ISA bus compatible).

This adapter is required when using a PC with a PCI bus as the IE-78K0-NS host

machine.

This board emulates the operations of the peripheral hardware peculiar to a device

(common to

PD780308 subseries). It should be used in combination with an in-circuit

emulator.

This probe is used to connect the in-circuit emulator to the target system and is designed

for an 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type). It should be used in combination with the TGC-

080SBP.

This conversion socket connects the NP-80GC-TQ or NP-H80GC-TQ to the target

system board designed to mount an 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type).

This probe is for an 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) and connects an in-circuit

emulator and the target system.

This conversion socket connects the board of the target system created to mount an

80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) and NP-80GC.

This probe is for an 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) and connects an in-circuit

emulator and the target system.

This conversion adapter connects the board of the target system created to mount

80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) and TGK-080SDW.

673

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.5.2 When using in-circuit emulator IE-78001-R-A

IE-78001-R-A

In-circuit emulator

IE-70000-98-IF-C

Interface adapter

IE-70000-PC-IF-C

Interface adapter

IE-780308-R-EM

Emulation board

EP-78230GC-R

Emulation probe

EV-9200GC-80

Conversion socket

(See Figure B-2)

EP-78054GK-R

Emulation probe

TGK-080SDW

Conversion adapter

(See Figure B-3)

Remarks 1. TGK-080SDW is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

Inquiry: Daimaru Kogyo, Ltd. Phone: Tokyo +81-3-3820-7112 Electronics Dept.

Osaka +81-6-6244-6672 Electronics 2nd Dept.

2. The EV-9200GC-80 is sold in sets of five units.

3. The TGK-080SDW is sold in single units.

This is an in-circuit emulator for debugging the hardware and software when an

application system using the 78K/0 Series is developed. It supports an integrated

debugger (ID78K0). This emulator is used with an emulation probe and interface

adapter for connecting a host machine.

This adapter is necessary when a PC-9800 series PC (except notebook type) is

used as the host machine for the IE-78001-R-A (C bus compatible).

This adapter is necessary when an IBM PC/AT or compatible machine is used as

the host machine for the IE-78001-R-A (ISA bus compatible).

This board is used with an in-circuit emulator to emulate device-specific peripheral

hardware.

This probe is for an 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) and connects an in-circuit

emulator and the target system.

This conversion socket connects the board of the target system created to mount an

80-pin plastic QFP (GC-8BT type) and EP-78230GC-R.

This probe is for an 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) and connects an in-circuit

emulator and the target system.

This conversion adapter connects the board of the target system created to mount

an 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type) and EP-78054GK-R.

674

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.6 Debugging Tools (Software)

SM78K0 This is a system simulator for the 78K/0 Series. The SM78K0 is Windows-based

System simulator software.

It is used to perform debugging at the C source level or assembler level while simulating

the operation of the target system on a host machine.

Use of the SM78K0 allows the execution of application logical testing and performance

testing on an independent basis from hardware development, thereby providing higher

development efficiency and software quality.

The SM78K0 should be used in combination with a device file (DF780058) (sold

separately).

Part Number:

S××××SM78K0

ID78K0-NS This debugger supports the in-circuit emulators for the 78K/0 Series. The

Integrated debugger ID78K0-NS is Windows-based software.

(supporting in-circuit emulators It has improved C-compatible debugging functions and can display the results of

IE-78K0-NS and IE-78K0-NS-A) tracing with the source program using an integrating window function that associates

ID78K0 the source program, disassemble display, and memory display with the trace result.

Integrated debugger It should be used in combination with a device file (sold separately).

(supporting in-circuit emulator Part Number:

S××××ID78K0-NS

IE-78001-R-A)

S××××ID78K0

Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.

S××××SM78K0

S××××ID78K0-NS

S××××ID78K0

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AB13 PC-9800 series, Windows (Japanese version) 3.5-inch 2HD FD

BB13 IBM PC/AT and compatibles Windows (English version)

AB17 Windows (Japanese version) CD-ROM

BB17 Windows (English version)

675

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.7 Embedded Software

RX78K0 The RX78K0 is a real-time OS conforming to the

ITRON specifications.

Real-time OS A tool (configurator) for generating the nucleus of the RX78K0 and multiple information

tables is supplied.

Used in combination with an assembler package (RA78K0) and device file (DF780058)

(both sold separately).

The real-time OS is a DOS-based application. It should be used in the DOS prompt when

using in Windows.

Part number:

S××××RX78013-∆∆∆∆

Caution When purchasing the RX78K0, fill in the purchase application form in advance and sign the user

agreement.

Remark ×××× and ∆∆∆∆ in the part number differ depending on the host machine and OS used.

S××××RX78013-∆∆∆∆

∆∆∆∆ Product Outline Maximum Number for Use in Mass Production

001 Evaluation object Do not use for mass-produced product.

100K Mass-production object 0.1 million units

001M 1 million units

010M 10 million units

S01 Source program Source program for mass-produced object

×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium

AA13 PC-9800 series Windows (Japanese version) 3.5-inch 2HD FD

AB13 IBM PC/AT and compatibles Windows (Japanese version)

BB13 Windows (English version)

676

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.8 System-Upgrade Method from Former In-Circuit Emulator for 78K/0 Series to IE-78001-R-A

If you already have a former in-circuit emulator for 78K/0 Series microcontrollers (IE-78000-R or IE-78000-R-A),

that in-circuit emulator can operate as an equivalent to the IE-78001-R-A by replacing its internal break board with

the IE-78001-R-BK.

Table B-1. System-Upgrade Method from Former In-Circuit Emulator for 78K/0 Series to IE-78001-R-A

In-Circuit Emulator Owned In-Circuit Emulator Cabinet System-UpNote Board to Be Purchased

IE-78000-R Required IE-78001-R-BK

IE-78000-R-A Not required

Note For upgrading a cabinet, send your in-circuit emulator to NEC Electronics.

677

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.9 Drawing and Footprint for Conversion Socket (EV-9200GC-80)

Figure B-2. EV-9200GC-80 Drawing (For Reference Only)

No.1 pin index

EV-9200GC-80

N O

EV-9200GC-80-G0

ITEM MILLIMETERS INCHES

18.0

14.4

18.0

4-C 2.0

0.8

6.0

16.0

18.7

6.0

16.0

18.7

8.2

8.0

2.5

2.0

0.35

2.3

1.5

0.709

0.567

0.709

4-C 0.079

0.031

0.236

0.63

0.736

0.236

0.63

0.736

0.323

0.315

0.098

0.079

0.014

0.091

0.059

678

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure B-3. EV-9200GC-80 Footprint (For Reference Only)

0.026 × 0.748=0.486

EV-9200GC-80-P1E

ITEM MILLIMETERS INCHES

19.7

15.0

19.7

6.0±0.05

0.35±0.02

2.36±0.03

2.3

1.57±0.03

0.776

0.591

0.776

0.236

0.014

0.093

0.091

0.062

0.65±0.02 × 19=12.35±0.05

+0.001

–0.002

+0.003

–0.002

+0.001

–0.002

+0.003

–0.002

+0.003

–0.002

+0.003

–0.002

+0.001

–0.001

+0.001

–0.002

+0.001

–0.002

Based on EV-9200GC-80

(2) Pad drawing (in mm)

Dimensions of mount pad for EV-9200 and that for target

device (QFP) may be different in some parts. For the

recommended mount pad dimensions for QFP, refer to

"SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE MOUNTING TECHNOLOGY

MANUAL" (C10535E).

Caution

679

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.10 Drawing of Conversion Adapter (TGK-080SDW, TGC-080SBP)

Figure B-4. TGK-080SDW Drawing (For Reference Only) (Unit: mm)

ITEM MILLIMETERS INCHES

b 0.25 0.010

c 5.3 0.209

0.5x19=9.5±0.10

0.020x0.748=0.374±0.004

d 5.3 0.209

h 1.85±0.2 0.073±0.008

i 3.5 0.138

j 2.0 0.079

e 1.3 0.051

f 3.55

g 0.3 0.012

0.140

ITEM MILLIMETERS INCHES

0.5x19=9.5 0.020x0.748=0.374

A 18.0 0.709

I 1.58 0.062

J 1.2 0.047

0.5x19=9.5 0.020x0.748=0.374

F 11.77 0.463

K 7.64 0.301

L 1.2 0.047

Q 1.2 0.047

R 1.58 0.062

S 3.55 0.140

N 1.58 0.062

O 1.2

P 7.64 0.301

0.047

W 6.8 0.268

X 8.24 0.324

Y 14.8 0.583

T C 2.0 C 0.079

U 12.31

V 10.17 0.400

0.485

Z 1.4±0.2 0.055±0.008

0.5

1.58

0.020

0.062

G 18.0 0.709

k 3.0 0.118

n 1.4±0.2 0.055±0.008

o 1.4±0.2 0.055±0.008

h=1.8 1.3 h=0.071 0.051

l 0.25

m 14.0 0.551

0.010

q 0~5°0.000~0.197°

φφ

11.77

0.5

0.463

0.020

TGK-080SDW-G1E

t 2.4 0.094

u 2.7 0.106

v 3.9 0.154

r 5.9

s 0.8 0.031

0.232

TGK-080SDW (TQPACK080SD + TQSOCKET080SDW)

Package dimension (unit: mm)

EFG P

IJJJ LLLM

M2 screw

ln o

Protrusion : 4 places

note: Product by TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

680

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

ITEM MILLIMETERS INCHES

b 7.35 0.289

c 1.2 0.047

a (16.95) (0.667)

d 1.85 0.073

e 3.5 0.138

f 2.0

g 6.0 0.236

0.079

ITEM MILLIMETERS INCHES

0.65x19=12.35 0.026x0.748=0.486

C 0.65 0.026

A 21.0 0.827

I C 2.0 C 0.079

14.47 0.570

J 14.95 0.589

E 12.75 0.502

F 15.15 0.596

K 13.95 0.549

L 13.7 0.539

Q 21.0 0.827

R 5.0 0.197

N 1.15 0.045

O 12.62

P 17.52 0.690

0.497

10.35

1.15

0.407

0.045

G 17.55 0.691

Reference diagram: TGC-080SBP (TQPACK080SB+TQSOCKET080SBP)

Package dimension (unit: mm)

note: Product by TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

1.8 0.071

4-C 1.0 4-C 0.039

7.7 0.303

4- 0.0514- 1.3

φφ

3.55 0.140

φφ

5.3 0.209

φφ

0.3 0.012

φφ

0.9 0.035

φφ

h 0.25 0.010

i 13.95

j 1.025 0.040

0.549

k 1.025 0.040

l 2.4 0.094

m 2.7 0.106

TGC-080SBP-G0E

;

G F L V

E D

Protrusion height

Figure B-5. TGC-080SBP Drawing (For Reference Only) (Unit: mm)

681

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

B.11 Cautions on Designing Target System

Figures B-6 to B-9 show the conditions when connecting the emulation probe to the conversion socket. Follow

the configuration below and consider the shape of parts to be mounted on the target system when designing a system.

(1) NP-80GC, NP-80GC-TQ, NP-H80GC-TQ

Figure B-6. Distance Between In-Circuit Emulator and Conversion Socket (80GC)

Note When NP-H80GC-TQ is used, the distance is 355 mm.

Remark NP-80GC, NP-80GC-TQ, and NP-H80GC-TQ are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

TGC-080SBP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

155 mm

Note

CN6

In-circuit emulator

IE-78K0-NS or IE-78K0-NS-A

Emulation board

IE-780308-NS-EM1

Conversion socket

EV-9200GC-80 or

conversion adapter

TGC-080SBP

Target system

Emulation probe

NP-80GC, NP-80GC-TQ,

NP-H80GC-TQ

682

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure B-7. Connection Condition of Target System (NP-80GC-TQ)

Remark NP-80GC-TQ is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

TGC-080SBP is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

Tar

et s

stem

40 mm

23 mm

11 mm

34 mm

Emulation probe

NP-80GC-TQ

Emulation board

IE-780308-NS-EM1

Conversion socket

TGC-080SBP

683

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

(2) NP-80GK, NP-H80GK-TQ

Figure B-8. Distance Between In-Circuit Emulator and Conversion Socket (80GK)

Note When NP-H80GK-TQ is used, the distance is 355 mm.

Remark NP-80GK and NP-H80GK-TQ are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

TGK-080SDW is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

CN6

In-circuit emulator

IE-78K0-NS or IE-78K0-NS-A

Emulation board

IE-780308-NS-EM1

Conversion adapter

TGK-080SDW

Target system

155 mmNote

Emulation probe

NP-80GK, NP-H80GK-TQ

684

APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Figure B-9. Connection Condition of Target System (NP-80GK)

Remark NP-80GK is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.

TGK-080SDW is a product of TOKYO ELETECH CORPORATION.

40 mm

23 mm

11 mm

34 mm

Tar

et s

stem

Emulation probe

NP-80GK

Emulation board

IE-780308-NS-EM1

Extension probe

TGK-080SDW

685User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

C.1 Register Index (Register Name)

16-bit timer mode control register (TMC0)........................................................................................................ 171

16-bit timer output control register (TOC0) ....................................................................................................... 174

16-bit timer register (TM0) ................................................................................................................................. 168

8-bit timer mode control register (TMC1).......................................................................................................... 216

8-bit timer output control register (TOC1) ......................................................................................................... 217

8-bit timer register 1 (TM1) ................................................................................................................................ 213

8-bit timer register 2 (TM2) ................................................................................................................................ 213

[A]

A/D conversion result register (ADCR) ............................................................................................................. 256

A/D converter input select register (ADIS)........................................................................................................ 260

A/D converter mode register (ADM) .................................................................................................................. 258

Asynchronous serial interface mode register (ASIM) ....................................................................................... 433

Asynchronous serial interface status register (ASIS)....................................................................................... 436

Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer (ADTP) ................................................................................ 385

Automatic data transmit/receive control register (ADTC) ................................................................................ 389

Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register (ADTI)............................................................ 390

[B]

Baud rate generator control register (BRGC) ................................................................................................... 437

[C]

Capture/compare control register 0 (CRC0) ..................................................................................................... 173

Capture/compare register 00 (CR00) ................................................................................................................ 167

Capture/compare register 01 (CR01) ................................................................................................................ 168

Compare register 10 (CR10) ............................................................................................................................. 213

Compare register 20 (CR20) ............................................................................................................................. 213

Correction address register 0 (CORAD0) ......................................................................................................... 526

Correction address register 1 (CORAD1) ......................................................................................................... 526

Correction control register (CORCN) ................................................................................................................ 527

[D]

D/A conversion value set register 0 (DACS0) .................................................................................................. 277

D/A conversion value set register 1 (DACS1) .................................................................................................. 277

D/A converter mode register (DAM) .................................................................................................................. 278

[E]

External interrupt mode register 0 (INTM0) ............................................................................................. 177, 483

External interrupt mode register 1 (INTM1) ............................................................................................. 261, 483

[I]

Internal expansion RAM size switching register (IXS) ..................................................................................... 537

Internal memory size switching register (IMS) ........................................................................................ 506, 536

686

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Interrupt mask flag register 0H (MK0H) ............................................................................................................ 481

Interrupt mask flag register 0L (MK0L) ............................................................................................................. 481

Interrupt mask flag register 1L (MK1L) .................................................................................................... 481, 499

Interrupt request flag register 0H (IF0H)........................................................................................................... 480

Interrupt request flag register 0L (IF0L) ............................................................................................................ 480

Interrupt request flag register 1L (IF1L) ................................................................................................... 480, 499

Interrupt timing specification register (SINT) ........................................................................................... 294, 345

[K]

Key return mode register (KRM) .............................................................................................................. 143, 500

[M]

Memory expansion mode register (MM) .................................................................................................. 142, 505

[O]

Oscillation mode select register (OSMS) .......................................................................................................... 151

Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) ........................................................................................ 514

[P]

Port 0 (P0) ......................................................................................................................................................... 122

Port 1 (P1) ......................................................................................................................................................... 124

Port 12 (P12) ...................................................................................................................................................... 136

Port 13 (P13) ...................................................................................................................................................... 137

Port 2 (P2) ................................................................................................................................................ 125, 127

Port 3 (P3) ......................................................................................................................................................... 129

Port 4 (P4) ......................................................................................................................................................... 130

Port 5 (P5) ......................................................................................................................................................... 131

Port 6 (P6) ......................................................................................................................................................... 132

Port 7 (P7) ......................................................................................................................................................... 134

Port mode register 0 (PM0) ............................................................................................................................... 138

Port mode register 1 (PM1) ............................................................................................................................... 138

Port mode register 12 (PM12) .................................................................................................................. 138, 472

Port mode register 13 (PM13) ........................................................................................................................... 138

Port mode register 2 (PM2) ............................................................................................................................... 138

Port mode register 3 (PM3) ............................................................................................. 138, 176, 218, 249, 253

Port mode register 5 (PM5) ............................................................................................................................... 138

Port mode register 6 (PM6) ............................................................................................................................... 138

Port mode register 7 (PM7) ............................................................................................................................... 138

Priority specify flag register 0H (PR0H) ............................................................................................................ 482

Priority specify flag register 0L (PR0L) ............................................................................................................. 482

Priority specify flag register 1L (PR1L) ............................................................................................................. 482

Processor clock control register (PCC) ............................................................................................................. 148

Program status word (PSW) ....................................................................................................................... 96, 487

Pull-up resistor option register H (PUOH) ........................................................................................................ 141

Pull-up resistor option register L (PUOL).......................................................................................................... 141

687

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

[R]

Real-time output buffer register H (RTBH) ....................................................................................................... 471

Real-time output buffer register L (RTBL) ........................................................................................................ 471

Real-time output port control register (RTPC) .................................................................................................. 473

Real-time output port mode register (RTPM) ................................................................................................... 472

Receive buffer register (RXB) ........................................................................................................................... 431

Receive shift register (RXS) .............................................................................................................................. 431

[S]

Sampling clock select register (SCS)....................................................................................................... 178, 485

Serial bus interface control register (SBIC) ............................................................................................. 293, 343

Serial I/O shift register 0 (SIO0) ............................................................................................................... 286, 338

Serial I/O shift register 1 (SIO1) ........................................................................................................................ 385

Serial interface pin select register (SIPS) ......................................................................................................... 441

Serial operating mode register 0 (CSIM0) ............................................................................................... 290, 342

Serial operating mode register 1 (CSIM1) ........................................................................................................ 388

Serial operating mode register 2 (CSIM2) ........................................................................................................ 432

Slave address register (SVA) ................................................................................................................... 286, 338

[T]

Timer clock select register 0 (TCL0) ........................................................................................................ 169, 247

Timer clock select register 1 (TCL1) ................................................................................................................. 214

Timer clock select register 2 (TCL2) ................................................................................................ 233, 241, 251

Timer clock select register 3 (TCL3) ................................................................................................ 288, 340, 386

Transmit shift register (TXS) ............................................................................................................................. 431

[W]

Watch timer mode control register (TMC2) ...................................................................................................... 236

Watchdog timer mode register (WDTM) ........................................................................................................... 243

688

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

C.2 Register Index (Symbol)

[A]

ADCR: A/D conversion result register ........................................................................................................ 256

ADIS: A/D converter input select register ................................................................................................. 260

ADM: A/D converter mode register .......................................................................................................... 258

ADTC: Automatic data transmit/receive control register ........................................................................... 389

ADTI: Automatic data transmit/receive interval specification register .................................................... 390

ADTP: Automatic data transmit/receive address pointer .......................................................................... 385

ASIM: Asynchronous serial interface mode register ................................................................................ 433

ASIS: Asynchronous serial interface status register ............................................................................... 436

[B]

BRGC: Baud rate generator control register .............................................................................................. 437

[C]

CORAD0: Correction address register 0 ......................................................................................................... 526

CORAD1: Correction address register 1 ......................................................................................................... 526

CORCN: Correction control register .............................................................................................................. 527

CR00: Capture/compare register 00 .......................................................................................................... 167

CR01: Capture/compare register 01 .......................................................................................................... 168

CR10: Compare register 10 ....................................................................................................................... 213

CR20: Compare register 20 ....................................................................................................................... 213

CRC0: Capture/compare control register 0 ............................................................................................... 173

CSIM0: Serial operating mode register 0 ........................................................................................... 290, 342

CSIM1: Serial operating mode register 1 .................................................................................................... 388

CSIM2: Serial operating mode register 2 .................................................................................................... 432

[D]

DACS0: D/A conversion value set register 0 ............................................................................................... 277

DACS1: D/A conversion value set register 1 ............................................................................................... 277

DAM: D/A converter mode register .......................................................................................................... 278

[I]

IF0H: Interrupt request flag register 0H ................................................................................................... 480

IF0L: Interrupt request flag register 0L.................................................................................................... 480

IF1L: Interrupt request flag register 1L........................................................................................... 480, 499

IMS: Internal memory size switching register ............................................................................... 506, 536

INTM0: External interrupt mode register 0 ........................................................................................ 177, 483

INTM1: External interrupt mode register 1 ........................................................................................ 261, 483

IXS: Internal expansion RAM size switching register............................................................................ 537

[K]

KRM: Key return mode register ....................................................................................................... 143, 500

[M]

MK0H: Interrupt mask flag register 0H ....................................................................................................... 481

MK0L: Interrupt mask flag register 0L ....................................................................................................... 481

689

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

MK1L: Interrupt mask flag register 1L .............................................................................................. 481, 499

MM: Memory expansion mode register ......................................................................................... 142, 505

[O]

OSMS: Oscillation mode selection register ................................................................................................ 151

OSTS: Oscillation stabilization time select register................................................................................... 514

[P]

P0: Port 0 ............................................................................................................................................... 122

P1: Port 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 124

P12: Port 12 ............................................................................................................................................. 136

P13: Port 13 ............................................................................................................................................. 137

P2: Port 2 ...................................................................................................................................... 125, 127

P3: Port 3 ............................................................................................................................................... 129

P4: Port 4 ............................................................................................................................................... 130

P5: Port 5 ............................................................................................................................................... 131

P6: Port 6 ............................................................................................................................................... 132

P7: Port 7 ............................................................................................................................................... 134

PCC: Processor clock control register ..................................................................................................... 148

PM0: Port mode register 0 ....................................................................................................................... 138

PM1: Port mode register 1 ....................................................................................................................... 138

PM12: Port mode register 12 ............................................................................................................ 138, 472

PM13: Port mode register 13 ..................................................................................................................... 138

PM2: Port mode register 2 ....................................................................................................................... 138

PM3: Port mode register 3 ..................................................................................... 138, 176, 218, 249, 253

PM5: Port mode register 5 ....................................................................................................................... 138

PM6: Port mode register 6 ....................................................................................................................... 138

PM7: Port mode register 7 ....................................................................................................................... 138

PR0H: Priority specification flag register 0H ............................................................................................. 482

PR0L: Priority specification flag register 0L .............................................................................................. 482

PR1L: Priority specification flag register 1L .............................................................................................. 482

PSW: Program status word ................................................................................................................ 96, 487

PUOH: Pull-up resistor option register H ................................................................................................... 141

PUOL: Pull-up resistor option register L .................................................................................................... 141

[R]

RTBH: Real-time output buffer register H .................................................................................................. 471

RTBL: Real-time output buffer register L .................................................................................................. 471

RTPC: Real-time output port control register ............................................................................................ 473

RTPM: Real-time output port mode register .............................................................................................. 472

RXB: Receive buffer register.................................................................................................................... 431

RXS: Receive shift register ...................................................................................................................... 431

[S]

SBIC: Serial bus interface control register ...................................................................................... 293, 343

SCS: Sampling clock select register ............................................................................................... 178, 485

SFR: Special-function register ................................................................................................................. 115

SINT: Interrupt timing specification register .................................................................................... 294, 345

690

APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

SIO0: Serial I/O shift register 0........................................................................................................ 286, 338

SIO1: Serial I/O shift register 1................................................................................................................. 385

SIPS: Serial interface pin select register.................................................................................................. 441

SVA: Slave address register ........................................................................................................... 286, 338

[T]

TCL0: Timer clock select register 0 ................................................................................................. 169, 247

TCL1: Timer clock select register 1 .......................................................................................................... 214

TCL2: Timer clock select register 2 ......................................................................................... 233, 241, 251

TCL3: Timer clock select register 3 ......................................................................................... 288, 340, 386

TM0: 16-bit timer register ......................................................................................................................... 168

TM1: 8-bit timer register 1 ........................................................................................................................ 213

TM2: 8-bit timer register 2 ........................................................................................................................ 213

TMC0: 16-bit timer mode control register .................................................................................................. 171

TMC1: 8-bit timer mode control register .................................................................................................... 216

TMC2: Watch timer mode control register ................................................................................................. 236

TOC0: 16-bit timer output control register ................................................................................................. 174

TOC1: 8-bit timer output control register ................................................................................................... 217

TXS: Transmit shift register ..................................................................................................................... 431

[W]

WDTM: Watchdog timer mode register ....................................................................................................... 243

691

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY

The revision history of this edition is listed in the table below. “Chapter” indicates the chapter of the previous edition

where the revision was made.

Edition Revisions Chapter

2nd Change of following block diagrams of ports: CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

edition

Figures 6-5 and 6-7 P20, P21, and P23 to P26 Block Diagram,

Figures 6-6 and 6-8 P22 and P27 Block Diagram, Figure 6-9

P30 to P37 Block Diagram, and Figure 6-16 P71 and P72

Block Diagram

Addition of Table 7-2 Relationships between CPU Clock and CHAPTER 7 CLOCK GENERATOR

Minimum Instruction Execution Time

Addition of Figures 9-10 and 9-13 Square Wave Output

CHAPTER 9 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

Operation Timing

Addition of (7) Conversion result immediately after A/D CHAPTER 14 A/D CONVERTER

converter start to 14.5 How to Read the A/D Converter

Characteristics Table

Correction of Note on BSYE in Figure 16-5 Serial Bus CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE

Interface Control Register Format CHANNEL 0 (

PD780058 Subseries)

Addition of Caution to 16.4.3 (2) (a) Bus release signal (REL)

and (b) Command signal (CMD)

Addition of (3) MSB/LSB switching as the start bit to 18.4.2 CHAPTER 18 SERIAL INTERFACE

3-wire serial I/O mode operation CHANNEL 1

Change of 18.4.3 (3) (d) Busy control option, (e) Busy &

strobe control option, and (f) Bit slippage detection function

in old edition to (4) Synchronization control, and improvement

of explanation

Correction of Figure 19-11 Receive Error Timing CHAPTER 19 SERIAL INTERFACE

Addition of (3) MSB/LSB switching as the start bit to 19.4.3 CHANNEL 2

3-wire serial I/O mode

Addition of 19.4.4 Restrictions in UART mode

Addition of Note to 26.1 Memory Size Switching Register CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y

26.3 Flash Memory Programming

Change of product name of flash programmer from Flashpro to

Flashpro II

Addition of APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES AMONG

PD78054, APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES AMONG

78058F, AND 780058 SUBSERIES

PD78054, 78058F, AND 780058 SUBSERIES

Total revision: Support of in-circuit emulators IE-78K0-NS and APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

IE-78001-R-A

Total revision: Deletion of fuzzy inference development support APPENDIX C EMBEDDED SOFTWARE

system

APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY

692 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Edition Revisions Chapter

3rd edition Deletion of following product Throughout

•

PD780058Y

Addition of following products

•

PD780058B, 780058BY, 780053(A), 780053Y(A), 780054(A), 780054Y(A),

780055(A), 780055Y(A), 780056(A), 780056Y(A), 780058B(A), 780058BY(A)

Deletion of following packages

• 80-pin plastic QFP (GC-3B9 type)

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-BE9 type)

Addition of following package

• 80-pin plastic TQFP (GK-9EU type)

1.1 Features, 1.7 Outline of Functions CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE

• Change of operating voltage range of A/D and D/A converters of (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

PD780058 and 78F0058

• Change of supply voltage of

PD78F0058

Addition of 1.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

2.1 Features, 2.7 Outline of Functions CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE

• Change of operating voltage range of A/D and D/A converters of (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

PD78F0058Y

• Change of supply voltage of

PD78F0058Y

Addition of 2.9 Differences Between Standard Model and (A) Model

Change of processing when A/D converter is not used in 3.2.11 AVREF0 CHAPTER 3 PIN FUNCTIONS

Change of recommended connection of unused pins and connection of P60 (

PD780058 SUBSERIES)

to P63, AVREF1, and VPP pins in Table 3-1 Pin I/O Circuit Types

Change of processing when A/D converter is not used in 4.2.11 AVREF0 CHAPTER 4 PIN FUNCTIONS

Change of recommended connection of unused pins and connection of P60 (

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

to P63, AVREF1, and VPP pins in Table 4-1 Pin I/O Circuit Types

Modification of Note 2 in 6.2.8 Port 6

CHAPTER 6 PORT FUNCTIONS

Addition of note on feedback resistor to Figure 7-3 Format of Processor CHAPTER 7 CLOCK

Clock Control Register GENERATOR

Addition of Table 8-5 INTP1/TI01 Pin Valid Edge and CR00 Capture CHAPTER 8 16-BIT

Trigger Valid Edge TIMER/EVENT COUNTER

Addition of Table 8-6 INTP0/TI00 Pin Valid Edge and CR01 Capture

Trigger Valid Edge

Correction of note on valid edge of INTP0/TI00/P00 and INTP1/TI01/P01 pin

in Figure 8-8 Format of External Interrupt Mode Register 0

Addition of Figure 8-17 Configuration of PPG Output

Addition of Figure 8-18 PPG Output Operation Timing

8.5 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter Operating Cautions

Addition of description on TI01/P01/INTP1 to (5) Valid edge setting

Addition of (c) One-shot pulse output function to (6) Re-trigger of

one-shot pulse

Addition of (8) Conflict operation

Addition of (9) Timer operation

Addition of (10) Capture operation

Addition of (11) Compare operation

Addition of (12) Edge detection

Modification of note on changing count clock in Figure 10-2 Format of CHAPTER 10 WATCH TIMER

Timer Clock Select Register 2

APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY

693

User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Edition Revisions Chapter

3rd edition Modification of note on changing count clock in Figure 11-2 Format of CHAPTER 11 WATCHDOG

Timer Clock Select Register 2 TIMER

Addition of note on rewriting TCL2 in Figure 13-2 Format of Timer Clock CHAPTER 13 BUZZER

Select Register 2 OUTPUT CONTROLLER

Modification of Figure 14-5 A/D Converter Basic Operation CHAPTER 14 A/D

Addition of Table 14-2 A/D Conversion Sampling Time and A/D CONVERTER

Converter Start Delay Time

Addition of 14.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table

14.6 A/D Converter Cautions

Change of description in (1) Power consumption in standby mode

Addition of (3) Conflicting operations

Addition of (6) Input impedance of ANI0 to ANI7 pins

Addition of (10) Timing at which A/D conversion result is undefined

Addition of (11) Notes on board design

Addition of (12) AVREF0 pin

Addition of (13) Internal equivalent circuit of ANI0 to ANI7 pins and

permissible signal source impedance

Addition of description of processing when D/A converter is not used in CHAPTER 15 D/A

15.5 D/A Converter Cautions (3) AVREF1 pin CONVERTER

Addition of 17.4.7 Restrictions in I2C bus mode 2 CHAPTER 17 SERIAL

INTERFACE CHANNEL 0

(

PD780058Y SUBSERIES)

Addition of 19.4.5 Restrictions in UART mode 2 CHAPTER 19 SERIAL

INTERFACE CHANNEL 2

Addition of Caution when interrupt is acknowledged to Figure 21-2 Format CHAPTER 21 INTERRUPT

of Interrupt Request Flag Register AND TEST FUNCTIONS

Addition of description on TI01/P01/INTP1 pin to Figure 21-5 Format of

External Interrupt Mode Register 0

Addition of Caution to 25.1 ROM Correction Function CHAPTER 25 ROM

CORRECTION

Modification of Table 26-1 Differences Between

PD78F0058, 78F0058Y CHAPTER 26

PD78F0058,

and Mask ROM Versions 78F0058Y

Total revision of description on flash memory programming as 26.3 Flash

Memory Characteristics

Addition of CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (MASK ROM CHAPTER 28 ELECTRICAL

VERSION) SPECIFICATIONS (MASK

ROM VERSION)

Addition of CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH CHAPTER 29 ELECTRICAL

MEMORY VERSION) SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH

MEMORY VERSION)

Addition of CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS (FLASH CHAPTER 30 ELECTRICAL

MEMORY VERSION (VDD = 2.2 V)) SPECIFICATIONS

(FLASH MEMORY VERSION

(VDD = 2.2 V))

Addition of CHAPTER 31 CHARACTERISTICS CURVES (REFERENCE CHAPTER 31

VALUES) CHARACTERISTICS CURVES

(REFERENCE VALUES)

Addition of CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE DRAWINGS CHAPTER 32 PACKAGE

DRAWINGS

APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY

694 User's Manual U12013EJ3V2UD

Edition Revisions Chapter

3rd edition Addition of CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS

CHAPTER 33 RECOMMENDED

SOLDERING CONDITIONS

Correction of APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES BETWEEN

PD78054, 78058F, APPENDIX A DIFFERENCES

AND 780058 BETWEEN

PD78054, 78058F,

AND 780058 SUBSERIES

Total revision of APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT TOOLS APPENDIX B DEVELOPMENT

Transfer of description of embedded software to APPENDIX B TOOLS

DEVELOPMENT TOOLS